MICROCHIP PIC18F2450-E/SO

PIC18F2450/4450
Data Sheet
28/40/44-Pin, High-Performance,
12 MIPS, Enhanced Flash,
USB Microcontrollers with
nanoWatt Technology
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A
Note the following details of the code protection feature on Microchip devices:
•
Microchip products meet the specification contained in their particular Microchip Data Sheet.
•
Microchip believes that its family of products is one of the most secure families of its kind on the market today, when used in the
intended manner and under normal conditions.
•
There are dishonest and possibly illegal methods used to breach the code protection feature. All of these methods, to our
knowledge, require using the Microchip products in a manner outside the operating specifications contained in Microchip’s Data
Sheets. Most likely, the person doing so is engaged in theft of intellectual property.
•
Microchip is willing to work with the customer who is concerned about the integrity of their code.
•
Neither Microchip nor any other semiconductor manufacturer can guarantee the security of their code. Code protection does not
mean that we are guaranteeing the product as “unbreakable.”
Code protection is constantly evolving. We at Microchip are committed to continuously improving the code protection features of our
products. Attempts to break Microchip’s code protection feature may be a violation of the Digital Millennium Copyright Act. If such acts
allow unauthorized access to your software or other copyrighted work, you may have a right to sue for relief under that Act.
Information contained in this publication regarding device
applications and the like is provided only for your convenience
and may be superseded by updates. It is your responsibility to
ensure that your application meets with your specifications.
MICROCHIP MAKES NO REPRESENTATIONS OR WARRANTIES OF ANY KIND WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
WRITTEN OR ORAL, STATUTORY OR OTHERWISE,
RELATED TO THE INFORMATION, INCLUDING BUT NOT
LIMITED TO ITS CONDITION, QUALITY, PERFORMANCE,
MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR PURPOSE.
Microchip disclaims all liability arising from this information and
its use. Use of Microchip’s products as critical components in
life support systems is not authorized except with express
written approval by Microchip. No licenses are conveyed,
implicitly or otherwise, under any Microchip intellectual property
rights.
Trademarks
The Microchip name and logo, the Microchip logo, Accuron,
dsPIC, KEELOQ, microID, MPLAB, PIC, PICmicro, PICSTART,
PRO MATE, PowerSmart, rfPIC, and SmartShunt are
registered trademarks of Microchip Technology Incorporated
in the U.S.A. and other countries.
AmpLab, FilterLab, Migratable Memory, MXDEV, MXLAB,
PICMASTER, SEEVAL, SmartSensor and The Embedded
Control Solutions Company are registered trademarks of
Microchip Technology Incorporated in the U.S.A.
Analog-for-the-Digital Age, Application Maestro, dsPICDEM,
dsPICDEM.net, dsPICworks, ECAN, ECONOMONITOR,
FanSense, FlexROM, fuzzyLAB, In-Circuit Serial
Programming, ICSP, ICEPIC, Linear Active Thermistor,
MPASM, MPLIB, MPLINK, MPSIM, PICkit, PICDEM,
PICDEM.net, PICLAB, PICtail, PowerCal, PowerInfo,
PowerMate, PowerTool, Real ICE, rfLAB, rfPICDEM, Select
Mode, Smart Serial, SmartTel, Total Endurance, UNI/O,
WiperLock and Zena are trademarks of Microchip Technology
Incorporated in the U.S.A. and other countries.
SQTP is a service mark of Microchip Technology Incorporated
in the U.S.A.
All other trademarks mentioned herein are property of their
respective companies.
© 2006, Microchip Technology Incorporated, Printed in the
U.S.A., All Rights Reserved.
Printed on recycled paper.
Microchip received ISO/TS-16949:2002 quality system certification for
its worldwide headquarters, design and wafer fabrication facilities in
Chandler and Tempe, Arizona and Mountain View, California in
October 2003. The Company’s quality system processes and
procedures are for its PICmicro® 8-bit MCUs, KEELOQ® code hopping
devices, Serial EEPROMs, microperipherals, nonvolatile memory and
analog products. In addition, Microchip’s quality system for the design
and manufacture of development systems is ISO 9001:2000 certified.
DS39760A-page ii
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
28/40/44-Pin, High-Performance, 12 MIPS, Enhanced Flash,
USB Microcontrollers with nanoWatt Technology
Universal Serial Bus Features:
Peripheral Highlights:
• USB V2.0 Compliant
• Low speed (1.5 Mb/s) and full speed (12 Mb/s)
• Supports control, interrupt, isochronous and
bulk transfers
• Supports up to 32 endpoints (16 bidirectional)
• 256-byte dual access RAM for USB
• On-chip USB transceiver with on-chip voltage
regulator
• Interface for off-chip USB transceiver
•
•
•
•
High-current sink/source: 25 mA/25 mA
Three external interrupts
Three Timer modules (Timer0 to Timer2)
Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) module:
- Capture is 16-bit, max. resolution 5.2 ns
- Compare is 16-bit, max. resolution 83.3 ns
- PWM output: PWM resolution is 1 to 10-bit
• Enhanced USART module:
- LIN bus support
• 10-bit, up to 13-channel Analog-to-Digital Converter
module (A/D):
- Up to 100 ksps sampling rate
- Programmable acquisition time
Power-Managed Modes:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Run: CPU on, peripherals on
Idle: CPU off, peripherals on
Sleep: CPU off, peripherals off
Idle mode currents down to 5.8 μA typical
Sleep mode currents down to 0.1 μA typical
Timer1 oscillator: 1.8 μA typical, 32 kHz, 2V
Watchdog Timer: 2.1 μA typical
Two-Speed Oscillator Start-up
Special Microcontroller Features:
Flexible Oscillator Structure:
• Four Crystal modes, including High-Precision PLL
for USB
• Two External Clock modes, up to 48 MHz
• Internal 31 kHz oscillator
• Secondary oscillator using Timer1 @ 32 kHz
• Dual oscillator options allow microcontroller and
USB module to run at different clock speeds
• Fail-Safe Clock Monitor:
- Allows for safe shutdown if any clock stops
Program Memory
• C compiler optimized architecture with optional
extended instruction set
• Flash memory retention: > 40 years
• Self-programmable under software control
• Priority levels for interrupts
• 8 x 8 Single-Cycle Hardware Multiplier
• Extended Watchdog Timer (WDT):
- Programmable period from 4 ms to 131s
• Programmable Code Protection
• Single-Supply In-Circuit Serial Programming™
(ICSP™) via two pins
• In-Circuit Debug (ICD) via two pins
• Optional dedicated ICD/ICSP port
(44-pin TQFP devices only)
• Wide operating voltage range (2.0V to 5.5V)
Device
Flash
(bytes)
# Single-Word
Instructions
Data
Memory
SRAM
(bytes)
PIC18F2450
16K
8192
768*
23
10
1
1
1/2
PIC18F4450
16K
8192
768*
34
13
1
1
1/2
*
I/O
10-Bit A/D
(ch)
CCP
EUSART
Timers
8/16-Bit
Includes 256 bytes of dual access RAM used by USB module and shared with data memory.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 1
PIC18F2450/4450
Pin Diagrams
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
MCLR/VPP/RE3
RA0/AN0
RA1/AN1
RA2/AN2/VREFRA3/AN3/VREF+
RA4/T0CKI/RCV
RA5/AN4/HLVDIN
VSS
OSC1/CLKI
OSC2/CLKO/RA6
RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI
RC1/T1OSI/UOE
RC2/CCP1
VUSB
PIC18F2450
28-Pin SDIP, SOIC
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
RB7/KBI3/PGD
RB6/KBI2/PGC
RB5/KBI1/PGM
RB4/AN11/KBI0
RB3/AN9/VPO
RB2/AN8/INT2/VMO
RB1/AN10/INT1
RB0/AN12/INT0
VDD
VSS
RC7/RX/DT
RC6/TX/CK
RC5/D+/VP
RC4/D-/VM
RA1/AN1
RA0/AN0
MCLR/VPP/RE3
RB7/KBI3/PGD
RB6/KBI2/PGC
RB5/KBI1/PGM
RB4/AN11/KBI0
28-Pin QFN
28 27 26 25 24 23 22
RA2/AN2/VREFRA3/AN3/VREF+
RA4/T0CKI/RCV
RA5/AN4/HLVDIN
VSS
OSC1/CLKI
OSC2/CLKO/RA6
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
PIC18F2450
21
20
19
18
17
16
15
RB3/AN9/VPO
RB2/AN8/INT2/VMO
RB1/AN10/INT1
RB0/AN12/INT0
VDD
VSS
RC7/RX/DT
RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI
RC1/T1OSI/UOE
RC2/CCP1
VUSB
RC4/D-/VM
RC5/D+/VP
RC6/TX/CK
8 9 10 11 12 13 14
Note:
Pinouts are subject to change.
DS39760A-page 2
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
Pin Diagrams (Continued)
MCLR/VPP/RE3
RA0/AN0
RA1/AN1
RA2/AN2/VREFRA3/AN3/VREF+
RA4/T0CKI/RCV
RA5/AN4/HLVDIN
RE0/AN5
RE1/AN6
RE2/AN7
VDD
VSS
OSC1/CLKI
OSC2/CLKO/RA6
RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI
RC1/T1OSI/UOE
RC2/CCP1
VUSB
RD0
RD1
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
RB7/KBI3/PGD
RB6/KBI2/PGC
RB5/KBI1/PGM
RB4/AN11/KBI0
RB3/AN9/VPO
RB2/AN8/INT2/VMO
RB1/AN10/INT1
RB0/AN12/INT0
VDD
VSS
RD7
RD6
RD5
RD4
RC7/RX/DT
RC6/TX/CK
RC5/D+/VP
RC4/D-/VM
RD3
RD2
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
RC6/TX/CK
RC5/D+/VP
RC4/D-/VM
RD3
RD2
RD1
RD0
VUSB
RC2/CCP1
RC1/T1OSI/UOE
RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI
44-Pin QFN
PIC18F4450
40-Pin PDIP
PIC18F4450
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
OSC2/CLKO/RA6
OSC1/CLKI
VSS
AVSS
VDD
AVDD
RE2/AN7
RE1/AN6
RE0/AN5
RA5/AN4/HLVDIN
RA4/T0CKI/RCV
RB3/AN9/VPO
NC
RB4/AN11/KBI0
RB5/KBI1/PGM
RB6/KBI2/PGC
RB7/KBI3/PGD
MCLR/VPP/RE3
RA0/AN0
RA1/AN1
RA2/AN2/VREFRA3/AN3/VREF+
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
RC7/RX/DT
RD4
RD5
RD6
RD7
VSS
AVDD
VDD
RB0/AN12/INT0
RB1/AN10/INT1
RB2/AN8/INT2/VMO
Note:
Pinouts are subject to change.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 3
PIC18F2450/4450
Pin Diagrams (Continued)
44
43
42
41
40
39
38
37
36
35
34
RC6/TX/CK
RC5/D+/VP
RC4/D-/VM
RD3
RD2
RD1
RD0
VUSB
RC2/CCP1
RC1/T1OSI/UOE
NC/ICPORTS*
44-Pin TQFP
RC7/RX/DT
RD4
RD5
RD6
RD7
VSS
VDD
RB0/AN12/INT0
RB1/AN10/INT1
RB2/AN8/INT2/VMO
RB3/AN9/VPO
PIC18F4450
33
32
31
30
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
NC/ICRST*/ICVPP*
RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI
OSC2/CLKO/RA6
OSC1/CLKI
VSS
VDD
RE2/AN7
RE1/AN6
RE0/AN5
RA5/AN4/HLVDIN
RA4/T0CKI/RCV
NC/ICCK*/ICPGC*
NC/ICDT*/ICPGD*
RB4/AN11/KBI0
RB5/KBI1/PGM
RB6/KBI2/PGC
RB7/KBI3/PGD
MCLR/VPP/RE3
RA0/AN0
RA1/AN1
RA2/AN2/VREFRA3/AN3/VREF+
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
Note:
*
DS39760A-page 4
Pinouts are subject to change.
Assignment of this feature is dependent on device configuration.
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
Table of Contents
1.0 Device Overview .......................................................................................................................................................................... 7
2.0 Oscillator Configurations ............................................................................................................................................................ 23
3.0 Power-Managed Modes ............................................................................................................................................................. 33
4.0 Reset .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 41
5.0 Memory Organization ................................................................................................................................................................. 53
6.0 Flash Program Memory.............................................................................................................................................................. 73
7.0 8 x 8 Hardware Multiplier............................................................................................................................................................ 83
8.0 Interrupts .................................................................................................................................................................................... 85
9.0 I/O Ports ..................................................................................................................................................................................... 99
10.0 Timer0 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 111
11.0 Timer1 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 115
12.0 Timer2 Module ......................................................................................................................................................................... 121
13.0 Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) Module ................................................................................................................................... 123
14.0 Universal Serial Bus (USB) ...................................................................................................................................................... 129
15.0 Enhanced Universal Synchronous Receiver Transmitter (EUSART)....................................................................................... 153
16.0 10-Bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (A/D) Module ..................................................................................................................... 173
17.0 High/Low-Voltage Detect (HLVD)............................................................................................................................................. 183
18.0 Special Features of the CPU.................................................................................................................................................... 189
19.0 Instruction Set Summary .......................................................................................................................................................... 211
20.0 Development Support............................................................................................................................................................... 261
21.0 Electrical Characteristics .......................................................................................................................................................... 265
22.0 DC and AC Characteristics Graphs and Tables....................................................................................................................... 293
23.0 Packaging Information.............................................................................................................................................................. 295
Appendix A: Revision History............................................................................................................................................................. 303
Appendix B: Device Differences ........................................................................................................................................................ 303
Appendix C: Conversion Considerations ........................................................................................................................................... 304
Appendix D: Migration From Baseline to Enhanced Devices ............................................................................................................ 304
Appendix E: Migration From Mid-Range to Enhanced Devices ......................................................................................................... 305
Appendix F: Migration From High-End to Enhanced Devices............................................................................................................ 305
Index ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 307
The Microchip Web Site ..................................................................................................................................................................... 315
Customer Change Notification Service .............................................................................................................................................. 315
Customer Support .............................................................................................................................................................................. 315
Reader Response .............................................................................................................................................................................. 316
PIC18F2450/4450 Product Identification System .............................................................................................................................. 317
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 5
PIC18F2450/4450
TO OUR VALUED CUSTOMERS
It is our intention to provide our valued customers with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip
products. To this end, we will continue to improve our publications to better suit your needs. Our publications will be refined and
enhanced as new volumes and updates are introduced.
If you have any questions or comments regarding this publication, please contact the Marketing Communications Department via
E-mail at [email protected] or fax the Reader Response Form in the back of this data sheet to (480) 792-4150. We
welcome your feedback.
Most Current Data Sheet
To obtain the most up-to-date version of this data sheet, please register at our Worldwide Web site at:
http://www.microchip.com
You can determine the version of a data sheet by examining its literature number found on the bottom outside corner of any page.
The last character of the literature number is the version number, (e.g., DS30000A is version A of document DS30000).
Errata
An errata sheet, describing minor operational differences from the data sheet and recommended workarounds, may exist for current
devices. As device/documentation issues become known to us, we will publish an errata sheet. The errata will specify the revision
of silicon and revision of document to which it applies.
To determine if an errata sheet exists for a particular device, please check with one of the following:
• Microchip’s Worldwide Web site; http://www.microchip.com
• Your local Microchip sales office (see last page)
When contacting a sales office, please specify which device, revision of silicon and data sheet (include literature number) you are
using.
Customer Notification System
Register on our web site at www.microchip.com to receive the most current information on all of our products.
DS39760A-page 6
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
1.0
DEVICE OVERVIEW
1.1.3
This document contains device-specific information for
the following devices:
• PIC18F2450
• PIC18F4450
This family of devices offers the advantages of all PIC18
microcontrollers – namely, high computational
performance at an economical price – with the addition of
high endurance, Enhanced Flash program memory. In
addition to these features, the PIC18F2450/4450 family
introduces design enhancements that make these microcontrollers a logical choice for many high-performance,
power sensitive applications.
1.1
1.1.1
New Core Features
nanoWatt TECHNOLOGY
All of the devices in the PIC18F2450/4450 family
incorporate a range of features that can significantly
reduce power consumption during operation. Key
items include:
• Alternate Run Modes: By clocking the controller
from the Timer1 source or the internal RC
oscillator, power consumption during code
execution can be reduced by as much as 90%.
• Multiple Idle Modes: The controller can also run
with its CPU core disabled but the peripherals still
active. In these states, power consumption can be
reduced even further, to as little as 4% of normal
operation requirements.
• On-the-Fly Mode Switching: The powermanaged modes are invoked by user code during
operation, allowing the user to incorporate powersaving ideas into their application’s software
design.
• Low Consumption in Key Modules: The
power requirements for both Timer1 and the
Watchdog Timer are minimized. See
Section 21.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for
values.
1.1.2
MULTIPLE OSCILLATOR OPTIONS
AND FEATURES
All of the devices in the PIC18F2450/4450 family offer
twelve different oscillator options, allowing users a wide
range of choices in developing application hardware.
These include:
• Four Crystal modes using crystals or ceramic
resonators.
• Four External Clock modes, offering the option of
using two pins (oscillator input and a divide-by-4
clock output) or one pin (oscillator input, with the
second pin reassigned as general I/O).
• An INTRC source (approximately 31 kHz, stable
over temperature and VDD). This option frees an
oscillator pin for use as an additional general
purpose I/O.
• A Phase Lock Loop (PLL) frequency multiplier,
available to both the High-Speed Crystal and
External Oscillator modes, which allows a wide
range of clock speeds from 4 MHz to 48 MHz.
• Asynchronous dual clock operation, allowing the
USB module to run from a high-frequency
oscillator while the rest of the microcontroller is
clocked from an internal low-power oscillator.
The internal oscillator provides a stable reference
source that gives the family additional features for
robust operation:
• Fail-Safe Clock Monitor: This option constantly
monitors the main clock source against a
reference signal provided by the internal
oscillator. If a clock failure occurs, the controller is
switched to the internal oscillator, allowing for
continued low-speed operation or a safe
application shutdown.
• Two-Speed Start-up: This option allows the
internal oscillator to serve as the clock source
from Power-on Reset, or wake-up from Sleep
mode, until the primary clock source is available.
UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS (USB)
Devices in the PIC18F2450/4450 family incorporate a
fully featured Universal Serial Bus communications
module that is compliant with the USB Specification
Revision 2.0. The module supports both low-speed and
full-speed communication for all supported data
transfer types. It also incorporates its own on-chip
transceiver and 3.3V regulator and supports the use of
external transceivers and voltage regulators.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 7
PIC18F2450/4450
1.2
Other Special Features
1.3
• Memory Endurance: The Enhanced Flash cells
for program memory are rated to last for many
thousands of erase/write cycles – up to 100,000.
• Self-Programmability: These devices can write
to their own program memory spaces under
internal software control. By using a bootloader
routine, located in the protected Boot Block at the
top of program memory, it becomes possible to
create an application that can update itself in the
field.
• Extended Instruction Set: The PIC18F2450/
4450 family introduces an optional extension to
the PIC18 instruction set, which adds 8 new
instructions and an Indexed
Literal Offset Addressing mode. This extension,
enabled as a device configuration option, has
been specifically designed to optimize re-entrant
application code originally developed in high-level
languages such as C.
• Enhanced Addressable USART: This serial
communication module is capable of standard
RS-232 operation and provides support for the LIN
bus protocol. Other enhancements include
Automatic Baud Rate Detection and a 16-bit Baud
Rate Generator for improved resolution.
• 10-Bit A/D Converter: This module incorporates
programmable acquisition time, allowing for a
channel to be selected and a conversion to be
initiated, without waiting for a sampling period and
thus, reducing code overhead.
• Dedicated ICD/ICSP Port: These devices
introduce the use of debugger and programming
pins that are not multiplexed with other microcontroller features. Offered as an option in select
packages, this feature allows users to develop I/O
intensive applications while retaining the ability to
program and debug in the circuit.
DS39760A-page 8
Details on Individual Family
Members
Devices in the PIC18F2450/4450 family are available
in 28-pin and 40/44-pin packages. Block diagrams for
the two groups are shown in Figure 1-1 and Figure 1-2.
The devices are differentiated from each other in the
following two ways:
1.
2.
A/D channels (10 for 28-pin devices, 13 for
40/44-pin devices).
I/O ports (3 bidirectional ports and 1 input only
port on 28-pin devices, 5 bidirectional ports on
40/44-pin devices).
All other features for devices in this family are identical.
These are summarized in Table 1-1.
The pinouts for all devices are listed in Table 1-2 and
Table 1-3.
Like all Microchip PIC18 devices, members of the
PIC18F2450/4450 family are available as both standard
and low-voltage devices. Standard devices with
Enhanced Flash memory, designated with an “F” in the
part number (such as PIC18F2450), accommodate an
operating VDD range of 4.2V to 5.5V. Low-voltage parts,
designated by “LF” (such as PIC18LF2450), function
over an extended VDD range of 2.0V to 5.5V.
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 1-1:
DEVICE FEATURES
Features
PIC18F2450
PIC18F4450
DC – 48 MHz
DC – 48 MHz
Program Memory (Bytes)
16384
16384
Program Memory (Instructions)
8192
8192
Data Memory (Bytes)
768
768
Operating Frequency
Interrupt Sources
13
13
Ports A, B, C, (E)
Ports A, B, C, D, E
Timers
3
3
Capture/Compare/PWM Modules
1
1
Enhanced USART
1
1
Universal Serial Bus (USB) Module
1
1
10 Input Channels
13 Input Channels
POR, BOR,
RESET Instruction,
Stack Full,
Stack Underflow (PWRT, OST),
MCLR (optional),
WDT
POR, BOR,
RESET Instruction,
Stack Full,
Stack Underflow (PWRT, OST),
MCLR (optional),
WDT
Yes
Yes
I/O Ports
10-bit Analog-to-Digital Module
Resets (and Delays)
Programmable Low-Voltage Detect
Programmable Brown-out Reset
Instruction Set
Packages
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Yes
Yes
75 Instructions;
83 with Extended Instruction Set
enabled
75 Instructions;
83 with Extended Instruction Set
enabled
28-pin PDIP
28-pin SOIC
40-pin PDIP
44-pin QFN
44-pin TQFP
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 9
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 1-1:
PIC18F2450 (28-PIN) BLOCK DIAGRAM
Data Bus<8>
Table Pointer<21>
PORTA
8
inc/dec logic
Data Memory
(2 Kbytes)
PCLATU PCLATH
21
RA0/AN0
RA1/AN1
RA2/AN2/VREFRA3/AN3/VREF+
RA4/T0CKI/RCV
RA5/AN4/HLVDIN
OSC2/CLKO/RA6
Data Latch
8
Address Latch
20
PCU PCH PCL
Program Counter
12
Data Address<12>
31 Level Stack
4
BSR
Address Latch
Program Memory
(24/32 Kbytes)
STKPTR
Data Latch
4
Access
Bank
12
FSR0
FSR1
FSR2
12
PORTB
RB0/AN12/INT0
RB1/AN10/INT1
RB2/AN8/INT2/VMO
RB3/AN9/VPO
RB4/AN11/KBI0
RB5/KBI1/PGM
RB6/KBI2/PGC
RB7/KBI3/PGD
inc/dec
logic
8
Table Latch
Address
Decode
ROM Latch
Instruction Bus <16>
IR
8
Instruction
Decode &
Control
State Machine
Control Signals
PRODH PRODL
3
OSC1
(2)
OSC2(2)
Internal
Oscillator
Block
Power-up
Timer
Oscillator
Start-up Timer
Power-on
Reset
INTRC
Oscillator
T1OSI
MCLR(1)
VDD, VSS
8
8
8
ALU<8>
8
PORTE
Band Gap
Reference
USB Voltage
Regulator
VUSB
W
8
Brown-out
Reset
Fail-Safe
Clock Monitor
Single-Supply
Programming
In-Circuit
Debugger
RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI
RC1/T1OSI/UOE
RC2/CCP1
RC4/D-/VM
RC5/D+/VP
RC6/TX/CK
RC7/RX/DT
8
BITOP
8
Watchdog
Timer
T1OSO
PORTC
8 x 8 Multiply
MCLR/VPP/RE3(1)
BOR
HLVD
Timer0
Timer1
CCP1
Note 1:
2:
Timer2
ADC
10-bit
EUSART
USB
RE3 is multiplexed with MCLR and is only available when the MCLR Resets are disabled.
OSC1/CLKI and OSC2/CLKO are only available in select oscillator modes and when these pins are not being used as digital I/O. Refer
to Section 2.0 “Oscillator Configurations” for additional information.
DS39760A-page 10
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 1-2:
PIC18F4450 (40/44-PIN) BLOCK DIAGRAM
Data Bus<8>
PORTA
Table Pointer<21>
inc/dec logic
Data Memory
(2 Kbytes)
PCLATU PCLATH
21
RA0/AN0
RA1/AN1
RA2/AN2/VREFRA3/AN3/VREF+
RA4/T0CKI/RCV
RA5/AN4/HLVDIN
OSC2/CLKO/RA6
Data Latch
8
8
Address Latch
20
PCU PCH PCL
Program Counter
12
Data Address<12>
PORTB
31 Level Stack
4
BSR
Address Latch
Program Memory
(24/32 Kbytes)
STKPTR
Data Latch
12
FSR0
FSR1
FSR2
RB0/AN12/INT0
RB1/AN10/INT1
RB2/AN8/INT2/VMO
RB3/AN9/VPO
RB4/AN11/KBI0
RB5/KBI1/PGM
RB6/KBI2/PGC
RB7/KBI3/PGD
4
Access
Bank
12
inc/dec
logic
8
Table Latch
PORTC
Address
Decode
ROM Latch
Instruction Bus <16>
RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI
RC1/T1OSI/UOE
RC2/CCP1
RC4/D-/VM
RC5/D+/VP
RC6/TX/CK
RC7/RX/DT
IR
8
Instruction
Decode &
Control
State Machine
Control Signals
PRODH PRODL
PORTD
3
VDD, VSS
OSC1(2)
OSC2(2)
T1OSI
Internal
Oscillator
Block
Power-up
Timer
INTRC
Oscillator
Oscillator
Start-up Timer
T1OSO
Power-on
Reset
ICPGC(3)
Watchdog
Timer
Single-Supply
Programming
ICPGD(3)
In-Circuit
Debugger
(3)
ICPORTS
ICRST(3)
MCLR(1)
8 x 8 Multiply
RD0
RD1
RD2
RD3
RD4
RD5
RD6
RD7
8
BITOP
8
W
8
8
8
8
ALU<8>
8
Brown-out
Reset
Fail-Safe
Clock Monitor
PORTE
RE0/AN5
RE1/AN6
RE2/AN7
MCLR/VPP/RE3(1)
Band Gap
Reference
USB Voltage
Regulator
VUSB
BOR
HLVD
Timer0
CCP1
Note 1:
2:
3:
Timer1
EUSART
Timer2
ADC
10-bit
USB
RE3 is multiplexed with MCLR and is only available when the MCLR Resets are disabled.
OSC1/CLKI and OSC2/CLKO are only available in select oscillator modes and when these pins are not being used as digital I/O. Refer
to Section 2.0 “Oscillator Configurations” for additional information.
These pins are only available on 44-pin TQFP under certain conditions. Refer to Section 18.9 “Special ICPORT Features (Designated
Packages Only)” for additional information.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 11
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 1-2:
PIC18F2450 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS
Pin Number
Pin Name
MCLR/Vpp/RE3
MCLR
Pin Buffer
PDIP,
QFN Type Type
SOIC
1
26
I
ST
P
I
ST
I
I
Analog
Analog
O
—
CLKO
O
—
RA6
I/O
TTL
VPP
RE3
OSC1/CLKI
OSC1
CLKI
9
OSC2/CLKO/RA6
OSC2
10
6
7
Description
Master Clear (input) or programming voltage (input).
Master Clear (Reset) input. This pin is an active-low
Reset to the device.
Programming voltage input.
Digital input.
Oscillator crystal or external clock input.
Oscillator crystal input or external clock source input.
External clock source input. Always associated with pin
function OSC1. (See OSC2/CLKO pin.)
Oscillator crystal or clock output.
Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or resonator
in Crystal Oscillator mode.
In select modes, OSC2 pin outputs CLKO which has
1/4 the frequency of OSC1 and denotes the instruction
cycle rate.
General purpose I/O pin.
Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input
ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels
O
= Output
DS39760A-page 12
CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output
I
= Input
P
= Power
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 1-2:
PIC18F2450 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Pin Number
Pin Name
Pin Buffer
PDIP,
QFN Type Type
SOIC
Description
PORTA is a bidirectional I/O port.
RA0/AN0
RA0
AN0
2
RA1/AN1
RA1
AN1
3
RA2/AN2/VREFRA2
AN2
VREF-
4
RA3/AN3/VREF+
RA3
AN3
VREF+
5
RA4/T0CKI/RCV
RA4
T0CKI
RCV
6
RA5/AN4/HLVDIN
RA5
AN4
HLVDIN
7
RA6
—
27
I/O
I
TTL
Analog
Digital I/O.
Analog input 0.
I/O
I
TTL
Analog
Digital I/O.
Analog input 1.
I/O
I
I
TTL
Analog
Analog
Digital I/O.
Analog input 2.
A/D reference voltage (low) input.
I/O
I
I
TTL
Analog
Analog
Digital I/O.
Analog input 3.
A/D reference voltage (high) input.
I/O
I
I
ST
ST
TTL
I/O
I
I
TTL
Analog
Analog
Digital I/O.
Analog input 4.
High/Low-Voltage Detect input.
—
—
See the OSC2/CLKO/RA6 pin.
28
1
2
3
4
—
Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input
ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels
O
= Output
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Digital I/O.
Timer0 external clock input.
External USB transceiver RCV input.
CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output
I
= Input
P
= Power
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 13
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 1-2:
PIC18F2450 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Pin Number
Pin Name
Pin Buffer
PDIP,
QFN Type Type
SOIC
Description
PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port. PORTB can be software
programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all inputs.
RB0/AN12/INT0
RB0
AN12
INT0
21
RB1/AN10/INT1
RB1
AN10
INT1
22
RB2/AN8/INT2/VMO
RB2
AN8
INT2
VMO
23
RB3/AN9/VPO
RB3
AN9
VPO
24
RB4/AN11/KBI0
RB4
AN11
KBI0
25
RB5/KBI1/PGM
RB5
KBI1
PGM
26
RB6/KBI2/PGC
RB6
KBI2
PGC
27
RB7/KBI3/PGD
RB7
KBI3
PGD
28
18
I/O
I
I
TTL
Analog
ST
Digital I/O.
Analog input 12.
External interrupt 0.
I/O
I
I
TTL
Analog
ST
Digital I/O.
Analog input 10.
External interrupt 1.
I/O
I
I
O
TTL
Analog
ST
—
Digital I/O.
Analog input 8.
External interrupt 2.
External USB transceiver VMO output.
I/O
I
O
TTL
Analog
—
Digital I/O.
Analog input 9.
External USB transceiver VPO output.
I/O
I
I
TTL
Analog
TTL
Digital I/O.
Analog input 11.
Interrupt-on-change pin.
I/O
I
I/O
TTL
TTL
ST
Digital I/O.
Interrupt-on-change pin.
Low-Voltage ICSP™ Programming enable pin.
I/O
I
I/O
TTL
TTL
ST
Digital I/O.
Interrupt-on-change pin.
In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP programming clock pin.
I/O
I
I/O
TTL
TTL
ST
Digital I/O.
Interrupt-on-change pin.
In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP programming data pin.
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input
ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels
O
= Output
DS39760A-page 14
CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output
I
= Input
P
= Power
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 1-2:
PIC18F2450 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Pin Number
Pin Name
Pin Buffer
PDIP,
QFN Type Type
SOIC
Description
PORTC is a bidirectional I/O port.
RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI
RC0
T1OSO
T1CKI
11
RC1/T1OSI/UOE
RC1
T1OSI
UOE
12
RC2/CCP1
RC2
CCP1
13
RC4/D-/VM
RC4
DVM
15
RC5/D+/VP
RC5
D+
VP
16
RC6/TX/CK
RC6
TX
CK
17
RC7/RX/DT
RC7
RX
DT
18
RE3
—
14
VUSB
VSS
VDD
8
I/O
O
I
ST
—
ST
I/O
I
—
ST
CMOS
—
I/O
I/O
ST
ST
Digital I/O.
Capture 1 input/Compare 1 output/PWM 1 output.
I
I/O
I
TTL
—
TTL
Digital input.
USB differential minus line (input/output).
External USB transceiver VM input.
I
I/O
O
TTL
—
TTL
Digital input.
USB differential plus line (input/output).
External USB transceiver VP input.
I/O
O
I/O
ST
—
ST
Digital I/O.
EUSART asynchronous transmit.
EUSART synchronous clock (see RX/DT).
I/O
I
I/O
ST
ST
ST
Digital I/O.
EUSART asynchronous receive.
EUSART synchronous data (see TX/CK).
—
—
—
See MCLR/VPP/RE3 pin.
11
O
—
Internal USB 3.3V voltage regulator.
P
—
Ground reference for logic and I/O pins.
P
—
Positive supply for logic and I/O pins.
9
Digital I/O.
Timer1 oscillator input.
External USB transceiver OE output.
10
12
13
14
15
8, 19 5, 16
20
Digital I/O.
Timer1 oscillator output.
Timer1external clock input.
17
Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input
ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels
O
= Output
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output
I
= Input
P
= Power
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 15
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 1-3:
PIC18F4450 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS
Pin Name
MCLR/Vpp/RE3
MCLR
Pin Number
PDIP
QFN
1
18
Pin Buffer
TQFP Type Type
18
I
ST
P
I
ST
I
I
Analog
Analog
O
—
CLKO
O
—
RA6
I/O
TTL
VPP
RE3
OSC1/CLKI
OSC1
CLKI
13
OSC2/CLKO/RA6
OSC2
14
32
33
30
31
Description
Master Clear (input) or programming voltage (input).
Master Clear (Reset) input. This pin is an
active-low Reset to the device.
Programming voltage input.
Digital input.
Oscillator crystal or external clock input.
Oscillator crystal input or external clock source input.
External clock source input. Always associated with
pin function OSC1. (See OSC2/CLKO pin.)
Oscillator crystal or clock output.
Oscillator crystal output. Connects to crystal or
resonator in Crystal Oscillator mode.
In select modes, OSC2 pin outputs CLKO which has
1/4 the frequency of OSC1 and denotes the instruction
cycle rate.
General purpose I/O pin.
Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input
CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output
ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I
= Input
O
= Output
P
= Power
Note 1: These pins are No Connect unless the ICPRT Configuration bit is set. For NC/ICPORTS, the pin is No
Connect unless ICPRT is set and the DEBUG Configuration bit is cleared.
DS39760A-page 16
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 1-3:
PIC18F4450 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Pin Name
Pin Number
PDIP
QFN
RA0/AN0
RA0
AN0
2
19
RA1/AN1
RA1
AN1
3
RA2/AN2/VREFRA2
AN2
VREF-
4
RA3/AN3/VREF+
RA3
AN3
VREF+
5
RA4/T0CKI/RCV
RA4
T0CKI
RCV
6
RA5/AN4/HLVDIN
RA5
AN4
HLVDIN
7
RA6
—
Pin Buffer
TQFP Type Type
Description
PORTA is a bidirectional I/O port.
20
21
22
23
24
—
19
I/O
I
TTL
Analog
Digital I/O.
Analog input 0.
I/O
I
TTL
Analog
Digital I/O.
Analog input 1.
I/O
I
I
TTL
Analog
Analog
Digital I/O.
Analog input 2.
A/D reference voltage (low) input.
I/O
I
I
TTL
Analog
Analog
Digital I/O.
Analog input 3.
A/D reference voltage (high) input.
I/O
I
I
ST
ST
TTL
I/O
I
I
TTL
Analog
Analog
Digital I/O.
Analog input 4.
High/Low-Voltage Detect input.
—
—
See the OSC2/CLKO/RA6 pin.
20
21
22
23
Digital I/O.
Timer0 external clock input.
External USB transceiver RCV input.
24
—
Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input
CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output
ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I
= Input
O
= Output
P
= Power
Note 1: These pins are No Connect unless the ICPRT Configuration bit is set. For NC/ICPORTS, the pin is No
Connect unless ICPRT is set and the DEBUG Configuration bit is cleared.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 17
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 1-3:
PIC18F4450 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Pin Name
Pin Number
PDIP
QFN
Pin Buffer
TQFP Type Type
Description
PORTB is a bidirectional I/O port. PORTB can be
software programmed for internal weak pull-ups on all
inputs.
RB0/AN12/INT0
RB0
AN12
INT0
33
RB1/AN10/INT1
RB1
AN10
INT1
34
RB2/AN8/INT2/VMO
RB2
AN8
INT2
VMO
35
RB3/AN9/VPO
RB3
AN9
VPO
36
RB4/AN11/KBI0
RB4
AN11
KBI0
37
RB5/KBI1/PGM
RB5
KBI1
PGM
38
RB6/KBI2/PGC
RB6
KBI2
PGC
39
RB7/KBI3/PGD
RB7
KBI3
PGD
40
9
10
11
12
14
15
16
17
8
I/O
I
I
TTL
Analog
ST
Digital I/O.
Analog input 12.
External interrupt 0.
I/O
I
I
TTL
Analog
ST
Digital I/O.
Analog input 10.
External interrupt 1.
I/O
I
I
O
TTL
Analog
ST
—
Digital I/O.
Analog input 8.
External interrupt 2.
External USB transceiver VMO output.
I/O
I
O
TTL
Analog
—
Digital I/O.
Analog input 9.
External USB transceiver VPO output.
I/O
I
I
TTL
Analog
TTL
Digital I/O.
Analog input 11.
Interrupt-on-change pin.
I/O
I
I/O
TTL
TTL
ST
Digital I/O.
Interrupt-on-change pin.
Low-Voltage ICSP™ Programming enable pin.
I/O
I
I/O
TTL
TTL
ST
Digital I/O.
Interrupt-on-change pin.
In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP programming clock pin.
I/O
I
I/O
TTL
TTL
ST
Digital I/O.
Interrupt-on-change pin.
In-Circuit Debugger and ICSP programming data pin.
9
10
11
14
15
16
17
Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input
CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output
ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I
= Input
O
= Output
P
= Power
Note 1: These pins are No Connect unless the ICPRT Configuration bit is set. For NC/ICPORTS, the pin is No
Connect unless ICPRT is set and the DEBUG Configuration bit is cleared.
DS39760A-page 18
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 1-3:
PIC18F4450 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Pin Name
Pin Number
PDIP
QFN
RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI
RC0
T1OSO
T1CKI
15
34
RC1/T1OSI/UOE
RC1
T1OSI
UOE
16
RC2/CCP1
RC2
CCP1
17
RC4/D-/VM
RC4
DVM
23
RC5/D+/VP
RC5
D+
VP
24
RC6/TX/CK
RC6
TX
CK
25
RC7/RX/DT
RC7
RX
DT
26
Pin Buffer
TQFP Type Type
Description
PORTC is a bidirectional I/O port.
35
36
42
43
44
1
32
I/O
O
I
ST
—
ST
Digital I/O.
Timer1 oscillator output.
Timer1 external clock input.
I/O
I
O
ST
CMOS
—
I/O
I/O
ST
ST
Digital I/O.
Capture 1 input/Compare 1 output/PWM 1 output.
I
I/O
I
TTL
—
TTL
Digital input.
USB differential minus line (input/output).
External USB transceiver VM input.
I
I/O
I
TTL
—
TTL
Digital input.
USB differential plus line (input/output).
External USB transceiver VP input.
I/O
O
I/O
ST
—
ST
Digital I/O.
EUSART asynchronous transmit.
EUSART synchronous clock (see RX/DT).
I/O
I
I/O
ST
ST
ST
Digital I/O.
EUSART asynchronous receive.
EUSART synchronous data (see TX/CK).
35
Digital I/O.
Timer1 oscillator input.
External USB transceiver OE output.
36
42
43
44
1
Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input
CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output
ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I
= Input
O
= Output
P
= Power
Note 1: These pins are No Connect unless the ICPRT Configuration bit is set. For NC/ICPORTS, the pin is No
Connect unless ICPRT is set and the DEBUG Configuration bit is cleared.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 19
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 1-3:
Pin Name
PIC18F4450 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Pin Number
PDIP
QFN
Pin Buffer
TQFP Type Type
Description
PORTD is a bidirectional I/O port.
RD0
19
38
38
I/O
ST
Digital I/O.
RD1
20
39
39
I/O
ST
Digital I/O.
RD2
21
40
40
I/O
ST
Digital I/O.
RD3
22
41
41
I/O
ST
Digital I/O.
RD4
27
2
2
I/O
ST
Digital I/O.
RD5
28
3
3
I/O
ST
Digital I/O.
RD6
29
4
4
I/O
ST
Digital I/O.
RD7
30
5
5
I/O
ST
Digital I/O.
Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input
CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output
ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I
= Input
O
= Output
P
= Power
Note 1: These pins are No Connect unless the ICPRT Configuration bit is set. For NC/ICPORTS, the pin is No
Connect unless ICPRT is set and the DEBUG Configuration bit is cleared.
DS39760A-page 20
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 1-3:
PIC18F4450 PINOUT I/O DESCRIPTIONS (CONTINUED)
Pin Name
Pin Number
PDIP
QFN
RE0/AN5
RE0
AN5
8
25
RE1/AN6
RE1
AN6
9
RE2/AN7
RE2
AN7
10
RE3
—
Pin Buffer
TQFP Type Type
Description
PORTE is a bidirectional I/O port.
26
27
—
25
I/O
I
ST
Analog
Digital I/O.
Analog input 5.
I/O
I
ST
Analog
Digital I/O.
Analog input 6.
I/O
I
ST
Analog
Digital I/O.
Analog input 7.
—
—
—
See MCLR/VPP/RE3 pin.
26
27
VSS
12, 31 6, 30,
31
6, 29
P
—
Ground reference for logic and I/O pins.
VDD
11, 32 7, 8, 7, 28
28, 29
P
—
Positive supply for logic and I/O pins.
O
—
Internal USB 3.3V voltage regulator output.
I/O
I/O
ST
ST
No Connect or dedicated ICD/ICSP™ port clock.
In-Circuit Debugger clock.
ICSP programming clock.
I/O
I/O
ST
ST
No Connect or dedicated ICD/ICSP port clock.
In-Circuit Debugger data.
ICSP programming data.
I
P
—
—
No Connect or dedicated ICD/ICSP port Reset.
Master Clear (Reset) input.
Programming voltage input.
VUSB
18
37
37
NC/ICCK/ICPGC(1)
ICCK
ICPGC
—
—
12
NC/ICDT/ICPGD(1)
ICDT
ICPGD
—
NC/ICRST/ICVPP(1)
ICRST
ICVPP
—
NC/ICPORTS(1)
ICPORTS
—
—
34
P
—
No Connect or 28-pin device emulation.
Enable 28-pin device emulation when connected
to VSS.
NC
—
13
—
—
—
No Connect.
—
—
13
33
Legend: TTL = TTL compatible input
CMOS = CMOS compatible input or output
ST = Schmitt Trigger input with CMOS levels I
= Input
O
= Output
P
= Power
Note 1: These pins are No Connect unless the ICPRT Configuration bit is set. For NC/ICPORTS, the pin is No
Connect unless ICPRT is set and the DEBUG Configuration bit is cleared.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 21
PIC18F2450/4450
NOTES:
DS39760A-page 22
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
2.0
2.1
OSCILLATOR
CONFIGURATIONS
2.2
Overview
Devices in the PIC18F2450/4450 family incorporate a
different oscillator and microcontroller clock system
than the non-USB PIC18F devices. The addition of the
USB module, with its unique requirements for a stable
clock source, make it necessary to provide a separate
clock source that is compliant with both USB low-speed
and full-speed specifications.
To accommodate these requirements, PIC18F2450/
4450 devices include a new clock branch to provide a
48 MHz clock for full-speed USB operation. Since it is
driven from the primary clock source, an additional
system of prescalers and postscalers has been added
to accommodate a wide range of oscillator frequencies.
An overview of the oscillator structure is shown in
Figure 2-1.
Other oscillator features used in PIC18 enhanced
microcontrollers, such as the internal RC oscillator and
clock switching, remain the same. They are discussed
later in this chapter.
2.1.1
OSCILLATOR CONTROL
The operation of the oscillator in PIC18F2450/4450
devices is controlled through two Configuration
registers and two control registers. Configuration
registers, CONFIG1L and CONFIG1H, select the
oscillator mode and USB prescaler/postscaler options.
As Configuration bits, these are set when the device is
programmed and left in that configuration until the
device is reprogrammed.
Oscillator Types
PIC18F2450/4450 devices can be operated in twelve
distinct oscillator modes. In contrast with the non-USB
PIC18 enhanced microcontrollers, four of these modes
involve the use of two oscillator types at once. Users
can program the FOSC3:FOSC0 Configuration bits to
select one of these modes:
1.
2.
3.
4.
XT
XTPLL
HS
HSPLL
Crystal/Resonator
Crystal/Resonator with PLL enabled
High-Speed Crystal/Resonator
High-Speed Crystal/Resonator
with PLL enabled
5. EC
External Clock with FOSC/4 output
6. ECIO
External Clock with I/O on RA6
7. ECPLL External Clock with PLL enabled
and FOSC/4 output on RA6
8. ECPIO External Clock with PLL enabled,
I/O on RA6
9. INTHS Internal Oscillator used as
microcontroller clock source, HS
Oscillator used as USB clock source
10. INTXT Internal Oscillator used as
microcontroller clock source, XT
Oscillator used as USB clock source
11. INTIO
Internal Oscillator used as
microcontroller clock source, EC
Oscillator used as USB clock source,
digital I/O on RA6
12. INTCKO Internal Oscillator used as
microcontroller clock source, EC
Oscillator used as USB clock source,
FOSC/4 output on RA6
The OSCCON register (Register 2-1) selects the Active
Clock mode; it is primarily used in controlling clock
switching in power-managed modes. Its use is
discussed in Section 2.4.1 “Oscillator Control
Register”.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 23
PIC18F2450/4450
2.2.1
OSCILLATOR MODES AND
USB OPERATION
however, the microcontroller core and other peripherals
can be separately clocked from the secondary or internal
oscillators as before.
Because of the unique requirements of the USB module,
a different approach to clock operation is necessary. In
previous PICmicro® devices, all core and peripheral
clocks were driven by a single oscillator source; the usual
sources were primary, secondary or the internal
oscillator. With PIC18F2450/4450 devices, the primary
oscillator becomes part of the USB module and cannot
be associated to any other clock source. Thus, the USB
module must be clocked from the primary clock source;
FIGURE 2-1:
Because of the timing requirements imposed by USB,
an internal clock of either 6 MHz or 48 MHz is required
while the USB module is enabled. Fortunately, the
microcontroller and other peripherals are not required
to run at this clock speed when using the primary
oscillator. There are numerous options to achieve the
USB module clock requirement and still provide
flexibility for clocking the rest of the device from the
primary oscillator source. These are detailed in
Section 2.3 “Oscillator Settings for USB”.
PIC18F2450/4450 CLOCK DIAGRAM
PIC18F2450/4450
PLLDIV
÷ 12
111
Sleep
OSC1
110
÷6
101
÷5
100
÷4
011
÷3
USBDIV
(4 MHz Input Only)
MUX
OSC2
PLL Prescaler
÷ 10
Primary Oscillator
USB Clock Source
96 MHz
PLL
0
÷2
1
010
÷2
001
÷1
000
FSEN
1
HSPLL, ECPLL,
XTPLL, ECPIO
USB
Peripheral
÷4
11
÷3
10
÷2
01
÷1
00
÷4
÷4
11
0
10
÷3
01
÷2
00
CPU
1
0
Primary
Clock
FOSC3:FOSC0
Secondary Oscillator
T1OSO
T1OSI
T1OSC
IDLEN
Peripherals
MUX
XT, HS, EC, ECIO
Oscillator Postscaler
CPUDIV
PLL Postscaler
CPUDIV
÷6
T1OSCEN
Enable
Oscillator
OSCCON<6:4>
Internal RC Oscillator
31.25 kHz
Internal Oscillator
Clock
Control
FOSC3:FOSC0
OSCCON<1:0>
Clock Source Option
for other Modules
WDT, PWRT, FSCM
and Two-Speed Start-up
DS39760A-page 24
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
2.2.2
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR/CERAMIC
RESONATORS
In HS, HSPLL, XT and XTPLL Oscillator modes, a
crystal or ceramic resonator is connected to the OSC1
and OSC2 pins to establish oscillation. Figure 2-2
shows the pin connections.
The oscillator design requires the use of a parallel cut
crystal.
Note:
Use of a series cut crystal may give a frequency out of the crystal manufacturer’s
specifications.
FIGURE 2-2:
C1(1)
CRYSTAL/CERAMIC
RESONATOR OPERATION
(XT, HS OR HSPLL
CONFIGURATION)
OSC1
XTAL
RF(3)
CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR
CERAMIC RESONATORS
Typical Capacitor Values Used:
Mode
Freq
OSC1
OSC2
XT
4.0 MHz
33 pF
33 pF
HS
8.0 MHz
16.0 MHz
27 pF
22 pF
27 pF
22 pF
Capacitor values are for design guidance only.
These capacitors were tested with the resonators
listed below for basic start-up and operation. These
values are not optimized.
Different capacitor values may be required to produce
acceptable oscillator operation. The user should test
the performance of the oscillator over the expected
VDD and temperature range for the application.
See the notes following Table 2-2 for additional
information.
Resonators Used:
4.0 MHz
8.0 MHz
Crystal
Freq
Typical Capacitor Values
Tested:
C1
C2
XT
4 MHz
27 pF
27 pF
HS
4 MHz
27 pF
27 pF
8 MHz
22 pF
22 pF
20 MHz
15 pF
15 pF
Capacitor values are for design guidance only.
These capacitors were tested with the crystals listed
below for basic start-up and operation. These values
are not optimized.
Different capacitor values may be required to produce
acceptable oscillator operation. The user should test
the performance of the oscillator over the expected
VDD and temperature range for the application.
See the notes following this table for additional
information.
4 MHz
PIC18FXXXX
OSC2
CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR
CRYSTAL OSCILLATOR
Crystals Used:
Note 1: See Table 2-1 and Table 2-2 for initial values of
C1 and C2.
2: A series resistor (RS) may be required for AT
strip cut crystals.
3: RF varies with the oscillator mode chosen.
TABLE 2-1:
Osc Type
Sleep
RS(2)
C2(1)
To
Internal
Logic
TABLE 2-2:
8 MHz
20 MHz
Note 1: Higher capacitance increases the stability
of oscillator but also increases the startup time.
2: When operating below 3V VDD, or when
using certain ceramic resonators at any
voltage, it may be necessary to use the
HS mode or switch to a crystal oscillator.
3: Since each resonator/crystal has its own
characteristics, the user should consult
the resonator/crystal manufacturer for
appropriate
values
of
external
components.
4: Rs may be required to avoid overdriving
crystals with low drive level specification.
5: Always verify oscillator performance over
the VDD and temperature range that is
expected for the application.
An internal postscaler allows users to select a clock
frequency other than that of the crystal or resonator.
Frequency division is determined by the CPUDIV Configuration bits. Users may select a clock frequency of
the oscillator frequency, or 1/2, 1/3 or 1/4 of the
frequency.
An external clock may also be used when the microcontroller is in HS Oscillator mode. In this case, the
OSC2/CLKO pin is left open (Figure 2-3).
16.0 MHz
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 25
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 2-3:
EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT
OPERATION (HS OSC
CONFIGURATION)
OSC1
Clock from
Ext. System
PIC18FXXXX
Open
2.2.3
OSC2
(HS Mode)
EXTERNAL CLOCK INPUT
The EC, ECIO, ECPLL and ECPIO Oscillator modes
require an external clock source to be connected to the
OSC1 pin. There is no oscillator start-up time required
after a Power-on Reset or after an exit from Sleep
mode.
In the EC and ECPLL Oscillator modes, the oscillator
frequency divided by 4 is available on the OSC2 pin.
This signal may be used for test purposes or to
synchronize other logic. Figure 2-4 shows the pin
connections for the EC Oscillator mode.
FIGURE 2-4:
EXTERNAL CLOCK
INPUT OPERATION
(EC AND ECPLL
CONFIGURATION)
PLL FREQUENCY MULTIPLIER
PIC18F2450/4450 devices include a Phase Locked
Loop (PLL) circuit. This is provided specifically for USB
applications with lower speed oscillators and can also
be used as a microcontroller clock source.
The PLL is enabled in HSPLL, XTPLL, ECPLL and
ECPIO Oscillator modes. It is designed to produce a
fixed 96 MHz reference clock from a fixed 4 MHz input.
The output can then be divided and used for both the
USB and the microcontroller core clock. Because the
PLL has a fixed frequency input and output, there are
eight prescaling options to match the oscillator input
frequency to the PLL.
There is also a separate postscaler option for deriving
the microcontroller clock from the PLL. This allows the
USB peripheral and microcontroller to use the same
oscillator input and still operate at different clock
speeds. In contrast to the postscaler for XT, HS and EC
modes, the available options are 1/2, 1/3, 1/4 and 1/6
of the PLL output.
The HSPLL, ECPLL and ECPIO modes make use of
the HS mode oscillator for frequencies up to 48 MHz.
The prescaler divides the oscillator input by up to 12 to
produce the 4 MHz drive for the PLL. The XTPLL mode
can only use an input frequency of 4 MHz which drives
the PLL directly.
FIGURE 2-6:
OSC1/CLKI
Clock from
Ext. System
2.2.4
PIC18FXXXX
FOSC/4
OSC2/CLKO
HS/EC/ECIO/XT Oscillator Enable
PLL Enable
(from CONFIG1H Register)
The ECIO and ECPIO Oscillator modes function like the
EC and ECPLL modes, except that the OSC2 pin
becomes an additional general purpose I/O pin. The I/O
pin becomes bit 6 of PORTA (RA6). Figure 2-5 shows
the pin connections for the ECIO Oscillator mode.
FIGURE 2-5:
PLL BLOCK DIAGRAM
(HS MODE)
OSC2
Oscillator
and
OSC1
Prescaler
FIN
FOUT
EXTERNAL CLOCK
INPUT OPERATION
(ECIO AND ECPIO
CONFIGURATION)
Loop
Filter
VCO
MUX
÷24
OSC1/CLKI
Clock from
Ext. System
Phase
Comparator
SYSCLK
PIC18FXXXX
RA6
I/O (OSC2)
The internal postscaler for reducing clock frequency in
XT and HS modes is also available in EC and ECIO
modes.
DS39760A-page 26
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
2.2.5
INTERNAL OSCILLATOR
2.3
The PIC18F2450/4450 devices include an internal RC
oscillator (INTRC) which provides a nominal 31 kHz output. INTRC is enabled if it is selected as the device clock
source; it is also enabled automatically when any of the
following are enabled:
•
•
•
•
Power-up Timer
Fail-Safe Clock Monitor
Watchdog Timer
Two-Speed Start-up
2.3.1
Internal Oscillator Modes
When the internal oscillator is used as the microcontroller clock source, one of the other oscillator
modes (External Clock or External Crystal/Resonator)
must be used as the USB clock source. The choice of
USB clock source is determined by the particular
internal oscillator mode.
There are four distinct modes available:
1.
2.
3.
4.
INTHS mode: The USB clock is provided by the
oscillator in HS mode.
INTXT mode: The USB clock is provided by the
oscillator in XT mode.
INTCKO mode: The USB clock is provided by an
external clock input on OSC1/CLKI; the OSC2/
CLKO pin outputs FOSC/4.
INTIO mode: The USB clock is provided by an
external clock input on OSC1/CLKI; the OSC2/
CLKO pin functions as a digital I/O (RA6).
Of these four modes, only INTIO mode frees up an
additional pin (OSC2/CLKO/RA6) for port I/O use.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
When the PIC18F2450/4450 is used for USB
connectivity, it must have either a 6 MHz or 48 MHz
clock for USB operation, depending on whether LowSpeed or Full-Speed mode is being used. This may
require some forethought in selecting an oscillator
frequency and programming the device.
The full range of possible oscillator configurations
compatible with USB operation is shown in Table 2-3.
These features are discussed in greater detail in
Section 18.0 “Special Features of the CPU”.
2.2.5.1
Oscillator Settings for USB
LOW-SPEED OPERATION
The USB clock for Low-Speed mode is derived from
the primary oscillator chain and not directly from the
PLL. It is divided by 4 to produce the actual 6 MHz
clock. Because of this, the microcontroller can only use
a clock frequency of 24 MHz when the USB module is
active and the controller clock source is one of the
primary oscillator modes (XT, HS or EC, with or without
the PLL).
This restriction does not apply if the microcontroller
clock source is the secondary oscillator or internal
oscillator.
2.3.2
RUNNING DIFFERENT USB AND
MICROCONTROLLER CLOCKS
The USB module, in either mode, can run
asynchronously with respect to the microcontroller core
and other peripherals. This means that applications can
use the primary oscillator for the USB clock while the
microcontroller runs from a separate clock source at a
lower speed. If it is necessary to run the entire
application from only one clock source, full-speed
operation provides a greater selection of microcontroller
clock frequencies.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 27
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 2-3:
OSCILLATOR CONFIGURATION OPTIONS FOR USB OPERATION
Input Oscillator
Frequency
PLL Division
(PLLDIV2:PLLDIV0)
Clock Mode
(FOSC3:FOSC0)
MCU Clock Division
(CPUDIV1:CPUDIV0)
Microcontroller
Clock Frequency
48 MHz
N/A(1)
EC, ECIO
None (00)
48 MHz
÷2 (01)
24 MHz
÷3 (10)
16 MHz
48 MHz
÷12 (111)
EC, ECIO
ECPLL, ECPIO
40 MHz
÷10 (110)
EC, ECIO
ECPLL, ECPIO
24 MHz
÷6 (101)
HS, EC, ECIO
HSPLL, ECPLL, ECPIO
20 MHz
÷5 (100)
HS, EC, ECIO
HSPLL, ECPLL, ECPIO
16 MHz
÷4 (011)
HS, EC, ECIO
HSPLL, ECPLL, ECPIO
Legend:
Note 1:
÷4 (11)
12 MHz
None (00)
48 MHz
÷2 (01)
24 MHz
÷3 (10)
16 MHz
÷4 (11)
12 MHz
÷2 (00)
48 MHz
÷3 (01)
32 MHz
÷4 (10)
24 MHz
÷6 (11)
16 MHz
None (00)
40 MHz
÷2 (01)
20 MHz
÷3 (10)
13.33 MHz
÷4 (11)
10 MHz
÷2 (00)
48 MHz
÷3 (01)
32 MHz
÷4 (10)
24 MHz
÷6 (11)
16 MHz
None (00)
24 MHz
÷2 (01)
12 MHz
÷3 (10)
8 MHz
÷4 (11)
6 MHz
÷2 (00)
48 MHz
÷3 (01)
32 MHz
÷4 (10)
24 MHz
÷6 (11)
16 MHz
None (00)
20 MHz
÷2 (01)
10 MHz
÷3 (10)
6.67 MHz
÷4 (11)
5 MHz
÷2 (00)
48 MHz
÷3 (01)
32 MHz
÷4 (10)
24 MHz
÷6 (11)
16 MHz
None (00)
16 MHz
÷2 (01)
8 MHz
÷3 (10)
5.33 MHz
÷4 (11)
4 MHz
÷2 (00)
48 MHz
÷3 (01)
32 MHz
÷4 (10)
24 MHz
÷6 (11)
16 MHz
All clock frequencies, except 24 MHz, are exclusively associated with full-speed USB operation (USB clock of 48 MHz).
Bold is used to highlight clock selections that are compatible with low-speed USB operation (system clock of 24 MHz,
USB clock of 6 MHz).
Only valid when the USBDIV Configuration bit is cleared.
DS39760A-page 28
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 2-3:
OSCILLATOR CONFIGURATION OPTIONS FOR USB OPERATION (CONTINUED)
Input Oscillator
Frequency
PLL Division
(PLLDIV2:PLLDIV0)
Clock Mode
(FOSC3:FOSC0)
MCU Clock Division
(CPUDIV1:CPUDIV0)
Microcontroller
Clock Frequency
12 MHz
÷3 (010)
HS, EC, ECIO
None (00)
12 MHz
÷2 (01)
6 MHz
÷3 (10)
4 MHz
HSPLL, ECPLL, ECPIO
8 MHz
÷2 (001)
HS, EC, ECIO
HSPLL, ECPLL, ECPIO
4 MHz
÷1 (000)
XT, HS, EC, ECIO
HSPLL, ECPLL, XTPLL,
ECPIO
Legend:
Note 1:
÷4 (11)
3 MHz
÷2 (00)
48 MHz
÷3 (01)
32 MHz
÷4 (10)
24 MHz
÷6 (11)
16 MHz
None (00)
8 MHz
÷2 (01)
4 MHz
÷3 (10)
2.67 MHz
÷4 (11)
2 MHz
÷2 (00)
48 MHz
÷3 (01)
32 MHz
÷4 (10)
24 MHz
÷6 (11)
16 MHz
None (00)
4 MHz
÷2 (01)
2 MHz
÷3 (10)
1.33 MHz
÷4 (11)
1 MHz
÷2 (00)
48 MHz
÷3 (01)
32 MHz
÷4 (10)
24 MHz
÷6 (11)
16 MHz
All clock frequencies, except 24 MHz, are exclusively associated with full-speed USB operation (USB clock of 48 MHz).
Bold is used to highlight clock selections that are compatible with low-speed USB operation (system clock of 24 MHz,
USB clock of 6 MHz).
Only valid when the USBDIV Configuration bit is cleared.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 29
PIC18F2450/4450
2.4
Clock Sources and Oscillator
Switching
Like previous PIC18 enhanced devices, the
PIC18F2450/4450 family includes a feature that allows
the device clock source to be switched from the main
oscillator to an alternate low-frequency clock source.
PIC18F2450/4450 devices offer two alternate clock
sources. When an alternate clock source is enabled,
the various power-managed operating modes are
available.
Essentially, there are three clock sources for these
devices:
• Primary oscillators
• Secondary oscillators
• Internal oscillator
The primary oscillators include the External Crystal
and Resonator modes, the External Clock modes and
the internal oscillator. The particular mode is defined by
the FOSC3:FOSC0 Configuration bits. The details of
these modes are covered earlier in this chapter.
The secondary oscillators are those external sources
not connected to the OSC1 or OSC2 pins. These
sources may continue to operate even after the
controller is placed in a power-managed mode.
PIC18F2450/4450 devices offer the Timer1 oscillator
as a secondary oscillator. This oscillator, in all powermanaged modes, is often the time base for functions
such as a Real-Time Clock. Most often, a 32.768 kHz
watch crystal is connected between the RC0/T1OSO/
T1CKI and RC1/T1OSI/UOE pins. Like the XT and HS
Oscillator mode circuits, loading capacitors are also
connected from each pin to ground. The Timer1
oscillator is discussed in greater detail in Section 11.3
“Timer1 Oscillator”.
In addition to being a primary clock source, the internal
oscillator is available as a power-managed mode
clock source. The INTRC source is also used as the
clock source for several special features, such as the
WDT and Fail-Safe Clock Monitor.
2.4.1
OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER
The OSCCON register (Register 2-1) controls several
aspects of the device clock’s operation, both in full
power operation and in power-managed modes.
INTRC always remains the clock source for features
such as the Watchdog Timer and the Fail-Safe Clock
Monitor.
The OSTS and T1RUN bits indicate which clock source
is currently providing the device clock. The OSTS bit
indicates that the Oscillator Start-up Timer has timed out
and the primary clock is providing the device clock in
primary clock modes. The T1RUN bit (T1CON<6>) indicates when the Timer1 oscillator is providing the device
clock in secondary clock modes. In power-managed
modes, only one of these three bits will be set at any
time. If none of these bits are set, the INTRC is providing
the clock or the internal oscillator has just started and is
not yet stable.
The IDLEN bit determines if the device goes into Sleep
mode, or one of the Idle modes, when the SLEEP
instruction is executed.
The use of the flag and control bits in the OSCCON
register is discussed in more detail in Section 3.0
“Power-Managed Modes”.
Note 1: The Timer1 oscillator must be enabled to
select the secondary clock source. The
Timer1 oscillator is enabled by setting the
T1OSCEN bit in the Timer1 Control register (T1CON<3>). If the Timer1 oscillator is
not enabled, then any attempt to select a
secondary clock source will be ignored.
2: It is recommended that the Timer1
oscillator be operating and stable prior to
switching to it as the clock source; otherwise, a very long delay may occur while
the Timer1 oscillator starts.
2.4.2
OSCILLATOR TRANSITIONS
PIC18F2450/4450 devices contain circuitry to prevent
clock “glitches” when switching between clock sources.
A short pause in the device clock occurs during the
clock switch. The length of this pause is the sum of two
cycles of the old clock source and three to four cycles
of the new clock source. This formula assumes that the
new clock source is stable.
Clock transitions are discussed in greater detail in
Section 3.1.2 “Entering Power-Managed Modes”.
The System Clock Select bits, SCS1:SCS0, select the
clock source. The available clock sources are the
primary clock (defined by the FOSC3:FOSC0 Configuration bits), the secondary clock (Timer1 oscillator) and the
internal oscillator. The clock source changes immediately after one or more of the bits is written to, following
a brief clock transition interval. The SCS bits are cleared
on all forms of Reset.
DS39760A-page 30
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 2-1:
OSCCON: OSCILLATOR CONTROL REGISTER
R/W-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
R(1)
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
IDLEN
—
—
—
OSTS
—
SCS1
SCS0
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
IDLEN: Idle Enable bit
1 = Device enters Idle mode on SLEEP instruction
0 = Device enters Sleep mode on SLEEP instruction
bit 6-4
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 3
OSTS: Oscillator Start-up Time-out Status bit(1)
1 = Oscillator Start-up Timer time-out has expired; primary oscillator is running
0 = Oscillator Start-up Timer time-out is running; primary oscillator is not ready
bit 2
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 1-0
SCS1:SCS0: System Clock Select bits
1x = Internal oscillator
01 = Timer1 oscillator
00 = Primary oscillator
Note 1:
Depends on the state of the IESO Configuration bit.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 31
PIC18F2450/4450
2.5
Effects of Power-Managed Modes
on the Various Clock Sources
When PRI_IDLE mode is selected, the designated
primary oscillator continues to run without interruption.
For all other power-managed modes, the oscillator
using the OSC1 pin is disabled. Unless the USB
module is enabled, the OSC1 pin (and OSC2 pin if
used by the oscillator) will stop oscillating.
In secondary clock modes (SEC_RUN and
SEC_IDLE), the Timer1 oscillator is operating and
providing the device clock. The Timer1 oscillator may
also run in all power-managed modes if required to
clock Timer1.
In internal oscillator modes (RC_RUN and RC_IDLE),
the internal oscillator provides the device clock source.
The 31 kHz INTRC output can be used directly to
provide the clock and may be enabled to support various
special features regardless of the power-managed
mode (see Section 18.2 “Watchdog Timer (WDT)”,
Section 18.3 “Two-Speed Start-up” and Section 18.4
“Fail-Safe Clock Monitor” for more information on
WDT, Fail-Safe Clock Monitor and Two-Speed Start-up).
Regardless of the Run or Idle mode selected, the USB
clock source will continue to operate. If the device is
operating from a crystal or resonator-based oscillator,
that oscillator will continue to clock the USB module.
The core and all other modules will switch to the new
clock source.
If the Sleep mode is selected, all clock sources are
stopped. Since all the transistor switching currents
have been stopped, Sleep mode achieves the lowest
current consumption of the device (only leakage
currents).
Sleep mode should never be invoked while the USB
module is operating and connected. The only exception
is when the device has been issued a “Suspend” command over the USB. Once the module has suspended
operation and shifted to a low-power state, the
microcontroller may be safely put into Sleep mode.
TABLE 2-4:
Enabling any on-chip feature that will operate during
Sleep will increase the current consumed during Sleep.
The INTRC is required to support WDT operation. The
Timer1 oscillator may be operating to support a RealTime Clock. Other features may be operating that do
not require a device clock source (i.e., PSP, INTn pins
and others). Peripherals that may add significant
current consumption are listed in Section 21.2 “DC
Characteristics: Power-Down and Supply Current”.
2.6
Power-up Delays
Power-up delays are controlled by two timers, so that no
external Reset circuitry is required for most applications.
The delays ensure that the device is kept in Reset until
the device power supply is stable under normal circumstances and the primary clock is operating and stable.
For additional information on power-up delays, see
Section 4.5 “Device Reset Timers”.
The first timer is the Power-up Timer (PWRT), which
provides a fixed delay on power-up (parameter 33,
Table 21-10). It is enabled by clearing (= 0) the
PWRTEN Configuration bit.
The second timer is the Oscillator Start-up Timer
(OST), intended to keep the chip in Reset until the
crystal oscillator is stable (XT and HS modes). The
OST does this by counting 1024 oscillator cycles
before allowing the oscillator to clock the device.
When the HSPLL Oscillator mode is selected, the
device is kept in Reset for an additional 2 ms following
the HS mode OST delay, so the PLL can lock to the
incoming clock frequency.
There is a delay of interval, TCSD (parameter 38,
Table 21-10), following POR, while the controller
becomes ready to execute instructions. This delay runs
concurrently with any other delays. This may be the
only delay that occurs when any of the EC or internal
oscillator modes are used as the primary clock source.
OSC1 AND OSC2 PIN STATES IN SLEEP MODE
Oscillator Mode
OSC1 Pin
OSC2 Pin
INTCKO
Floating, pulled by external clock
At logic low (clock/4 output)
INTIO
Floating, pulled by external clock
Configured as PORTA, bit 6
ECIO, ECPIO
Floating, pulled by external clock
Configured as PORTA, bit 6
EC
Floating, pulled by external clock
At logic low (clock/4 output)
XT and HS
Feedback inverter disabled at quiescent
voltage level
Feedback inverter disabled at quiescent
voltage level
Note:
See Table 4-2 in Section 4.0 “Reset” for time-outs due to Sleep and MCLR Reset.
DS39760A-page 32
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
3.0
POWER-MANAGED MODES
3.1.1
PIC18F2450/4450 devices offer a total of seven
operating modes for more efficient power
management. These modes provide a variety of
options for selective power conservation in applications
where resources may be limited (i.e., battery-powered
devices).
CLOCK SOURCES
The SCS1:SCS0 bits allow the selection of one of three
clock sources for power-managed modes. They are:
• The primary clock, as defined by the
FOSC3:FOSC0 Configuration bits
• The secondary clock (the Timer1 oscillator)
• The internal oscillator (for RC modes)
There are three categories of power-managed modes:
3.1.2
• Run modes
• Idle modes
• Sleep mode
These categories define which portions of the device
are clocked and sometimes, what speed. The Run and
Idle modes may use any of the three available clock
sources (primary, secondary or internal oscillator); the
Sleep mode does not use a clock source.
The power-managed modes include several powersaving features offered on previous PICmicro®
devices. One is the clock switching feature, offered in
other PIC18 devices, allowing the controller to use the
Timer1 oscillator in place of the primary oscillator. Also
included is the Sleep mode, offered by all PICmicro
devices, where all device clocks are stopped.
3.1
Selecting Power-Managed Modes
Selecting a power-managed mode requires two
decisions: if the CPU is to be clocked or not and the
selection of a clock source. The IDLEN bit
(OSCCON<7>) controls CPU clocking, while the
SCS1:SCS0 bits (OSCCON<1:0>) select the clock
source. The individual modes, bit settings, clock sources
and affected modules are summarized in Table 3-1.
TABLE 3-1:
Switching from one power-managed mode to another
begins by loading the OSCCON register. The
SCS1:SCS0 bits select the clock source and determine
which Run or Idle mode is to be used. Changing these
bits causes an immediate switch to the new clock
source, assuming that it is running. The switch may
also be subject to clock transition delays. These are
discussed in Section 3.1.3 “Clock Transitions and
Status Indicators” and subsequent sections.
Entry to the power-managed Idle or Sleep modes is
triggered by the execution of a SLEEP instruction. The
actual mode that results depends on the status of the
IDLEN bit.
Depending on the current mode and the mode being
switched to, a change to a power-managed mode does
not always require setting all of these bits. Many
transitions may be done by changing the oscillator
select bits, or changing the IDLEN bit, prior to issuing a
SLEEP instruction. If the IDLEN bit is already
configured correctly, it may only be necessary to
perform a SLEEP instruction to switch to the desired
mode.
POWER-MANAGED MODES
OSCCON Bits
Mode
ENTERING POWER-MANAGED
MODES
Module Clocking
Available Clock and Oscillator Source
IDLEN(1)
SCS1:SCS0
CPU
Peripherals
0
N/A
Off
Off
PRI_RUN
N/A
00
Clocked
Clocked
Primary – all oscillator modes.
This is the normal full power execution mode.
SEC_RUN
N/A
01
Clocked
Clocked
Secondary – Timer1 oscillator
RC_RUN
N/A
1x
Clocked
Clocked
Internal oscillator(2)
PRI_IDLE
1
00
Off
Clocked
Primary – all oscillator modes
SEC_IDLE
1
01
Off
Clocked
Secondary – Timer1 oscillator
RC_IDLE
1
1x
Off
Clocked
Internal oscillator(2)
Sleep
Note 1:
2:
None – all clocks are disabled
IDLEN reflects its value when the SLEEP instruction is executed.
Clock is INTRC source.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 33
PIC18F2450/4450
3.1.3
CLOCK TRANSITIONS AND
STATUS INDICATORS
3.2.1
The PRI_RUN mode is the normal, full power execution
mode of the microcontroller. This is also the default
mode upon a device Reset unless Two-Speed Start-up
is enabled (see Section 18.3 “Two-Speed Start-up”
for details). In this mode, the OSTS bit is set.
The length of the transition between clock sources is
the sum of two cycles of the old clock source and three
to four cycles of the new clock source. This formula
assumes that the new clock source is stable.
Two bits indicate the current clock source and its
status. They are:
3.2.2
In general, only one of these bits will be set while in a
given power-managed mode. When the OSTS bit is
set, the primary clock is providing the device clock.
When the T1RUN bit is set, the Timer1 oscillator is
providing the clock.
SEC_RUN mode is entered by setting the SCS1:SCS0
bits to ‘01’. The device clock source is switched to the
Timer1 oscillator (see Figure 3-1), the primary
oscillator is shut down, the T1RUN bit (T1CON<6>) is
set and the OSTS bit is cleared.
Executing a SLEEP instruction does not
necessarily place the device into Sleep
mode. It acts as the trigger to place the
controller into either the Sleep mode, or
one of the Idle modes, depending on the
setting of the IDLEN bit.
3.1.4
Note:
MULTIPLE SLEEP COMMANDS
The power-managed mode that is invoked with the
SLEEP instruction is determined by the setting of the
IDLEN bit at the time the instruction is executed. If
another SLEEP instruction is executed, the device will
enter the power-managed mode specified by IDLEN at
that time. If IDLEN has changed, the device will enter
the new power-managed mode specified by the new
setting.
3.2
The Timer1 oscillator should already be
running prior to entering SEC_RUN mode.
If the T1OSCEN bit is not set when the
SCS1:SCS0 bits are set to ‘01’, entry to
SEC_RUN mode will not occur. If the
Timer1 oscillator is enabled but not yet
running, device clocks will be delayed until
the oscillator has started. In such
situations, initial oscillator operation is far
from stable and unpredictable operation
may result.
On transitions from SEC_RUN mode to PRI_RUN, the
peripherals and CPU continue to be clocked from the
Timer1 oscillator while the primary clock is started.
When the primary clock becomes ready, a clock switch
back to the primary clock occurs (see Figure 3-2).
When the clock switch is complete, the T1RUN bit is
cleared, the OSTS bit is set and the primary clock is
providing the clock. The IDLEN and SCS bits are not
affected by the wake-up; the Timer1 oscillator
continues to run.
Run Modes
In the Run modes, clocks to both the core and
peripherals are active. The difference between these
modes is the clock source.
FIGURE 3-1:
SEC_RUN MODE
The SEC_RUN mode is the compatible mode to the
“clock switching” feature offered in other PIC18
devices. In this mode, the CPU and peripherals are
clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. This gives users the
option of lower power consumption while still using a
high accuracy clock source.
• OSTS (OSCCON<3>)
• T1RUN (T1CON<6>)
Note:
PRI_RUN MODE
TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO SEC_RUN MODE
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
Q2
1
T1OSI
2
3
n-1
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
n
Clock Transition(1)
OSC1
CPU
Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program
Counter
Note
1:
PC
PC + 2
PC + 4
Clock transition typically occurs within 2-4 TOSC.
DS39760A-page 34
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 3-2:
TRANSITION TIMING FROM SEC_RUN MODE TO PRI_RUN MODE (HSPLL)
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3
T1OSI
OSC1
TOST(1)
TPLL(1)
1
PLL Clock
Output
2
n-1 n
Clock(2)
Transition
CPU Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program
Counter
SCS1:SCS0 bits Changed
Note
3.2.3
PC + 2
PC
OSTS bit Set
1:
TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale.
2:
Clock transition typically occurs within 2-4 TOSC.
RC_RUN MODE
In RC_RUN mode, the CPU and peripherals are
clocked from the internal oscillator; the primary clock is
shut down. When using the INTRC source, this mode
provides the best power conservation of all the Run
modes while still executing code. It works well for user
applications which are not highly timing sensitive or do
not require high-speed clocks at all times.
If the primary clock source is the internal oscillator
(INTRC), there are no distinguishable differences
between the PRI_RUN and RC_RUN modes during
execution. However, a clock switch delay will occur during entry to and exit from RC_RUN mode. Therefore, if
the primary clock source is the internal oscillator, the
use of RC_RUN mode is not recommended.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PC + 4
This mode is entered by setting SCS1 to ‘1’. Although
it is ignored, it is recommended that SCS0 also be
cleared; this is to maintain software compatibility with
future devices. When the clock source is switched to
the INTRC (see Figure 3-3), the primary oscillator is
shut down and the OSTS bit is cleared.
On transitions from RC_RUN mode to PRI_RUN mode,
the device continues to be clocked from the INTRC
while the primary clock is started. When the primary
clock becomes ready, a clock switch to the primary
clock occurs (see Figure 3-4). When the clock switch is
complete, the OSTS bit is set and the primary clock is
providing the device clock. The IDLEN and SCS bits
are not affected by the switch. The INTRC source will
continue to run if either the WDT or the Fail-Safe Clock
Monitor is enabled.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 35
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 3-3:
TRANSITION TIMING TO RC_RUN MODE
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
Q2
1
INTRC
2
3
n-1
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
n
Clock Transition(1)
OSC1
CPU
Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program
Counter
Note
1:
PC
PC + 2
PC + 4
Clock transition typically occurs within 2-4 TOSC.
FIGURE 3-4:
TRANSITION TIMING FROM RC_RUN MODE TO PRI_RUN MODE
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3
Q1
INTRC
OSC1
TOST(1)
TPLL(1)
1
PLL Clock
Output
2
n-1 n
Clock(2)
Transition
CPU Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program
Counter
PC
SCS1:SCS0 bits Changed
Note
PC + 2
OSTS bit Set
1:
TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale.
2:
Clock transition typically occurs within 2-4 TOSC.
DS39760A-page 36
PC + 4
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
3.3
Sleep Mode
3.4
The power-managed Sleep mode in the PIC18F2450/
4450 devices is identical to the legacy Sleep mode
offered in all other PICmicro devices. It is entered by
clearing the IDLEN bit (the default state on device
Reset) and executing the SLEEP instruction. This shuts
down the selected oscillator (Figure 3-5). All clock
source status bits are cleared.
Idle Modes
The Idle modes allow the controller’s CPU to be
selectively shut down while the peripherals continue to
operate. Selecting a particular Idle mode allows users
to further manage power consumption.
If the IDLEN bit is set to ‘1’ when a SLEEP instruction is
executed, the peripherals will be clocked from the clock
source selected using the SCS1:SCS0 bits; however, the
CPU will not be clocked. The clock source status bits are
not affected. Setting IDLEN and executing a SLEEP
instruction provides a quick method of switching from a
given Run mode to its corresponding Idle mode.
Entering the Sleep mode from any other mode does not
require a clock switch. This is because no clocks are
needed once the controller has entered Sleep. If the
WDT is selected, the INTRC source will continue to
operate. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, it will also
continue to run.
If the WDT is selected, the INTRC source will continue
to operate. If the Timer1 oscillator is enabled, it will also
continue to run.
When a wake event occurs in Sleep mode (by interrupt,
Reset or WDT time-out), the device will not be clocked
until the clock source selected by the SCS1:SCS0 bits
becomes ready (see Figure 3-6), or it will be clocked
from the internal oscillator if either the Two-Speed
Start-up or the Fail-Safe Clock Monitor are enabled
(see Section 18.0 “Special Features of the CPU”). In
either case, the OSTS bit is set when the primary clock
is providing the device clocks. The IDLEN and SCS bits
are not affected by the wake-up.
Since the CPU is not executing instructions, the only
exits from any of the Idle modes are by interrupt, WDT
time-out or a Reset. When a wake event occurs, CPU
execution is delayed by an interval of TCSD
(parameter 38, Table 21-10) while it becomes ready to
execute code. When the CPU begins executing code,
it resumes with the same clock source for the current
Idle mode. For example, when waking from RC_IDLE
mode, the internal oscillator will clock the CPU and
peripherals (in other words, RC_RUN mode). The
IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up.
While in any Idle mode or Sleep mode, a WDT time-out
will result in a WDT wake-up to the Run mode currently
specified by the SCS1:SCS0 bits.
FIGURE 3-5:
TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO SLEEP MODE
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1
OSC1
CPU
Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Sleep
Program
Counter
PC
FIGURE 3-6:
PC + 2
TRANSITION TIMING FOR WAKE FROM SLEEP (HSPLL)
Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Q1
OSC1
PLL Clock
Output
TOST(1)
TPLL(1)
CPU Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program
Counter
PC
Wake Event
PC + 2
PC + 4
PC + 6
OSTS bit Set
Note1: TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 37
PIC18F2450/4450
3.4.1
PRI_IDLE MODE
3.4.2
This mode is unique among the three low-power Idle
modes in that it does not disable the primary device
clock. For timing sensitive applications, this allows for
the fastest resumption of device operation, with its
more accurate primary clock source, since the clock
source does not have to “warm up” or transition from
another oscillator.
PRI_IDLE mode is entered from PRI_RUN mode by
setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP
instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, set
IDLEN first, then clear the SCS bits and execute
SLEEP. Although the CPU is disabled, the peripherals
continue to be clocked from the primary clock source
specified by the FOSC3:FOSC0 Configuration bits.
The OSTS bit remains set (see Figure 3-7).
In SEC_IDLE mode, the CPU is disabled but the
peripherals continue to be clocked from the Timer1
oscillator. This mode is entered from SEC_RUN by
setting the IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP
instruction. If the device is in another Run mode, set
IDLEN first, then set SCS1:SCS0 to ‘01’ and execute
SLEEP. When the clock source is switched to the
Timer1 oscillator, the primary oscillator is shut down,
the OSTS bit is cleared and the T1RUN bit is set.
When a wake event occurs, the peripherals continue to
be clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. After an interval of
TCSD following the wake event, the CPU begins executing code being clocked by the Timer1 oscillator. The
IDLEN and SCS bits are not affected by the wake-up;
the Timer1 oscillator continues to run (see Figure 3-8).
When a wake event occurs, the CPU is clocked from the
primary clock source. A delay of interval TCSD is
required between the wake event and when code
execution starts. This is required to allow the CPU to
become ready to execute instructions. After the wakeup, the OSTS bit remains set. The IDLEN and SCS bits
are not affected by the wake-up (see Figure 3-8).
FIGURE 3-7:
SEC_IDLE MODE
Note:
The Timer1 oscillator should already be
running prior to entering SEC_IDLE mode.
If the T1OSCEN bit is not set when the
SLEEP instruction is executed, the SLEEP
instruction will be ignored and entry to
SEC_IDLE mode will not occur. If the
Timer1 oscillator is enabled but not yet running, peripheral clocks will be delayed until
the oscillator has started. In such situations,
initial oscillator operation is far from stable
and unpredictable operation may result.
TRANSITION TIMING FOR ENTRY TO IDLE MODE
Q1
Q4
Q3
Q2
Q1
OSC1
CPU Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program
Counter
PC
FIGURE 3-8:
PC + 2
TRANSITION TIMING FOR WAKE FROM IDLE TO RUN MODE
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
OSC1
TCSD
CPU Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program
Counter
PC
Wake Event
DS39760A-page 38
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
3.4.3
RC_IDLE MODE
In RC_IDLE mode, the CPU is disabled but the peripherals continue to be clocked from the internal oscillator,
INTRC. This mode allows for controllable power
conservation during Idle periods.
From RC_RUN, this mode is entered by setting the
IDLEN bit and executing a SLEEP instruction. If the
device is in another Run mode, first set IDLEN, then set
the SCS1 bit and execute SLEEP. Although its value is
ignored, it is recommended that SCS0 also be cleared;
this is to maintain software compatibility with future
devices. When the clock source is switched to the
INTRC, the primary oscillator is shut down and the
OSTS bit is cleared.
When a wake event occurs, the peripherals continue to
be clocked from the INTRC. After a delay of TCSD following the wake event, the CPU begins executing code
being clocked by the INTRC. The IDLEN and SCS bits
are not affected by the wake-up. The INTRC source will
continue to run if either the WDT or the Fail-Safe Clock
Monitor is enabled.
3.5
Exiting Idle and Sleep Modes
An exit from Sleep mode or any of the Idle modes is
triggered by an interrupt, a Reset or a WDT time-out.
This section discusses the triggers that cause exits
from power-managed modes. The clocking subsystem
actions are discussed in each of the power-managed
modes (see Section 3.2 “Run Modes”, Section 3.3
“Sleep Mode” and Section 3.4 “Idle Modes”).
3.5.1
EXIT BY INTERRUPT
Any of the available interrupt sources can cause the
device to exit from an Idle mode, or the Sleep mode, to
a Run mode. To enable this functionality, an interrupt
source must be enabled by setting its enable bit in one
of the INTCON or PIE registers. The exit sequence is
initiated when the corresponding interrupt flag bit is set.
A fixed delay of interval TCSD, following the wake event,
is required when leaving Sleep and Idle modes. This
delay is required for the CPU to prepare for execution.
Instruction execution resumes on the first clock cycle
following this delay.
3.5.2
EXIT BY WDT TIME-OUT
A WDT time-out will cause different actions depending
on which power-managed mode the device is in when
the time-out occurs.
If the device is not executing code (all Idle modes and
Sleep mode), the time-out will result in an exit from the
power-managed mode (see Section 3.2 “Run
Modes” and Section 3.3 “Sleep Mode”). If the device
is executing code (all Run modes), the time-out will
result in a WDT Reset (see Section 18.2 “Watchdog
Timer (WDT)”).
3.5.3
EXIT BY RESET
Normally, the device is held in Reset by the Oscillator
Start-up Timer (OST) until the primary clock becomes
ready. At that time, the OSTS bit is set and the device
begins executing code.
The exit delay time from Reset to the start of code
execution depends on both the clock sources before
and after the wake-up and the type of oscillator if the
new clock source is the primary clock. Exit delays are
summarized in Table 3-2.
Code execution can begin before the primary clock
becomes ready. If either the Two-Speed Start-up (see
Section 18.3 “Two-Speed Start-up”) or Fail-Safe
Clock Monitor (see Section 18.4 “Fail-Safe Clock
Monitor”) is enabled, the device may begin execution
as soon as the Reset source has cleared. Execution is
clocked by the INTRC driven by the internal oscillator.
Execution is clocked by the internal oscillator until
either the primary clock becomes ready or a powermanaged mode is entered before the primary clock
becomes ready; the primary clock is then shut down.
On all exits from Idle or Sleep modes by interrupt, code
execution branches to the interrupt vector if the GIE/
GIEH bit (INTCON<7>) is set. Otherwise, code execution
continues or resumes without branching (see
Section 8.0 “Interrupts”).
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 39
PIC18F2450/4450
3.5.4
EXIT WITHOUT AN OSCILLATOR
START-UP DELAY
Certain exits from power-managed modes do not
invoke the OST at all. There are two cases:
• PRI_IDLE mode, where the primary clock source
is not stopped; and
• the primary clock source is not any of the XT or
HS modes.
TABLE 3-2:
In these instances, the primary clock source either
does not require an oscillator start-up delay, since it is
already running (PRI_IDLE), or normally does not
require an oscillator start-up delay (EC and any internal
oscillator modes). However, a fixed delay of interval
TCSD following the wake event is still required when
leaving Sleep and Idle modes to allow the CPU to
prepare for execution. Instruction execution resumes
on the first clock cycle following this delay.
EXIT DELAY ON WAKE-UP BY RESET FROM SLEEP MODE OR ANY IDLE MODE
(BY CLOCK SOURCES)
Microcontroller Clock Source
Before Wake-up
After Wake-up
Primary Device Clock
(PRI_IDLE mode)
XTPLL, HSPLL
Exit Delay
Clock Ready Status
Bit (OSCCON)
None
OSTS
XT, HS
EC
INTRC(1)
T1OSC or INTRC(1)
INTRC(1)
None
(Sleep mode)
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
XT, HS
TOST(3)
XTPLL, HSPLL
TOST + trc(3)
EC
TCSD(2)
INTRC(1)
TIOBST(4)
XT, HS
TOST(3)
XTPLL, HSPLL
TOST + trc(3)
EC
TCSD(2)
INTRC(1)
None
XT, HS
TOST(3)
XTPLL, HSPLL
TOST + trc(3)
EC
TCSD(2)
INTRC(1)
TIOBST(4)
OSTS
OSTS
OSTS
In this instance, refers specifically to the 31 kHz INTRC clock source.
TCSD (parameter 38, Table 21-10) is a required delay when waking from Sleep and all Idle modes and runs
concurrently with any other required delays (see Section 3.4 “Idle Modes”).
TOST is the Oscillator Start-up Timer period (parameter 32, Table 21-10). trc is the PLL lock time-out
(parameter F12, Table 21-7); it is also designated as TPLL.
Execution continues during TIOBST (parameter 39, Table 21-10), the INTRC stabilization period.
DS39760A-page 40
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
4.0
RESET
A simplified block diagram of the on-chip Reset circuit
is shown in Figure 4-1.
The PIC18F2450/4450 devices differentiate between
various kinds of Reset:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
Power-on Reset (POR)
MCLR Reset during normal operation
MCLR Reset during power-managed modes
Watchdog Timer (WDT) Reset (during
execution)
Programmable Brown-out Reset (BOR)
RESET Instruction
Stack Full Reset
Stack Underflow Reset
This section discusses Resets generated by MCLR,
POR and BOR and covers the operation of the various
start-up timers. Stack Reset events are covered in
Section 5.1.2.4 “Stack Full and Underflow Resets”.
WDT Resets are covered in Section 18.2 “Watchdog
Timer (WDT)”.
FIGURE 4-1:
4.1
RCON Register
Device Reset events are tracked through the RCON
register (Register 4-1). The lower five bits of the
register indicate that a specific Reset event has
occurred. In most cases, these bits can only be cleared
by the event and must be set by the application after
the event. The state of these flag bits, taken together,
can be read to indicate the type of Reset that just
occurred. This is described in more detail in
Section 4.6 “Reset State of Registers”.
The RCON register also has control bits for setting
interrupt priority (IPEN) and software control of the
BOR (SBOREN). Interrupt priority is discussed in
Section 8.0 “Interrupts”. BOR is covered in
Section 4.4 “Brown-out Reset (BOR)”.
SIMPLIFIED BLOCK DIAGRAM OF ON-CHIP RESET CIRCUIT
RESET Instruction
Stack Full/Underflow Reset
Stack
Pointer
External Reset
MCLR
MCLRE
( )_IDLE
Sleep
WDT
Time-out
VDD Rise
Detect
POR Pulse
VDD
Brown-out
Reset
S
BOREN
OST/PWRT
OST
1024 Cycles
10-bit Ripple Counter
OSC1
32 μs
INTRC(1)
PWRT
Chip_Reset
R
Q
65.5 ms
11-bit Ripple Counter
Enable PWRT
Enable OST(2)
Note 1:
2:
This is the INTRC source from the internal oscillator and is separate from the RC oscillator of the CLKI pin.
See Table 4-2 for time-out situations.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 41
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 4-1:
RCON: RESET CONTROL REGISTER
R/W-0
R/W-1(1)
U-0
R/W-1
R-1
R-1
R/W-0(2)
R/W-0
IPEN
SBOREN
—
RI
TO
PD
POR
BOR
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
IPEN: Interrupt Priority Enable bit
1 = Enable priority levels on interrupts
0 = Disable priority levels on interrupts (PIC16CXXX Compatibility mode)
bit 6
SBOREN: BOR Software Enable bit(1)
If BOREN1:BOREN0 = 01:
1 = BOR is enabled
0 = BOR is disabled
If BOREN1:BOREN0 = 00, 10 or 11:
Bit is disabled and read as ‘0’.
bit 5
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 4
RI: RESET Instruction Flag bit
1 = The RESET instruction was not executed (set by firmware only)
0 = The RESET instruction was executed causing a device Reset (must be set in software after a
Brown-out Reset occurs)
bit 3
TO: Watchdog Time-out Flag bit
1 = Set by power-up, CLRWDT instruction or SLEEP instruction
0 = A WDT time-out occurred
bit 2
PD: Power-Down Detection Flag bit
1 = Set by power-up or by the CLRWDT instruction
0 = Set by execution of the SLEEP instruction
bit 1
POR: Power-on Reset Status bit(2)
1 = A Power-on Reset has not occurred (set by firmware only)
0 = A Power-on Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Power-on Reset occurs)
bit 0
BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit
1 = A Brown-out Reset has not occurred (set by firmware only)
0 = A Brown-out Reset occurred (must be set in software after a Brown-out Reset occurs)
Note 1:
2:
If SBOREN is enabled, its Reset state is ‘1’; otherwise, it is ‘0’.
The actual Reset value of POR is determined by the type of device Reset. See the notes following this
register and Section 4.6 “Reset State of Registers” for additional information.
Note 1: It is recommended that the POR bit be set after a Power-on Reset has been detected so that subsequent
Power-on Resets may be detected.
2: Brown-out Reset is said to have occurred when BOR is ‘0’ and POR is ‘1’ (assuming that POR was set to
‘1’ by software immediately after POR).
DS39760A-page 42
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
4.2
Master Clear Reset (MCLR)
The MCLR pin provides a method for triggering an
external Reset of the device. A Reset is generated by
holding the pin low. These devices have a noise filter in
the MCLR Reset path which detects and ignores small
pulses.
FIGURE 4-2:
In PIC18F2450/4450 devices, the MCLR input can be
disabled with the MCLRE Configuration bit. When
MCLR is disabled, the pin becomes a digital input. See
Section 9.5 “PORTE, TRISE and LATE Registers”
for more information.
4.3
D
To take advantage of the POR circuitry, tie the MCLR pin
through a resistor (1 kΩ to 10 kΩ) to VDD. This will
eliminate external RC components usually needed to
create a Power-on Reset delay. A minimum rise rate for
VDD is specified (parameter D004, Section267 “DC
Characteristics”). For a slow rise time, see Figure 4-2.
R
R1
MCLR
C
PIC18FXXXX
Note 1:
External Power-on Reset circuit is required
only if the VDD power-up slope is too slow.
The diode D helps discharge the capacitor
quickly when VDD powers down.
2:
R < 40 kΩ is recommended to make sure that
the voltage drop across R does not violate
the device’s electrical specification.
3:
R1 ≥ 1 kΩ will limit any current flowing into
MCLR from external capacitor C, in the event
of MCLR/VPP pin breakdown, due to Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) or Electrical
Overstress (EOS).
Power-on Reset (POR)
A Power-on Reset pulse is generated on-chip
whenever VDD rises above a certain threshold. This
allows the device to start in the initialized state when
VDD is adequate for operation.
VDD
VDD
The MCLR pin is not driven low by any internal Resets,
including the WDT.
EXTERNAL POWER-ON
RESET CIRCUIT (FOR
SLOW VDD POWER-UP)
When the device starts normal operation (i.e., exits the
Reset condition), device operating parameters (voltage, frequency, temperature, etc.) must be met to
ensure operation. If these conditions are not met, the
device must be held in Reset until the operating
conditions are met.
POR events are captured by the POR bit (RCON<1>).
The state of the bit is set to ‘0’ whenever a POR occurs;
it does not change for any other Reset event. POR is
not reset to ‘1’ by any hardware event. To capture
multiple events, the user manually resets the bit to ‘1’
in software following any POR.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 43
PIC18F2450/4450
4.4
Brown-out Reset (BOR)
PIC18F2450/4450 devices implement a BOR circuit
that provides the user with a number of configuration
and power-saving options. The BOR is controlled by
the
BORV1:BORV0
and
BOREN1:BOREN0
Configuration bits. There are a total of four BOR
configurations which are summarized in Table 4-1.
The BOR threshold is set by the BORV1:BORV0 bits. If
BOR is enabled (any values of BOREN1:BOREN0
except ‘00’), any drop of VDD below VBOR (parameter
D005, Section 267 “DC Characteristics: Supply
Voltage”) for greater than TBOR (parameter 35,
Table 21-10) will reset the device. A Reset may or may
not occur if VDD falls below VBOR for less than TBOR.
The chip will remain in Brown-out Reset until VDD rises
above VBOR.
If the Power-up Timer is enabled, it will be invoked after
VDD rises above VBOR; it then will keep the chip in
Reset for an additional time delay, TPWRT
(parameter 33, Table 21-10). If VDD drops below VBOR
while the Power-up Timer is running, the chip will go
back into a Brown-out Reset and the Power-up Timer
will be initialized. Once VDD rises above VBOR, the
Power-up Timer will execute the additional time delay.
BOR and the Power-on Timer (PWRT) are
independently configured. Enabling BOR Reset does
not automatically enable the PWRT.
4.4.1
SOFTWARE ENABLED BOR
When BOREN1:BOREN0 = 01, the BOR can be
enabled or disabled by the user in software. This is
done with the control bit, SBOREN (RCON<6>).
Setting SBOREN enables the BOR to function as
previously described. Clearing SBOREN disables the
BOR entirely. The SBOREN bit operates only in this
mode; otherwise, it is read as ‘0’.
TABLE 4-1:
Placing the BOR under software control gives the user
the additional flexibility of tailoring the application to its
environment without having to reprogram the device to
change BOR configuration. It also allows the user to
tailor device power consumption in software by eliminating the incremental current that the BOR consumes.
While the BOR current is typically very small, it may have
some impact in low-power applications.
Note:
Even when BOR is under software control,
the BOR Reset voltage level is still set by
the BORV1:BORV0 Configuration bits. It
cannot be changed in software.
4.4.2
DETECTING BOR
When BOR is enabled, the BOR bit always resets to ‘0’
on any BOR or POR event. This makes it difficult to
determine if a BOR event has occurred just by reading
the state of BOR alone. A more reliable method is to
simultaneously check the state of both POR and BOR.
This assumes that the POR bit is reset to ‘1’ in software
immediately after any POR event. IF BOR is ‘0’ while
POR is ‘1’, it can be reliably assumed that a BOR event
has occurred.
4.4.3
DISABLING BOR IN SLEEP MODE
When BOREN1:BOREN0 = 10, the BOR remains
under hardware control and operates as previously
described. Whenever the device enters Sleep mode,
however, the BOR is automatically disabled. When the
device returns to any other operating mode, BOR is
automatically re-enabled.
This mode allows for applications to recover from
brown-out situations, while actively executing code,
when the device requires BOR protection the most. At
the same time, it saves additional power in Sleep mode
by eliminating the small incremental BOR current.
BOR CONFIGURATIONS
BOR Configuration
BOREN1
BOREN0
Status of
SBOREN
(RCON<6>)
0
0
Unavailable
0
1
Available
1
0
Unavailable
BOR enabled in hardware in Run and Idle modes, disabled during
Sleep mode.
1
1
Unavailable
BOR enabled in hardware; must be disabled by reprogramming the
Configuration bits.
DS39760A-page 44
BOR Operation
BOR disabled; must be enabled by reprogramming the Configuration bits.
BOR enabled in software; operation controlled by SBOREN.
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
4.5
4.5.3
Device Reset Timers
PIC18F2450/4450 devices incorporate three separate
on-chip timers that help regulate the Power-on Reset
process. Their main function is to ensure that the
device clock is stable before code is executed. These
timers are:
• Power-up Timer (PWRT)
• Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST)
• PLL Lock Time-out
4.5.1
With the PLL enabled in its PLL mode, the time-out
sequence following a Power-on Reset is slightly different from other oscillator modes. A separate timer is
used to provide a fixed time-out that is sufficient for the
PLL to lock to the main oscillator frequency. This PLL
lock time-out (TPLL) is typically 2 ms and follows the
oscillator start-up time-out.
4.5.4
TIME-OUT SEQUENCE
On power-up, the time-out sequence is as follows:
POWER-UP TIMER (PWRT)
The Power-up Timer (PWRT) of the PIC18F2450/4450
devices is an 11-bit counter which uses the INTRC
source as the clock input. This yields an approximate
time interval of 2048 x 32 μs = 65.6 ms. While the
PWRT is counting, the device is held in Reset.
The power-up time delay depends on the INTRC clock
and will vary from chip to chip due to temperature and
process variation. See DC parameter 33 (Table 21-10)
for details.
The PWRT is enabled by clearing the PWRTEN
Configuration bit.
4.5.2
PLL LOCK TIME-OUT
OSCILLATOR START-UP
TIMER (OST)
The Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) provides a
1024 oscillator cycle (from OSC1 input) delay after the
PWRT delay is over (parameter 33, Table 21-10). This
ensures that the crystal oscillator or resonator has
started and stabilized.
1.
2.
After the POR condition has cleared, PWRT
time-out is invoked (if enabled).
Then, the OST is activated.
The total time-out will vary based on oscillator configuration and the status of the PWRT. Figure 4-3,
Figure 4-4, Figure 4-5, Figure 4-6 and Figure 4-7 all
depict time-out sequences on power-up, with the
Power-up Timer enabled and the device operating in
HS Oscillator mode. Figure 4-3 through Figure 4-6 also
apply to devices operating in XT mode. For devices in
RC mode and with the PWRT disabled, on the other
hand, there will be no time-out at all.
Since the time-outs occur from the POR pulse, if MCLR
is kept low long enough, all time-outs will expire.
Bringing MCLR high will begin execution immediately
(Figure 4-5). This is useful for testing purposes or to
synchronize more than one PIC18FXXXX device
operating in parallel.
The OST time-out is invoked only for XT, HS and
HSPLL modes and only on Power-on Reset or on exit
from most power-managed modes.
TABLE 4-2:
TIME-OUT IN VARIOUS SITUATIONS
Power-up(2) and Brown-out
Oscillator
Configuration
PWRTEN = 0
1024 TOSC
1024 TOSC
66 ms(1) + 1024 TOSC + 2 ms(2)
1024 TOSC + 2 ms(2)
1024 TOSC + 2 ms(2)
66 ms(1)
—
—
66 ms(1) + 2 ms(2)
2 ms(2)
2 ms(2)
EC, ECIO
ECPLL, ECPIO
66 ms(1)
INTIO, INTCKO
INTHS, INTXT
Note 1:
2:
Exit from
Power-Managed Mode
66 ms(1) + 1024 TOSC
HS, XT
HSPLL, XTPLL
PWRTEN = 1
66
ms(1)
+ 1024 TOSC
—
—
1024 TOSC
1024 TOSC
66 ms (65.5 ms) is the nominal Power-up Timer (PWRT) delay.
2 ms is the nominal time required for the PLL to lock.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 45
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 4-3:
TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR TIED TO VDD, VDD RISE < TPWRT)
VDD
MCLR
INTERNAL POR
TPWRT
PWRT TIME-OUT
TOST
OST TIME-OUT
INTERNAL RESET
TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 1
FIGURE 4-4:
VDD
MCLR
INTERNAL POR
TPWRT
PWRT TIME-OUT
TOST
OST TIME-OUT
INTERNAL RESET
FIGURE 4-5:
TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POWER-UP (MCLR NOT TIED TO VDD): CASE 2
VDD
MCLR
INTERNAL POR
TPWRT
PWRT TIME-OUT
TOST
OST TIME-OUT
INTERNAL RESET
DS39760A-page 46
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 4-6:
SLOW RISE TIME (MCLR TIED TO VDD, VDD RISE > TPWRT)
5V
VDD
1V
0V
MCLR
INTERNAL POR
TPWRT
PWRT TIME-OUT
TOST
OST TIME-OUT
INTERNAL RESET
TIME-OUT SEQUENCE ON POR w/PLL ENABLED (MCLR TIED TO VDD)
FIGURE 4-7:
VDD
MCLR
INTERNAL POR
TPWRT
PWRT TIME-OUT
TOST
TPLL
OST TIME-OUT
PLL TIME-OUT
INTERNAL RESET
Note:
TOST = 1024 clock cycles.
TPLL ≈ 2 ms max. First three stages of the Power-up Timer.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 47
PIC18F2450/4450
4.6
Reset State of Registers
POR and BOR, are set or cleared differently in different
Reset situations as indicated in Table 4-3. These bits
are used in software to determine the nature of the
Reset.
Most registers are unaffected by a Reset. Their status
is unknown on POR and unchanged by all other
Resets. The other registers are forced to a “Reset
state” depending on the type of Reset that occurred.
Table 4-4 describes the Reset states for all of the
Special Function Registers. These are categorized by
Power-on and Brown-out Resets, Master Clear and
WDT Resets and WDT wake-ups.
Most registers are not affected by a WDT wake-up,
since this is viewed as the resumption of normal operation. Status bits from the RCON register, RI, TO, PD,
TABLE 4-3:
STATUS BITS, THEIR SIGNIFICANCE AND THE INITIALIZATION CONDITION
FOR RCON REGISTER
Condition
Program
Counter
RCON Register
SBOREN
RI
TO
PD
STKPTR Register
POR BOR STKFUL STKUNF
Power-on Reset
0000h
1
1
1
1
0
0
0
0
RESET Instruction
0000h
u(2)
0
u
u
u
u
u
u
Brown-out
0000h
u
(2)
1
1
1
u
0
u
u
MCLR during Power-Managed
Run modes
0000h
u(2)
u
1
u
u
u
u
u
MCLR during Power-Managed
Idle modes and Sleep mode
0000h
u(2)
u
1
0
u
u
u
u
WDT Time-out during Full Power or
Power-Managed Run modes
0000h
u(2)
u
0
u
u
u
u
u
MCLR during Full Power Execution
0000h
u(2)
u
u
u
u
u
u
u
Stack Full Reset (STVREN = 1)
0000h
u(2)
u
u
u
u
u
1
u
Stack Underflow Reset
(STVREN = 1)
0000h
u
(2)
u
u
u
u
u
u
1
Stack Underflow Error (not an actual
Reset, STVREN = 0)
0000h
u(2)
u
u
u
u
u
u
1
WDT Time-out during Power-Managed
Idle or Sleep modes
PC + 2
u(2)
u
0
0
u
u
u
u
PC + 2(1)
u(2)
u
u
0
u
u
u
u
Interrupt Exit from
Power-Managed modes
Legend: u = unchanged
Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEH or GIEL bits are set, the PC is loaded with the
interrupt vector (008h or 0018h).
2: Reset state is ‘1’ for POR and unchanged for all other Resets when software BOR is enabled
(BOREN1:BOREN0 Configuration bits = 01 and SBOREN = 1); otherwise, the Reset state is ‘0’.
DS39760A-page 48
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 4-4:
Register
INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS
Applicable Devices
Power-on Reset,
Brown-out Reset
MCLR Resets,
WDT Reset,
RESET Instruction,
Stack Resets
Wake-up via WDT
or Interrupt
TOSU
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---0 uuuu(1)
TOSH
2450
4450
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu(1)
TOSL
2450
4450
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu(1)
STKPTR
2450
4450
00-0 0000
uu-0 0000
uu-u uuuu(1)
PCLATU
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
PCLATH
2450
4450
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PCL
2450
4450
0000 0000
0000 0000
PC + 2(3)
TBLPTRU
2450
4450
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
TBLPTRH
2450
4450
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TBLPTRL
2450
4450
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TABLAT
2450
4450
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PRODH
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
PRODL
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
INTCON
2450
4450
0000 000x
0000 000u
uuuu uuuu(2)
INTCON2
2450
4450
1111 -1-1
1111 -1-1
uuuu -u-u(2)
INTCON3
2450
4450
11-0 0-00
11-0 0-00
uu-u u-uu(2)
INDF0
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
POSTINC0
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
POSTDEC0
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
PREINC0
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
PLUSW0
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
FSR0H
2450
4450
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
FSR0L
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
WREG
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
INDF1
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
POSTINC1
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
POSTDEC1
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
PREINC1
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
PLUSW1
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
FSR1H
2450
4450
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
FSR1L
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
BSR
2450
4450
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition.
Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device.
Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are
updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the
hardware stack.
2: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up).
3: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the
interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h).
4: See Table 4-3 for Reset value for specific condition.
5: PORTA<6>, LATA<6> and TRISA<6> are enabled depending on the oscillator mode selected. When not
enabled as PORTA pins, they are disabled and read ‘0’.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 49
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 4-4:
Register
INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED)
Applicable Devices
Power-on Reset,
Brown-out Reset
MCLR Resets,
WDT Reset,
RESET Instruction,
Stack Resets
Wake-up via WDT
or Interrupt
INDF2
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
POSTINC2
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
POSTDEC2
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
PREINC2
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
PLUSW2
2450
4450
N/A
N/A
N/A
FSR2H
2450
4450
---- 0000
---- 0000
---- uuuu
FSR2L
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
STATUS
2450
4450
---x xxxx
---u uuuu
---u uuuu
TMR0H
2450
4450
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TMR0L
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
T0CON
2450
4450
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
OSCCON
2450
4450
0--- q-00
0--- 0-q0
u--- u-qu
u-uu uuuu
HLVDCON
2450
4450
0-00 0101
0-00 0101
WDTCON
2450
4450
---- ---0
---- ---0
---- ---u
RCON
2450
4450
0q-1 11q0
0q-q qquu
uq-u qquu
TMR1H
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
TMR1L
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
T1CON
2450
4450
0000 0000
u0uu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
TMR2
2450
4450
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
PR2
2450
4450
1111 1111
1111 1111
1111 1111
T2CON
2450
4450
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
ADRESH
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
(4)
ADRESL
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
ADCON0
2450
4450
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
ADCON1
2450
4450
--00 qqqq
--00 qqqq
--uu uuuu
ADCON2
2450
4450
0-00 0000
0-00 0000
u-uu uuuu
CCPR1H
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
CCPR1L
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
CCP1CON
2450
4450
--00 0000
--00 0000
--uu uuuu
SPBRG
2450
4450
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
RCREG
2450
4450
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
TXREG
2450
4450
0000 0000
0000 0000
uuuu uuuu
Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition.
Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device.
Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are
updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the
hardware stack.
2: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up).
3: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the
interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h).
4: See Table 4-3 for Reset value for specific condition.
5: PORTA<6>, LATA<6> and TRISA<6> are enabled depending on the oscillator mode selected. When not
enabled as PORTA pins, they are disabled and read ‘0’.
DS39760A-page 50
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 4-4:
Register
INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED)
Applicable Devices
Power-on Reset,
Brown-out Reset
MCLR Resets,
WDT Reset,
RESET Instruction,
Stack Resets
Wake-up via WDT
or Interrupt
TXSTA
2450
4450
0000 0010
0000 0010
uuuu uuuu
RCSTA
2450
4450
0000 000x
0000 000x
uuuu uuuu
EECON2
2450
4450
0000 0000
0000 0000
0000 0000
EECON1
2450
4450
-x-0 x00-
-u-0 u00-
-u-0 u00-
IPIR2
2450
4450
1-1- -1--
1-1- -1--
u-u- -u--
PIR2
2450
4450
0-0- -0--
0-0- -0--
u-u- -u--(2)
PIE2
2450
4450
0-0- -0--
0-0- -0--
u-u- -u--
IPR1
2450
4450
-111 -111
-111 -111
-uuu -uuu
PIR1
2450
4450
-000 -000
-000 -000
-uuu -uuu(2)
PIE1
2450
4450
-000 -000
-000 -000
-uuu -uuu
TRISE
2450
4450
---- -111
---- -111
uuuu -uuu
TRISD
2450
4450
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
TRISC
2450
4450
11-- -111
11-- -111
uu-- -uuu
TRISB
2450
4450
1111 1111
1111 1111
uuuu uuuu
TRISA
2450
4450
-111 1111(5)
-111 1111(5)
-uuu uuuu(5)
LATE
2450
4450
---- -xxx
---- -uuu
---- -uuu
LATD
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
LATC
2450
4450
xx-- -xxx
uu-- -uuu
uu-- -uuu
(5)
LATB
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
LATA(5)
2450
4450
-xxx xxxx(5)
-uuu uuuu(5)
-uuu uuuu(5)
PORTE
2450
4450
---- x000
---- x000
---- uuuu
PORTD
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
PORTC
2450
4450
xxxx -xxx
uuuu -uuu
uuuu -uuu
PORTB
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
uuuu uuuu
(5)
0000(5)
0000(5)
-uuu uuuu(5)
PORTA
2450
4450
-x0x
UEP15
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UEP14
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UEP13
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UEP12
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UEP11
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
-u0u
UEP10
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UEP9
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition.
Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device.
Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are
updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the
hardware stack.
2: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up).
3: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the
interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h).
4: See Table 4-3 for Reset value for specific condition.
5: PORTA<6>, LATA<6> and TRISA<6> are enabled depending on the oscillator mode selected. When not
enabled as PORTA pins, they are disabled and read ‘0’.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 51
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 4-4:
Register
INITIALIZATION CONDITIONS FOR ALL REGISTERS (CONTINUED)
Applicable Devices
Power-on Reset,
Brown-out Reset
MCLR Resets,
WDT Reset,
RESET Instruction,
Stack Resets
Wake-up via WDT
or Interrupt
UEP8
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UEP7
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UEP6
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UEP5
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UEP4
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UEP3
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UEP2
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UEP1
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UEP0
2450
4450
---0 0000
---0 0000
---u uuuu
UCFG
2450
4450
00-0 0000
00-0 0000
uu-u uuuu
UADDR
2450
4450
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
UCON
2450
4450
-0x0 000-
-0x0 000-
-uuu uuu-
USTAT
2450
4450
-xxx xxx-
-xxx xxx-
-uuu uuu-
UEIE
2450
4450
0--0 0000
0--0 0000
u--u uuuu
UEIR
2450
4450
0--0 0000
0--0 0000
u--u uuuu
UIE
2450
4450
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
UIR
2450
4450
-000 0000
-000 0000
-uuu uuuu
UFRMH
2450
4450
---- -xxx
---- -xxx
---- -uuu
UFRML
2450
4450
xxxx xxxx
xxxx xxxx
uuuu uuuu
Legend: u = unchanged, x = unknown, - = unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’, q = value depends on condition.
Shaded cells indicate conditions do not apply for the designated device.
Note 1: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the TOSU, TOSH and TOSL are
updated with the current value of the PC. The STKPTR is modified to point to the next location in the
hardware stack.
2: One or more bits in the INTCONx or PIRx registers will be affected (to cause wake-up).
3: When the wake-up is due to an interrupt and the GIEL or GIEH bit is set, the PC is loaded with the
interrupt vector (0008h or 0018h).
4: See Table 4-3 for Reset value for specific condition.
5: PORTA<6>, LATA<6> and TRISA<6> are enabled depending on the oscillator mode selected. When not
enabled as PORTA pins, they are disabled and read ‘0’.
DS39760A-page 52
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
5.0
MEMORY ORGANIZATION
5.1
Program Memory Organization
PIC18 microcontrollers implement a 21-bit program
counter which is capable of addressing a 2-Mbyte
program memory space. Accessing a location between
the upper boundary of the physically implemented
memory and the 2-Mbyte address will return all ‘0’s (a
NOP instruction).
There are two types of memory in PIC18F2450/4450
microcontroller devices:
• Program Memory
• Data RAM
As Harvard architecture devices, the data and program
memories use separate busses; this allows for
concurrent access of the two memory spaces.
The PIC18F2450 and PIC18F4450 each have 16 Kbytes
of Flash memory and can store up to 8192 single-word
instructions.
Additional detailed information on the operation of the
Flash program memory is provided in Section 6.0
“Flash Program Memory”.
PIC18 devices have two interrupt vectors. The Reset
vector address is at 0000h and the interrupt vector
addresses are at 0008h and 0018h.
The program memory maps for PIC18F2450 and
PIC18F4450 devices are shown in Figure 5-1.
FIGURE 5-1:
PROGRAM MEMORY MAP AND STACK FOR PIC18F2450/4450 DEVICES
PIC18F2450/4450
PC<20:0>
CALL, RCALL, RETURN,
RETFIE, RETLW, CALLW,
ADDULNK, SUBULNK
21
Stack Level 1
•
•
•
Stack Level 31
Reset Vector
0000h
High Priority Interrupt Vector 0008h
Low Priority Interrupt Vector 0018h
3FFFh
4000h
User Memory Space
On-Chip
Program Memory
Read ‘0’
1FFFFFh
200000h
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 53
PIC18F2450/4450
5.1.1
PROGRAM COUNTER
The Program Counter (PC) specifies the address of the
instruction to fetch for execution. The PC is 21 bits wide
and is contained in three separate 8-bit registers. The
low byte, known as the PCL register, is both readable
and writable. The high byte, or PCH register, contains
the PC<15:8> bits; it is not directly readable or writable.
Updates to the PCH register are performed through the
PCLATH register. The upper byte is called PCU. This
register contains the PC<20:16> bits; it is also not
directly readable or writable. Updates to the PCU
register are performed through the PCLATU register.
The contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are transferred
to the program counter by any operation that writes
PCL. Similarly, the upper two bytes of the program
counter are transferred to PCLATH and PCLATU by an
operation that reads PCL. This is useful for computed
offsets to the PC (see Section 5.1.4.1 “Computed
GOTO”).
The PC addresses bytes in the program memory. To
prevent the PC from becoming misaligned with word
instructions, the Least Significant bit of PCL is fixed to
a value of ‘0’. The PC increments by 2 to address
sequential instructions in the program memory.
The CALL, RCALL and GOTO program branch
instructions write to the program counter directly. For
these instructions, the contents of PCLATH and
PCLATU are not transferred to the program counter.
5.1.2
RETURN ADDRESS STACK
The return address stack allows any combination of up
to 31 program calls and interrupts to occur. The PC is
pushed onto the stack when a CALL or RCALL
instruction is executed or an interrupt is Acknowledged.
The PC value is pulled off the stack on a RETURN,
RETLW or a RETFIE instruction. PCLATU and PCLATH
are not affected by any of the RETURN or CALL
instructions.
FIGURE 5-2:
The stack operates as a 31-word by 21-bit RAM and a
5-bit Stack Pointer, STKPTR. The stack space is not
part of either program or data space. The Stack Pointer
is readable and writable and the address on the top of
the stack is readable and writable through the Top-ofStack Special Function Registers. Data can also be
pushed to, or popped from the stack, using these
registers.
A CALL type instruction causes a push onto the stack.
The Stack Pointer is first incremented and the location
pointed to by the Stack Pointer is written with the
contents of the PC (already pointing to the instruction
following the CALL). A RETURN type instruction causes
a pop from the stack. The contents of the location
pointed to by the STKPTR are transferred to the PC
and then the Stack Pointer is decremented.
The Stack Pointer is initialized to ‘00000’ after all
Resets. There is no RAM associated with the location
corresponding to a Stack Pointer value of ‘00000’; this
is only a Reset value. Status bits indicate if the stack is
full, has overflowed or has underflowed.
5.1.2.1
Top-of-Stack Access
Only the top of the return address stack (TOS) is
readable and writable. A set of three registers,
TOSU:TOSH:TOSL, hold the contents of the stack location pointed to by the STKPTR register (Figure 5-2). This
allows users to implement a software stack if necessary.
After a CALL, RCALL or interrupt, the software can read
the pushed value by reading the TOSU:TOSH:TOSL
registers. These values can be placed on a user-defined
software stack. At return time, the software can return
these values to TOSU:TOSH:TOSL and do a return.
The user must disable the global interrupt enable bits
while accessing the stack to prevent inadvertent stack
corruption.
RETURN ADDRESS STACK AND ASSOCIATED REGISTERS
Return Address Stack<20:0>
11111
11110
11101
Top-of-Stack Registers
TOSU
00h
TOSH
1Ah
DS39760A-page 54
STKPTR<4:0>
00010
TOSL
34h
Top-of-Stack
Stack Pointer
001A34h
000D58h
00011
00010
00001
00000
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
5.1.2.2
Return Stack Pointer (STKPTR)
When the stack has been popped enough times to
unload the stack, the next pop will return a value of zero
to the PC and sets the STKUNF bit, while the Stack
Pointer remains at zero. The STKUNF bit will remain
set until cleared by software or until a POR occurs.
The STKPTR register (Register 5-1) contains the Stack
Pointer value, the STKFUL (Stack Full) status bit and
the STKUNF (Stack Underflow) status bit. The value of
the Stack Pointer can be 0 through 31. The Stack
Pointer increments before values are pushed onto the
stack and decrements after values are popped off the
stack. On Reset, the Stack Pointer value will be zero.
The user may read and write the Stack Pointer value.
This feature can be used by a Real-Time Operating
System (RTOS) for return stack maintenance.
Note:
After the PC is pushed onto the stack 31 times (without
popping any values off the stack), the STKFUL bit is
set. The STKFUL bit is cleared by software or by a
POR.
5.1.2.3
PUSH and POP Instructions
Since the Top-of-Stack is readable and writable, the
ability to push values onto the stack and pull values off
the stack, without disturbing normal program execution, is a desirable feature. The PIC18 instruction set
includes two instructions, PUSH and POP, that permit
the TOS to be manipulated under software control.
TOSU, TOSH and TOSL can be modified to place data
or a return address on the stack.
The action that takes place when the stack becomes
full depends on the state of the STVREN (Stack
Overflow Reset Enable) Configuration bit. (Refer to
Section 18.1 “Configuration Bits” for a description of
the device Configuration bits.) If STVREN is set
(default), the 31st push will push the (PC + 2) value
onto the stack, set the STKFUL bit and reset the
device. The STKFUL bit will remain set and the Stack
Pointer will be set to zero.
The PUSH instruction places the current PC value onto
the stack. This increments the Stack Pointer and loads
the current PC value onto the stack.
If STVREN is cleared, the STKFUL bit will be set on the
31st push and the Stack Pointer will increment to 31.
Any additional pushes will not overwrite the 31st push
and the STKPTR will remain at 31.
REGISTER 5-1:
Returning a value of zero to the PC on an
underflow has the effect of vectoring the
program to the Reset vector, where the
stack conditions can be verified and
appropriate actions can be taken. This is
not the same as a Reset, as the contents
of the SFRs are not affected.
The POP instruction discards the current TOS by
decrementing the Stack Pointer. The previous value
pushed onto the stack then becomes the TOS value.
STKPTR: STACK POINTER REGISTER
R/C-0
R/C-0
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
STKFUL(1)
STKUNF(1)
—
SP4
SP3
SP2
SP1
SP0
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
C = Clearable bit
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7
STKFUL: Stack Full Flag bit(1)
1 = Stack became full or overflowed
0 = Stack has not become full or overflowed
bit 6
STKUNF: Stack Underflow Flag bit(1)
1 = Stack underflow occurred
0 = Stack underflow did not occur
bit 5
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 4-0
SP4:SP0: Stack Pointer Location bits
Note 1:
x = Bit is unknown
Bit 7 and bit 6 are cleared by user software or by a POR.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 55
PIC18F2450/4450
5.1.2.4
Stack Full and Underflow Resets
Device Resets on stack overflow and stack underflow
conditions are enabled by setting the STVREN bit in
Configuration Register 4L. When STVREN is set, a full
or underflow condition will set the appropriate STKFUL
or STKUNF bit and then cause a device Reset. When
STVREN is cleared, a full or underflow condition will set
the appropriate STKFUL or STKUNF bit but not cause
a device Reset. The STKFUL or STKUNF bits are
cleared by user software or a Power-on Reset.
5.1.3
FAST REGISTER STACK
A Fast Register Stack is provided for the STATUS,
WREG and BSR registers to provide a “fast return”
option for interrupts. Each stack is only one level deep
and is neither readable nor writable. It is loaded with the
current value of the corresponding register when the
processor vectors for an interrupt. All interrupt sources
will push values into the stack registers. The values in
the registers are then loaded back into their associated
registers if the RETFIE, FAST instruction is used to
return from the interrupt.
5.1.4
LOOK-UP TABLES IN PROGRAM
MEMORY
There may be programming situations that require the
creation of data structures, or look-up tables, in
program memory. For PIC18 devices, look-up tables
can be implemented in two ways:
• Computed GOTO
• Table Reads
5.1.4.1
Computed GOTO
A computed GOTO is accomplished by adding an offset
to the program counter. An example is shown in
Example 5-2.
A look-up table can be formed with an ADDWF PCL
instruction and a group of RETLW nn instructions. The
W register is loaded with an offset into the table before
executing a call to that table. The first instruction of the
called routine is the ADDWF PCL instruction. The next
instruction executed will be one of the RETLW nn
instructions that returns the value ‘nn’ to the calling
function.
If both low and high priority interrupts are enabled, the
stack registers cannot be used reliably to return from
low priority interrupts. If a high priority interrupt occurs
while servicing a low priority interrupt, the stack register
values stored by the low priority interrupt will be
overwritten. In these cases, users must save the key
registers in software during a low priority interrupt.
The offset value (in WREG) specifies the number of
bytes that the program counter should advance and
should be multiples of 2 (LSb = 0).
If interrupt priority is not used, all interrupts may use the
Fast Register Stack for returns from interrupt. If no
interrupts are used, the Fast Register Stack can be
used to restore the STATUS, WREG and BSR registers
at the end of a subroutine call. To use the Fast Register
Stack for a subroutine call, a CALL label, FAST
instruction must be executed to save the STATUS,
WREG and BSR registers to the Fast Register Stack. A
RETURN, FAST instruction is then executed to restore
these registers from the Fast Register Stack.
EXAMPLE 5-2:
Example 5-1 shows a source code example that uses
the Fast Register Stack during a subroutine call and
return.
EXAMPLE 5-1:
CALL
FAST REGISTER STACK
CODE EXAMPLE
SUB1, FAST
;STATUS, WREG, BSR
;SAVED IN FAST REGISTER
;STACK
•
•
SUB1
•
•
RETURN, FAST
DS39760A-page 56
;RESTORE VALUES SAVED
;IN FAST REGISTER STACK
In this method, only one data byte may be stored in
each instruction location and room on the return
address stack is required.
ORG
TABLE
5.1.4.2
MOVF
CALL
nn00h
ADDWF
RETLW
RETLW
RETLW
.
.
.
COMPUTED GOTO USING
AN OFFSET VALUE
OFFSET, W
TABLE
PCL
nnh
nnh
nnh
Table Reads and Table Writes
A better method of storing data in program memory
allows two bytes of data to be stored in each instruction
location.
Look-up table data may be stored two bytes per
program word by using table reads and writes. The
Table Pointer (TBLPTR) register specifies the byte
address and the Table Latch (TABLAT) register
contains the data that is read from or written to program
memory. Data is transferred to or from program
memory one byte at a time.
Table read and table write operations are discussed
further in Section 6.1 “Table Reads and Table
Writes”.
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
5.2
5.2.2
PIC18 Instruction Cycle
5.2.1
An “Instruction Cycle” consists of four Q cycles: Q1
through Q4. The instruction fetch and execute are
pipelined in such a manner that a fetch takes one
instruction cycle, while the decode and execute takes
another instruction cycle. However, due to the
pipelining, each instruction effectively executes in one
cycle. If an instruction causes the program counter to
change (e.g., GOTO), then two cycles are required to
complete the instruction (Example 5-3).
CLOCKING SCHEME
The microcontroller clock input, whether from an
internal or external source, is internally divided by four
to generate four non-overlapping quadrature clocks
(Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4). Internally, the program counter is
incremented on every Q1; the instruction is fetched
from the program memory and latched into the Instruction Register (IR) during Q4. The instruction is decoded
and executed during the following Q1 through Q4. The
clocks and instruction execution flow are shown in
Figure 5-3.
FIGURE 5-3:
INSTRUCTION FLOW/PIPELINING
A fetch cycle begins with the Program Counter (PC)
incrementing in Q1.
In the execution cycle, the fetched instruction is latched
into the Instruction Register (IR) in cycle Q1. This
instruction is then decoded and executed during the
Q2, Q3 and Q4 cycles. Data memory is read during Q2
(operand read) and written during Q4 (destination
write).
CLOCK/INSTRUCTION CYCLE
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q2
Q1
Q3
Q4
Q2
Q1
Q3
Q4
OSC1
Q1
Q2
Internal
Phase
Clock
Q3
Q4
PC
PC
PC + 2
PC + 4
OSC2/CLKO
(RC mode)
Execute INST (PC – 2)
Fetch INST (PC)
EXAMPLE 5-3:
TCY0
TCY1
Fetch 1
Execute 1
2. MOVWF PORTB
4. BSF
Execute INST (PC + 2)
Fetch INST (PC + 4)
INSTRUCTION PIPELINE FLOW
1. MOVLW 55h
3. BRA
Execute INST (PC)
Fetch INST (PC + 2)
SUB_1
PORTA, BIT3 (Forced NOP)
Fetch 2
TCY2
TCY3
TCY5
Execute 2
Fetch 3
Execute 3
Fetch 4
Flush (NOP)
Fetch SUB_1 Execute SUB_1
5. Instruction @ address SUB_1
Note:
TCY4
All instructions are single cycle, except for any program branches. These take two cycles since the fetch
instruction is “flushed” from the pipeline while the new instruction is being fetched and then executed.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 57
PIC18F2450/4450
5.2.3
INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM
MEMORY
The program memory is addressed in bytes.
Instructions are stored as two bytes or four bytes in
program memory. The Least Significant Byte of an
instruction word is always stored in a program memory
location with an even address (LSb = 0). To maintain
alignment with instruction boundaries, the PC
increments in steps of 2 and the LSb will always read
‘0’ (see Section 5.1.1 “Program Counter”).
Figure 5-4 shows an example of how instruction words
are stored in the program memory.
FIGURE 5-4:
The CALL and GOTO instructions have the absolute
program memory address embedded into the
instruction. Since instructions are always stored on word
boundaries, the data contained in the instruction is a
word address. The word address is written to PC<20:1>,
which accesses the desired byte address in program
memory. Instruction #2 in Figure 5-4 shows how the
instruction, GOTO 0006h, is encoded in the program
memory. Program branch instructions, which encode a
relative address offset, operate in the same manner. The
offset value stored in a branch instruction represents the
number of single-word instructions that the PC will be
offset by. Section 19.0 “Instruction Set Summary”
provides further details of the instruction set.
INSTRUCTIONS IN PROGRAM MEMORY
LSB = 1
LSB = 0
0Fh
EFh
F0h
C1h
F4h
55h
03h
00h
23h
56h
Program Memory
Byte Locations →
5.2.4
Instruction 1:
Instruction 2:
MOVLW
GOTO
055h
0006h
Instruction 3:
MOVFF
123h, 456h
TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS
The standard PIC18 instruction set has four two-word
instructions: CALL, MOVFF, GOTO and LSFR. In all
cases, the second word of the instructions always has
‘1111’ as its four Most Significant bits; the other 12 bits
are literal data, usually a data memory address.
The use of ‘1111’ in the 4 MSbs of an instruction
specifies a special form of NOP. If the instruction is
executed in proper sequence, immediately after the
first word, the data in the second word is accessed and
EXAMPLE 5-4:
Word Address
↓
000000h
000002h
000004h
000006h
000008h
00000Ah
00000Ch
00000Eh
000010h
000012h
000014h
used by the instruction sequence. If the first word is
skipped for some reason and the second word is
executed by itself, a NOP is executed instead. This is
necessary for cases when the two-word instruction is
preceded by a conditional instruction that changes the
PC. Example 5-4 shows how this works.
Note:
See Section 5.5 “Program Memory and
the Extended Instruction Set” for
information on two-word instruction in the
extended instruction set.
TWO-WORD INSTRUCTIONS
CASE 1:
Object Code
Source Code
0110 0110 0000 0000
TSTFSZ
REG1
1100 0001 0010 0011
MOVFF
REG1, REG2 ; No, skip this word
ADDWF
REG3
1111 0100 0101 0110
0010 0100 0000 0000
; is RAM location 0?
; Execute this word as a NOP
; continue code
CASE 2:
Object Code
Source Code
0110 0110 0000 0000
TSTFSZ
REG1
1100 0001 0010 0011
MOVFF
REG1, REG2 ; Yes, execute this word
ADDWF
REG3
1111 0100 0101 0110
0010 0100 0000 0000
DS39760A-page 58
; is RAM location 0?
; 2nd word of instruction
; continue code
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
5.3
Note:
Data Memory Organization
The operation of some aspects of data
memory are changed when the PIC18
extended instruction set is enabled. See
Section 5.6 “Data Memory and the
Extended Instruction Set” for more
information.
The data memory in PIC18 devices is implemented as
static RAM. Each register in the data memory has a
12-bit address, allowing up to 4096 bytes of data
memory. The memory space is divided into as many as
16 banks that contain 256 bytes each. PIC18F2450/
4450 devices implement three complete banks, for a
total of 768 bytes. Figure 5-5 shows the data memory
organization for the devices.
The data memory contains Special Function Registers
(SFRs) and General Purpose Registers (GPRs). The
SFRs are used for control and status of the controller
and peripheral functions, while GPRs are used for data
storage and scratchpad operations in the user’s
application. Any read of an unimplemented location will
read as ‘0’s.
The instruction set and architecture allow operations
across all banks. The entire data memory may be
accessed by Direct, Indirect or Indexed Addressing
modes. Addressing modes are discussed later in this
subsection.
To ensure that commonly used registers (SFRs and
select GPRs) can be accessed in a single cycle, PIC18
devices implement an Access Bank. This is a 256-byte
memory space that provides fast access to SFRs and
the lower portion of GPR Bank 0 without using the
BSR. Section 5.3.3 “Access Bank” provides a
detailed description of the Access RAM.
5.3.1
USB RAM
Bank 4 of the data memory is actually mapped to
special dual port RAM. When the USB module is
disabled, the GPRs in these banks are used like any
other GPR in the data memory space.
When the USB module is enabled, the memory in this
bank is allocated as buffer RAM for USB operation.
This area is shared between the microcontroller core
and the USB Serial Interface Engine (SIE) and is used
to transfer data directly between the two.
5.3.2
BANK SELECT REGISTER (BSR)
Large areas of data memory require an efficient
addressing scheme to make rapid access to any
address possible. Ideally, this means that an entire
address does not need to be provided for each read or
write operation. For PIC18 devices, this is
accomplished with a RAM banking scheme. This
divides the memory space into 16 contiguous banks of
256 bytes. Depending on the instruction, each location
can be addressed directly by its full 12-bit address, or
an 8-bit low-order address and a 4-bit Bank Pointer.
Most instructions in the PIC18 instruction set make use
of the Bank Pointer, known as the Bank Select Register
(BSR). This SFR holds the 4 Most Significant bits of a
location’s address; the instruction itself includes the
8 Least Significant bits. Only the four lower bits of the
BSR are implemented (BSR3:BSR0). The upper four
bits are unused; they will always read ‘0’ and cannot be
written to. The BSR can be loaded directly by using the
MOVLB instruction.
The value of the BSR indicates the bank in data
memory. The eight bits in the instruction show the location in the bank and can be thought of as an offset from
the bank’s lower boundary. The relationship between
the BSR’s value and the bank division in data memory
is shown in Figure 5-6.
Since up to 16 registers may share the same low-order
address, the user must always be careful to ensure that
the proper bank is selected before performing a data
read or write. For example, writing what should be
program data to an 8-bit address of F9h, while the BSR
is 0Fh, will end up resetting the program counter.
While any bank can be selected, only those banks that
are actually implemented can be read or written to.
Writes to unimplemented banks are ignored, while
reads from unimplemented banks will return ‘0’s. Even
so, the STATUS register will still be affected as if the
operation was successful. The data memory map in
Figure 5-6 indicates which banks are implemented.
In the core PIC18 instruction set, only the MOVFF
instruction fully specifies the 12-bit address of the
source and target registers. This instruction ignores the
BSR completely when it executes. All other instructions
include only the low-order address as an operand and
must use either the BSR or the Access Bank to locate
their target registers.
It is theoretically possible to use this area of USB RAM
that is not allocated as USB buffers for normal scratchpad memory or other variable storage. In practice, the
dynamic nature of buffer allocation makes this risky at
best. Bank 4 is also used for USB buffer management
when the module is enabled and should not be used for
any other purposes during that time.
Additional information on USB RAM and buffer
operation is provided in Section 14.0 “Universal
Serial Bus (USB)”.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 59
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 5-5:
DATA MEMORY MAP FOR PIC18F2450/4450 DEVICES
BSR<3:0>
= 0000
00h
Access RAM
FFh
00h
GPR
Bank 0
= 0001
= 0011
= 0100
= 0101
FFh
00h
Bank 2
Bank 3
Bank 4
Bank 5
000h
05Fh
060h
0FFh
100h
GPR
Bank 1
= 0010
When a = 0:
Data Memory Map
FFh
00h
FFh
00h
Unused
Read as 00h
Unused
Read as 00h
1FFh
200h
2FFh
300h
The BSR is ignored and the
Access Bank is used.
The first 96 bytes are
general purpose RAM
(from Bank 0).
The remaining 160 bytes are
Special Function Registers
(from Bank 15).
When a = 1:
The BSR specifies the bank
used by the instruction.
3FFh
400h
GPR(1)
4FFh
800h
FFh
00h
Access Bank
Access RAM Low
00h
5Fh
Access RAM High 60h
(SFRs)
FFh
to
Unused
Read as 00h
= 1110
= 1111
Note 1:
Bank 14
FFh
00h
Unused
FFh
SFR
Bank 15
EFFh
F00h
F5Fh
F60h
FFFh
This bank also serve as RAM buffer for USB operation. See Section 5.3.1 “USB RAM” for more
information.
DS39760A-page 60
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 5-6:
USE OF THE BANK SELECT REGISTER (DIRECT ADDRESSING)
0
Data Memory
BSR(1)
7
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
000h
00h
Bank 0
100h
Bank 1
Bank Select(2)
FFh
00h
From Opcode(2)
7
1
1
1
1
1
1
0
1
1
FFh
00h
200h
Bank 2
300h
FFh
00h
Bank 3
through
Bank 13
FFh
00h
E00h
Bank 14
F00h
Bank 15
FFFh
Note 1:
2:
5.3.3
FFh
00h
FFh
The Access RAM bit of the instruction can be used to force an override of the selected bank (BSR<3:0>) to
the registers of the Access Bank.
The MOVFF instruction embeds the entire 12-bit address in the instruction.
ACCESS BANK
While the use of the BSR, with an embedded 8-bit
address, allows users to address the entire range of
data memory, it also means that the user must always
ensure that the correct bank is selected. Otherwise,
data may be read from or written to the wrong location.
This can be disastrous if a GPR is the intended target
of an operation but an SFR is written to instead.
Verifying and/or changing the BSR for each read or
write to data memory can become very inefficient.
To streamline access for the most commonly used data
memory locations, the data memory is configured with
an Access Bank, which allows users to access a
mapped block of memory without specifying a BSR.
The Access Bank consists of the first 96 bytes of
memory (00h-5Fh) in Bank 0 and the last 160 bytes of
memory (60h-FFh) in Block 15. The lower half is known
as the “Access RAM” and is composed of GPRs. The
upper half is where the device’s SFRs are mapped.
These two areas are mapped contiguously in the
Access Bank and can be addressed in a linear fashion
by an 8-bit address (Figure 5-5).
The Access Bank is used by core PIC18 instructions
that include the Access RAM bit (the ‘a’ parameter in
the instruction). When ‘a’ is equal to ‘1’, the instruction
uses the BSR and the 8-bit address included in the
opcode for the data memory address. When ‘a’ is ‘0’,
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
however, the instruction is forced to use the Access
Bank address map; the current value of the BSR is
ignored entirely.
Using this “forced” addressing allows the instruction to
operate on a data address in a single cycle without
updating the BSR first. For 8-bit addresses of 60h and
above, this means that users can evaluate and operate
on SFRs more efficiently. The Access RAM below 60h
is a good place for data values that the user might need
to access rapidly, such as immediate computational
results or common program variables. Access RAM
also allows for faster and more code efficient context
saving and switching of variables.
The mapping of the Access Bank is slightly different
when the extended instruction set is enabled (XINST
Configuration bit = 1). This is discussed in more detail
in Section 5.6.3 “Mapping the Access Bank in
Indexed Literal Offset Mode”.
5.3.4
GENERAL PURPOSE
REGISTER FILE
PIC18 devices may have banked memory in the GPR
area. This is data RAM which is available for use by all
instructions. GPRs start at the bottom of Bank 0
(address 000h) and grow upwards towards the bottom of
the SFR area. GPRs are not initialized by a Power-on
Reset and are unchanged on all other Resets.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 61
PIC18F2450/4450
5.3.5
SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTERS
The Special Function Registers (SFRs) are registers
used by the CPU and peripheral modules for controlling
the desired operation of the device. These registers are
implemented as static RAM in the data memory space.
SFRs start at the top of data memory and extend
downward to occupy the top segment of Bank 15, from
F60h to FFFh. A list of these registers is given in
Table 5-1 and Table 5-2.
peripheral functions. The Reset and interrupt registers
are described in their respective chapters, while the
ALU’s STATUS register is described later in this
section. Registers related to the operation of a
peripheral feature are described in the chapter for that
peripheral.
The SFRs are typically distributed among the
peripherals whose functions they control. Unused SFR
locations are unimplemented and read as ‘0’s.
The SFRs can be classified into two sets: those
associated with the “core” device functionality (ALU,
Resets and interrupts) and those related to the
TABLE 5-1:
Address
SPECIAL FUNCTION REGISTER MAP FOR PIC18F2450/4450 DEVICES
Name
Address
Name
INDF2
Address
(1)
Name
Address
Name
Address
Name
FFFh
TOSU
FDFh
FBFh
CCPR1H
F9Fh
IPR1
F7Fh
UEP15
FFEh
TOSH
FDEh POSTINC2(1)
FBEh
CCPR1L
F9Eh
PIR1
F7Eh
UEP14
FFDh
TOSL
FDDh POSTDEC2(1)
FBDh
CCP1CON
F9Dh
PIE1
F7Dh
UEP13
FFCh
STKPTR
FDCh
PREINC2(1)
FBCh
—(2)
F9Ch
—(2)
F7Ch
UEP12
FFBh
PCLATU
FDBh
PLUSW2(1)
FBBh
—(2)
F9Bh
—(2)
F7Bh
UEP11
FFAh
PCLATH
FDAh
FSR2H
FBAh
—(2)
F9Ah
—(2)
F7Ah
UEP10
FF9h
PCL
FD9h
FSR2L
FB9h
—(2)
F99h
—(2)
F79h
UEP9
FF8h
TBLPTRU
FD8h
STATUS
FB8h
BAUDCON
F98h
—(2)
F78h
UEP8
FF7h
TBLPTRH
FD7h
TMR0H
FB7h
—(2)
F97h
—(2)
F77h
UEP7
FF6h
TBLPTRL
FD6h
TMR0L
FB6h
—(2)
F96h
TRISE(3)
F76h
UEP6
(2)
F95h
(3)
FF5h
TABLAT
FD5h
T0CON
FB5h
—
F75h
UEP5
FF4h
PRODH
FD4h
—(2)
FB4h
—(2)
F94h
TRISD
TRISC
F74h
UEP4
FF3h
PRODL
FD3h
OSCCON
FB3h
—(2)
F93h
TRISB
F73h
UEP3
FF2h
INTCON
FD2h
HLVDCON
FB2h
—(2)
F92h
TRISA
F72h
UEP2
F71h
UEP1
FF1h
INTCON2
FD1h
WDTCON
FB1h
—(2)
F91h
—(2)
FF0h
INTCON3
FD0h
RCON
FB0h
SPBRGH
F90h
—(2)
F70h
UEP0
FEFh
INDF0(1)
FCFh
TMR1H
FAFh
SPBRG
F8Fh
—(2)
F6Fh
UCFG
FCEh
TMR1L
FAEh
RCREG
F8Eh
—(2)
F6Eh
UADDR
FEEh POSTINC0(1)
FEDh POSTDEC0
(1)
FECh
PREINC0(1)
FEBh
PLUSW0(1)
FEAh
FSR0H
FE9h
FSR0L
(3)
FCDh
T1CON
FADh
TXREG
F8Dh
LATE
F6Dh
UCON
FCCh
TMR2
FACh
TXSTA
F8Ch
LATD(3)
F6Ch
USTAT
FCBh
PR2
FABh
RCSTA
F8Bh
LATC
F6Bh
UEIE
FCAh
T2CON
FAAh
—(2)
F8Ah
LATB
F6Ah
UEIR
FC9h
—(2)
FA9h
—(2)
F89h
LATA
F69h
UIE
FA8h
—(2)
F88h
—(2)
F68h
UIR
FE8h
WREG
FC8h
—(2)
FE7h
INDF1(1)
FC7h
—(2)
FA7h
EECON2(1)
F87h
—(2)
F67h
UFRMH
FC6h
—(2)
FA6h
EECON1
F86h
—(2)
F66h
UFRML
FC5h
(2)
—
(2)
F85h
(2)
F65h
—(2)
FA4h
—
(2)
F84h
PORTE
F64h
—(2)
F83h
PORTD(3)
F63h
—(2)
FE6h POSTINC1(1)
FE5h POSTDEC1
(1)
(1)
FA5h
ADRESH
—
FE4h
PREINC1
FE3h
PLUSW1(1)
FC3h
ADRESL
FA3h
—(2)
FE2h
FSR1H
FC2h
ADCON0
FA2h
IPR2
F82h
PORTC
F62h
—(2)
FE1h
FSR1L
FC1h
ADCON1
FA1h
PIR2
F81h
PORTB
F61h
—(2)
FE0h
BSR
FC0h
ADCON2
FA0h
PIE2
F80h
PORTA
F60h
—(2)
Note 1:
2:
3:
FC4h
—
Not a physical register.
Unimplemented registers are read as ‘0’.
These registers are implemented only on 40/44-pin devices.
DS39760A-page 62
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 5-2:
File Name
TOSU
REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F2450/4450)
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
—
—
—
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Top-of-Stack Upper Byte (TOS<20:16>)
Value on
POR, BOR
Details
on page
---0 0000
49, 54
TOSH
Top-of-Stack High Byte (TOS<15:8>)
0000 0000
49, 54
TOSL
Top-of-Stack Low Byte (TOS<7:0>)
0000 0000
49, 54
00-0 0000
49, 55
---0 0000
49, 54
STKPTR
STKFUL
STKUNF
—
PCLATU
—
—
—
SP4
SP3
SP2
SP1
SP0
Holding Register for PC<20:16>
PCLATH
Holding Register for PC<15:8>
0000 0000
49, 54
PCL
PC Low Byte (PC<7:0>)
0000 0000
49, 54
TBLPTRU
—
—
bit 21(1)
--00 0000
49, 76
TBLPTRH
Program Memory Table Pointer High Byte (TBLPTR<15:8>)
Program Memory Table Pointer Upper Byte (TBLPTR<20:16>)
0000 0000
49, 76
TBLPTRL
Program Memory Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTR<7:0>)
0000 0000
49, 76
TABLAT
Program Memory Table Latch
0000 0000
49, 76
PRODH
Product Register High Byte
xxxx xxxx
49, 83
PRODL
Product Register Low Byte
xxxx xxxx
49, 83
INTCON
GIE/GIEH
PEIE/GIEL
TMR0IE
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
0000 000x
49, 87
INTCON2
RBPU
INTEDG0
INTEDG1
INTEDG2
—
TMR0IP
—
RBIP
1111 -1-1
49, 88
INT2IP
INT1IP
—
INT2IE
INT1IE
—
INT2IF
INT1IF
11-0 0-00
49, 89
INTCON3
INDF0
Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 not changed (not a physical register)
N/A
49, 68
POSTINC0
Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-incremented (not a physical register)
N/A
49, 69
POSTDEC0
Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 post-decremented (not a physical register)
N/A
49, 69
PREINC0
Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register)
N/A
49, 69
PLUSW0
Uses contents of FSR0 to address data memory – value of FSR0 pre-incremented (not a physical register) –
value of FSR0 offset by W
N/A
49, 69
FSR0H
---- 0000
49, 68
FSR0L
Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0 Low Byte
—
xxxx xxxx
49, 68
WREG
Working Register
xxxx xxxx
49,
INDF1
Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 not changed (not a physical register)
N/A
49, 68
POSTINC1
Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-incremented (not a physical register)
N/A
49, 69
POSTDEC1
Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 post-decremented (not a physical register)
N/A
49, 69
PREINC1
Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register)
N/A
49, 69
PLUSW1
Uses contents of FSR1 to address data memory – value of FSR1 pre-incremented (not a physical register) –
value of FSR1 offset by W
N/A
49, 69
---- 0000
49, 68
xxxx xxxx
49, 68
---- 0000
49, 59
FSR1H
—
FSR1L
—
—
—
—
—
—
Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 0 High Byte
Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1 High Byte
Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 1 Low Byte
BSR
—
—
—
—
Bank Select Register
INDF2
Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 not changed (not a physical register)
N/A
50, 68
POSTINC2
Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-incremented (not a physical register)
N/A
50, 69
POSTDEC2
Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 post-decremented (not a physical register)
N/A
50, 69
PREINC2
Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register)
N/A
50, 69
PLUSW2
Uses contents of FSR2 to address data memory – value of FSR2 pre-incremented (not a physical register) –
value of FSR2 offset by W
N/A
50, 69
---- 0000
50, 68
xxxx xxxx
50, 68
FSR2H
—
FSR2L
—
—
—
Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2 High Byte
Indirect Data Memory Address Pointer 2 Low Byte
STATUS
—
—
TMR0H
Timer0 Register High Byte
TMR0L
Timer0 Register Low Byte
T0CON
TMR0ON
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
T08BIT
—
T0CS
N
T0SE
OV
PSA
Z
T0PS2
DC
T0PS1
C
T0PS0
---x xxxx
50, 66
0000 0000
50, 113
xxxx xxxx
50, 113
1111 1111
50, 111
x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells are unimplemented, read as ‘0’.
Bit 21 of the TBLPTRU allows access to the device Configuration bits.
The SBOREN bit is only available when BOREN<1:0> = 01; otherwise, the bit reads as ‘0’.
These registers and/or bits are not implemented on 28-pin devices and are read as ‘0’. Reset values are shown for 40/44-pin devices;
individual unimplemented bits should be interpreted as ‘-’.
RA6 is configured as a port pin based on various primary oscillator modes. When the port pin is disabled, all of the associated bits read ‘0’.
RE3 is only available as a port pin when the MCLRE Configuration bit is clear; otherwise, the bit reads as ‘0’.
RC5 and RC4 are only available as port pins when the USB module is disabled (UCON<3> = 0).
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 63
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 5-2:
File Name
REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F2450/4450) (CONTINUED)
OSCCON
IDLEN
—
—
—
OSTS
—
SCS1
SCS0
0--- q-00
50, 31
HLVDCON
VDIRMAG
—
IRVST
HLVDEN
HLVDL3
HLVDL2
HLVDL1
HLVDL0
0-00 0101
50, 183
WDTCON
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SWDTEN
--- ---0
50, 202
—
RI
TO
PD
POR
BOR
IPEN
SBOREN
(2)
TMR1H
Timer1 Register High Byte
TMR1L
Timer1 Register Low Byte
T1CON
RD16
T1RUN
TMR2
Timer2 Register
PR2
Timer2 Period Register
T2CON
—
T2OUTPS3
T1CKPS1
T2OUTPS2
ADRESH
A/D Result Register High Byte
ADRESL
A/D Result Register Low Byte
Bit 4
T1CKPS0
T2OUTPS1
Bit 3
T1OSCEN
T2OUTPS0
Bit 2
T1SYNC
TMR2ON
Bit 1
TMR1CS
T2CKPS1
Bit 0
Details
on page
Bit 6
RCON
Bit 5
Value on
POR, BOR
Bit 7
TMR1ON
T2CKPS0
0q-1 11q0
50, 42
xxxx xxxx
50, 119
xxxx xxxx
50, 119
0000 0000
50, 115
0000 0000
50, 122
1111 1111
50, 122
-000 0000
50, 121
xxxx xxxx
50, 182
xxxx xxxx
50, 182
ADCON0
—
—
CHS3
CHS2
CHS1
CHS0
GO/DONE
ADON
--00 0000
50, 173
ADCON1
—
—
VCFG1
VCFG0
PCFG3
PCFG2
PCFG1
PCFG0
--00 qqqq
50, 174
ADFM
—
ACQT2
ACQT1
ACQT0
ADCS2
ADCS1
ADCS0
ADCON2
CCPR1H
Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 High Byte
CCPR1L
Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 Low Byte
CCP1CON
BAUDCON
0-00 0000
50, 175
xxxx xxxx
50, 124
xxxx xxxx
50, 124
—
—
DC1B1
DC1B0
CCP1M3
CCP1M2
CCP1M1
CCP1M0
--00 0000
50, 123,
ABDOVF
RCIDL
—
SCKP
BRG16
—
WUE
ABDEN
01-0 0-00
51, 156,
SPBRGH
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte
0000 0000
50, 157
SPBRG
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte
0000 0000
50, 157
RCREG
EUSART Receive Register
0000 0000
50, 164
TXREG
EUSART Transmit Register
0000 0000
50, 162
TXSTA
CSRC
TX9
TXEN
SYNC
SENDB
BRGH
TRMT
TX9D
0000 0010
51, 154
RCSTA
SPEN
RX9
SREN
CREN
ADDEN
FERR
OERR
RX9D
0000 000x
51, 155
EECON2
0000 0000
51, 74
—
CFGS
—
FREE
WRERR
WREN
WR
—
-x-0 x00-
51, 75
IPR2
OSCFIP
—
USBIP
—
—
HLVDIP
—
—
1-1- -1--
51, 95
PIR2
OSCFIF
—
USBIF
—
—
HLVDIF
—
—
0-0- -0--
51, 91
PIE2
OSCFIE
—
USBIE
—
—
HLVDIE
—
—
0-0- -0--
51, 93
IPR1
—
ADIP
RCIP
TXIP
—
CCP1IP
TMR2IP
TMR1IP
-111 -111
51, 94
PIR1
—
ADIF
RCIF
TXIF
—
CCP1IF
TMR2IF
TMR1IF
-000 -000
51, 90
PIE1
—
ADIE
RCIE
TXIE
—
CCP1IE
TMR2IE
TMR1IE
-000 -000
51, 92
TRISE(3)
—
—
—
—
—
TRISE2
TRISE1
TRISE0
---- -111
51, 110
TRISD(3)
TRISD7
TRISD6
TRISD5
TRISD4
TRISD3
TRISD2
TRISD1
TRISD0
1111 1111
51, 108
TRISC
TRISC7
TRISC6
—
—
—
TRISC2
TRISC1
TRISC0
11-- -111
51, 106
TRISB
TRISB7
TRISB6
TRISB5
TRISB4
TRISB3
TRISB2
TRISB1
TRISB0
1111 1111
51, 103
TRISA
—
TRISA6(4)
TRISA5
TRISA4
TRISA3
TRISA2
TRISA1
TRISA0
-111 1111
51, 100
LATE(3)
—
—
—
—
—
LATE2
LATE1
LATE0
---- -xxx
51, 110
LATD(3)
LATD7
LATD6
LATD5
LATD4
LATD3
LATD2
LATD1
LATD0
xxxx xxxx
51, 108
EECON1
Data Memory Control Register 2 (not a physical register)
LATC
LATC7
LATC6
—
—
—
LATC2
LATC1
LATC0
xx-- -xxx
51, 106
LATB
LATB7
LATB6
LATB5
LATB4
LATB3
LATB2
LATB1
LATB0
xxxx xxxx
51, 103
LATA
—
LATA6(4)
LATA5
LATA4
LATA3
LATA2
LATA1
LATA0
-xxx xxxx
51, 100
PORTE
—
—
—
—
RE3(5)
RE2(3)
RE1(3)
RE0(3)
---- x000
51, 109
RD7
RD6
RD5
RD4
RD3
RD2
RD1
RD0
xxxx xxxx
51, 108
PORTD(3)
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells are unimplemented, read as ‘0’.
Bit 21 of the TBLPTRU allows access to the device Configuration bits.
The SBOREN bit is only available when BOREN<1:0> = 01; otherwise, the bit reads as ‘0’.
These registers and/or bits are not implemented on 28-pin devices and are read as ‘0’. Reset values are shown for 40/44-pin devices;
individual unimplemented bits should be interpreted as ‘-’.
RA6 is configured as a port pin based on various primary oscillator modes. When the port pin is disabled, all of the associated bits read ‘0’.
RE3 is only available as a port pin when the MCLRE Configuration bit is clear; otherwise, the bit reads as ‘0’.
RC5 and RC4 are only available as port pins when the USB module is disabled (UCON<3> = 0).
DS39760A-page 64
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 5-2:
File Name
REGISTER FILE SUMMARY (PIC18F2450/4450) (CONTINUED)
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Value on
POR, BOR
Details
on page
PORTC
RC7
RC6
RC5(6)
RC4(6)
—
RC2
RC1
RC0
xxxx -xxx
51, 106
PORTB
RB7
RB6
RB5
RB4
RB3
RB2
RB1
RB0
xxxx xxxx
51, 100
PORTA
—
RA6(4)
RA5
RA4
RA3
RA2
RA1
RA0
-x0x 0000
51, 100
UEP15
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
51, 135
UEP14
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
51, 135
UEP13
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
51, 135
UEP12
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
51, 135
UEP11
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
51, 135
UEP10
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
51, 135
UEP9
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
51, 135
UEP8
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
52, 135
UEP7
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
52, 135
UEP6
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
52, 135
UEP5
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
52, 135
UEP4
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
52, 135
UEP3
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
52, 135
UEP2
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
52, 135
UEP1
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
52, 135
UEP0
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
---0 0000
52, 135
UCFG
UTEYE
UOEMON
—
UPUEN
UTRDIS
FSEN
PPB1
PPB0
00-0 0000
52, 132
UADDR
—
ADDR6
ADDR5
ADDR4
ADDR3
ADDR2
ADDR1
ADDR0
-000 0000
52, 136
UCON
—
PPBRST
SE0
PKTDIS
USBEN
RESUME
SUSPND
—
-0x0 000-
52, 130
USTAT
—
ENDP3
ENDP2
ENDP1
ENDP0
DIR
PPBI
—
-xxx xxx-
52, 134
UEIE
BTSEE
—
—
BTOEE
DFN8EE
CRC16EE
CRC5EE
PIDEE
0--0 0000
52, 147
UEIR
BTSEF
—
—
BTOEF
DFN8EF
CRC16EF
CRC5EF
PIDEF
0--0 0000
52, 146
UIE
—
SOFIE
STALLIE
IDLEIE
TRNIE
ACTVIE
UERRIE
URSTIE
-000 0000
52, 145
UIR
—
SOFIF
STALLIF
IDLEIF
TRNIF
ACTVIF
UERRIF
URSTIF
-000 0000
52, 144
UFRMH
—
—
—
—
—
FRM10
FRM9
FRM8
---- -xxx
52, 136
UFRML
FRM7
FRM6
FRM5
FRM4
FRM3
FRM2
FRM1
FRM0
xxxx xxxx
52, 136
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
6:
x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented, q = value depends on condition. Shaded cells are unimplemented, read as ‘0’.
Bit 21 of the TBLPTRU allows access to the device Configuration bits.
The SBOREN bit is only available when BOREN<1:0> = 01; otherwise, the bit reads as ‘0’.
These registers and/or bits are not implemented on 28-pin devices and are read as ‘0’. Reset values are shown for 40/44-pin devices;
individual unimplemented bits should be interpreted as ‘-’.
RA6 is configured as a port pin based on various primary oscillator modes. When the port pin is disabled, all of the associated bits read ‘0’.
RE3 is only available as a port pin when the MCLRE Configuration bit is clear; otherwise, the bit reads as ‘0’.
RC5 and RC4 are only available as port pins when the USB module is disabled (UCON<3> = 0).
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 65
PIC18F2450/4450
5.3.6
STATUS REGISTER
The STATUS register, shown in Register 5-2, contains
the arithmetic status of the ALU. As with any other SFR,
it can be the operand for any instruction.
If the STATUS register is the destination for an instruction
that affects the Z, DC, C, OV or N bits, the results of the
instruction are not written; instead, the STATUS register
is updated according to the instruction performed.
Therefore, the result of an instruction with the STATUS
register as its destination may be different than intended.
As an example, CLRF STATUS will set the Z bit and leave
the remaining Status bits unchanged (‘000u u1uu’).
REGISTER 5-2:
It is recommended that only BCF, BSF, SWAPF, MOVFF
and MOVWF instructions are used to alter the STATUS
register because these instructions do not affect the Z,
C, DC, OV or N bits in the STATUS register.
For other instructions that do not affect Status bits, see
the instruction set summaries in Table 19-2 and
Table 19-3.
Note:
The C and DC bits operate as the Borrow
and Digit Borrow bits, respectively, in
subtraction.
STATUS REGISTER
U-0
U-0
U-0
R/W-x
R/W-x
R/W-x
R/W-x
R/W-x
—
—
—
N
OV
Z
DC(1)
C(2)
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7-5
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 4
N: Negative bit
This bit is used for signed arithmetic (2’s complement). It indicates whether the result was
negative (ALU MSB = 1).
1 = Result was negative
0 = Result was positive
bit 3
OV: Overflow bit
This bit is used for signed arithmetic (2’s complement). It indicates an overflow of the 7-bit
magnitude which causes the sign bit (bit 7 of the result) to change state.
1 = Overflow occurred for signed arithmetic (in this arithmetic operation)
0 = No overflow occurred
bit 2
Z: Zero bit
1 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is zero
0 = The result of an arithmetic or logic operation is not zero
bit 1
DC: Digit Carry/Borrow bit(1)
For ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW and SUBWF instructions:
1 = A carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result occurred
0 = No carry-out from the 4th low-order bit of the result
bit 0
C: Carry/Borrow bit(2)
For ADDWF, ADDLW, SUBLW and SUBWF instructions:
1 = A carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred
0 = No carry-out from the Most Significant bit of the result occurred
Note 1:
2:
For borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the 2’s complement of the second
operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either bit 4 or bit 3 of the source register.
For borrow, the polarity is reversed. A subtraction is executed by adding the 2’s complement of the second
operand. For rotate (RRF, RLF) instructions, this bit is loaded with either the high or low-order bit of the
source register.
DS39760A-page 66
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
5.4
Data Addressing Modes
Note:
The execution of some instructions in the
core PIC18 instruction set are changed
when the PIC18 extended instruction
set is enabled. See Section 5.6 “Data
Memory and the Extended Instruction
Set” for more information.
While the program memory can be addressed in only
one way – through the program counter – information
in the data memory space can be addressed in several
ways. For most instructions, the addressing mode is
fixed. Other instructions may use up to three modes,
depending on which operands are used and whether or
not the extended instruction set is enabled.
The addressing modes are:
•
•
•
•
Inherent
Literal
Direct
Indirect
An additional addressing mode, Indexed Literal Offset,
is available when the extended instruction set is
enabled (XINST Configuration bit = 1). Its operation is
discussed in greater detail in Section 5.6.1 “Indexed
Addressing with Literal Offset”.
5.4.1
INHERENT AND LITERAL
ADDRESSING
Many PIC18 control instructions do not need any
argument at all; they either perform an operation that
globally affects the device or they operate implicitly on
one register. This addressing mode is known as
Inherent Addressing. Examples include SLEEP, RESET
and DAW.
Other instructions work in a similar way but require an
additional explicit argument in the opcode. This is
known as Literal Addressing mode because they
require some literal value as an argument. Examples
include ADDLW and MOVLW, which respectively, add or
move a literal value to the W register. Other examples
include CALL and GOTO, which include a 20-bit
program memory address.
5.4.2
Purpose Register File”) or a location in the Access
Bank (Section 5.3.3 “Access Bank”) as the data
source for the instruction.
The Access RAM bit ‘a’ determines how the address is
interpreted. When ‘a’ is ‘1’, the contents of the BSR
(Section 5.3.2 “Bank Select Register (BSR)”) are
used with the address to determine the complete 12-bit
address of the register. When ‘a’ is ‘0’, the address is
interpreted as being a register in the Access Bank.
Addressing that uses the Access RAM is sometimes
also known as Direct Forced Addressing mode.
A few instructions, such as MOVFF, include the entire
12-bit address (either source or destination) in their
opcodes. In these cases, the BSR is ignored entirely.
The destination of the operation’s results is determined
by the destination bit ‘d’. When ‘d’ is ‘1’, the results are
stored back in the source register, overwriting its original contents. When ‘d’ is ‘0’, the results are stored in
the W register. Instructions without the ‘d’ argument
have a destination that is implicit in the instruction; their
destination is either the target register being operated
on or the W register.
5.4.3
Indirect Addressing allows the user to access a location
in data memory without giving a fixed address in the
instruction. This is done by using File Select Registers
(FSRs) as pointers to the locations to be read or written
to. Since the FSRs are themselves located in RAM as
Special Function Registers, they can also be directly
manipulated under program control. This makes FSRs
very useful in implementing data structures, such as
tables and arrays in data memory.
The registers for Indirect Addressing are also
implemented with Indirect File Operands (INDFs) that
permit automatic manipulation of the pointer value with
auto-incrementing, auto-decrementing or offsetting
with another value. This allows for efficient code, using
loops, such as the example of clearing an entire RAM
bank in Example 5-5.
EXAMPLE 5-5:
DIRECT ADDRESSING
Direct Addressing mode specifies all or part of the
source and/or destination address of the operation
within the opcode itself. The options are specified by
the arguments accompanying the instruction.
In the core PIC18 instruction set, bit-oriented and byteoriented instructions use some version of Direct
Addressing by default. All of these instructions include
some 8-bit literal address as their Least Significant
Byte. This address specifies either a register address in
one of the banks of data RAM (Section 5.3.4 “General
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
INDIRECT ADDRESSING
NEXT
LFSR
CLRF
BTFSS
BRA
CONTINUE
Advance Information
HOW TO CLEAR RAM
(BANK 1) USING
INDIRECT ADDRESSING
FSR0, 100h ;
POSTINC0
; Clear INDF
; register then
; inc pointer
FSR0H, 1
; All done with
; Bank1?
NEXT
; NO, clear next
; YES, continue
DS39760A-page 67
PIC18F2450/4450
5.4.3.1
FSR Registers and the
INDF Operand
mapped in the SFR space but are not physically
implemented. Reading or writing to a particular INDF
register actually accesses its corresponding FSR
register pair. A read from INDF1, for example, reads
the data at the address indicated by FSR1H:FSR1L.
Instructions that use the INDF registers as operands
actually use the contents of their corresponding FSR as
a pointer to the instruction’s target. The INDF operand
is just a convenient way of using the pointer.
At the core of Indirect Addressing are three sets of
registers: FSR0, FSR1 and FSR2. Each represents a
pair of 8-bit registers: FSRnH and FSRnL. The four
upper bits of the FSRnH register are not used, so each
FSR pair holds a 12-bit value. This represents a value
that can address the entire range of the data memory
in a linear fashion. The FSR register pairs, then, serve
as pointers to data memory locations.
Because Indirect Addressing uses a full 12-bit address,
data RAM banking is not necessary. Thus, the current
contents of the BSR and the Access RAM bit have no
effect on determining the target address.
Indirect Addressing is accomplished with a set of
Indirect File Operands, INDF0 through INDF2. These
can be thought of as “virtual” registers; they are
FIGURE 5-7:
INDIRECT ADDRESSING
000h
Using an instruction with one of the
indirect addressing registers as the
operand....
Bank 0
ADDWF, INDF1, 1
100h
Bank 1
200h
Bank 2
...uses the 12-bit address stored in
the FSR pair associated with that
register....
300h
FSR1H:FSR1L
7
0
x x x x 1 1 1 0
7
0
1 1 0 0 1 1 0 0
Bank 3
through
Bank 13
...to determine the data memory
location to be used in that operation.
E00h
In this case, the FSR1 pair contains
ECCh. This means the contents of
location ECCh will be added to that
of the W register and stored back in
ECCh.
Bank 14
F00h
Bank 15
FFFh
Data Memory
DS39760A-page 68
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
5.4.3.2
FSR Registers and POSTINC,
POSTDEC, PREINC and PLUSW
In addition to the INDF operand, each FSR register pair
also has four additional indirect operands. Like INDF,
these are “virtual” registers that cannot be indirectly
read or written to. Accessing these registers actually
accesses the associated FSR register pair, but also
performs a specific action on it stored value. They are:
• POSTDEC: accesses the FSR value, then
automatically decrements it by ‘1’ afterwards
• POSTINC: accesses the FSR value, then
automatically increments it by ‘1’ afterwards
• PREINC: increments the FSR value by ‘1’, then
uses it in the operation
• PLUSW: adds the signed value of the W register
(range of -127 to 128) to that of the FSR and uses
the new value in the operation.
In this context, accessing an INDF register uses the
value in the FSR registers without changing them.
Similarly, accessing a PLUSW register gives the FSR
value offset by that in the W register; neither value is
actually changed in the operation. Accessing the other
virtual registers changes the value of the FSR
registers.
Operations on the FSRs with POSTDEC, POSTINC
and PREINC affect the entire register pair; that is,
rollovers of the FSRnL register from FFh to 00h carry
over to the FSRnH register. On the other hand, results
of these operations do not change the value of any
flags in the STATUS register (e.g., Z, N, OV, etc.).
5.4.3.3
Operations by FSRs on FSRs
Indirect Addressing operations that target other FSRs
or virtual registers represent special cases. For
example, using an FSR to point to one of the virtual
registers will not result in successful operations. As a
specific case, assume that FSR0H:FSR0L contains
FE7h, the address of INDF1. Attempts to read the
value of INDF1, using INDF0 as an operand, will return
00h. Attempts to write to INDF1, using INDF0 as the
operand, will result in a NOP.
On the other hand, using the virtual registers to write to
an FSR pair may not occur as planned. In these cases,
the value will be written to the FSR pair but without any
incrementing or decrementing. Thus, writing to INDF2
or POSTDEC2 will write the same value to the
FSR2H:FSR2L.
Since the FSRs are physical registers mapped in the
SFR space, they can be manipulated through all direct
operations. Users should proceed cautiously when
working on these registers, particularly if their code
uses Indirect Addressing.
Similarly, operations by Indirect Addressing are
generally permitted on all other SFRs. Users should
exercise the appropriate caution that they do not
inadvertently change settings that might affect the
operation of the device.
The PLUSW register can be used to implement a form
of Indexed Addressing in the data memory space. By
manipulating the value in the W register, users can
reach addresses that are fixed offsets from pointer
addresses. In some applications, this can be used to
implement some powerful program control structure,
such as software stacks, inside of data memory.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 69
PIC18F2450/4450
5.5
Program Memory and the
Extended Instruction Set
When using the extended instruction set, this
addressing mode requires the following:
The operation of program memory is unaffected by the
use of the extended instruction set.
Enabling the extended instruction set adds eight
additional two-word commands to the existing
PIC18 instruction set: ADDFSR, ADDULNK, CALLW,
MOVSF, MOVSS, PUSHL, SUBFSR and SUBULNK. These
instructions are executed as described in
Section 5.2.4 “Two-Word Instructions”.
5.6
Data Memory and the Extended
Instruction Set
Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set (XINST
Configuration bit = 1) significantly changes certain
aspects of data memory and its addressing.
Specifically, the use of the Access Bank for many of the
core PIC18 instructions is different. This is due to the
introduction of a new addressing mode for the data
memory space. This mode also alters the behavior of
Indirect Addressing using FSR2 and its associated
operands.
What does not change is just as important. The size of
the data memory space is unchanged, as well as its
linear addressing. The SFR map remains the same.
Core PIC18 instructions can still operate in both Direct
and Indirect Addressing mode; inherent and literal
instructions do not change at all. Indirect Addressing
with FSR0 and FSR1 also remains unchanged.
5.6.1
INDEXED ADDRESSING WITH
LITERAL OFFSET
Enabling the PIC18 extended instruction set changes
the behavior of Indirect Addressing using the FSR2
register pair and its associated file operands. Under the
proper conditions, instructions that use the Access
Bank – that is, most bit-oriented and byte-oriented
instructions – can invoke a form of Indexed Addressing
using an offset specified in the instruction. This special
addressing mode is known as Indexed Addressing with
Literal Offset or Indexed Literal Offset mode.
DS39760A-page 70
• The use of the Access Bank is forced (‘a’ = 0);
and
• The file address argument is less than or equal
to 5Fh.
Under these conditions, the file address of the
instruction is not interpreted as the lower byte of an
address (used with the BSR in Direct Addressing), or
as an 8-bit address in the Access Bank. Instead, the
value is interpreted as an offset value to an Address
Pointer specified by FSR2. The offset and the contents
of FSR2 are added to obtain the target address of the
operation.
5.6.2
INSTRUCTIONS AFFECTED BY
INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE
Any of the core PIC18 instructions that can use Direct
Addressing are potentially affected by the Indexed
Literal Offset Addressing mode. This includes all byteoriented and bit-oriented instructions, or almost one-half
of the standard PIC18 instruction set. Instructions that
only use Inherent or Literal Addressing modes are
unaffected.
Additionally, byte-oriented and bit-oriented instructions
are not affected if they use the Access Bank (Access
RAM bit is ‘1’) or include a file address of 60h or above.
Instructions meeting these criteria will continue to
execute as before. A comparison of the different
possible addressing modes when the extended
instruction set is enabled in shown in Figure 5-8.
Those who desire to use byte-oriented or bit-oriented
instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset mode should
note the changes to assembler syntax for this mode.
This is described in more detail in Section 19.2.1
“Extended Instruction Syntax”.
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 5-8:
COMPARING ADDRESSING OPTIONS FOR BIT-ORIENTED AND
BYTE-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS (EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET ENABLED)
EXAMPLE INSTRUCTION: ADDWF, f, d, a (Opcode: 0010 01da ffff ffff)
When a = 0 and f ≥ 60h:
The instruction executes in
Direct Forced mode. ‘f’ is interpreted as a location in the
Access RAM between 060h
and 0FFh. This is the same as
the SFRs or locations F60h to
0FFh (Bank 15) of data
memory.
000h
Locations below 60h are not
available in this addressing
mode.
F00h
060h
080h
Bank 0
100h
00h
Bank 1
through
Bank 14
60h
Valid range
for ‘f’
FFh
Access RAM
Bank 15
F60h
SFRs
FFFh
Data Memory
When a = 0 and f ≤ 5Fh:
The instruction executes in
Indexed Literal Offset mode. ‘f’
is interpreted as an offset to the
address value in FSR2. The
two are added together to
obtain the address of the target
register for the instruction. The
address can be anywhere in
the data memory space.
Note that in this mode, the
correct syntax is now:
ADDWF [k], d
where ‘k’ is the same as ‘f’.
000h
Bank 0
080h
100h
001001da ffffffff
Bank 1
through
Bank 14
FSR2H
FSR2L
F00h
Bank 15
F60h
SFRs
FFFh
Data Memory
When a = 1 (all values of f):
The instruction executes in
Direct mode (also known as
Direct Long mode). ‘f’ is interpreted as a location in one of
the 16 banks of the data
memory space. The bank is
designated by the Bank Select
Register (BSR). The address
can be in any implemented
bank in the data memory
space.
BSR
00000000
000h
Bank 0
080h
100h
Bank 1
through
Bank 14
001001da ffffffff
F00h
Bank 15
F60h
SFRs
FFFh
Data Memory
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 71
PIC18F2450/4450
5.6.3
MAPPING THE ACCESS BANK IN
INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE
The use of Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode
effectively changes how the lower portion of Access
RAM (00h to 5Fh) is mapped. Rather than containing
just the contents of the bottom half of Bank 0, this mode
maps the contents from Bank 0 and a user-defined
“window” that can be located anywhere in the data
memory space. The value of FSR2 establishes the
lower boundary of the addresses mapped into the
window, while the upper boundary is defined by FSR2
plus 95 (5Fh). Addresses in the Access RAM above
5Fh are mapped as previously described (see
Section 5.3.3 “Access Bank”). An example of Access
Bank remapping in this addressing mode is shown in
Figure 5-9.
FIGURE 5-9:
Remapping of the Access Bank applies only to
operations using the Indexed Literal Offset mode.
Operations that use the BSR (Access RAM bit is ‘1’) will
continue to use Direct Addressing as before. Any
indirect or indexed operation that explicitly uses any of
the indirect file operands (including FSR2) will continue
to operate as standard Indirect Addressing. Any
instruction that uses the Access Bank, but includes a
register address of greater than 05Fh, will use Direct
Addressing and the normal Access Bank map.
5.6.4
BSR IN INDEXED LITERAL
OFFSET MODE
Although the Access Bank is remapped when the
extended instruction set is enabled, the operation of the
BSR remains unchanged. Direct Addressing, using the
BSR to select the data memory bank, operates in the
same manner as previously described.
REMAPPING THE ACCESS BANK WITH INDEXED LITERAL
OFFSET ADDRESSING
Example Situation:
ADDWF f, d, a
000h
FSR2H:FSR2L = 120h
Locations in the region
from the FSR2 Pointer
(120h) to the pointer plus
05Fh (17Fh) are mapped
to the bottom of the
Access RAM (000h-05Fh).
Bank 0
100h
120h
17Fh
Bank 1
200h
00h
Bank 1 “Window”
5Fh
60h
Special Function Registers at F60h through FFFh
are mapped to 60h
through FFh as usual.
Bank 0 addresses below
5Fh are not available in
this mode. They can still
be addressed by using the
BSR.
Window
Bank 2
through
Bank 14
SFRs
FFh
Access Bank
F00h
Bank 15
F60h
SFRs
FFFh
Data Memory
DS39760A-page 72
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
6.0
FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY
6.1
Table Reads and Table Writes
The Flash program memory is readable, writable and
erasable, during normal operation over the entire VDD
range.
In order to read and write program memory, there are
two operations that allow the processor to move bytes
between the program memory space and the data RAM:
A read from program memory is executed on one byte
at a time. A write to program memory is executed on
blocks of 16 bytes at a time. Program memory is
erased in blocks of 64 bytes at a time. A Bulk Erase
operation may not be issued from user code.
• Table Read (TBLRD)
• Table Write (TBLWT)
Writing or erasing program memory will cease
instruction fetches until the operation is complete. The
program memory cannot be accessed during the write
or erase, therefore, code cannot execute. An internal
programming timer terminates program memory writes
and erases.
A value written to program memory does not need to be
a valid instruction. Executing a program memory
location that forms an invalid instruction results in a
NOP.
The program memory space is 16 bits wide, while the
data RAM space is 8 bits wide. Table reads and table
writes move data between these two memory spaces
through an 8-bit register (TABLAT).
Table read operations retrieve data from program
memory and place it into the data RAM space.
Figure 6-1 shows the operation of a table read with
program memory and data RAM.
Table write operations store data from the data memory
space into holding registers in program memory. The
procedure to write the contents of the holding registers
into program memory is detailed in Section 6.5 “Writing
to Flash Program Memory”. Figure 6-2 shows the
operation of a table write with program memory and data
RAM.
Table operations work with byte entities. A table block
containing data, rather than program instructions, is not
required to be word-aligned. Therefore, a table block can
start and end at any byte address. If a table write is being
used to write executable code into program memory,
program instructions will need to be word-aligned.
FIGURE 6-1:
TABLE READ OPERATION
Instruction: TBLRD*
Program Memory
Table Pointer(1)
TBLPTRU
TBLPTRH
Table Latch (8-bit)
TBLPTRL
TABLAT
Program Memory
(TBLPTR)
Note 1:
Table Pointer register points to a byte in program memory.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 73
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 6-2:
TABLE WRITE OPERATION
Instruction: TBLWT*
Program Memory
Holding Registers
Table Pointer(1)
TBLPTRU
TBLPTRH
Table Latch (8-bit)
TBLPTRL
TABLAT
Program Memory
(TBLPTR)
Note 1:
6.2
Table Pointer actually points to one of 16 holding registers, the address of which is determined by
TBLPTRL<3:0>. The process for physically writing data to the program memory array is discussed
in Section 6.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”.
Control Registers
Several control registers are used in conjunction with
the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions. These include the:
•
•
•
•
EECON1 register
EECON2 register
TABLAT register
TBLPTR registers
6.2.1
The WREN bit, when set, will allow a write operation.
On power-up, the WREN bit is clear. The WRERR bit is
set in hardware when the WREN bit is set and cleared
when the internal programming timer expires and the
write operation is complete.
EECON1 AND EECON2 REGISTERS
The EECON1 register (Register 6-1) is the control
register for memory accesses. The EECON2 register is
not a physical register; it is used exclusively in the
memory write and erase sequences. Reading
EECON2 will read all ‘0’s.
The CFGS control bit determines if the access will be
to the Configuration/Calibration registers or to program
memory.
DS39760A-page 74
The FREE bit, when set, will allow a program memory
erase operation. When FREE is set, the erase
operation is initiated on the next WR command. When
FREE is clear, only writes are enabled.
Note:
During normal operation, the WRERR is
read as ‘1’. This can indicate that a write
operation was prematurely terminated by
a Reset or a write operation was
attempted improperly.
The WR control bit initiates write operations. The bit
cannot be cleared, only set, in software; it is cleared in
hardware at the completion of the write operation.
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 6-1:
U-0
EECON1: MEMORY CONTROL REGISTER 1
R/W-x
—
CFGS
U-0
R/W-0
—
FREE
R/W-x
(1)
WRERR
R/W-0
R/S-0
U-0
WREN
WR
—
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 6
CFGS: Flash Program or Configuration Select bit
1 = Access Configuration registers
0 = Access Flash program
bit 5
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 4
FREE: Flash Row Erase Enable bit
1 = Erase the program memory row addressed by TBLPTR on the next WR command
(cleared by completion of erase operation)
0 = Perform write-only
bit 3
WRERR: Flash Program Error Flag bit(1)
1 = A write operation is prematurely terminated (any Reset during self-timed programming in normal
operation or an improper write attempt)
0 = The write operation completed
bit 2
WREN: Flash Program Write Enable bit
1 = Allows write cycles to Flash program
0 = Inhibits write cycles to Flash program
bit 1
WR: Write Control bit
1 = Initiates a program memory erase cycle or write cycle
(The operation is self-timed and the bit is cleared by hardware once write is complete.
The WR bit can only be set (not cleared) in software.)
0 = Write cycle complete
bit 0
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
Note 1:
When a WRERR occurs, the CFGS bit is not cleared. This allows tracing of the error condition.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 75
PIC18F2450/4450
6.2.2
TABLE LATCH REGISTER (TABLAT)
6.2.4
The Table Latch (TABLAT) is an 8-bit register mapped
into the SFR space. The Table Latch register is used to
hold 8-bit data during data transfers between program
memory and data RAM.
6.2.3
TBLPTR is used in reads, writes and erases of the
Flash program memory.
When a TBLRD is executed, all 22 bits of the TBLPTR
determine which byte is read from program memory
into TABLAT.
TABLE POINTER REGISTER
(TBLPTR)
When a TBLWT is executed, the four LSbs of the Table
Pointer register (TBLPTR<3:0>) determine which of the
16 program memory holding registers is written to.
When the timed write to program memory begins (via
the WR bit), the 16 MSbs of the TBLPTR
(TBLPTR<21:4>) determine which program memory
block of 16 bytes is written to. For more detail, see
Section 6.5 “Writing to Flash Program Memory”.
The Table Pointer (TBLPTR) register addresses a byte
within the program memory. The TBLPTR is comprised
of three SFR registers: Table Pointer Upper Byte, Table
Pointer High Byte and Table Pointer Low Byte
(TBLPTRU:TBLPTRH:TBLPTRL). These three registers
join to form a 22-bit wide pointer. The low-order 21 bits
allow the device to address up to 2 Mbytes of program
memory space. The 22nd bit allows access to the device
ID, the user ID and the Configuration bits.
When an erase of program memory is executed, the
16 MSbs of the Table Pointer register (TBLPTR<21:6>)
point to the 64-byte block that will be erased. The Least
Significant bits (TBLPTR<5:0>) are ignored.
The Table Pointer, TBLPTR, is used by the TBLRD and
TBLWT instructions. These instructions can update the
TBLPTR in one of four ways based on the table operation. These operations are shown in Table 6-1. These
operations on the TBLPTR only affect the low-order
21 bits.
TABLE 6-1:
TABLE POINTER BOUNDARIES
Figure 6-3 describes the relevant boundaries of the
TBLPTR based on Flash program memory operations.
TABLE POINTER OPERATIONS WITH TBLRD AND TBLWT INSTRUCTIONS
Example
Operation on Table Pointer
TBLRD*
TBLWT*
TBLPTR is not modified
TBLRD*+
TBLWT*+
TBLPTR is incremented after the read/write
TBLRD*TBLWT*-
TBLPTR is decremented after the read/write
TBLRD+*
TBLWT+*
TBLPTR is incremented before the read/write
FIGURE 6-3:
21
TABLE POINTER BOUNDARIES BASED ON OPERATION
TBLPTRU
16
15
TBLPTRH
8
7
TBLPTRL
0
TABLE ERASE
TBLPTR<21:6>
TABLE WRITE – TBLPTR<21:4>
TABLE READ – TBLPTR<21:0>
DS39760A-page 76
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
6.3
Reading the Flash Program
Memory
TBLPTR points to a byte address in program space.
Executing TBLRD places the byte pointed to into
TABLAT. In addition, TBLPTR can be modified
automatically for the next table read operation.
The TBLRD instruction is used to retrieve data from
program memory and places it into data RAM. Table
reads from program memory are performed one byte at
a time.
FIGURE 6-4:
The internal program memory is typically organized by
words. The Least Significant bit of the address selects
between the high and low bytes of the word. Figure 6-4
shows the interface between the internal program
memory and the TABLAT.
READS FROM FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY
Program Memory
(Even Byte Address)
(Odd Byte Address)
TBLPTR = xxxxx1
Instruction Register
(IR)
EXAMPLE 6-1:
FETCH
TBLRD
TBLPTR = xxxxx0
TABLAT
Read Register
READING A FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WORD
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
CODE_ADDR_UPPER
TBLPTRU
CODE_ADDR_HIGH
TBLPTRH
CODE_ADDR_LOW
TBLPTRL
; Load TBLPTR with the base
; address of the word
READ_WORD
TBLRD*+
MOVF
MOVWF
TBLRD*+
MOVF
MOVF
TABLAT, W
WORD_EVEN
TABLAT, W
WORD_ODD
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
; read into TABLAT and increment
; get data
; read into TABLAT and increment
; get data
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 77
PIC18F2450/4450
6.4
Erasing Flash Program Memory
6.4.1
The minimum erase block is 32 words or 64 bytes. Only
through the use of an external programmer, or through
ICSP control, can larger blocks of program memory be
Bulk Erased. Word Erase in the Flash array is not
supported.
The sequence of events for erasing a block of internal
program memory is:
1.
When initiating an erase sequence from the
microcontroller itself, a block of 64 bytes of program
memory is erased. The Most Significant 16 bits of the
TBLPTR<21:6> point to the block being erased.
TBLPTR<5:0> are ignored.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
The EECON1 register commands the erase operation.
The WREN bit must be set to enable write operations.
The FREE bit is set to select an erase operation.
For protection, the write initiate sequence for EECON2
must be used.
7.
A long write is necessary for erasing the internal Flash.
Instruction execution is halted while in a long write
cycle. The long write will be terminated by the internal
programming timer.
EXAMPLE 6-2:
FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY
ERASE SEQUENCE
8.
Load Table Pointer register with address of row
being erased.
Set the EECON1 register for the erase operation:
• clear the CFGS bit to access program memory;
• set WREN bit to enable writes;
• set FREE bit to enable the erase.
Disable interrupts.
Write 55h to EECON2.
Write 0AAh to EECON2.
Set the WR bit. This will begin the Row Erase
cycle.
The CPU will stall for duration of the erase
(about 2 ms using internal timer).
Re-enable interrupts.
ERASING A FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY ROW
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
CODE_ADDR_UPPER
TBLPTRU
CODE_ADDR_HIGH
TBLPTRH
CODE_ADDR_LOW
TBLPTRL
; load TBLPTR with the base
; address of the memory block
BCF
BSF
BSF
BCF
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
BSF
BSF
EECON1,
EECON1,
EECON1,
INTCON,
55h
EECON2
0AAh
EECON2
EECON1,
INTCON,
;
;
;
;
ERASE_ROW
Required
Sequence
DS39760A-page 78
CFGS
WREN
FREE
GIE
access Flash program memory
enable write to memory
enable Row Erase operation
disable interrupts
; write 55h
WR
GIE
; write 0AAh
; start erase (CPU stall)
; re-enable interrupts
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
6.5
Writing to Flash Program Memory
The long write is necessary for programming the
internal Flash. Instruction execution is halted while in a
long write cycle. The long write will be terminated by
the internal programming timer.
The minimum programming block is 8 words or
16 bytes. Word or byte programming is not supported.
Table writes are used internally to load the holding
registers needed to program the Flash memory. There
are 16 holding registers used by the table writes for
programming.
Since the Table Latch (TABLAT) is only a single byte, the
TBLWT instruction may need to be executed 16 times for
each programming operation. All of the table write operations will essentially be short writes because only the
holding registers are written. At the end of updating the
16 holding registers, the EECON1 register must be
written to in order to start the programming operation
with a long write.
FIGURE 6-5:
The write/erase voltages are generated by an on-chip
charge pump, rated to operate over the voltage range
of the device.
Note:
The default value of the holding registers on
device Resets and after write operations is
FFh. A write of FFh to a holding register
does not modify that byte. This means that
individual bytes of program memory may be
modified, provided that the change does not
attempt to change any bit from a ‘0’ to a ‘1’.
When modifying individual bytes, it is not
necessary to load all 16 holding registers
before executing a write operation.
TABLE WRITES TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY
TABLAT
Write Register
8
8
TBLPTR = xxxxx0
8
TBLPTR = xxxxx1
Holding Register
TBLPTR = xxxxx2
Holding Register
8
TBLPTR = xxxxxF
Holding Register
Holding Register
Program Memory
6.5.1
FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY WRITE
SEQUENCE
The sequence of events for programming an internal
program memory location should be:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Read 64 bytes into RAM.
Update data values in RAM as necessary.
Load Table Pointer register with address being
erased.
Execute the Row Erase procedure.
Load Table Pointer register with address of first
byte being written.
Write 16 bytes into the holding registers with
auto-increment.
Set the EECON1 register for the write operation:
• clear the CFGS bit to access program memory;
• set WREN to enable byte writes.
Disable interrupts.
Write 55h to EECON2.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
10. Write 0AAh to EECON2.
11. Set the WR bit. This will begin the write cycle.
12. The CPU will stall for duration of the write (about
2 ms using internal timer).
13. Re-enable interrupts.
14. Repeat steps 6 through 14 once more to write
64 bytes.
15. Verify the memory (table read).
This procedure will require about 8 ms to update one
row of 64 bytes of memory. An example of the required
code is given in Example 6-3.
Note:
Advance Information
Before setting the WR bit, the Table
Pointer address needs to be within the
intended address range of the 16 bytes in
the holding register.
DS39760A-page 79
PIC18F2450/4450
EXAMPLE 6-3:
WRITING TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
D'64’
COUNTER
BUFFER_ADDR_HIGH
FSR0H
BUFFER_ADDR_LOW
FSR0L
CODE_ADDR_UPPER
TBLPTRU
CODE_ADDR_HIGH
TBLPTRH
CODE_ADDR_LOW
TBLPTRL
TBLRD*+
MOVF
MOVWF
DECFSZ
BRA
TABLAT, W
POSTINC0
COUNTER
READ_BLOCK
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
DATA_ADDR_HIGH
FSR0H
DATA_ADDR_LOW
FSR0L
NEW_DATA_LOW
POSTINC0
NEW_DATA_HIGH
INDF0
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
BCF
BSF
BSF
BCF
CODE_ADDR_UPPER
TBLPTRU
CODE_ADDR_HIGH
TBLPTRH
CODE_ADDR_LOW
TBLPTRL
EECON1, CFGS
EECON1, WREN
EECON1, FREE
INTCON, GIE
; number of bytes in erase block
; point to buffer
; Load TBLPTR with the base
; address of the memory block
READ_BLOCK
;
;
;
;
;
read into TABLAT, and inc
get data
store data
done?
repeat
MODIFY_WORD
; point to buffer
; update buffer word
ERASE_BLOCK
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
BSF
BSF
TBLRD*MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
WRITE_BUFFER_BACK
MOVLW
MOVWF
WRITE_BYTE_TO_HREGS
MOVF
MOVWF
TBLWT+*
Required
Sequence
55h
EECON2
0AAh
EECON2
EECON1, WR
INTCON, GIE
;
;
;
;
access Flash program memory
enable write to memory
enable Row Erase operation
disable interrupts
; write 55h
BUFFER_ADDR_HIGH
FSR0H
BUFFER_ADDR_LOW
FSR0L
D’4’
COUNTER1
;
;
;
;
;
write 0AAh
start erase (CPU stall)
re-enable interrupts
dummy read decrement
point to buffer
D’16’
COUNTER
; number of bytes in holding register
POSTINC0, W
TABLAT
;
;
;
;
;
DECFSZ COUNTER
BRA
WRITE_WORD_TO_HREGS
DS39760A-page 80
; load TBLPTR with the base
; address of the memory block
get low byte of buffer data
present data to table latch
write data, perform a short write
to internal TBLWT holding register.
loop until buffers are full
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
EXAMPLE 6-3:
WRITING TO FLASH PROGRAM MEMORY (CONTINUED)
PROGRAM_MEMORY
Required
Sequence
6.5.2
BCF
BSF
BCF
EECON1, CFGS
EECON1, WREN
INTCON, GIE
; access Flash program memory
; enable write to memory
; disable interrupts
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
BSF
DECFSZ
BRA
BSF
BCF
55h
EECON2
0AAh
EECON2
EECON1, WR
COUNTER1
WRITE_BUFFER_BACK
INTCON, GIE
EECON1, WREN
; write 55h
; write 0AAh
; start program (CPU stall)
; re-enable interrupts
; disable write to memory
6.5.4
WRITE VERIFY
Depending on the application, good programming
practice may dictate that the value written to the
memory should be verified against the original value.
This should be used in applications where excessive
writes can stress bits near the specification limit.
6.5.3
UNEXPECTED TERMINATION OF
WRITE OPERATION
TABLE 6-2:
To protect against spurious writes to Flash program
memory, the write initiate sequence must also be
followed. See Section 18.0 “Special Features of the
CPU” for more detail.
6.6
If a write is terminated by an unplanned event, such as
loss of power or an unexpected Reset, the memory
location just programmed should be verified and
reprogrammed if needed. If the write operation is
interrupted by a MCLR Reset or a WDT Time-out Reset
during normal operation, the user can check the
WRERR bit and rewrite the location(s) as needed.
PROTECTION AGAINST SPURIOUS
WRITES
Flash Program Operation During
Code Protection
See Section 18.5 “Program Verification and Code
Protection” for details on code protection of Flash
program memory.
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PROGRAM FLASH MEMORY
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
TBLPTRU
—
—
bit 21
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Program Memory Table Pointer Upper Byte (TBLPTR<20:16>)
TBPLTRH Program Memory Table Pointer High Byte (TBLPTR<15:8>)
Reset
Values
on page
49
49
TBLPTRL Program Memory Table Pointer Low Byte (TBLPTR<7:0>)
49
TABLAT
49
Program Memory Table Latch
INTCON
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE
EECON2
Control Register 2 (not a physical register)
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
51
—
CFGS
—
FREE
WRERR
WREN
WR
—
51
OSCFIP
—
USBIP
—
—
HLVDIP
—
—
51
PIR2
OSCFIF
—
USBIF
—
—
HLVDIF
—
—
51
PIE2
OSCFIE
—
USBIE
—
—
HLVDIE
—
—
51
EECON1
IPR2
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used during Flash access.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 81
PIC18F2450/4450
NOTES:
DS39760A-page 82
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
7.0
8 x 8 HARDWARE MULTIPLIER
7.1
Introduction
EXAMPLE 7-1:
MOVF
MULWF
All PIC18 devices include an 8 x 8 hardware multiplier
as part of the ALU. The multiplier performs an unsigned
operation and yields a 16-bit result that is stored in the
product register pair, PRODH:PRODL. The multiplier’s
operation does not affect any flags in the STATUS
register.
ARG1, W
ARG2
;
; ARG1 * ARG2 ->
; PRODH:PRODL
EXAMPLE 7-2:
Making multiplication a hardware operation allows it to
be completed in a single instruction cycle. This has the
advantages of higher computational throughput and
reduced code size for multiplication algorithms and
allows the PIC18 devices to be used in many applications previously reserved for digital signal processors.
A comparison of various hardware and software
multiply operations, along with the savings in memory
and execution time, is shown in Table 7-1.
7.2
8 x 8 UNSIGNED
MULTIPLY ROUTINE
8 x 8 SIGNED MULTIPLY
ROUTINE
MOVF
MULWF
ARG1, W
ARG2
BTFSC
SUBWF
ARG2, SB
PRODH, F
MOVF
BTFSC
SUBWF
ARG2, W
ARG1, SB
PRODH, F
;
;
;
;
;
ARG1 * ARG2 ->
PRODH:PRODL
Test Sign Bit
PRODH = PRODH
- ARG1
; Test Sign Bit
; PRODH = PRODH
;
- ARG2
Operation
Example 7-1 shows the instruction sequence for an
8 x 8 unsigned multiplication. Only one instruction is
required when one of the arguments is already loaded
in the WREG register.
Example 7-2 shows the sequence to do an 8 x 8 signed
multiplication. To account for the sign bits of the
arguments, each argument’s Most Significant bit (MSb)
is tested and the appropriate subtractions are done.
TABLE 7-1:
PERFORMANCE COMPARISON FOR VARIOUS MULTIPLY OPERATIONS
Routine
8 x 8 unsigned
8 x 8 signed
16 x 16 unsigned
16 x 16 signed
Multiply Method
Without hardware multiply
Program
Memory
(Words)
Cycles
(Max)
@ 40 MHz
@ 10 MHz
@ 4 MHz
13
69
6.9 μs
27.6 μs
69 μs
Time
Hardware multiply
1
1
100 ns
400 ns
1 μs
Without hardware multiply
33
91
9.1 μs
36.4 μs
91 μs
Hardware multiply
6
6
600 ns
2.4 μs
6 μs
Without hardware multiply
21
242
24.2 μs
96.8 μs
242 μs
Hardware multiply
28
28
2.8 μs
11.2 μs
28 μs
Without hardware multiply
52
254
25.4 μs
102.6 μs
254 μs
Hardware multiply
35
40
4.0 μs
16.0 μs
40 μs
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 83
PIC18F2450/4450
Example 7-3 shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16
unsigned multiplication. Equation 7-1 shows the
algorithm that is used. The 32-bit result is stored in four
registers (RES3:RES0).
EQUATION 7-1:
RES3:RES0
=
=
EXAMPLE 7-3:
16 x 16 UNSIGNED
MULTIPLICATION
ALGORITHM
ARG1H:ARG1L • ARG2H:ARG2L
(ARG1H • ARG2H • 216) +
(ARG1H • ARG2L • 28) +
(ARG1L • ARG2H • 28) +
(ARG1L • ARG2L)
EQUATION 7-2:
RES3:RES0= ARG1H:ARG1L • ARG2H:ARG2L
= (ARG1H • ARG2H • 216) +
(ARG1H • ARG2L • 28) +
(ARG1L • ARG2H • 28) +
(ARG1L • ARG2L) +
(-1 • ARG2H<7> • ARG1H:ARG1L • 216) +
(-1 • ARG1H<7> • ARG2H:ARG2L • 216)
EXAMPLE 7-4:
16 x 16 UNSIGNED
MULTIPLY ROUTINE
MOVF
MULWF
ARG1L, W
ARG2L
MOVFF
MOVFF
PRODH, RES1
PRODL, RES0
MOVF
MULWF
ARG1H, W
ARG2H
MOVFF
MOVFF
PRODH, RES3
PRODL, RES2
MOVF
MULWF
ARG1L, W
ARG2H
MOVF
ADDWF
MOVF
ADDWFC
CLRF
ADDWFC
PRODL, W
RES1, F
PRODH, W
RES2, F
WREG
RES3, F
MOVF
MULWF
ARG1H, W
ARG2L
MOVF
ADDWF
MOVF
ADDWFC
CLRF
ADDWFC
PRODL, W
RES1, F
PRODH, W
RES2, F
WREG
RES3, F
; ARG1L * ARG2L->
; PRODH:PRODL
;
;
ARG1L * ARG2H->
PRODH:PRODL
Add cross
products
ARG1H * ARG2L->
PRODH:PRODL
Add cross
products
Example 7-4 shows the sequence to do a 16 x 16
signed multiply. Equation 7-2 shows the algorithm
used. The 32-bit result is stored in four registers
(RES3:RES0). To account for the sign bits of the
arguments, the MSb for each argument pair is tested
and the appropriate subtractions are done.
DS39760A-page 84
ARG1L, W
ARG2L
MOVFF
MOVFF
PRODH, RES1
PRODL, RES0
MOVF
MULWF
ARG1H, W
ARG2H
MOVFF
MOVFF
PRODH, RES3
PRODL, RES2
MOVF
MULWF
ARG1L,W
ARG2H
MOVF
ADDWF
MOVF
ADDWFC
CLRF
ADDWFC
PRODL, W
RES1, F
PRODH, W
RES2, F
WREG
RES3, F
MOVF
MULWF
ARG1H, W
ARG2L
MOVF
ADDWF
MOVF
ADDWFC
CLRF
ADDWFC
PRODL, W
RES1, F
PRODH, W
RES2, F
WREG
RES3, F
BTFSS
BRA
MOVF
SUBWF
MOVF
SUBWFB
ARG2H, 7
SIGN_ARG1
ARG1L, W
RES2
ARG1H, W
RES3
; ARG2H:ARG2L neg?
; no, check ARG1
;
;
;
ARG1H, 7
CONT_CODE
ARG2L, W
RES2
ARG2H, W
RES3
; ARG1H:ARG1L neg?
; no, done
;
;
;
; ARG1L * ARG2L ->
; PRODH:PRODL
;
;
; ARG1H * ARG2H ->
; PRODH:PRODL
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
ARG1L * ARG2H ->
PRODH:PRODL
Add cross
products
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
MOVF
MULWF
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
16 x 16 SIGNED
MULTIPLY ROUTINE
;
;
; ARG1H * ARG2H->
; PRODH:PRODL
;
;
16 x 16 SIGNED
MULTIPLICATION
ALGORITHM
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
ARG1H * ARG2L ->
PRODH:PRODL
Add cross
products
;
;
SIGN_ARG1
BTFSS
BRA
MOVF
SUBWF
MOVF
SUBWFB
;
CONT_CODE
:
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
8.0
INTERRUPTS
The PIC18F2450/4450 devices have multiple interrupt
sources and an interrupt priority feature that allows
each interrupt source to be assigned a high priority
level or a low priority level. The high priority interrupt
vector is at 000008h and the low priority interrupt vector
is at 000018h. High priority interrupt events will
interrupt any low priority interrupts that may be in
progress.
There are ten registers which are used to control
interrupt operation. These registers are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
RCON
INTCON
INTCON2
INTCON3
PIR1, PIR2
PIE1, PIE2
IPR1, IPR2
When an interrupt is responded to, the global interrupt
enable bit is cleared to disable further interrupts. If the
IPEN bit is cleared, this is the GIE bit. If interrupt priority
levels are used, this will be either the GIEH or GIEL bit.
High priority interrupt sources can interrupt a low
priority interrupt. Low priority interrupts are not
processed while high priority interrupts are in progress.
The return address is pushed onto the stack and the PC
is loaded with the interrupt vector address (000008h or
000018h). Once in the Interrupt Service Routine, the
source(s) of the interrupt can be determined by polling
the interrupt flag bits. The interrupt flag bits must be
cleared in software before re-enabling interrupts to avoid
recursive interrupts.
The “return from interrupt” instruction, RETFIE, exits
the interrupt routine and sets the GIE bit (GIEH or GIEL
if priority levels are used) which re-enables interrupts.
It is recommended that the Microchip header files
supplied with MPLAB® IDE be used for the symbolic bit
names in these registers. This allows the assembler/
compiler to automatically take care of the placement of
these bits within the specified register.
For external interrupt events, such as the INT pins or
the PORTB input change interrupt, the interrupt latency
will be three to four instruction cycles. The exact
latency is the same for one or two-cycle instructions.
Individual interrupt flag bits are set regardless of the
status of their corresponding enable bit or the GIE bit.
Note:
Do not use the MOVFF instruction to modify
any of the interrupt control registers while
any interrupt is enabled. Doing so may
cause erratic microcontroller behavior.
Each interrupt source has three bits to control its
operation. The functions of these bits are:
• Flag bit to indicate that an interrupt event
occurred
• Enable bit that allows program execution to
branch to the interrupt vector address when the
flag bit is set
• Priority bit to select high priority or low priority
The interrupt priority feature is enabled by setting the
IPEN bit (RCON<7>). When interrupt priority is
enabled, there are two bits which enable interrupts
globally. Setting the GIEH bit (INTCON<7>) enables all
interrupts that have the priority bit set (high priority).
Setting the GIEL bit (INTCON<6>) enables all
interrupts that have the priority bit cleared (low priority).
When the interrupt flag, enable bit and appropriate
global interrupt enable bit are set, the interrupt will
vector immediately to address 000008h or 000018h,
depending on the priority bit setting. Individual interrupts can be disabled through their corresponding
enable bits.
When the IPEN bit is cleared (default state), the
interrupt priority feature is disabled and interrupts are
compatible with PICmicro® mid-range devices. In
Compatibility mode, the interrupt priority bits for each
source have no effect. INTCON<6> is the PEIE bit
which enables/disables all peripheral interrupt sources.
INTCON<7> is the GIE bit which enables/disables all
interrupt sources. All interrupts branch to address
000008h in Compatibility mode.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
8.1
USB Interrupts
Unlike other peripherals, the USB module is capable of
generating a wide range of interrupts for many types of
events. These include several types of normal communication and status events and several module level
error events.
To handle these events, the USB module is equipped
with its own interrupt logic. The logic functions in a
manner similar to the microcontroller level interrupt
funnel, with each interrupt source having separate flag
and enable bits. All events are funneled to a single
device level interrupt, USBIF (PIR2<5>). Unlike the
device level interrupt logic, the individual USB interrupt
events cannot be individually assigned their own priority. This is determined at the device level interrupt
funnel for all USB events by the USBIP bit.
For additional details on USB interrupt logic, refer to
Section 14.5 “USB Interrupts”.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 85
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 8-1:
INTERRUPT LOGIC
TMR0IF
TMR0IE
TMR0IP
RBIF
RBIE
RBIP
INT0IF
INT0IE
Interrupt to CPU
Vector to Location
0008h
INT1IF
INT1IE
INT1IP
INT2IF
INT2IE
INT2IP
Peripheral Interrupt Flag bit
Peripheral Interrupt Enable bit
Peripheral Interrupt Priority bit
GIE/GIEH
TMR1IF
TMR1IE
TMR1IP
From USB
Interrupt Logic
Wake-up if in Sleep Mode
IPEN
IPEN
USBIF
USBIE
USBIP
PEIE/GIEL
IPEN
Additional Peripheral Interrupts
High Priority Interrupt Generation
Low Priority Interrupt Generation
Peripheral Interrupt Flag bit
Peripheral Interrupt Enable bit
Peripheral Interrupt Priority bit
TMR1IF
TMR1IE
TMR1IP
From USB
Interrupt Logic
RBIF
RBIE
RBIP
USBIF
USBIE
USBIP
Additional Peripheral Interrupts
DS39760A-page 86
Interrupt to CPU
Vector to Location
0018h
TMR0IF
TMR0IE
TMR0IP
PEIE/GIEL
GIE/GIEH
INT1IF
INT1IE
INT1IP
INT2IF
INT2IE
INT2IP
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
8.2
INTCON Registers
Note:
The INTCON registers are readable and writable
registers which contain various enable, priority and flag
bits.
REGISTER 8-1:
Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt
condition occurs regardless of the state of
its corresponding enable bit or the global
interrupt enable bit. User software should
ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits
are clear prior to enabling an interrupt.
This feature allows for software polling.
INTCON: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-x
GIE/GIEH
PEIE/GIEL
TMR0IE
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF(1)
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
GIE/GIEH: Global Interrupt Enable bit
When IPEN = 0:
1 = Enables all unmasked interrupts
0 = Disables all interrupts
When IPEN = 1:
1 = Enables all high priority interrupts
0 = Disables all interrupts
bit 6
PEIE/GIEL: Peripheral Interrupt Enable bit
When IPEN = 0:
1 = Enables all unmasked peripheral interrupts
0 = Disables all peripheral interrupts
When IPEN = 1:
1 = Enables all low priority peripheral interrupts
0 = Disables all low priority peripheral interrupts
bit 5
TMR0IE: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the TMR0 overflow interrupt
0 = Disables the TMR0 overflow interrupt
bit 4
INT0IE: INT0 External Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the INT0 external interrupt
0 = Disables the INT0 external interrupt
bit 3
RBIE: RB Port Change Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the RB port change interrupt
0 = Disables the RB port change interrupt
bit 2
TMR0IF: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit
1 = TMR0 register has overflowed (must be cleared in software)
0 = TMR0 register did not overflow
bit 1
INT0IF: INT0 External Interrupt Flag bit
1 = The INT0 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software)
0 = The INT0 external interrupt did not occur
bit 0
RBIF: RB Port Change Interrupt Flag bit(1)
1 = At least one of the RB7:RB4 pins changed state (must be cleared in software)
0 = None of the RB7:RB4 pins have changed state
Note 1:
A mismatch condition will continue to set this bit. Reading PORTB will end the mismatch condition and
allow the bit to be cleared.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 87
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 8-2:
INTCON2: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 2
R/W-1
R/W-1
INTEDG0
RBPU
R/W-1
INTEDG1
R/W-1
U-0
INTEDG2
—
R/W-1
U-0
R/W-1
TMR0IP
—
RBIP
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7
RBPU: PORTB Pull-up Enable bit
1 = All PORTB pull-ups are disabled
0 = PORTB pull-ups are enabled by individual port latch values
bit 6
INTEDG0: External Interrupt 0 Edge Select bit
1 = Interrupt on rising edge
0 = Interrupt on falling edge
bit 5
INTEDG1: External Interrupt 1 Edge Select bit
1 = Interrupt on rising edge
0 = Interrupt on falling edge
bit 4
INTEDG2: External Interrupt 2 Edge Select bit
1 = Interrupt on rising edge
0 = Interrupt on falling edge
bit 3
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 2
TMR0IP: TMR0 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 1
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 0
RBIP: RB Port Change Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
Note:
x = Bit is unknown
Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs regardless of the state of its corresponding
enable bit or the global interrupt enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits
are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling.
DS39760A-page 88
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 8-3:
INTCON3: INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTER 3
R/W-1
R/W-1
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
INT2IP
INT1IP
—
INT2IE
INT1IE
—
INT2IF
INT1IF
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7
INT2IP: INT2 External Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 6
INT1IP: INT1 External Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 5
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 4
INT2IE: INT2 External Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the INT2 external interrupt
0 = Disables the INT2 external interrupt
bit 3
INT1IE: INT1 External Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the INT1 external interrupt
0 = Disables the INT1 external interrupt
bit 2
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 1
INT2IF: INT2 External Interrupt Flag bit
1 = The INT2 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software)
0 = The INT2 external interrupt did not occur
bit 0
INT1IF: INT1 External Interrupt Flag bit
1 = The INT1 external interrupt occurred (must be cleared in software)
0 = The INT1 external interrupt did not occur
Note:
x = Bit is unknown
Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt condition occurs regardless of the state of its corresponding
enable bit or the global interrupt enable bit. User software should ensure the appropriate interrupt flag bits
are clear prior to enabling an interrupt. This feature allows for software polling.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 89
PIC18F2450/4450
8.3
PIR Registers
The PIR registers contain the individual flag bits for the
peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of peripheral
interrupt sources, there are two Peripheral Interrupt
Request (Flag) registers (PIR1 and PIR2).
REGISTER 8-4:
Note 1: Interrupt flag bits are set when an interrupt
condition occurs regardless of the state of
its corresponding enable bit or the Global
Interrupt Enable bit, GIE (INTCON<7>).
2: User software should ensure the
appropriate interrupt flag bits are cleared
prior to enabling an interrupt and after
servicing that interrupt.
PIR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 1
U-0
R/W-0
R-0
R-0
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
—
ADIF
RCIF
TXIF
—
CCP1IF
TMR2IF
TMR1IF
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 6
ADIF: A/D Converter Interrupt Flag bit
1 = An A/D conversion completed (must be cleared in software)
0 = The A/D conversion is not complete
bit 5
RCIF: EUSART Receive Interrupt Flag bit
1 = The EUSART receive buffer, RCREG, is full (cleared when RCREG is read)
0 = The EUSART receive buffer is empty
bit 4
TXIF: EUSART Transmit Interrupt Flag bit
1 = The EUSART transmit buffer, TXREG, is empty (cleared when TXREG is written)
0 = The EUSART transmit buffer is full
bit 3
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 2
CCP1IF: CCP1 Interrupt Flag bit
Capture mode:
1 = A TMR1 register capture occurred (must be cleared in software)
0 = No TMR1 register capture occurred
Compare mode:
1 = A TMR1 register compare match occurred (must be cleared in software)
0 = No TMR1 register compare match occurred
PWM mode:
Unused in this mode.
bit 1
TMR2IF: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Flag bit
1 = TMR2 to PR2 match occurred (must be cleared in software)
0 = No TMR2 to PR2 match occurred
bit 0
TMR1IF: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Flag bit
1 = TMR1 register overflowed (must be cleared in software)
0 = TMR1 register did not overflow
DS39760A-page 90
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 8-5:
PIR2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT REQUEST (FLAG) REGISTER 2
R/W-0
U-0
R/W-0
U-0
U-0
R/W-0
U-0
U-0
OSCFIF
—
USBIF
—
—
HLVDIF
—
—
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
OSCFIF: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Flag bit
1 = System oscillator failed, clock input has changed to INTRC (must be cleared in software)
0 = System clock operating
bit 6
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 5
USBIF: USB Interrupt Flag bit
1 = USB has requested an interrupt (must be cleared in software)
0 = No USB interrupt request
bit 4-3
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 2
HLVDIF: High/Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Flag bit
1 = A high/low-voltage condition occurred
0 = No high/low-voltage event has occurred
bit 1-0
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 91
PIC18F2450/4450
8.4
PIE Registers
The PIE registers contain the individual enable bits for
the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of
peripheral interrupt sources, there are two Peripheral
Interrupt Enable registers (PIE1 and PIE2). When
IPEN = 0, the PEIE bit must be set to enable any of
these peripheral interrupts.
REGISTER 8-6:
PIE1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 1
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
—
ADIE
RCIE
TXIE
—
CCP1IE
TMR2IE
TMR1IE
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 6
ADIE: A/D Converter Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the A/D interrupt
0 = Disables the A/D interrupt
bit 5
RCIE: EUSART Receive Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the EUSART receive interrupt
0 = Disables the EUSART receive interrupt
bit 4
TXIE: EUSART Transmit Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the EUSART transmit interrupt
0 = Disables the EUSART transmit interrupt
bit 3
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 2
CCP1IE: CCP1 Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the CCP1 interrupt
0 = Disables the CCP1 interrupt
bit 1
TMR2IE: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the TMR2 to PR2 match interrupt
0 = Disables the TMR2 to PR2 match interrupt
bit 0
TMR1IE: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enables the TMR1 overflow interrupt
0 = Disables the TMR1 overflow interrupt
DS39760A-page 92
Advance Information
x = Bit is unknown
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 8-7:
PIE2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER 2
R/W-0
U-0
R/W-0
U-0
U-0
R/W-0
U-0
U-0
OSCFIE
—
USBIE
—
—
HLVDIE
—
—
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7
OSCFIE: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 6
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 5
USBIE: USB Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 4-3
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 2
HLVDIE: High/Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Enabled
0 = Disabled
bit 1-0
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
x = Bit is unknown
DS39760A-page 93
PIC18F2450/4450
8.5
IPR Registers
The IPR registers contain the individual priority bits for
the peripheral interrupts. Due to the number of
peripheral interrupt sources, there are two Peripheral
Interrupt Priority registers (IPR1 and IPR2). Using the
priority bits requires that the Interrupt Priority Enable
(IPEN) bit be set.
REGISTER 8-8:
IPR1: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 1
U-0
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
U-0
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
—
ADIP
RCIP
TXIP
—
CCP1IP
TMR2IP
TMR1IP
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 6
ADIP: A/D Converter Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 5
RCIP: EUSART Receive Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 4
TXIP: EUSART Transmit Interrupt Priority bit
x = Bit is unknown
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 3
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 2
CCP1IP: CCP1 Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 1
TMR2IP: TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 0
TMR1IP: TMR1 Overflow Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
DS39760A-page 94
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 8-9:
IPR2: PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT PRIORITY REGISTER 2
R/W-1
U-0
R/W-1
U-0
U-0
R/W-1
U-0
U-0
OSCFIP
—
USBIP
—
—
HLVDIP
—
—
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7
OSCFIP: Oscillator Fail Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 6
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 5
USBIP: USB Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 4-3
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 2
HLVDIP: High/Low-Voltage Detect Interrupt Priority bit
1 = High priority
0 = Low priority
bit 1-0
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
x = Bit is unknown
DS39760A-page 95
PIC18F2450/4450
8.6
RCON Register
The RCON register contains flag bits which are used to
determine the cause of the last Reset or wake-up from
Idle or Sleep modes. RCON also contains the IPEN bit
which enables interrupt priorities.
REGISTER 8-10:
RCON: RESET CONTROL REGISTER
R/W-0
R/W-1(1)
U-0
R/W-1
R-1
R-1
R/W-0(2)
R/W-0
IPEN
SBOREN
—
RI
TO
PD
POR
BOR
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
IPEN: Interrupt Priority Enable bit
1 = Enable priority levels on interrupts
0 = Disable priority levels on interrupts (PIC16CXXX Compatibility mode)
bit 6
SBOREN: BOR Software Enable bit(1)
For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1.
bit 5
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 4
RI: RESET Instruction Flag bit
For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1.
bit 3
TO: Watchdog Time-out Flag bit
For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1.
bit 2
PD: Power-Down Detection Flag bit
For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1.
bit 1
POR: Power-on Reset Status bit(2)
For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1.
bit 0
BOR: Brown-out Reset Status bit
For details of bit operation, see Register 4-1.
Note 1:
2:
If SBOREN is enabled, its Reset state is ‘1’; otherwise, it is ‘0’. See Register 4-1 for additional information.
The actual Reset value of POR is determined by the type of device Reset. See Register 4-1 for additional
information.
DS39760A-page 96
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
8.7
INTn Pin Interrupts
8.8
TMR0 Interrupt
External interrupts on the RB0/AN12/INT0, RB1/AN10/
INT1and RB2/AN8/INT2/VMO pins are edge-triggered.
If the corresponding INTEDGx bit in the INTCON2
register is set (= 1), the interrupt is triggered by a rising
edge; if the bit is clear, the trigger is on the falling edge.
When a valid edge appears on the RBx/INTx pin, the
corresponding flag bit, INTxIF, is set. This interrupt can
be disabled by clearing the corresponding enable bit,
INTxIE. Flag bit, INTxIF, must be cleared in software in
the Interrupt Service Routine before re-enabling the
interrupt.
In 8-bit mode (which is the default), an overflow in the
TMR0 register (FFh → 00h) will set flag bit, TMR0IF. In
16-bit mode, an overflow in the TMR0H:TMR0L
register pair (FFFFh → 0000h) will set TMR0IF. The
interrupt can be enabled/disabled by setting/clearing
enable bit, TMR0IE (INTCON<5>). Interrupt priority for
Timer0 is determined by the value contained in the
interrupt priority bit, TMR0IP (INTCON2<2>). See
Section 12.0 “Timer2 Module” for further details on
the Timer0 module.
All external interrupts (INT0, INT1 and INT2) can wakeup the processor from the power-managed modes if bit,
INTxIE, was set prior to going into the power-managed
modes. If the Global Interrupt Enable bit, GIE, is set, the
processor will branch to the interrupt vector following
wake-up.
8.9
Interrupt priority for INT1 and INT2 is determined by the
value contained in the interrupt priority bits, INT1IP
(INTCON3<6>) and INT2IP (INTCON3<7>). There is
no priority bit associated with INT0. It is always a high
priority interrupt source.
EXAMPLE 8-1:
MOVWF
MOVFF
MOVFF
;
; USER
;
MOVFF
MOVF
MOVFF
PORTB Interrupt-on-Change
An input change on PORTB<7:4> sets flag bit, RBIF
(INTCON<0>). The interrupt can be enabled/disabled
by setting/clearing enable bit, RBIE (INTCON<3>).
Interrupt priority for PORTB interrupt-on-change is
determined by the value contained in the interrupt
priority bit, RBIP (INTCON2<0>).
8.10
Context Saving During Interrupts
During interrupts, the return PC address is saved on
the stack. Additionally, the WREG, STATUS and BSR
registers are saved on the fast return stack. If a fast
return from interrupt is not used (see Section 5.3
“Data Memory Organization”), the user may need to
save the WREG, STATUS and BSR registers on entry
to the Interrupt Service Routine. Depending on the
user’s application, other registers may also need to be
saved. Example 8-1 saves and restores the WREG,
STATUS and BSR registers during an Interrupt Service
Routine.
SAVING STATUS, WREG AND BSR REGISTERS IN RAM
W_TEMP
STATUS, STATUS_TEMP
BSR, BSR_TEMP
; W_TEMP is in virtual bank
; STATUS_TEMP located anywhere
; BSR_TMEP located anywhere
ISR CODE
BSR_TEMP, BSR
W_TEMP, W
STATUS_TEMP, STATUS
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
; Restore BSR
; Restore WREG
; Restore STATUS
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 97
PIC18F2450/4450
NOTES:
DS39760A-page 98
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
9.0
I/O PORTS
Reading the PORTA register reads the status of the
pins; writing to it will write to the port latch.
Depending on the device selected and features
enabled, there are up to five ports available. Some pins
of the I/O ports are multiplexed with an alternate
function from the peripheral features on the device. In
general, when a peripheral is enabled, that pin may not
be used as a general purpose I/O pin.
Each port has three registers for its operation. These
registers are:
• TRIS register (data direction register)
• PORT register (reads the levels on the pins of the
device)
• LAT register (output latch)
The Data Latch register (LATA) is useful for readmodify-write operations on the value driven by the I/O
pins.
A simplified model of a generic I/O port, without the
interfaces to other peripherals, is shown in Figure 9-1.
FIGURE 9-1:
GENERIC I/O PORT
OPERATION
D
WR LAT
or PORT
Q
I/O pin(1)
CK
RA4 is also multiplexed with the USB module; it serves
as a receiver input from an external USB transceiver.
For details on configuration of the USB module, see
Section 14.2 “USB Status and Control”.
Several PORTA pins are multiplexed with analog inputs.
The operation of pins RA5 and RA3:RA0 as A/D
converter inputs is selected by clearing/setting the
control bits in the ADCON1 register (A/D Control
Register 1).
D
Q
All other PORTA pins have TTL input levels and full
CMOS output drivers.
CK
TRIS Latch
Input
Buffer
EXAMPLE 9-1:
CLRF
RD TRIS
CLRF
Q
D
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
ENEN
RD PORT
Note 1:
I/O pins have diode protection to VDD and VSS.
MOVWF
9.1
On a Power-on Reset, RA5 and RA3:RA0
are configured as analog inputs and read
as ‘0’. RA4 is configured as a digital input.
The TRISA register controls the direction of the RA
pins, even when they are being used as analog inputs.
The user must ensure the bits in the TRISA register are
maintained set when using them as analog inputs.
Data Latch
WR TRIS
The RA4 pin is multiplexed with the Timer0 module
clock input to become the RA4/T0CKI pin. The RA6 pin
is multiplexed with the main oscillator pin; it is enabled
as an oscillator or I/O pin by the selection of the main
oscillator in Configuration Register 1H (see
Section 18.1 “Configuration Bits” for details). When
not used as a port pin, RA6 and its associated TRIS
and LAT bits are read as ‘0’.
Note:
RD LAT
Data
Bus
The Data Latch register (LATA) is also memory
mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATA
register read and write the latched output value for
PORTA.
PORTA
;
;
;
LATA
;
;
;
0Fh
;
ADCON1 ;
0CFh
;
;
;
TRISA
;
;
INITIALIZING PORTA
Initialize PORTA by
clearing output
data latches
Alternate method
to clear output
data latches
Configure A/D
for digital inputs
Value used to
initialize data
direction
Set RA<3:0> as inputs
RA<5:4> as outputs
PORTA, TRISA and LATA Registers
PORTA is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The
corresponding data direction register is TRISA. Setting
a TRISA bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTA
pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in
a high-impedance mode). Clearing a TRISA bit (= 0)
will make the corresponding PORTA pin an output (i.e.,
put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin).
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 99
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 9-1:
Pin
PORTA I/O SUMMARY
Function
TRIS
Setting
I/O
RA0
0
OUT
DIG
LATA<0> data output; not affected by analog input.
1
IN
TTL
PORTA<0> data input; disabled when analog input enabled.
AN0
1
IN
ANA
A/D input channel 0. Default configuration on POR; does not affect
digital output.
RA1
0
OUT
DIG
LATA<1> data output; not affected by analog input.
1
IN
TTL
PORTA<1> data input; reads ‘0’ on POR.
AN1
1
IN
ANA
A/D input channel 1. Default configuration on POR; does not affect
digital output.
RA2
0
OUT
DIG
LATA<2> data output; not affected by analog input.
1
IN
TTL
PORTA<2> data input. Disabled when analog functions enabled.
1
IN
ANA
A/D input channel 2. Default configuration on POR; not affected by
analog output.
RA0/AN0
RA1/AN1
RA2/AN2/
VREF-
AN2
1
IN
ANA
A/D voltage reference low input.
RA3
0
OUT
DIG
LATA<3> data output; not affected by analog input.
1
IN
TTL
PORTA<3> data input; disabled when analog input enabled.
AN3
1
IN
ANA
A/D input channel 3. Default configuration on POR.
VREF+
1
IN
ANA
A/D voltage reference high input.
RA4
0
OUT
DIG
LATA<4> data output; not affected by analog input.
RA4/T0CKI/
RCV
1
IN
ST
PORTA<4> data input; disabled when analog input enabled.
T0CKI
1
IN
ST
Timer0 clock input.
RCV
x
IN
TTL
External USB transceiver RCV input.
RA5
0
OUT
DIG
LATA<5> data output; not affected by analog input.
1
IN
TTL
PORTA<5> data input; disabled when analog input enabled.
AN4
1
IN
ANA
A/D input channel 4. Default configuration on POR.
HLVDIN
1
IN
ANA
High/Low-Voltage Detect external trip point input.
OSC2
x
OUT
ANA
Main oscillator feedback output connection (all XT and HS modes).
CLKO
x
OUT
DIG
System cycle clock output (FOSC/4); available in EC, ECPLL and
INTCKO modes.
RA6
0
OUT
DIG
LATA<6> data output. Available only in ECIO, ECPIO and INTIO
modes; otherwise, reads as ‘0’.
1
IN
TTL
PORTA<6> data input. Available only in ECIO, ECPIO and INTIO
modes; otherwise, reads as ‘0’.
RA5/AN4/
HLVDIN
Legend:
OUT = Output, IN = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input,
TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option)
TABLE 9-2:
Name
Description
VREFRA3/AN3/
VREF+
OSC2/CLKO/
RA6
I/O Type
SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTA
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 6
PORTA
—
RA6(1)
RA5
RA4
RA3
RA2
RA1
RA0
51
LATA
—
LATA6(1)
LATA5
LATA4
LATA3
LATA2
LATA1
LATA0
51
TRISA
—
TRISA6(1)
TRISA5
TRISA4
TRISA3
TRISA2
TRISA1
TRISA0
51
ADCON1
—
—
VCFG1
VCFG0
PCFG3
PCFG2
PCFG1
PCFG0
50
UCON
—
PPBRST
SE0
PKTDIS
USBEN
—
52
RESUME SUSPND
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
Bit 7
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PORTA.
Note 1: RA6 and its associated latch and data direction bits are enabled as I/O pins based on oscillator
configuration; otherwise, they are read as ‘0’.
DS39760A-page 100
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
9.2
PORTB, TRISB and LATB
Registers
A mismatch condition will continue to set flag bit, RBIF.
Reading PORTB will end the mismatch condition and
allow flag bit, RBIF, to be cleared.
PORTB is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The
corresponding data direction register is TRISB. Setting
a TRISB bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTB
pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in
a high-impedance mode). Clearing a TRISB bit (= 0)
will make the corresponding PORTB pin an output (i.e.,
put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin).
The Data Latch register (LATB) is also memory
mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATB
register read and write the latched output value for
PORTB.
Each of the PORTB pins has a weak internal pull-up. A
single control bit can turn on all the pull-ups. This is
performed by clearing bit, RBPU (INTCON2<7>). The
weak pull-up is automatically turned off when the port
pin is configured as an output. The pull-ups are
disabled on a Power-on Reset.
Note:
On a Power-on Reset, RB4:RB0 are
configured as analog inputs by default and
read as ‘0’; RB7:RB5 are configured as
digital inputs.
By programming the Configuration bit,
PBADEN (CONFIG3H<1>), RB4:RB0 will
alternatively be configured as digital inputs
on POR.
Four of the PORTB pins (RB7:RB4) have an interrupton-change feature. Only pins configured as inputs can
cause this interrupt to occur. Any RB7:RB4 pin
configured as an output is excluded from the interrupton-change comparison. The pins are compared with
the old value latched on the last read of PORTB. The
“mismatch” outputs of RB7:RB4 are ORed together to
generate the RB Port Change Interrupt with Flag bit,
RBIF (INTCON<0>).
The interrupt-on-change feature is recommended for
wake-up on key depression operation and operations
where PORTB is only used for the interrupt-on-change
feature. Polling of PORTB is not recommended while
using the interrupt-on-change feature.
Pins, RB2 and RB3, are multiplexed with the USB
peripheral and serve as the differential signal outputs
for an external USB transceiver (TRIS configuration).
Refer to Section 14.2.2.2 “External Transceiver” for
additional information on configuring the USB module
for operation with an external transceiver.
EXAMPLE 9-2:
CLRF
CLRF
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
PORTB
;
;
;
LATB
;
;
;
0Eh
;
ADCON1 ;
;
;
0CFh
;
;
;
TRISB
;
;
;
INITIALIZING PORTB
Initialize PORTB by
clearing output
data latches
Alternate method
to clear output
data latches
Set RB<4:0> as
digital I/O pins
(required if config bit
PBADEN is set)
Value used to
initialize data
direction
Set RB<3:0> as inputs
RB<5:4> as outputs
RB<7:6> as inputs
The interrupt-on-change can be used to wake the
device from Sleep. The user, in the Interrupt Service
Routine, can clear the interrupt in the following manner:
a)
b)
Any read or write of PORTB (except with the
MOVFF (ANY), PORTB instruction). This will
end the mismatch condition.
Clear flag bit, RBIF.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 101
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 9-3:
Pin
RB0/AN12/
INT0
PORTB I/O SUMMARY
Function
TRIS
Setting
I/O
I/O Type
RB0
0
OUT
DIG
LATB<0> data output; not affected by analog input.
1
IN
TTL
PORTB<0> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared.
Disabled when analog input enabled.(1)
1
IN
ANA
A/D input channel 12.(1)
AN12
RB1/AN10/
INT1
INT0
1
IN
ST
External interrupt 0 input.
RB1
0
OUT
DIG
LATB<1> data output; not affected by analog input.
1
IN
TTL
PORTB<1> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared.
Disabled when analog input enabled.(1)
1
IN
ANA
A/D input channel 10.(1)
AN10
RB2/AN8/
INT2/VMO
RB3/AN9/VPO
RB4/AN11/
KBI0
INT1
1
IN
ST
External interrupt 1 input.
RB2
0
OUT
DIG
LATB<2> data output; not affected by analog input.
1
IN
TTL
PORTB<2> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared.
Disabled when analog input enabled.(1)
AN8
1
IN
ANA
A/D input channel 8.(1)
INT2
1
IN
ST
VMO
0
OUT
DIG
External USB transceiver VMO data output.
RB3
0
OUT
DIG
LATB<3> data output; not affected by analog input.
1
IN
TTL
PORTB<3> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared.
Disabled when analog input enabled.(1)
AN9
1
IN
ANA
A/D input channel 9.(1)
VPO
0
OUT
DIG
External USB transceiver VPO data output.
RB4
0
OUT
DIG
LATB<4> data output; not affected by analog input.
1
IN
TTL
PORTB<4> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared.
Disabled when analog input enabled.(1)
1
IN
ANA
A/D input channel 11.(1)
AN11
RB5/KBI1/
PGM
RB6/KBI2/
PGC
RB7/KBI3/
PGD
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
Description
External interrupt 2 input.
KBI0
1
IN
TTL
Interrupt-on-pin change.
RB5
0
OUT
DIG
LATB<5> data output.
1
IN
TTL
PORTB<5> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared.
KBI1
1
IN
TTL
Interrupt-on-pin change.
PGM
x
IN
ST
Single-Supply Programming mode entry (ICSP™). Enabled by LVP
Configuration bit; all other pin functions disabled.
RB6
0
OUT
DIG
LATB<6> data output.
1
IN
TTL
PORTB<6> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared.
KBI2
1
IN
TTL
Interrupt-on-pin change.
PGC
x
IN
ST
Serial execution (ICSP) clock input for ICSP and ICD operation.(2)
RB7
0
OUT
DIG
LATB<7> data output.
1
IN
TTL
PORTB<7> data input; weak pull-up when RBPU bit is cleared.
KBI3
1
IN
TTL
Interrupt-on-pin change.
PGD
x
OUT
DIG
Serial execution data output for ICSP and ICD operation.(2)
x
IN
ST
Serial execution data input for ICSP and ICD operation.(2)
OUT = Output, IN = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input,
TTL = TTL Buffer Input, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is overridden for this option)
Configuration on POR is determined by PBADEN Configuration bit. Pins are configured as analog inputs when
PBADEN is set and digital inputs when PBADEN is cleared.
All other pin functions are disabled when ICSP™ or ICD operation is enabled.
DS39760A-page 102
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 9-4:
Name
PORTB
SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTB
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
RB7
RB6
RB5
RB4
RB3
RB2
RB1
RB0
51
LATB
LATB7
LATB6
LATB5
LATB4
LATB3
LATB2
LATB1
LATB0
51
TRISB
TRISB7
TRISB6
TRISB5
TRISB4
TRISB3
TRISB2
TRISB1
TRISB0
51
TMR0IE
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
—
TMR0IP
—
RBIP
49
INT1IE
—
INT2IF
INT1IF
49
PCFG2
PCFG1
PCFG0
50
—
52
INTCON
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL
INTCON2
RBPU
INTCON3
INT2IP
ADCON1
UCON
INTEDG0 INTEDG1 INTEDG2
INT1IP
—
—
—
VCFG1
VCFG0
PCFG3
—
PPBRST
SE0
PKTDIS
USBEN
INT2IE
RESUME SUSPND
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PORTB.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 103
PIC18F2450/4450
9.3
PORTC, TRISC and LATC
Registers
PORTC is a 7-bit wide, bidirectional port. The
corresponding data direction register is TRISC. Setting
a TRISC bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTC
pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in
a high-impedance mode). Clearing a TRISC bit (= 0)
will make the corresponding PORTC pin an output (i.e.,
put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin).
When enabling peripheral functions on PORTC pins
other than RC4 and RC5, care should be taken in
defining the TRIS bits. Some peripherals override the
TRIS bit to make a pin an output, while other
peripherals override the TRIS bit to make a pin an
input. The user should refer to the corresponding
peripheral section for the correct TRIS bit settings.
Note:
On a Power-on Reset, these pins, except
RC4 and RC5, are configured as digital
inputs. To use pins RC4 and RC5 as
digital inputs, the USB module must be
disabled (UCON<3> = 0) and the on-chip
USB transceiver must be disabled
(UCFG<3> = 1).
In PIC18F2450/4450 devices, the RC3 pin is not
implemented.
The Data Latch register (LATC) is also memory
mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATC
register read and write the latched output value for
PORTC.
PORTC is primarily multiplexed with serial
communication modules, including the EUSART and
the USB module (Table 9-5). Except for RC4 and RC5,
PORTC uses Schmitt Trigger input buffers.
Pins RC4 and RC5 are multiplexed with the USB
module. Depending on the configuration of the module,
they can serve as the differential data lines for the onchip USB transceiver, or the data inputs from an
external USB transceiver. Both RC4 and RC5 have
TTL input buffers instead of the Schmitt Trigger buffers
on the other pins.
Unlike other PORTC pins, RC4 and RC5 do not have
TRISC bits associated with them. As digital ports, they
can only function as digital inputs. When configured for
USB operation, the data direction is determined by the
configuration and status of the USB module at a given
time. If an external transceiver is used, RC4 and RC5
always function as inputs from the transceiver. If the
on-chip transceiver is used, the data direction is
determined by the operation being performed by the
module at that time.
The contents of the TRISC register are affected by
peripheral overrides. Reading TRISC always returns
the current contents, even though a peripheral device
may be overriding one or more of the pins.
EXAMPLE 9-3:
CLRF
PORTC
CLRF
LATC
MOVLW
07h
MOVWF
TRISC
INITIALIZING PORTC
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Initialize PORTC by
clearing output
data latches
Alternate method
to clear output
data latches
Value used to
initialize data
direction
RC<5:0> as outputs
RC<7:6> as inputs
When the external transceiver is enabled, RC2 also
serves as the output enable control to the transceiver.
Additional information on configuring USB options is
provided in Section 14.2.2.2 “External Transceiver”.
DS39760A-page 104
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 9-5:
Pin
RC0/T1OSO/
T1CKI
PORTC I/O SUMMARY
Function
TRIS
Setting
I/O
I/O Type
RC0
0
OUT
DIG
T1OSO
RC1/T1OSI/
UOE
RC2/CCP1
IN
ST
x
OUT
ANA
RC6/TX/CK
RC7/RX/DT
Legend:
Note 1:
PORTC<0> data input.
Timer1 oscillator output; enabled when Timer1 oscillator enabled.
Disables digital I/O.
1
IN
ST
Timer1 counter input.
RC1
0
OUT
DIG
LATC<1> data output.
PORTC<1> data input.
1
IN
ST
T1OSI
x
IN
ANA
Timer1 oscillator input; enabled when Timer1 oscillator enabled.
Disables digital I/O.
UOE
0
OUT
DIG
External USB transceiver OE output.
RC2
0
OUT
DIG
LATC<2> data output.
1
IN
ST
PORTC<2> data input.
0
OUT
DIG
CCP1 Compare and PWM output; takes priority over port data.
1
IN
ST
CCP1 Capture input.
RC4
—(1)
IN
TTL
PORTC<4> data input; disabled when USB module or on-chip
transceiver is enabled.
D-
—(1)
OUT
XCVR
(1)
IN
XCVR
VM
—(1)
IN
TTL
External USB transceiver VM input.
RC5
—(1)
IN
TTL
PORTC<5> data input; disabled when USB module or on-chip
transceiver is enabled.
D+
—(1)
OUT
XCVR
—1)
IN
XCVR
VP
—1)
IN
TTL
RC6
0
OUT
DIG
LATC<6> data output.
1
IN
ST
PORTC<6> data input.
TX
0
OUT
DIG
Asynchronous serial transmit data output (EUSART module); takes
priority over port data. User must configure as output.
CK
0
OUT
DIG
Synchronous serial clock output (EUSART module); takes priority
over port data.
Synchronous serial clock input (EUSART module).
—
RC5/D+/VP
LATC<0> data output.
T1CKI
CCP1
RC4/D-/VM
1
Description
USB bus differential minus line output (internal transceiver).
USB bus differential minus line input (internal transceiver).
USB bus differential plus line output (internal transceiver).
USB bus differential plus line input (internal transceiver).
External USB transceiver VP input.
1
IN
ST
0
OUT
DIG
LATC<7> data output.
1
IN
ST
PORTC<7> data input.
RX
1
IN
ST
Asynchronous serial receive data input (EUSART module).
DT
1
OUT
DIG
Synchronous serial data output (EUSART module).
1
IN
ST
Synchronous serial data input (EUSART module). User must
configure as an input.
RC7
OUT = Output, IN = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input,
TTL = TTL Buffer Input, XCVR = USB Transceiver, x = Don’t care (TRIS bit does not affect port direction or is
overridden for this option)
RC4 and RC5 do not have corresponding TRISC bits. In Port mode, these pins are input only. USB data direction is
determined by the USB configuration.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 105
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 9-6:
Name
PORTC
SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTC
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
RC7
RC6
RC5(1)
RC4(1)
—
RC2
RC1
RC0
51
—
—
LATC2
LATC1
LATC0
51
TRISC2
TRISC1
TRISC0
51
—
52
LATC
LATC7
LATC6
—
TRISC
TRISC7
TRISC6
—
—
—
UCON
—
PPBRST
SE0
PKTDIS
USBEN
Bit 2
Bit 1
RESUME SUSPND
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
Bit 7
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PORTC.
Note 1: RC5 and RC4 are only available as port pins when the USB module is disabled (UCON<3> = 0).
DS39760A-page 106
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
9.4
Note:
EXAMPLE 9-4:
PORTD, TRISD and LATD
Registers
PORTD is only available on 40/44-pin
devices.
PORTD is an 8-bit wide, bidirectional port. The
corresponding data direction register is TRISD. Setting
a TRISD bit (= 1) will make the corresponding PORTD
pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output driver in
a high-impedance mode). Clearing a TRISD bit (= 0)
will make the corresponding PORTD pin an output (i.e.,
put the contents of the output latch on the selected pin).
CLRF
PORTD
CLRF
LATD
MOVLW
0CFh
MOVWF
TRISD
INITIALIZING PORTD
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
;
Initialize PORTD by
clearing output
data latches
Alternate method
to clear output
data latches
Value used to
initialize data
direction
Set RD<3:0> as inputs
RD<5:4> as outputs
RD<7:6> as inputs
The Data Latch register (LATD) is also memory
mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATD
register read and write the latched output value for
PORTD.
All pins on PORTD are implemented with Schmitt
Trigger input buffers. Each pin is individually
configurable as an input or output.
Note:
On a Power-on Reset, these pins are
configured as digital inputs.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 107
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 9-7:
Pin
PORTD I/O SUMMARY
Function
TRIS
Setting
I/O
I/O Type
RD0
0
OUT
DIG
LATD<0> data output.
1
IN
ST
PORTD<0> data input.
0
OUT
DIG
LATD<1> data output.
1
IN
ST
PORTD<1> data input.
0
OUT
DIG
LATD<2> data output.
1
IN
ST
PORTD<2> data input.
0
OUT
DIG
LATD<3> data output.
1
IN
ST
PORTD<3> data input.
0
OUT
DIG
LATD<4> data output.
1
IN
ST
PORTD<4> data input.
0
OUT
DIG
LATD<5> data output
1
IN
ST
PORTD<5> data input
0
OUT
DIG
LATD<6> data output.
1
IN
ST
PORTD<6> data input.
0
OUT
DIG
LATD<7> data output.
1
IN
ST
PORTD<7> data input.
RD0
RD1
RD1
RD2
RD2
RD3
RD3
RD4
RD4
RD5
RD5
RD6
RD6
RD7
Legend:
RD7
OUT = Output, IN = Input, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input
TABLE 9-8:
Name
PORTD(1)
LATD(1)
TRISD(1)
Note 1:
Description
SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTD
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
RD7
RD6
RD5
RD4
RD3
RD2
RD1
RD0
51
LATD7
LATD6
LATD5
LATD4
LATD3
LATD2
LATD1
LATD0
51
TRISD7
TRISD6
TRISD5
TRISD4
TRISD3
TRISD2
TRISD1
TRISD0
51
These registers and/or bits are unimplemented on 28-pin devices.
DS39760A-page 108
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
9.5
PORTE, TRISE and LATE
Registers
Depending on the particular PIC18F2450/4450 device
selected, PORTE is implemented in two different ways.
For 40/44-pin devices, PORTE is a 4-bit wide port.
Three pins (RE0/AN5, RE1/AN6 and RE2/AN7) are
individually configurable as inputs or outputs. These
pins have Schmitt Trigger input buffers. When selected
as an analog input, these pins will read as ‘0’s.
The corresponding data direction register is TRISE.
Setting a TRISE bit (= 1) will make the corresponding
PORTE pin an input (i.e., put the corresponding output
driver in a high-impedance mode). Clearing a TRISE bit
(= 0) will make the corresponding PORTE pin an output
(i.e., put the contents of the output latch on the selected
pin).
TRISE controls the direction of the RE pins, even when
they are being used as analog inputs. The user must
make sure to keep the pins configured as inputs when
using them as analog inputs.
Note:
functions as a digital input only pin; as such, it does not
have TRIS or LAT bits associated with its operation.
Otherwise, it functions as the device’s Master Clear input.
In either configuration, RE3 also functions as the
programming voltage input during programming.
Note:
EXAMPLE 9-5:
CLRF
CLRF
MOVLW
MOVWF
MOVLW
MOVWF
On a Power-on Reset, RE2:RE0 are
configured as analog inputs.
The Data Latch register (LATE) is also memory
mapped. Read-modify-write operations on the LATE
register read and write the latched output value for
PORTE.
The fourth pin of PORTE (MCLR/VPP/RE3) is an input
only pin. Its operation is controlled by the MCLRE Configuration bit. When selected as a port pin (MCLRE = 0), it
REGISTER 9-1:
On a Power-on Reset, RE3 is enabled as
a digital input only if Master Clear
functionality is disabled.
PORTE
;
;
;
LATE
;
;
;
0Ah
;
ADCON1 ;
03h
;
;
;
TRISC
;
;
;
9.5.1
INITIALIZING PORTE
Initialize PORTE by
clearing output
data latches
Alternate method
to clear output
data latches
Configure A/D
for digital inputs
Value used to
initialize data
direction
Set RE<0> as inputs
RE<1> as inputs
RE<2> as outputs
PORTE IN 28-PIN DEVICES
For 28-pin devices, PORTE is only available when
Master Clear functionality is disabled (MCLRE = 0). In
these cases, PORTE is a single bit, input only port
comprised of RE3 only. The pin operates as previously
described.
PORTE REGISTER
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
R/W-x
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
—
—
—
—
RE3(1,2)
RE2(3)
RE1(3)
RE0(3)
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7-4
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 3-0
RE3:RE0: PORTE Data Input bits(1,2,3)
Note 1:
2:
3:
x = Bit is unknown
implemented only when Master Clear functionality is disabled (MCLRE Configuration bit = 0); otherwise,
read as ‘0’.
RE3 is the only PORTE bit implemented on both 28-pin and 40/44-pin devices. All other bits are
implemented only when PORTE is implemented (i.e., 40/44-pin devices).
Unimplemented in 28-pin devices; read as ‘0’.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 109
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 9-9:
Pin
PORTE I/O SUMMARY
Function
TRIS
Setting
I/O
I/O Type
RE0
0
OUT
DIG
1
IN
ST
AN5
1
IN
ANA
A/D input channel 5; default configuration on POR.
RE1
0
OUT
DIG
LATE<1> data output; not affected by analog input.
1
IN
ST
AN6
1
IN
ANA
A/D input channel 6; default configuration on POR.
RE2
0
OUT
DIG
LATE<2> data output; not affected by analog input.
1
IN
ST
PORTE<2> data input; disabled when analog input enabled.
1
— (1)
IN
ANA
RE3
IN
ST
PORTE<3> data input; enabled when MCLRE Configuration bit
is clear.
MCLR
—(1)
IN
ST
External Master Clear input; enabled when MCLRE Configuration bit
is set.
VPP
— (1)
IN
ANA
RE0/AN5
RE1/AN6
RE2/AN7
AN7
MCLR/VPP/
RE3
Legend:
Note 1:
Description
LATE<0> data output; not affected by analog input.
PORTE<0> data input; disabled when analog input enabled.
PORTE<1> data input; disabled when analog input enabled.
A/D input channel 7; default configuration on POR.
High-voltage detection, used for ICSP™ mode entry detection.
Always available regardless of pin mode.
OUT = Output, IN = Input, ANA = Analog Signal, DIG = Digital Output, ST = Schmitt Buffer Input.
RE3 does not have a corresponding TRISE<3> bit. This pin is always an input regardless of mode.
TABLE 9-10:
SUMMARY OF REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PORTE
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
PORTE
—
—
—
—
RE3(1,2)
RE2(3)
RE1(3)
RE0(3)
51
LATE(3)
—
—
—
—
—
LATE2
LATE1
LATE0
51
TRISE(3)
—
—
—
—
—
TRISE2
TRISE1
TRISE0
51
ADCON1
—
—
VCFG1
VCFG0
PCFG3
PCFG2
PCFG1
PCFG0
50
Name
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’
Note 1: Implemented only when Master Clear functionality is disabled (MCLRE Configuration bit = 0); otherwise,
read as ‘0’.
2: RE3 is the only PORTE bit implemented on both 28-pin and 40/44-pin devices. All other bits are
implemented only when PORTE is implemented (i.e., 40/44-pin devices).
3: These registers and/or bits are unimplemented on 28-pin devices.
DS39760A-page 110
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
10.0
TIMER0 MODULE
The T0CON register (Register 10-1) controls all
aspects of the module’s operation, including the
prescale selection. It is both readable and writable.
The Timer0 module incorporates the following features:
• Software selectable operation as a timer or
counter in both 8-Bit or 16-Bit modes
• Readable and writable registers
• Dedicated 8-bit, software programmable
prescaler
• Selectable clock source (internal or external)
• Edge select for external clock
• Interrupt on overflow
REGISTER 10-1:
A simplified block diagram of the Timer0 module in
8-Bit mode is shown in Figure 10-1. Figure 10-2 shows
a simplified block diagram of the Timer0 module in 16Bit mode.
T0CON: TIMER0 CONTROL REGISTER
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
R/W-1
TMR0ON
T08BIT
T0CS
T0SE
PSA
T0PS2
T0PS1
T0PS0
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
TMR0ON: Timer0 On/Off Control bit
1 = Enables Timer0
0 = Stops Timer0
bit 6
T08BIT: Timer0 8-Bit/16-Bit Control bit
1 = Timer0 is configured as an 8-bit timer/counter
0 = Timer0 is configured as a 16-bit timer/counter
bit 5
T0CS: Timer0 Clock Source Select bit
1 = Transition on T0CKI pin
0 = Internal instruction cycle clock (CLKO)
bit 4
T0SE: Timer0 Source Edge Select bit
1 = Increment on high-to-low transition on T0CKI pin
0 = Increment on low-to-high transition on T0CKI pin
bit 3
PSA: Timer0 Prescaler Assignment bit
1 = TImer0 prescaler is NOT assigned. Timer0 clock input bypasses prescaler.
0 = Timer0 prescaler is assigned. Timer0 clock input comes from prescaler output.
bit 2-0
T0PS2:T0PS0: Timer0 Prescaler Select bits
111 = 1:256 Prescale value
110 = 1:128 Prescale value
101 = 1:64 Prescale value
100 = 1:32 Prescale value
011 = 1:16 Prescale value
010 = 1:8 Prescale value
001 = 1:4 Prescale value
000 = 1:2 Prescale value
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 111
PIC18F2450/4450
10.1
Timer0 Operation
Timer0 can operate as either a timer or a counter; the
mode is selected by clearing the T0CS bit
(T0CON<5>). In Timer mode, the module increments
on every clock by default unless a different prescaler
value is selected (see Section 10.3 “Prescaler”). If
the TMR0 register is written to, the increment is
inhibited for the following two instruction cycles. The
user can work around this by writing an adjusted value
to the TMR0 register.
The Counter mode is selected by setting the T0CS bit
(= 1). In Counter mode, Timer0 increments either on
every rising or falling edge of pin RA4/T0CKI. The
incrementing edge is determined by the Timer0 Source
Edge Select bit, T0SE (T0CON<4>); clearing this bit
selects the rising edge. Restrictions on the external
clock input are discussed below.
An external clock source can be used to drive Timer0;
however, it must meet certain requirements to ensure
that the external clock can be synchronized with the
FIGURE 10-1:
internal phase clock (TOSC). There is a delay between
synchronization and the onset of incrementing the
timer/counter.
10.2
Timer0 Reads and Writes in
16-Bit Mode
TMR0H is not the actual high byte of Timer0 in 16-Bit
mode; it is actually a buffered version of the real high
byte of Timer0, which is not directly readable nor
writable (refer to Figure 10-2). TMR0H is updated with
the contents of the high byte of Timer0 during a read of
TMR0L. This provides the ability to read all 16 bits of
Timer0 without having to verify that the read of the high
and low byte were valid, due to a rollover between
successive reads of the high and low byte.
Similarly, a write to the high byte of Timer0 must also
take place through the TMR0H Buffer register. The high
byte is updated with the contents of TMR0H when a
write occurs to TMR0L. This allows all 16 bits of Timer0
to be updated at once.
TIMER0 BLOCK DIAGRAM (8-BIT MODE)
FOSC/4
0
1
1
Programmable
Prescaler
T0CKI pin
T0SE
T0CS
0
Sync with
Internal
Clocks
(2 TCY Delay)
8
3
T0PS2:T0PS0
8
PSA
Note:
Set
TMR0IF
on Overflow
TMR0L
Internal Data Bus
Upon Reset, Timer0 is enabled in 8-Bit mode with clock input from T0CKI maximum prescale.
FIGURE 10-2:
TIMER0 BLOCK DIAGRAM (16-BIT MODE)
FOSC/4
0
1
1
T0CKI pin
T0SE
T0CS
Programmable
Prescaler
0
Sync with
Internal
Clocks
TMR0
High Byte
TMR0L
8
Set
TMR0IF
on Overflow
(2 TCY Delay)
3
Read TMR0L
T0PS2:T0PS0
Write TMR0L
PSA
8
8
TMR0H
8
8
Internal Data Bus
Note:
Upon Reset, Timer0 is enabled in 8-Bit mode with clock input from T0CKI maximum prescale.
DS39760A-page 112
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
10.3
10.3.1
Prescaler
An 8-bit counter is available as a prescaler for the Timer0
module. The prescaler is not directly readable or writable;
its value is set by the PSA and T0PS2:T0PS0 bits
(T0CON<3:0>) which determine the prescaler
assignment and prescale ratio.
Clearing the PSA bit assigns the prescaler to the
Timer0 module. When it is assigned, prescale values
from 1:2 through 1:256, in power-of-2 increments, are
selectable.
When assigned to the Timer0 module, all instructions
writing to the TMR0 register (e.g., CLRF TMR0, MOVWF
TMR0, BSF TMR0,etc.) clear the prescaler count.
Note:
Writing to TMR0 when the prescaler is
assigned to Timer0 will clear the prescaler
count but will not change the prescaler
assignment.
TABLE 10-1:
Name
SWITCHING PRESCALER
ASSIGNMENT
The prescaler assignment is fully under software
control and can be changed “on-the-fly” during program
execution.
10.4
Timer0 Interrupt
The TMR0 interrupt is generated when the TMR0
register overflows from FFh to 00h in 8-Bit mode, or
from FFFFh to 0000h in 16-Bit mode. This overflow
sets the TMR0IF flag bit. The interrupt can be masked
by clearing the TMR0IE bit (INTCON<5>). Before reenabling the interrupt, the TMR0IF bit must be cleared
in software by the Interrupt Service Routine.
Since Timer0 is shut down in Sleep mode, the TMR0
interrupt cannot awaken the processor from Sleep.
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER0
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
TMR0L
Timer0 Register Low Byte
50
TMR0H
Timer0 Register High Byte
INTCON
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE
T0CON
TMR0ON
T08BIT
T0CS
T0SE
PSA
T0PS2
T0PS1
T0PS0
50
TRISA
—
TRISA6(1)
TRISA5
TRISA4
TRISA3
TRISA2
TRISA1
TRISA0
51
50
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
Legend: — = unimplemented locations, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by Timer0.
Note 1: RA6 is configured as a port pin based on various primary oscillator modes. When the port pin is disabled,
all of the associated bits read ‘0’.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 113
PIC18F2450/4450
NOTES:
DS39760A-page 114
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
11.0
TIMER1 MODULE
The Timer1 timer/counter module incorporates these
features:
• Software selectable operation as a 16-bit timer or
counter
• Readable and writable 8-bit registers (TMR1H
and TMR1L)
• Selectable clock source (internal or external) with
device clock or Timer1 oscillator internal options
• Interrupt on overflow
• Module Reset on CCP Special Event Trigger
• Device clock status flag (T1RUN)
REGISTER 11-1:
A simplified block diagram of the Timer1 module is
shown in Figure 11-1. A block diagram of the module’s
operation in Read/Write mode is shown in Figure 11-2.
The module incorporates its own low-power oscillator
to provide an additional clocking option. The Timer1
oscillator can also be used as a low-power clock source
for the microcontroller in power-managed operation.
Timer1 can also be used to provide Real-Time Clock
(RTC) functionality to applications with only a minimal
addition of external components and code overhead.
Timer1 is controlled through the T1CON Control
register (Register 11-1). It also contains the Timer1
Oscillator Enable bit (T1OSCEN). Timer1 can be
enabled or disabled by setting or clearing control bit,
TMR1ON (T1CON<0>).
T1CON: TIMER1 CONTROL REGISTER
R/W-0
R-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
RD16
T1RUN
T1CKPS1
T1CKPS0
T1OSCEN
T1SYNC
TMR1CS
TMR1ON
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
RD16: 16-Bit Read/Write Mode Enable bit
1 = Enables register read/write of Timer1 in one 16-bit operation
0 = Enables register read/write of Timer1 in two 8-bit operations
bit 6
T1RUN: Timer1 System Clock Status bit
1 = Device clock is derived from Timer1 oscillator
0 = Device clock is derived from another source
bit 5-4
T1CKPS1:T1CKPS0: Timer1 Input Clock Prescale Select bits
11 = 1:8 Prescale value
10 = 1:4 Prescale value
01 = 1:2 Prescale value
00 = 1:1 Prescale value
bit 3
T1OSCEN: Timer1 Oscillator Enable bit
1 = Timer1 oscillator is enabled
0 = Timer1 oscillator is shut off
The oscillator inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain.
bit 2
T1SYNC: Timer1 External Clock Input Synchronization Select bit
When TMR1CS = 1:
1 = Do not synchronize external clock input
0 = Synchronize external clock input
When TMR1CS = 0:
This bit is ignored. Timer1 uses the internal clock when TMR1CS = 0.
bit 1
TMR1CS: Timer1 Clock Source Select bit
1 = External clock from RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI pin (on the rising edge)
0 = Internal clock (FOSC/4)
bit 0
TMR1ON: Timer1 On bit
1 = Enables Timer1
0 = Stops Timer1
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 115
PIC18F2450/4450
11.1
Timer1 Operation
cycle (FOSC/4). When the bit is set, Timer1 increments
on every rising edge of the Timer1 external clock input
or the Timer1 oscillator, if enabled.
Timer1 can operate in one of these modes:
• Timer
• Synchronous Counter
• Asynchronous Counter
When Timer1 is enabled, the RC1/T1OSI/UOE and
RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI pins become inputs. This means
the values of TRISC<1:0> are ignored and the pins are
read as ‘0’.
The operating mode is determined by the clock select
bit, TMR1CS (T1CON<1>). When TMR1CS is cleared
(= 0), Timer1 increments on every internal instruction
FIGURE 11-1:
TIMER1 BLOCK DIAGRAM
Timer1 Oscillator
On/Off
T1OSO/T1CKI
1
1
FOSC/4
Internal
Clock
T1OSI
Synchronize
Prescaler
1, 2, 4, 8
0
Detect
0
2
T1OSCEN(1)
Sleep Input
Timer1
On/Off
TMR1CS
T1CKPS1:T1CKPS0
T1SYNC
TMR1ON
Clear TMR1
(CCP Special Event Trigger)
Set
TMR1IF
on Overflow
TMR1
High Byte
TMR1L
Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain.
FIGURE 11-2:
TIMER1 BLOCK DIAGRAM (16-BIT READ/WRITE MODE)
Timer1 Oscillator
1
T1OSO/T1CKI
1
FOSC/4
Internal
Clock
T1OSI
Synchronize
Prescaler
1, 2, 4, 8
0
Detect
0
2
Sleep Input
(1)
Timer1
On/Off
TMR1CS
T1OSCEN
T1CKPS1:T1CKPS0
T1SYNC
TMR1ON
Clear TMR1
(CCP Special Event Trigger)
TMR1
High Byte
TMR1L
8
Set
TMR1IF
on Overflow
Read TMR1L
Write TMR1L
8
8
TMR1H
8
8
Internal Data Bus
Note 1: When enable bit, T1OSCEN, is cleared, the inverter and feedback resistor are turned off to eliminate power drain.
DS39760A-page 116
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
11.2
Timer1 16-Bit Read/Write Mode
Timer1 can be configured for 16-bit reads and writes
(see Figure 11-2). When the RD16 control bit
(T1CON<7>) is set, the address for TMR1H is mapped
to a buffer register for the high byte of Timer1. A read
from TMR1L will load the contents of the high byte of
Timer1 into the Timer1 high byte buffer. This provides
the user with the ability to accurately read all 16 bits of
Timer1 without having to determine whether a read of
the high byte, followed by a read of the low byte, has
become invalid due to a rollover between reads.
TABLE 11-1:
CAPACITOR SELECTION FOR
THE TIMER OSCILLATOR(2,3,4)
Osc Type
Freq
C1
C2
LP
32 kHz
27 pF(1)
27 pF(1)
Note 1: Microchip suggests these values as a
starting point in validating the oscillator
circuit.
2: Higher capacitance increases the stability
of the oscillator but also increases the
start-up time.
A write to the high byte of Timer1 must also take place
through the TMR1H Buffer register. The Timer1 high
byte is updated with the contents of TMR1H when a
write occurs to TMR1L. This allows a user to write all
16 bits to both the high and low bytes of Timer1 at once.
3: Since each resonator/crystal has its own
characteristics, the user should consult
the resonator/crystal manufacturer for
appropriate
values
of
external
components.
The high byte of Timer1 is not directly readable or
writable in this mode. All reads and writes must take
place through the Timer1 High Byte Buffer register.
Writes to TMR1H do not clear the Timer1 prescaler.
The prescaler is only cleared on writes to TMR1L.
4: Capacitor values are for design guidance
only.
11.3
Timer1 Oscillator
An on-chip crystal oscillator circuit is incorporated
between pins T1OSI (input) and T1OSO (amplifier
output). It is enabled by setting the Timer1 Oscillator
Enable bit, T1OSCEN (T1CON<3>). The oscillator is a
low-power circuit rated for 32 kHz crystals. It will
continue to run during all power-managed modes. The
circuit for a typical LP oscillator is shown in Figure 11-3.
Table 11-1 shows the capacitor selection for the Timer1
oscillator.
The user must provide a software time delay to ensure
proper start-up of the Timer1 oscillator.
FIGURE 11-3:
EXTERNAL
COMPONENTS FOR THE
TIMER1 LP OSCILLATOR
C1
33 pF
PIC18FXXXX
T1OSI
XTAL
32.768 kHz
T1OSO
C2
33 pF
Note:
See the Notes with Table 11-1 for additional
information about capacitor selection.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
11.3.1
USING TIMER1 AS A CLOCK
SOURCE
The Timer1 oscillator is also available as a clock source
in power-managed modes. By setting the clock select
bits, SCS1:SCS0 (OSCCON<1:0>), to ‘01’, the device
switches to SEC_RUN mode. Both the CPU and
peripherals are clocked from the Timer1 oscillator. If the
IDLEN bit (OSCCON<7>) is cleared and a SLEEP
instruction is executed, the device enters SEC_IDLE
mode. Additional details are available in Section 3.0
“Power-Managed Modes”.
Whenever the Timer1 oscillator is providing the clock
source, the Timer1 system clock status flag, T1RUN
(T1CON<6>), is set. This can be used to determine the
controller’s current clocking mode. It can also indicate
the clock source being currently used by the Fail-Safe
Clock Monitor. If the Clock Monitor is enabled and the
Timer1 oscillator fails while providing the clock, polling
the T1RUN bit will indicate whether the clock is being
provided by the Timer1 oscillator or another source.
11.3.2
LOW-POWER TIMER1 OPTION
The Timer1 oscillator can operate at two distinct levels
of power consumption based on device configuration.
When the LPT1OSC Configuration bit is set, the Timer1
oscillator operates in a low-power mode. When
LPT1OSC is not set, Timer1 operates at a higher power
level. Power consumption for a particular mode is
relatively constant, regardless of the device’s operating
mode. The default Timer1 configuration is the higher
power mode.
As the low-power Timer1 mode tends to be more
sensitive to interference, high noise environments may
cause some oscillator instability. The low-power option
is, therefore, best suited for low noise applications
where power conservation is an important design
consideration.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 117
PIC18F2450/4450
11.3.3
TIMER1 OSCILLATOR LAYOUT
CONSIDERATIONS
The Timer1 oscillator circuit draws very little power
during operation. Due to the low-power nature of the
oscillator, it may also be sensitive to rapidly changing
signals in close proximity.
The oscillator circuit, shown in Figure 11-3, should be
located as close as possible to the microcontroller.
There should be no circuits passing within the oscillator
circuit boundaries other than VSS or VDD.
If a high-speed circuit must be located near the oscillator (such as the CCP1 pin in Output Compare or PWM
mode, or the primary oscillator using the OSC2 pin), a
grounded guard ring around the oscillator circuit, as
shown in Figure 11-4, may be helpful when used on a
single-sided PCB or in addition to a ground plane.
FIGURE 11-4:
OSCILLATOR CIRCUIT
WITH GROUNDED
GUARD RING
11.5
Resetting Timer1 Using the CCP
Special Event Trigger
If the CCP module is configured in Compare mode
to
generate
a
Special
Event
Trigger
(CCP1M3:CCP1M0 = 1011), this signal will reset
Timer1. The trigger from CCP1 will also start an A/D
conversion if the A/D module is enabled (see
Section 13.3.4 “Special Event Trigger” for more
information).
The module must be configured as either a timer or a
synchronous counter to take advantage of this feature.
When used this way, the CCPRH:CCPRL register pair
effectively becomes a period register for Timer1.
If Timer1 is running in Asynchronous Counter mode,
this Reset operation may not work.
In the event that a write to Timer1 coincides with a
Special Event Trigger, the write operation will take
precedence.
Note:
The Special Event Triggers from the
CCP1 module will not set the TMR1IF
interrupt flag bit (PIR1<0>).
VDD
VSS
11.6
OSC1
OSC2
Adding an external LP oscillator to Timer1 (such as the
one described in Section 11.3 “Timer1 Oscillator”)
gives users the option to include RTC functionality to
their applications. This is accomplished with an
inexpensive watch crystal to provide an accurate time
base and several lines of application code to calculate
the time. When operating in Sleep mode and using a
battery or supercapacitor as a power source, it can
completely eliminate the need for a separate RTC
device and battery backup.
RC0
RC1
RC2
Note: Not drawn to scale.
11.4
Using Timer1 as a Real-Time
Clock
Timer1 Interrupt
The TMR1 register pair (TMR1H:TMR1L) increments
from 0000h to FFFFh and rolls over to 0000h. The
Timer1 interrupt, if enabled, is generated on overflow
which is latched in interrupt flag bit, TMR1IF
(PIR1<0>). This interrupt can be enabled or disabled
by setting or clearing the Timer1 Interrupt Enable bit,
TMR1IE (PIE1<0>).
The application code routine, RTCisr, shown in
Example 11-1, demonstrates a simple method to
increment a counter at one-second intervals using an
Interrupt Service Routine. Incrementing the TMR1
register pair to overflow triggers the interrupt and calls
the routine which increments the seconds counter by
one. Additional counters for minutes and hours are
incremented as the previous counter overflows.
Since the register pair is 16 bits wide, counting up to
overflow the register directly from a 32.768 kHz clock
would take 2 seconds. To force the overflow at the
required one-second intervals, it is necessary to
preload it. The simplest method is to set the MSb of
TMR1H with a BSF instruction. Note that the TMR1L
register is never preloaded or altered; doing so may
introduce cumulative error over many cycles.
For this method to be accurate, Timer1 must operate in
Asynchronous mode and the Timer1 overflow interrupt
must be enabled (PIE1<0> = 1) as shown in the
routine, RTCinit. The Timer1 oscillator must also be
enabled and running at all times.
DS39760A-page 118
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
EXAMPLE 11-1:
IMPLEMENTING A REAL-TIME CLOCK USING A TIMER1 INTERRUPT SERVICE
RTCinit
MOVLW
MOVWF
CLRF
MOVLW
MOVWF
CLRF
CLRF
MOVLW
MOVWF
BSF
RETURN
80h
TMR1H
TMR1L
b’00001111’
T1OSC
secs
mins
d’12’
hours
PIE1, TMR1IE
; Preload TMR1 register pair
; for 1 second overflow
BSF
BCF
INCF
MOVLW
CPFSGT
RETURN
CLRF
INCF
MOVLW
CPFSGT
RETURN
CLRF
INCF
MOVLW
CPFSGT
RETURN
MOVLW
MOVWF
RETURN
TMR1H, 7
PIR1, TMR1IF
secs, F
d’59’
secs
;
;
;
;
Preload for 1 sec overflow
Clear interrupt flag
Increment seconds
60 seconds elapsed?
;
;
;
;
No, done
Clear seconds
Increment minutes
60 minutes elapsed?
;
;
;
;
No, done
clear minutes
Increment hours
24 hours elapsed?
; Configure for external clock,
; Asynchronous operation, external oscillator
; Initialize timekeeping registers
;
; Enable Timer1 interrupt
RTCisr
TABLE 11-2:
Name
INTCON
secs
mins, F
d’59’
mins
mins
hours, F
d’23’
hours
; No, done
; Reset hours to 1
d’01’
hours
; Done
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER1 AS A TIMER/COUNTER
Bit 7
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
TMR0IE
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
Bit 6
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL
PIR1
—
ADIF
RCIF
TXIF
—
CCP1IF
TMR2IF
TMR1IF
51
PIE1
—
ADIE
RCIE
TXIE
—
CCP1IE
TMR2IE
TMR1IE
51
—
ADIP
RCIP
TXIP
—
CCP1IP
TMR2IP
TMR1IP
51
IPR1
TMR1L
Timer1 Register Low Byte
50
TMR1H
TImer1 Register High Byte
50
T1CON
RD16
T1RUN
T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC
TMR1CS
TMR1ON
50
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer1 module.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 119
PIC18F2450/4450
NOTES:
DS39760A-page 120
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
12.0
TIMER2 MODULE
12.1
Timer2 Operation
• 8-bit timer and period registers (TMR2 and PR2,
respectively)
• Readable and writable (both registers)
• Software programmable prescaler (1:1, 1:4 and
1:16)
• Software programmable postscaler (1:1 through
1:16)
• Interrupt on TMR2 to PR2 match
In normal operation, TMR2 is incremented from 00h on
each clock (FOSC/4). A 2-bit counter/prescaler on the
clock input gives direct input, divide-by-4 and divide-by16 prescale options. These are selected by the prescaler
control bits, T2CKPS1:T2CKPS0 (T2CON<1:0>). The
value of TMR2 is compared to that of the period register,
PR2, on each clock cycle. When the two values match,
the comparator generates a match signal as the timer
output. This signal also resets the value of TMR2 to 00h
on the next cycle and drives the output counter/
postscaler (see Section 12.2 “Timer2 Interrupt”).
The module is controlled through the T2CON register
(Register 12-1) which enables or disables the timer and
configures the prescaler and postscaler. Timer2 can be
shut off by clearing control bit, TMR2ON (T2CON<2>),
to minimize power consumption.
The TMR2 and PR2 registers are both directly readable
and writable. The TMR2 register is cleared on any
device Reset, while the PR2 register initializes at FFh.
Both the prescaler and postscaler counters are cleared
on the following events:
A simplified block diagram of the module is shown in
Figure 12-1.
• a write to the TMR2 register
• a write to the T2CON register
• any device Reset (Power-on Reset, MCLR Reset,
Watchdog Timer Reset or Brown-out Reset)
The Timer2 module timer incorporates the following
features:
TMR2 is not cleared when T2CON is written.
REGISTER 12-1:
T2CON: TIMER2 CONTROL REGISTER
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
—
T2OUTPS3
T2OUTPS2
T2OUTPS1
T2OUTPS0
TMR2ON
T2CKPS1
T2CKPS0
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 6-3
T2OUTPS3:T2OUTPS0: Timer2 Output Postscale Select bits
0000 = 1:1 Postscale
0001 = 1:2 Postscale
•
•
•
1111 = 1:16 Postscale
bit 2
TMR2ON: Timer2 On bit
1 = Timer2 is on
0 = Timer2 is off
bit 1-0
T2CKPS1:T2CKPS0: Timer2 Clock Prescale Select bits
00 = Prescaler is 1
01 = Prescaler is 4
1x = Prescaler is 16
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
x = Bit is unknown
DS39760A-page 121
PIC18F2450/4450
12.2
Timer2 Interrupt
A range of 16 postscale options (from 1:1 through 1:16
inclusive) can be selected with the postscaler control
bits, T2OUTPS3:T2OUTPS0 (T2CON<6:3>).
Timer2 also can generate an optional device interrupt.
The Timer2 output signal (TMR2 to PR2 match)
provides the input for the 4-bit output counter/
postscaler. This counter generates the TMR2 match
interrupt flag which is latched in TMR2IF (PIR1<1>).
The interrupt is enabled by setting the TMR2 Match
Interrupt Enable bit, TMR2IE (PIE1<1>).
FIGURE 12-1:
12.3
TMR2 Output
The unscaled output of TMR2 is available primarily to
the CCP module, where it is used as a time base for
operations in PWM mode.
TIMER2 BLOCK DIAGRAM
4
1:1 to 1:16
Postscaler
T2OUTPS3:T2OUTPS0
Set TMR2IF
2
TMR2 Output
(to PWM)
T2CKPS1:T2CKPS0
TMR2/PR2
Match
Reset
1:1, 1:4, 1:16
Prescaler
FOSC/4
Comparator
TMR2
8
PR2
8
8
Internal Data Bus
TABLE 12-1:
Name
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH TIMER2 AS A TIMER/COUNTER
Bit 7
Bit 6
INTCON GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
TMR0IE
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
PIR1
—
ADIF
RCIF
TXIF
—
CCP1IF
TMR2IF
TMR1IF
51
PIE1
—
ADIE
RCIE
TXIE
—
CCP1IE
TMR2IE
TMR1IE
51
IPR1
—
ADIP
RCIP
TXIP
—
CCP1IP
TMR2IP
TMR1IP
51
TMR2
T2CON
PR2
Timer2 Register
—
50
T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0
Timer2 Period Register
50
50
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Timer2 module.
DS39760A-page 122
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
13.0
CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM
(CCP) MODULE
PIC18F2450/4450 devices have one CCP (Capture/
Compare/PWM) module. The module contains a 16-bit
register, which can operate as a 16-bit Capture register,
a 16-bit Compare register or a PWM Master/Slave Duty
Cycle register.
REGISTER 13-1:
CCP1CON: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM CONTROL REGISTER
U-0
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
—
—
DC1B1
DC1B0
CCP1M3
CCP1M2
CCP1M1
CCP1M0
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7-6
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 5-4
DC1B1:DC1B0: PWM Duty Cycle for CCP Module bits
Capture mode:
Unused.
Compare mode:
Unused.
PWM mode:
These bits are the two LSbs (bit 1 and bit 0) of the 10-bit PWM duty cycle. The eight MSbs of the duty
cycle are found in CCPR1L.
bit 3-0
CCP1M3:CCP1M0: CCP Module Mode Select bits
0000 = Capture/Compare/PWM disabled (resets CCP module)
0001 = Reserved
0010 = Compare mode: toggle output on match (CCP1IF bit is set)
0011 = Reserved
0100 = Capture mode: every falling edge
0101 = Capture mode: every rising edge
0110 = Capture mode: every 4th rising edge
0111 = Capture mode: every 16th rising edge
1000 = Compare mode: initialize CCP1 pin low; on compare match, force CCP1 pin high
(CCP1IF bit is set)
1001 = Compare mode: initialize CCP1 pin high; on compare match, force CCP1 pin low
(CCP1IF bit is set)
1010 = Compare mode: generate software interrupt on compare match (CCP1IF bit is set,
CCP1 pin reflects I/O state)
1011 = Compare mode: trigger special event, reset timer and start A/D conversion on CCP1 match
(CCP1IF bit is set)
11xx = PWM mode
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 123
PIC18F2450/4450
13.1
13.2.1
CCP Module Configuration
The Capture/Compare/PWM module is associated with
a control register (generically, CCP1CON) and a data
register (CCPR1). The data register, in turn, is
comprised of two 8-bit registers: CCPR1L (low byte)
and CCPR1H (high byte). All registers are both
readable and writable.
13.1.1
CCP MODULE AND TIMER
RESOURCES
CCP MODE – TIMER
RESOURCE
CCP Mode
Timer Resource
Capture
Compare
PWM
Timer1
Timer1
Timer2
Capture Mode
In Capture mode, the CCPR1H:CCPR1L register pair
captures the 16-bit value of the TMR1 register when an
event occurs on the corresponding CCP1 pin. An event
is defined as one of the following:
•
•
•
•
If RC2/CCP1 is configured as an output, a
write to the port can cause a capture
condition.
SOFTWARE INTERRUPT
When the Capture mode is changed, a false capture
interrupt may be generated. The user should keep the
CCP1IE interrupt enable bit clear to avoid false
interrupts. The interrupt flag bit, CCP1IF, should also
be cleared following any such change in operating
mode.
CCP PRESCALER
There are four prescaler settings in Capture mode.
They are specified as part of the operating mode
selected by the mode select bits (CCP1M3:CCP1M0).
Whenever the CCP module is turned off or Capture
mode is disabled, the prescaler counter is cleared. This
means that any Reset will clear the prescaler counter.
Switching from one capture prescaler to another may
generate an interrupt. Also, the prescaler counter will
not be cleared, therefore, the first capture may be from
a non-zero prescaler. Example 13-1 shows the
recommended method for switching between capture
prescalers. This example also clears the prescaler
counter and will not generate the “false” interrupt.
EXAMPLE 13-1:
every falling edge
every rising edge
every 4th rising edge
every 16th rising edge
The event is selected by the mode select bits,
CCP1M3:CCP1M0 (CCP1CON<3:0>). When a capture
is made, the interrupt request flag bit, CCP1IF, is set; it
must be cleared in software. If another capture occurs
before the value in register CCPR1 is read, the old
captured value is overwritten by the new captured value.
FIGURE 13-1:
Note:
13.2.3
In Timer1 in Asynchronous Counter mode, the capture
operation will not work.
13.2
In Capture mode, the CCP1 pin should be configured
as an input by setting the corresponding TRIS direction
bit.
13.2.2
The CCP module utilizes Timer1 or Timer2, depending
on the mode selected. Timer1 is available to the module in Capture or Compare modes, while Timer2 is
available for modules in PWM mode.
TABLE 13-1:
CCP1 PIN CONFIGURATION
CHANGING BETWEEN
CAPTURE PRESCALERS
(CCP1 SHOWN)
CLRF
MOVLW
CCP1CON
NEW_CAPT_PS
MOVWF
CCP1CON
;
;
;
;
;
;
Turn CCP module off
Load WREG with the
new prescaler mode
value and CCP ON
Load CCP1CON with
this value
CAPTURE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM
Set CCP1IF
CCP1 pin
Prescaler
÷ 1, 4, 16
and
Edge Detect
CCPR1H
CCPR1L
TMR1
Enable
Q1:Q4
DS39760A-page 124
TMR1H
4
CCP1CON<3:0>
TMR1L
4
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
13.3
13.3.3
Compare Mode
In Compare mode, the 16-bit CCPR1 register value is
constantly compared against the TMR1 register pair
value. When a match occurs, the CCP1 pin can be:
•
•
•
•
driven high
driven low
toggled (high-to-low or low-to-high)
remain unchanged (that is, reflects the state of the
I/O latch)
The action on the pin is based on the value of the mode
select bits (CCP1M3:CCP1M0). At the same time, the
interrupt flag bit, CCP1IF, is set.
13.3.1
CCP1 PIN CONFIGURATION
The user must configure the CCP1 pin as an output by
clearing the appropriate TRIS bit.
Note:
13.3.2
Clearing the CCP1CON register will force
the RC2 compare output latch to the
default low level.
SOFTWARE INTERRUPT MODE
When the Generate Software Interrupt mode is chosen
(CCP1M3:CCP1M0 = 1010), the CCP1 pin is not
affected. Only a CCP interrupt is generated, if enabled,
and the CCP1IE bit is set.
13.3.4
SPECIAL EVENT TRIGGER
The CCP module is equipped with a Special Event
Trigger. This is an internal hardware signal generated
in Compare mode to trigger actions by other modules.
The Special Event Trigger is enabled by selecting
the Compare Special Event Trigger mode
(CCP1M3:CCP1M0 = 1011).
For the CCP module, the Special Event Trigger resets
the Timer1 register pair. This allows the CCPR1
registers to serve as a programmable period register
for the Timer1.
The Special Event Trigger for CCP1 can also start an
A/D conversion. In order to do this, the A/D converter
must already be enabled.
TIMER1 MODE SELECTION
Timer1 must be running in Timer mode, or
Synchronized Counter mode, if the CCP module is
using the compare feature. In Asynchronous Counter
mode, the compare operation may not work.
FIGURE 13-2:
COMPARE MODE OPERATION BLOCK DIAGRAM
CCPR1H
CCPR1L
Set CCP1IF
Special Event Trigger
(Timer1 Reset)
CCP1 pin
Comparator
Compare
Match
Output
Logic
4
S
Q
R
TRIS
Output Enable
CCP1CON<3:0>
TMR1H
TMR1L
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 125
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 13-2:
Name
INTCON
RCON
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH CAPTURE, COMPARE, TIMER1
Bit 7
Bit 6
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL
IPEN
Reset
Values
on page
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
TMR0IE
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
—
RI
TO
PD
POR
BOR
50
SBOREN(1)
PIR1
—
ADIF
RCIF
TXIF
—
CCP1IF
TMR2IF
TMR1IF
51
PIE1
—
ADIE
RCIE
TXIE
—
CCP1IE
TMR2IE
TMR1IE
51
—
ADIP
RCIP
TXIP
—
CCP1IP
TMR2IP
TMR1IP
51
TRISC7
TRISC6
—
—
—
TRISC2
TRISC1
TRISC0
51
IPR1
TRISC
TMR1L
Timer1 Register Low Byte
50
TMR1H
Timer1 Register High Byte
50
T1CON
RD16
T1RUN
T1CKPS1 T1CKPS0 T1OSCEN T1SYNC
TMR1CS TMR1ON
50
CCPR1L
Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 Low Byte
50
CCPR1H
Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 High Byte
50
CCP1CON
—
—
DC1B1
DC1B0
CCP1M3
CCP1M2
CCP1M1
CCP1M0
50
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by Capture/Compare and Timer1.
Note 1: The SBOREN bit is only available when BOREN<1:0> = 01; otherwise, the bit reads as ‘0’.
DS39760A-page 126
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
13.4
13.4.1
PWM Mode
In Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) mode, the CCP1 pin
produces up to a 10-bit resolution PWM output.
Figure 13-3 shows a simplified block diagram of the
CCP module in PWM mode.
EQUATION 13-1:
For a step-by-step procedure on how to set up the CCP
module for PWM operation, see Section 13.4.3
“Setup for PWM Operation”.
FIGURE 13-3:
SIMPLIFIED PWM BLOCK
DIAGRAM
CCP1CON<5:4>
Duty Cycle Registers
PWM PERIOD
The PWM period is specified by writing to the PR2
register. The PWM period can be calculated using the
following formula:
PWM Period = [(PR2) + 1] • 4 • TOSC •
(TMR2 Prescale Value)
PWM frequency is defined as 1/[PWM period].
When TMR2 is equal to PR2, the following three events
occur on the next increment cycle:
• TMR2 is cleared
• The CCP1 pin is set (exception: if PWM duty
cycle = 0%, the CCP1 pin will not be set)
• The PWM duty cycle is latched from CCPR1L into
CCPR1H
CCPR1L
CCPR1H (Slave)
Note:
R
Comparator
Q
CCP1
Output
(Note 1)
TMR2
S
Comparator
Clear Timer,
CCP1 pin and
latch D.C.
PR2
Corresponding
TRIS bit
Note 1: The 8-bit TMR2 value is concatenated with the 2-bit
internal Q clock, or 2 bits of the prescaler, to create
the 10-bit time base.
A PWM output (Figure 13-4) has a time base (period)
and a time that the output stays high (duty cycle).
The frequency of the PWM is the inverse of the
period (1/period).
FIGURE 13-4:
PWM OUTPUT
13.4.2
The Timer2 postscalers (see Section 12.0
“Timer2 Module”) are not used in the
determination of the PWM frequency. The
postscaler could be used to have a servo
update rate at a different frequency than
the PWM output.
PWM DUTY CYCLE
The PWM duty cycle is specified by writing to the
CCPR1L register and to the CCP1CON<5:4> bits. Up
to 10-bit resolution is available. The CCPR1L contains
the eight MSbs and the CCP1CON<5:4> bits contain
the two LSbs. This 10-bit value is represented by
CCPR1L:CCP1CON<5:4>. The following equation is
used to calculate the PWM duty cycle in time:
EQUATION 13-2:
PWM Duty Cycle = (CCPR1L:CCP1CON<5:4>) •
TOSC • (TMR2 Prescale Value)
Period
Duty Cycle
TMR2 = PR2
CCPR1L and CCP1CON<5:4> can be written to at any
time, but the duty cycle value is not latched into
CCPR1H until after a match between PR2 and TMR2
occurs (i.e., the period is complete). In PWM mode,
CCPR1H is a read-only register.
TMR2 = Duty Cycle
TMR2 = PR2
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 127
PIC18F2450/4450
13.4.3
The CCPR1H register and a 2-bit internal latch are
used to double-buffer the PWM duty cycle. This
double-buffering is essential for glitchless PWM
operation.
The following steps should be taken when configuring
the CCP module for PWM operation:
1.
When the CCPR1H and 2-bit latch match TMR2,
concatenated with an internal 2-bit Q clock or 2 bits of
the TMR2 prescaler, the CCP1 pin is cleared.
2.
The maximum PWM resolution (bits) for a given PWM
frequency is given by the equation:
3.
4.
EQUATION 13-3:
F OSC
log ⎛ ---------------⎞
⎝ F PWM⎠
PWM Resolution (max) = -----------------------------bits
log ( 2 )
Note:
EXAMPLE PWM FREQUENCIES AND RESOLUTIONS AT 40 MHz
PWM Frequency
2.44 kHz
9.77 kHz
39.06 kHz
156.25 kHz
312.50 kHz
416.67 kHz
16
4
1
1
1
1
FFh
FFh
FFh
3Fh
1Fh
17h
10
10
10
8
7
6.58
Timer Prescaler (1, 4, 16)
PR2 Value
Maximum Resolution (bits)
TABLE 13-4:
INTCON
5.
Set the PWM period by writing to the PR2
register.
Set the PWM duty cycle by writing to the
CCPR1L register and CCP1CON<5:4> bits.
Make the CCP1 pin an output by clearing the
appropriate TRIS bit.
Set the TMR2 prescale value, then enable
Timer2 by writing to T2CON.
Configure the CCP module for PWM operation.
If the PWM duty cycle value is longer than
the PWM period, the CCP1 pin will not be
cleared.
TABLE 13-3:
Name
SETUP FOR PWM OPERATION
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH PWM AND TIMER2
Bit 7
Bit 6
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
TMR0IE
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
IPEN
SBOREN(1)
—
RI
TO
PD
POR
BOR
50
PIR1
—
ADIF
RCIF
TXIF
—
CCP1IF
TMR2IF
TMR1IF
51
PIE1
—
ADIE
RCIE
TXIE
—
CCP1IE
TMR2IE
TMR1IE
51
IPR1
—
ADIP
RCIP
TXIP
—
CCP1IP
TMR2IP
TMR1IP
51
TRISC7
TRISC6
—
—
—
TRISC2
TRISC1
TRISC0
51
RCON
TRISC
TMR2
Timer2 Register
PR2
Timer2 Period Register
T2CON
—
50
50
T2OUTPS3 T2OUTPS2 T2OUTPS1 T2OUTPS0 TMR2ON
T2CKPS1 T2CKPS0
50
CCPR1L
Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 Low Byte
50
CCPR1H
Capture/Compare/PWM Register 1 High Byte
50
CCP1CON
—
—
DC1B1
DC1B0
CCP1M3
CCP1M2
CCP1M1
CCP1M0
50
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by PWM or Timer2.
Note 1: The SBOREN bit is only available when BOREN<1:0> = 01; otherwise, the bit reads as ‘0’.
DS39760A-page 128
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
14.0
UNIVERSAL SERIAL BUS
(USB)
This section describes the details of the USB peripheral.
Because of the very specific nature of the module,
knowledge of USB is expected. Some high-level USB
information is provided in Section 14.9 “Overview of
USB” only for application design reference. Designers
are encouraged to refer to the official specification
published by the USB Implementers Forum (USB-IF) for
the latest information. USB Specification Revision 2.0 is
the most current specification at the time of publication
of this document.
14.1
Overview of the USB Peripheral
any USB host and the PIC® microcontroller. The SIE can
be interfaced directly to the USB, utilizing the internal
transceiver, or it can be connected through an external
transceiver. An internal 3.3V regulator is also available
to power the internal transceiver in 5V applications.
Some special hardware features have been included to
improve performance. Dual port memory in the
device’s data memory space (USB RAM) has been
supplied to share direct memory access between the
microcontroller core and the SIE. Buffer descriptors are
also provided, allowing users to freely program
endpoint memory usage within the USB RAM space.
Figure 14-1 presents a general overview of the USB
peripheral and its features.
The PIC18F2450/4450 device family contains a fullspeed and low-speed compatible USB Serial Interface
Engine (SIE) that allows fast communication between
FIGURE 14-1:
USB PERIPHERAL AND OPTIONS
PIC18F2450/4450 Family
3.3V Regulator
VREGEN
External 3.3V
Supply(3)
VUSB
EN
External
Pull-ups(2)
FSEN
UTRDIS
(Full
Speed)
Transceiver
FS
USB Clock from the
Oscillator Module
OE
USB Control and
Configuration
USB
SIE
(Low
Speed)
USB Bus
D+
DUOE(1)
VM(1)
VP(1)
RCV(1)
VMO(1)
VPO(1)
External
Transceiver
USB Bus
256-Byte
USB RAM
Note 1:
This signal is only available if the internal transceiver is disabled (UTRDIS = 1).
2:
The pull-ups can be supplied either from the VUSB pin or from an external 3.3V supply.
3:
Do not enable the internal regulator when using an external 3.3V supply.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 129
PIC18F2450/4450
14.2
USB Status and Control
In addition, the USB Control register contains a status
bit, SE0 (UCON<5>), which is used to indicate the
occurrence of a single-ended zero on the bus. When
the USB module is enabled, this bit should be
monitored to determine whether the differential data
lines have come out of a single-ended zero condition.
This helps to differentiate the initial power-up state from
the USB Reset signal.
The operation of the USB module is configured and
managed through three control registers. In addition, a
total of 22 registers are used to manage the actual USB
transactions. The registers are:
•
•
•
•
•
•
USB Control register (UCON)
USB Configuration register (UCFG)
USB Transfer Status register (USTAT)
USB Device Address register (UADDR)
Frame Number registers (UFRMH:UFRML)
Endpoint Enable registers 0 through 15 (UEPn)
14.2.1
The overall operation of the USB module is controlled
by the USBEN bit (UCON<3>). Setting this bit activates
the module and resets all of the PPBI bits in the Buffer
Descriptor Table to ‘0’. This bit also activates the onchip voltage regulator, if enabled. Thus, this bit can be
used as a soft attach/detach to the USB. Although all
status and control bits are ignored when this bit is clear,
the module needs to be fully preconfigured prior to
setting this bit.
USB CONTROL REGISTER (UCON)
The USB Control register (Register 14-1) contains bits
needed to control the module behavior during transfers.
The register contains bits that control the following:
•
•
•
•
Main USB Peripheral Enable
Ping-Pong Buffer Pointer Reset
Control of the Suspend mode
Packet Transfer Disable
REGISTER 14-1:
UCON: USB CONTROL REGISTER
U-0
R/W-0
R-x
R/C-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
U-0
—
PPBRST
SE0
PKTDIS
USBEN
RESUME
SUSPND
—
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
C = Clearable bit
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 6
PPBRST: Ping-Pong Buffers Reset bit
1 = Reset all Ping-Pong Buffer Pointers to the Even Buffer Descriptor (BD) banks
0 = Ping-Pong Buffer Pointers not being reset
bit 5
SE0: Live Single-Ended Zero Flag bit
1 = Single-ended zero active on the USB bus
0 = No single-ended zero detected
bit 4
PKTDIS: Packet Transfer Disable bit
1 = SIE token and packet processing disabled, automatically set when a SETUP token is received
0 = SIE token and packet processing enabled
bit 3
USBEN: USB Module Enable bit
1 = USB module and supporting circuitry enabled (device attached)
0 = USB module and supporting circuitry disabled (device detached)
bit 2
RESUME: Resume Signaling Enable bit
1 = Resume signaling activated
0 = Resume signaling disabled
bit 1
SUSPND: Suspend USB bit
1 = USB module and supporting circuitry in Power Conserve mode, SIE clock inactive
0 = USB module and supporting circuitry in normal operation, SIE clock clocked at the configured rate
bit 0
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
DS39760A-page 130
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
The PPBRST bit (UCON<6>) controls the Reset status
when Double-Buffering mode (ping-pong buffering) is
used. When the PPBRST bit is set, all Ping-Pong
Buffer Pointers are set to the Even buffers. PPBRST
has to be cleared by firmware. This bit is ignored in
buffering modes not using ping-pong buffering.
The PKTDIS bit (UCON<4>) is a flag indicating that the
SIE has disabled packet transmission and reception.
This bit is set by the SIE when a SETUP token is
received to allow setup processing. This bit cannot be
set by the microcontroller, only cleared; clearing it
allows the SIE to continue transmission and/or
reception. Any pending events within the Buffer
Descriptor Table will still be available, indicated within
the USTAT register’s FIFO buffer.
The RESUME bit (UCON<2>) allows the peripheral to
perform a remote wake-up by executing Resume
signaling. To generate a valid remote wake-up,
firmware must set RESUME for 10 ms and then clear
the bit. For more information on Resume signaling, see
Sections 7.1.7.5, 11.4.4 and 11.9 in the USB 2.0
specification.
The SUSPND bit (UCON<1>) places the module and
supporting circuitry (i.e., voltage regulator) in a lowpower mode. The input clock to the SIE is also
disabled. This bit should be set by the software in
response to an IDLEIF interrupt. It should be reset by
the microcontroller firmware after an ACTVIF interrupt
is observed. When this bit is active, the device remains
attached to the bus but the transceiver outputs remain
Idle. The voltage on the VUSB pin may vary depending
on the value of this bit. Setting this bit before a IDLEIF
request will result in unpredictable bus behavior.
Note:
14.2.2
While in Suspend mode, a typical bus
powered USB device is limited to 500 μA
of current. This is the complete current
drawn by the PICmicro device and its supporting circuitry. Care should be taken to
assure minimum current draw when the
device enters Suspend mode.
The UCFG register also contains two bits which aid in
module testing, debugging and USB certifications.
These bits control output enable state monitoring and
eye pattern generation.
Note:
14.2.2.1
The UFCG register contains most of the bits that
control the system level behavior of the USB module.
These include:
Internal Transceiver
The USB peripheral has a built-in, USB 2.0, full-speed
and low-speed compliant transceiver, internally connected to the SIE. This feature is useful for low-cost
single chip applications. The UTRDIS bit (UCFG<3>)
controls the transceiver; it is enabled by default
(UTRDIS = 0). The FSEN bit (UCFG<2>) controls the
transceiver speed; setting the bit enables full-speed
operation.
The USB specification requires 3.3V operation for
communications; however, the rest of the chip may be
running at a higher voltage. Thus, the transceiver is
supplied power from a separate source, VUSB.
14.2.2.2
External Transceiver
This module provides support for use with an off-chip
transceiver. The off-chip transceiver is intended for
applications where physical conditions dictate the
location of the transceiver to be away from the SIE. For
example, applications that require isolation from the
USB could use an external transceiver through some
isolation to the microcontroller’s SIE (Figure 14-2).
External transceiver operation is enabled by setting the
UTRDIS bit.
FIGURE 14-2:
PIC®
Microcontroller
USB CONFIGURATION REGISTER
(UCFG)
Prior to communicating over USB, the module’s
associated internal and/or external hardware must be
configured. Most of the configuration is performed with
the UCFG register (Register 14-2). The separate USB
voltage regulator (see Section 14.2.2.7 “Internal
Regulator”) is controlled through the Configuration
registers.
The USB speed, transceiver and pull-up
should only be configured during the module setup phase. It is not recommended to
switch these settings while the module is
enabled.
TYPICAL EXTERNAL
TRANSCEIVER WITH
ISOLATION
VDD Isolated
from USB
3.3V Derived
from USB
VDD
VUSB
VM
VP
RCV
VMO
VPO
UOE
Note:
1.5 kΩ
Isolation
Transceiver
D+
D-
The above setting shows a simplified schematic
for a full-speed configuration using an external
transceiver with isolation.
• Bus Speed (full speed versus low speed)
• On-Chip Transceiver Enable
• Ping-Pong Buffer Usage
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 131
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 14-2:
UCFG: USB CONFIGURATION REGISTER
R/W-0
R/W-0
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
UTEYE
UOEMON(1)
—
UPUEN(2,3)
UTRDIS(2)
FSEN(2)
PPB1
PPB0
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
UTEYE: USB Eye Pattern Test Enable bit
1 = Eye pattern test enabled
0 = Eye pattern test disabled
bit 6
UOEMON: USB OE Monitor Enable bit(1)
1 = UOE signal active; it indicates intervals during which the D+/D- lines are driving
0 = UOE signal inactive
bit 5
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 4
UPUEN: USB On-Chip Pull-up Enable bit(2,3)
1 = On-chip pull-up enabled (pull-up on D+ with FSEN = 1 or D- with FSEN = 0)
0 = On-chip pull-up disabled
bit 3
UTRDIS: On-Chip Transceiver Disable bit(2)
1 = On-chip transceiver disabled; digital transceiver interface enabled
0 = On-chip transceiver active
bit 2
FSEN: Full-Speed Enable bit(2)
1 = Full-speed device: controls transceiver edge rates; requires input clock at 48 MHz
0 = Low-speed device: controls transceiver edge rates; requires input clock at 6 MHz
bit 1-0
PPB1:PPB0: Ping-Pong Buffers Configuration bits
11 = Enabled for all endpoints except Endpoint 0
10 = Even/Odd ping-pong buffers enabled for all endpoints
01 = Even/Odd ping-pong buffer enabled for OUT Endpoint 0
00 = Even/Odd ping-pong buffers disabled
Note 1:
2:
3:
If UTRDIS is set, the UOE signal will be active independent of the UOEMON bit setting.
The UPUEN, UTRDIS and FSEN bits should never be changed while the USB module is enabled. These
values must be preconfigured prior to enabling the module.
This bit is only valid when the on-chip transceiver is active (UTRDIS = 0); otherwise, it is ignored.
There are 6 signals from the module to communicate
with and control an external transceiver:
•
•
•
•
•
•
VM: Input from the single-ended D- line
VP: Input from the single-ended D+ line
RCV: Input from the differential receiver
VMO: Output to the differential line driver
VPO: Output to the differential line driver
UOE: Output enable
DS39760A-page 132
The VPO and VMO signals are outputs from the SIE to
the external transceiver. The RCV signal is the output
from the external transceiver to the SIE; it represents
the differential signals from the serial bus translated
into a single pulse train. The VM and VP signals are
used to report conditions on the serial bus to the SIE
that can’t be captured with the RCV signal. The
combinations of states of these signals and their
interpretation are listed in Table 14-1 and Table 14-2.
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 14-1:
DIFFERENTIAL OUTPUTS TO
TRANSCEIVER
VPO
VMO
Bus State
0
0
Single-Ended Zero
0
1
Differential ‘0’
1
0
Differential ‘1’
1
1
Illegal Condition
14.2.2.5
The USB OE monitoring is useful for initial system
debugging, as well as scope triggering during eye
pattern generation tests.
14.2.2.6
TABLE 14-2:
SINGLE-ENDED INPUTS
FROM TRANSCEIVER
VP
VM
Bus State
0
0
Single-Ended Zero
0
1
Low Speed
1
0
High Speed
1
1
Error
The UOE signal toggles the state of the external
transceiver. This line is pulled low by the device to
enable the transmission of data from the SIE to an
external device.
14.2.2.3
Pull-up Resistors
The PIC18F2450/4450 devices require an external pullup resistor to meet the requirements for low-speed and
full-speed USB. Either an external 3.3V supply or the
VUSB pin may be used to pull up D+ or D-. The pull-up
resistor must be 1.5 kΩ (±5%) as required by the USB
specifications. Figure 14-3 shows an example with the
VUSB pin.
FIGURE 14-3:
EXTERNAL CIRCUITRY
PIC®
Microcontroller
Host
Controller/HUB
VUSB
Once UTEYE is set, the module emulates a switch from
a receive to transmit state and will start transmitting a
J-K-J-K bit sequence (K-J-K-J for full speed). The
sequence will be repeated indefinitely while the Eye
Pattern Test mode is enabled.
Note that this bit should never be set while the module
is connected to an actual USB system. This test mode
is intended for board verification to aid with USB
certification tests. It is intended to show a system
developer the noise integrity of the USB signals which
can be affected by board traces, impedance
mismatches and proximity to other system
components. It does not properly test the transition
from a receive to a transmit state. Although the eye
pattern is not meant to replace the more complex USB
certification test, it should aid during first order system
debugging.
14.2.2.7
D-
14.2.2.4
The above setting shows a typical connection
for a full-speed configuration using an on-chip
regulator and an external pull-up resistor.
Ping-Pong Buffer Configuration
Internal Regulator
The PIC18F2450/4450 devices have a built-in 3.3V
regulator to provide power to the internal transceiver and
provide a source for the external pull-ups. An external
220 nF (±20%) capacitor is required for stability.
The drive from VUSB is sufficient to only
drive an external pull-up in addition to the
internal transceiver.
1.5 kΩ
D+
Eye Pattern Test Enable
An automatic eye pattern test can be generated by the
module when the UCFG<7> bit is set. The eye pattern
output will be observable based on module settings,
meaning that the user is first responsible for configuring
the SIE clock settings, pull-up resistor and Transceiver
mode. In addition, the module has to be enabled.
Note:
Note:
USB Output Enable Monitor
The USB OE monitor provides indication as to whether
the SIE is listening to the bus or actively driving the bus.
This is enabled by default when using an external
transceiver or when UCFG<6> = 1.
The regulator is enabled by default and can be disabled
through the VREGEN Configuration bit. When enabled,
the voltage is visible on pin VUSB. When the regulator
is disabled, a 3.3V source must be provided through
the VUSB pin for the internal transceiver. If the internal
transceiver is disabled, VUSB is not used.
Note 1: Do not enable the internal regulator if an
external regulator is connected to VUSB.
2: VDD must be greater than VUSB at all
times, even with the regulator disabled.
The usage of ping-pong buffers is configured using the
PPB1:PPB0 bits. Refer to Section 14.4.4 “Ping-Pong
Buffering” for a complete explanation of the ping-pong
buffers.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 133
PIC18F2450/4450
14.2.3
USB STATUS REGISTER (USTAT)
Clearing the transfer complete flag bit, TRNIF, causes
the SIE to advance the FIFO. If the next data in the
FIFO holding register is valid, the SIE will immediately
reassert the interrupt. If no additional data is present,
TRNIF will remain clear; USTAT data will no longer be
reliable.
The USB Status register reports the transaction status
within the SIE. When the SIE issues a USB transfer
complete interrupt, USTAT should be read to determine
the status of the transfer. USTAT contains the transfer
endpoint number, direction and Ping-Pong Buffer
Pointer value (if used).
Note:
Note:
The data in the USB Status register is valid
only when the TRNIF interrupt flag is
asserted.
The USTAT register is actually a read window into a
four-byte status FIFO, maintained by the SIE. It allows
the microcontroller to process one transfer while the
SIE processes additional endpoints (Figure 14-4).
When the SIE completes using a buffer for reading or
writing data, it updates the USTAT register. If another
USB transfer is performed before a transaction
complete interrupt is serviced, the SIE will store the
status of the next transfer into the status FIFO.
If an endpoint request is received while the
USTAT FIFO is full, the SIE will
automatically issue a NAK back to the
host.
FIGURE 14-4:
USTAT FIFO
USTAT from SIE
Clearing TRNIF
Advances FIFO
4-byte FIFO
for USTAT
Data Bus
REGISTER 14-3:
USTAT: USB STATUS REGISTER
U-0
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
R-x
U-0
—
ENDP3
ENDP2
ENDP1
ENDP0
DIR
PPBI(1)
—
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 6-3
ENDP3:ENDP0: Encoded Number of Last Endpoint Activity bits
(represents the number of the BDT updated by the last USB transfer)
1111 = Endpoint 15
1110 = Endpoint 14
....
0001 = Endpoint 1
0000 = Endpoint 0
bit 2
DIR: Last BD Direction Indicator bit
1 = The last transaction was an IN token
0 = The last transaction was an OUT or SETUP token
bit 1
PPBI: Ping-Pong BD Pointer Indicator bit(1)
1 = The last transaction was to the Odd BD bank
0 = The last transaction was to the Even BD bank
bit 0
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
Note 1:
x = Bit is unknown
This bit is only valid for endpoints with available Even and Odd BD registers.
DS39760A-page 134
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
14.2.4
USB ENDPOINT CONTROL
Each of the 16 possible bidirectional endpoints has its
own independent control register, UEPn (where ‘n’ represents the endpoint number). Each register has an
identical complement of control bits. The prototype is
shown in Register 14-4.
The EPHSHK bit (UEPn<4>) controls handshaking for
the endpoint; setting this bit enables USB handshaking.
Typically, this bit is always set except when using
isochronous endpoints.
The EPCONDIS bit (UEPn<3>) is used to enable or
disable USB control operations (SETUP) through the
endpoint. Clearing this bit enables SETUP
transactions. Note that the corresponding EPINEN and
EPOUTEN bits must be set to enable IN and OUT
REGISTER 14-4:
transactions. For Endpoint 0, this bit should always be
cleared since the USB specifications identify
Endpoint 0 as the default control endpoint.
The EPOUTEN bit (UEPn<2>) is used to enable or disable USB OUT transactions from the host. Setting this
bit enables OUT transactions. Similarly, the EPINEN bit
(UEPn<1>) enables or disables USB IN transactions
from the host.
The EPSTALL bit (UEPn<0>) is used to indicate a
STALL condition for the endpoint. If a STALL is issued
on a particular endpoint, the EPSTALL bit for that endpoint pair will be set by the SIE. This bit remains set
until it is cleared through firmware, or until the SIE is
reset.
UEPn: USB ENDPOINT n CONTROL REGISTER (UEP0 THROUGH UEP15)
U-0
U-0
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS
EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL(1)
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7-5
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 4
EPHSHK: Endpoint Handshake Enable bit
1 = Endpoint handshake enabled
0 = Endpoint handshake disabled (typically used for isochronous endpoints)
bit 3
EPCONDIS: Bidirectional Endpoint Control bit
If EPOUTEN = 1 and EPINEN = 1:
1 = Disable Endpoint n from control transfers; only IN and OUT transfers allowed
0 = Enable Endpoint n for control (SETUP) transfers; IN and OUT transfers also allowed
bit 2
EPOUTEN: Endpoint Output Enable bit
1 = Endpoint n output enabled
0 = Endpoint n output disabled
bit 1
EPINEN: Endpoint Input Enable bit
1 = Endpoint n input enabled
0 = Endpoint n input disabled
bit 0
EPSTALL: Endpoint Stall Enable bit(1)
1 = Endpoint n is stalled
0 = Endpoint n is not stalled
Note 1:
Valid only if Endpoint n is enabled; otherwise, the bit is ignored.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 135
PIC18F2450/4450
14.2.5
USB ADDRESS REGISTER
(UADDR)
FIGURE 14-5:
The USB Address register contains the unique USB
address that the peripheral will decode when active.
UADDR is reset to 00h when a USB Reset is received,
indicated by URSTIF, or when a Reset is received from
the microcontroller. The USB address must be written
by the microcontroller during the USB setup phase
(enumeration) as part of the Microchip USB firmware
support.
14.2.6
USB FRAME NUMBER REGISTERS
(UFRMH:UFRML)
Banks 0
to 1
Banks 2
to 3
Bank 4
The Frame Number registers contain the 11-bit frame
number. The low-order byte is contained in UFRML,
while the three high-order bits are contained in
UFRMH. The register pair is updated with the current
frame number whenever a SOF token is received. For
the microcontroller, these registers are read-only. The
Frame Number register is primarily used for
isochronous transfers.
14.3
000h
User Data
1FFh
200h
Unused
Buffer Descriptors,
USB Data or User Data
3FFh
400h
4FFh
500h
USB Data or
User Data
Banks 5
to 14
USB RAM
IMPLEMENTATION OF
USB RAM IN DATA
MEMORY SPACE
7FFh
800h
Unused
USB data moves between the microcontroller core and
the SIE through a memory space known as the USB
RAM. This is a special dual port memory that is
mapped into the normal data memory space in Bank 4
(400h to 4FFh) for a total of 256 bytes (Figure 14-5).
Some portion of Bank 4 (400h through 4FFh) is used
specifically for endpoint buffer control, while the
remaining portion is available for USB data. Depending
on the type of buffering being used, all but 8 bytes of
Bank 4 may also be available for use as USB buffer
space.
Bank15
Although USB RAM is available to the microcontroller
as data memory, the sections that are being accessed
by the SIE should not be accessed by the
microcontroller. A semaphore mechanism is used to
determine the access to a particular buffer at any given
time. This is discussed in Section 14.4.1.1 “Buffer
Ownership”.
DS39760A-page 136
Advance Information
SFRs
F00h
F80h
FFFh
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
14.4
Buffer Descriptors and the Buffer
Descriptor Table
The registers in Bank 4 are used specifically for endpoint buffer control in a structure known as the Buffer
Descriptor Table (BDT). This provides a flexible method
for users to construct and control endpoint buffers of
various lengths and configuration.
The BDT is composed of Buffer Descriptors (BD) which
are used to define and control the actual buffers in the
USB RAM space. Each BD, in turn, consists of four
registers, where n represents one of the 64 possible
BDs (range of 0 to 63):
•
•
•
•
BDnSTAT: BD Status register
BDnCNT: BD Byte Count register
BDnADRL: BD Address Low register
BDnADRH: BD Address High register
BD STATUS AND CONFIGURATION
Buffer descriptors not only define the size of an
endpoint buffer, but also determine its configuration
and control. Most of the configuration is done with the
BD Status register, BDnSTAT. Each BD has its own
unique and correspondingly numbered BDnSTAT
register.
FIGURE 14-6:
Buffer
Descriptor
EXAMPLE OF A BUFFER
DESCRIPTOR
Address
Registers
Contents
400h
BD0STAT
(xxh)
401h
BD0CNT
10h
402h
BD0ADRL
80h
403h
BD0ADRH
04h
Size of Block
Starting
Address
480h
BDs always occur as a four-byte block in the sequence,
BDnSTAT:BDnCNT:BDnADRL:BDnADRH. The address
of BDnSTAT is always an offset of (4n – 1) (in
hexadecimal) from 400h, with n being the buffer
descriptor number.
Depending on the buffering configuration used
(Section 14.4.4 “Ping-Pong Buffering”), there are up
to 32, 33 or 64 sets of buffer descriptors. At a minimum,
the BDT must be at least 8 bytes long. This is because
the USB specification mandates that every device must
have Endpoint 0 with both input and output for initial
setup. Depending on the endpoint and buffering
configuration, the BDT can be as long as 256 bytes.
Although they can be thought of as Special Function
Registers, the Buffer Descriptor Status and Address
registers are not hardware mapped, as conventional
microcontroller SFRs in Bank 15 are. If the endpoint corresponding to a particular BD is not enabled, its registers
are not used. Instead of appearing as unimplemented
addresses, however, they appear as available RAM.
Only when an endpoint is enabled by setting the
UEPn<1> bit does the memory at those addresses
become functional as BD registers. As with any address
in the data memory space, the BD registers have an
indeterminate value on any device Reset.
A total of 256 bytes of address space in Bank 4 is
available for BDT and USB data RAM. In Ping-Pong
Buffer mode, all the 16 bidirectional endpoints can not
be implemented where BDT itself can be as long as
256 bytes. In the majority of USB applications, few
endpoints are required to be implemented. Hence, a
small portion of the 256 bytes will be used for BDT and
the rest can be used for USB data.
An example of a BD for a 16-byte buffer, starting at
480h, is shown in Figure 14-6. A particular set of BD
registers is only valid if the corresponding endpoint has
been enabled using the UEPn register. All BD registers
are available in USB RAM. The BD for each endpoint
should be set up prior to enabling the endpoint.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
14.4.1
USB Data
Buffer
48Fh
Note:
Memory regions not to scale.
Unlike other control registers, the bit configuration for
the BDnSTAT register is context sensitive. There are
two distinct configurations, depending on whether the
microcontroller or the USB module is modifying the BD
and buffer at a particular time. Only three bit definitions
are shared between the two.
14.4.1.1
Buffer Ownership
Because the buffers and their BDs are shared between
the CPU and the USB module, a simple semaphore
mechanism is used to distinguish which is allowed to
update the BD and associated buffers in memory.
This is done by using the UOWN bit (BDnSTAT<7>) as
a semaphore to distinguish which is allowed to update
the BD and associated buffers in memory. UOWN is the
only bit that is shared between the two configurations
of BDnSTAT.
When UOWN is clear, the BD entry is “owned” by the
microcontroller core. When the UOWN bit is set, the BD
entry and the buffer memory are “owned” by the USB
peripheral. The core should not modify the BD or its
corresponding data buffer during this time. Note that
the microcontroller core can still read BDnSTAT while
the SIE owns the buffer and vice versa.
The buffer descriptors have a different meaning based
on the source of the register update. Prior to placing
ownership with the USB peripheral, the user can configure the basic operation of the peripheral through the
BDnSTAT bits. During this time, the byte count and
buffer location registers can also be set.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 137
PIC18F2450/4450
When UOWN is set, the user can no longer depend on
the values that were written to the BDs. From this point,
the SIE updates the BDs as necessary, overwriting the
original BD values. The BDnSTAT register is updated
by the SIE with the token PID and the transfer count,
BDnCNT, is updated.
The BDnSTAT byte of the BDT should always be the
last byte updated when preparing to arm an endpoint.
The SIE will clear the UOWN bit when a transaction
has completed. The only exception to this is when KEN
is enabled and/or BSTALL is enabled.
No hardware mechanism exists to block access when
the UOWN bit is set. Thus, unexpected behavior can
occur if the microcontroller attempts to modify memory
when the SIE owns it. Similarly, reading such memory
may produce inaccurate data until the USB peripheral
returns ownership to the microcontroller.
14.4.1.2
BDnSTAT Register (CPU Mode)
When UOWN = 0, the microcontroller core owns the
BD. At this point, the other seven bits of the register
take on control functions.
The Data Toggle Sync Enable bit, DTSEN
(BDnSTAT<3>), controls data toggle parity checking.
Setting DTSEN enables data toggle synchronization by
the SIE. When enabled, it checks the data packet’s
parity against the value of DTS (BDnSTAT<6>). If a
packet arrives with an incorrect synchronization, the
data will essentially be ignored. It will not be written to
TABLE 14-3:
the USB RAM and the USB transfer complete interrupt
flag will not be set. The SIE will send an ACK token
back to the host to Acknowledge receipt, however. The
effects of the DTSEN bit on the SIE are summarized in
Table 14-3.
The Buffer Stall bit, BSTALL (BDnSTAT<2>), provides
support for control transfers, usually one-time stalls on
Endpoint 0. It also provides support for the
SET_FEATURE/CLEAR_FEATURE commands specified in Chapter 9 of the USB specification; typically,
continuous STALLs to any endpoint other than the
default control endpoint.
The BSTALL bit enables buffer stalls. Setting BSTALL
causes the SIE to return a STALL token to the host if a
received token would use the BD in that location. The
EPSTALL bit in the corresponding UEPn control
register is set and a STALL interrupt is generated when
a STALL is issued to the host. The UOWN bit remains
set and the BDs are not changed unless a SETUP
token is received. In this case, the STALL condition is
cleared and the ownership of the BD is returned to the
microcontroller core.
The BD9:BD8 bits (BDnSTAT<1:0>) store the two most
significant digits of the SIE byte count; the lower 8 digits
are stored in the corresponding BDnCNT register. See
Section 14.4.2 “BD Byte Count” for more
information.
EFFECT OF DTSEN BIT ON ODD/EVEN (DATA0/DATA1) PACKET RECEPTION
OUT Packet
from Host
BDnSTAT Settings
Device Response after Receiving Packet
DTSEN
DTS
Handshake
UOWN
TRNIF
BDnSTAT and USTAT Status
DATA0
1
0
ACK
0
1
Updated
DATA1
1
0
ACK
1
0
Not Updated
DATA0
1
1
ACK
0
1
Updated
DATA1
1
1
ACK
1
0
Not Updated
Either
0
x
ACK
0
1
Updated
Either, with error
x
x
NAK
1
0
Not Updated
Legend: x = don’t care
DS39760A-page 138
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 14-5:
R/W-x
BDnSTAT: BUFFER DESCRIPTOR n STATUS REGISTER (BD0STAT THROUGH
BD63STAT), CPU MODE (DATA IS WRITTEN TO THE SIDE)
R/W-x
UOWN(1)
(2)
DTS
R/W-x
R/W-x
(3)
(3)
—
—
R/W-x
R/W-x
R/W-x
R/W-x
DTSEN
BSTALL
BC9
BC8
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
UOWN: USB Own bit(1)
0 = The microcontroller core owns the BD and its corresponding buffer
bit 6
DTS: Data Toggle Synchronization bit(2)
1 = Data 1 packet
0 = Data 0 packet
bit 5-4
Reserved: These bits should always be programmed to ‘0’(3)
bit 3
DTSEN: Data Toggle Synchronization Enable bit
1 = Data toggle synchronization is enabled; data packets with incorrect Sync value will be ignored
0 = No data toggle synchronization is performed
bit 2
BSTALL: Buffer Stall Enable bit
1 = Buffer stall enabled; STALL handshake issued if a token is received that would use the BD in the
given location (UOWN bit remains set, BD value is unchanged)
0 = Buffer stall disabled
bit 1-0
BC9:BC8: Byte Count 9 and 8 bits
The byte count bits represent the number of bytes that will be transmitted for an IN token or received
during an OUT token. Together with BC<7:0>, the valid byte counts are 0-1023.
Note 1:
2:
3:
This bit must be initialized by the user to the desired value prior to enabling the USB module.
This bit is ignored unless DTSEN = 1.
If these bits are set, USB communication may not work. Hence, these bits should always be maintained
as ‘0’.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 139
PIC18F2450/4450
14.4.1.3
BDnSTAT Register (SIE Mode)
When the BD and its buffer are owned by the SIE, most
of the bits in BDnSTAT take on a different meaning. The
configuration is shown in Register 14-6. Once UOWN is
set, any data or control settings previously written there
by the user will be overwritten with data from the SIE.
The BDnSTAT register is updated by the SIE with the
token Packet Identifier (PID) which is stored in
BDnSTAT<5:3>. The transfer count in the
corresponding BDnCNT register is updated. Values
that overflow the 8-bit register carry over to the two
most significant digits of the count, stored in
BDnSTAT<1:0>.
14.4.2
BD BYTE COUNT
The byte count represents the total number of bytes
that will be transmitted during an IN transfer. After an IN
transfer, the SIE will return the number of bytes sent to
the host.
For an OUT transfer, the byte count represents the
maximum number of bytes that can be received and
stored in USB RAM. After an OUT transfer, the SIE will
return the actual number of bytes received. If the
number of bytes received exceeds the corresponding
REGISTER 14-6:
byte count, the data packet will be rejected and a NAK
handshake will be generated. When this happens, the
byte count will not be updated.
The 10-bit byte count is distributed over two registers.
The lower 8 bits of the count reside in the BDnCNT
register. The upper two bits reside in BDnSTAT<1:0>.
This represents a valid byte range of 0 to 1023.
14.4.3
BD ADDRESS VALIDATION
The BD Address register pair contains the starting RAM
address location for the corresponding endpoint buffer.
For an endpoint starting location to be valid, it must fall
in the range of the USB RAM, 400h to 7FFh. No
mechanism is available in hardware to validate the BD
address.
If the value of the BD address does not point to an
address in the USB RAM, or if it points to an address
within another endpoint’s buffer, data is likely to be lost
or overwritten. Similarly, overlapping a receive buffer
(OUT endpoint) with a BD location in use can yield
unexpected
results.
When
developing
USB
applications, the user may want to consider the
inclusion of software-based address validation in their
code.
BDnSTAT: BUFFER DESCRIPTOR n STATUS REGISTER (BD0STAT THROUGH
BD63STAT), SIE MODE (DATA RETURNED BY THE SIDE TO THE
MICROCONTROLLER)
R/W-x
U-x
R/W-x
R/W-x
R/W-x
R/W-x
R/W-x
R/W-x
UOWN
—
PID3
PID2
PID1
PID0
BC9
BC8
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
UOWN: USB Own bit
1 = The SIE owns the BD and its corresponding buffer
bit 6
Reserved: Not written by the SIE
bit 5-2
PID3:PID0: Packet Identifier bits
The received token PID value of the last transfer (IN, OUT or SETUP transactions only).
bit 1-0
BC9:BC8: Byte Count 9 and 8 bits
These bits are updated by the SIE to reflect the actual number of bytes received on an OUT transfer
and the actual number of bytes transmitted on an IN transfer.
DS39760A-page 140
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
14.4.4
PING-PONG BUFFERING
An endpoint is defined to have a ping-pong buffer when
it has two sets of BD entries: one set for an Even
transfer and one set for an Odd transfer. This allows the
CPU to process one BD while the SIE is processing the
other BD. Double-buffering BDs in this way allows for
maximum throughput to/from the USB.
The USB module supports three modes of operation:
• No ping-pong support
• Ping-pong buffer support for OUT Endpoint 0 only
• Ping-pong buffer support for all endpoints
The ping-pong buffer settings are configured using the
PPB1:PPB0 bits in the UCFG register.
The USB module keeps track of the Ping-Pong Pointer
individually for each endpoint. All pointers are initially
reset to the Even BD when the module is enabled. After
the completion of a transaction (UOWN cleared by the
FIGURE 14-7:
SIE), the pointer is toggled to the Odd BD. After the
completion of the next transaction, the pointer is
toggled back to the Even BD and so on.
The Even/Odd status of the last transaction is stored in
the PPBI bit of the USTAT register. The user can reset
all Ping-Pong Pointers to Even using the PPBRST bit.
Figure 14-7 shows the three different modes of
operation and how USB RAM is filled with the BDs.
BDs have a fixed relationship to a particular endpoint,
depending on the buffering configuration. The mapping
of BDs to endpoints is detailed in Table 14-4. This
relationship also means that gaps may occur in the
BDT if endpoints are not enabled contiguously. This
theoretically means that the BDs for disabled endpoints
could be used as buffer space. In practice, users
should avoid using such spaces in the BDT unless a
method of validating BD addresses is implemented.
BUFFER DESCRIPTOR TABLE MAPPING FOR BUFFERING MODES
PPB1:PPB0 = 00
No Ping-Pong Buffers
PPB1:PPB0 = 01
Ping-Pong Buffer on EP0 OUT
400h
400h
PPB1:PPB0 = 10
Ping-Pong Buffers on all EPs
400h
EP0 OUT
Descriptor
EP0 OUT Even
Descriptor
EP0 OUT Even
Descriptor
EP0 IN
Descriptor
EP0 OUT Odd
Descriptor
EP0 OUT Odd
Descriptor
EP1 OUT
Descriptor
EP0 IN Even
Descriptor
EP0 IN
Descriptor
EP1 IN
Descriptor
EP0 IN Odd
Descriptor
EP1 OUT
Descriptor
EP1 OUT Even
Descriptor
EP1 IN
Descriptor
EP1 OUT Odd
Descriptor
EP15 IN
Descriptor
47Fh
483h
Available
as
Data RAM
EP1 IN Even
Descriptor
EP15 IN
Descriptor
EP1 IN Odd
Descriptor
Available
as
Data RAM
EP15 IN Odd
Descriptor
4FFh
4FFh
Maximum Memory Used: 128 bytes
Maximum BDs: 32 (BD0 to BD31)
Note:
Maximum Memory Used: 132 bytes
Maximum BDs: 33 (BD0 to BD32)
4FFh
Maximum Memory Used: 256 bytes
Maximum BDs: 64 (BD0 to BD63)
Memory area not shown to scale.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 141
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 14-4:
ASSIGNMENT OF BUFFER DESCRIPTORS FOR THE DIFFERENT
BUFFERING MODES
BDs Assigned to Endpoint
Mode 0
(No Ping-Pong)
Endpoint
0
Mode 1
(Ping-Pong on EP0 OUT)
Mode 2
(Ping-Pong on all EPs)
Out
In
Out
In
Out
In
0
1
0 (E), 1 (O)
2
0 (E), 1 (O)
2 (E), 3 (O)
1
2
3
3
4
4 (E), 5 (O)
6 (E), 7 (O)
2
4
5
5
6
8 (E), 9 (O)
10 (E), 11 (O)
3
6
7
7
8
12 (E), 13 (O)
14 (E), 15 (O)
4
8
9
9
10
16 (E), 17 (O)
18 (E), 19 (O)
5
10
11
11
12
20 (E), 21 (O)
22 (E), 23 (O)
6
12
13
13
14
24 (E), 25 (O)
26 (E), 27 (O)
7
14
15
15
16
28 (E), 29 (O)
30 (E), 31 (O)
8
16
17
17
18
32 (E), 33 (O)
34 (E), 35 (O)
9
18
19
19
20
36 (E), 37 (O)
38 (E), 39 (O)
10
20
21
21
22
40 (E), 41 (O)
42 (E), 43 (O)
11
22
23
23
24
44 (E), 45 (O)
46 (E), 47 (O)
12
24
25
25
26
48 (E), 49 (O)
50 (E), 51 (O)
13
26
27
27
28
52 (E), 53 (O)
54 (E), 55 (O)
14
28
29
29
30
56 (E), 57 (O)
58 (E), 59 (O)
15
30
31
31
32
60 (E), 61 (O)
62 (E), 63 (O)
Legend: (E) = Even transaction buffer, (O) = Odd transaction buffer
TABLE 14-5:
SUMMARY OF USB BUFFER DESCRIPTOR TABLE REGISTERS
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
BDnSTAT(1)
UOWN
DTS(4)
PID3(2)
PID2(2)
PID1(2)
DTSEN(3)
PID0(2)
BSTALL(3)
BC9
BC8
BDnCNT(1)
Byte Count
BDnADRL(1)
Buffer Address Low
BDnADRH(1)
Buffer Address High
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
For buffer descriptor registers, n may have a value of 0 to 63. For the sake of brevity, all 64 registers are
shown as one generic prototype. All registers have indeterminate Reset values (xxxx xxxx).
Bits 5 through 2 of the BDnSTAT register are used by the SIE to return PID3:PID0 values once the register
is turned over to the SIE (UOWN bit is set). Once the registers have been under SIE control, the values
written for DTSEN and BSTALL are no longer valid.
Prior to turning the buffer descriptor over to the SIE (UOWN bit is cleared), bits 3 and 2 of the BDnSTAT
register are used to configure the DTSEN and BSTALL settings.
This bit is ignored unless DTSEN = 1.
DS39760A-page 142
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
14.5
USB Interrupts
Figure 14-8 shows the interrupt logic for the USB
module. There are two layers of interrupt registers in
the USB module. The top level consists of overall USB
status interrupts; these are enabled and flagged in the
UIE and UIR registers, respectively. The second level
consists of USB error conditions, which are enabled
and flagged in the UEIR and UEIE registers. An
interrupt condition in any of these triggers a USB Error
Interrupt Flag (UERRIF) in the top level.
The USB module can generate multiple interrupt
conditions. To accommodate all of these interrupt
sources, the module is provided with its own interrupt
logic structure, similar to that of the microcontroller.
USB interrupts are enabled with one set of control
registers and trapped with a separate set of flag registers. All sources are funneled into a single USB interrupt
request,
USBIF
(PIR2<5>),
in
the
microcontroller’s interrupt logic.
FIGURE 14-8:
Interrupts may be used to trap routine events in a USB
transaction. Figure 14-9 shows some common events
within a USB frame and their corresponding interrupts.
USB INTERRUPT LOGIC FUNNEL
Second Level USB Interrupts
(USB Error Conditions)
Top Level USB Interrupts
(USB Status Interrupts)
UEIR (Flag) and UEIE (Enable) Registers
UIR (Flag) and UIE (Enable) Registers
SOFIF
SOFIE
BTSEF
BTSEE
TRNIF
TRNIE
BTOEF
BTOEE
USBIF
IDLEIF
IDLEIE
DFN8EF
DFN8EE
UERRIF
UERRIE
CRC16EF
CRC16EE
STALLIF
STALLIE
CRC5EF
CRC5EE
PIDEF
PIDEE
ACTVIF
ACTVIE
URSTIF
URSTIE
FIGURE 14-9:
EXAMPLE OF A USB TRANSACTION AND INTERRUPT EVENTS
From Host
From Host
To Host
SETUPToken
Data
ACK
To Host
From Host
Data
ACK
From Host
To Host
Empty Data
ACK
From Host
IN Token
USB Reset
URSTIF
From Host
START-OF-FRAME
SOFIF
OUT Token
Set TRNIF
Set TRNIF
Set TRNIF
Transaction
Transaction
Complete
RESET
SOF
SETUP
DATA
SOF
STATUS
Differential Data
Control Transfer(1)
1 ms Frame
Note
1:
The control transfer shown here is only an example showing events that can occur for every transaction. Typical control transfers
will spread across multiple frames.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 143
PIC18F2450/4450
14.5.1
USB INTERRUPT STATUS
REGISTER (UIR)
Once an interrupt bit has been set by the SIE, it must
be cleared by software by writing a ‘0’. The flag bits
can also be set in software which can aid in firmware
debugging.
The USB Interrupt Status register (Register 14-7)
contains the flag bits for each of the USB status
interrupt sources. Each of these sources has a
corresponding interrupt enable bit in the UIE register. All
of the USB status flags are ORed together to generate
the USBIF interrupt flag for the microcontroller’s
interrupt funnel.
REGISTER 14-7:
UIR: USB INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R-0
R/W-0
—
SOFIF
STALLIF
IDLEIF(1)
TRNIF(2)
ACTVIF(3)
UERRIF(4)
URSTIF
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 6
SOFIF: START-OF-FRAME Token Interrupt bit
1 = A START-OF-FRAME token received by the SIE
0 = No START-OF-FRAME token received by the SIE
bit 5
STALLIF: A STALL Handshake Interrupt bit
1 = A STALL handshake was sent by the SIE
0 = A STALL handshake has not been sent
bit 4
IDLEIF: Idle Detect Interrupt bit(1)
1 = Idle condition detected (constant Idle state of 3 ms or more)
0 = No Idle condition detected
bit 3
TRNIF: Transaction Complete Interrupt bit(2)
1 = Processing of pending transaction is complete; read USTAT register for endpoint information
0 = Processing of pending transaction is not complete or no transaction is pending
bit 2
ACTVIF: Bus Activity Detect Interrupt bit(3)
1 = Activity on the D+/D- lines was detected
0 = No activity detected on the D+/D- lines
bit 1
UERRIF: USB Error Condition Interrupt bit(4)
1 = An unmasked error condition has occurred
0 = No unmasked error condition has occurred.
bit 0
URSTIF: USB Reset Interrupt bit
1 = Valid USB Reset occurred; 00h is loaded into UADDR register
0 = No USB Reset has occurred
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Once an Idle state is detected, the user may want to place the USB module in Suspend mode.
Clearing this bit will cause the USTAT FIFO to advance (valid only for IN, OUT and SETUP tokens).
This bit is typically unmasked only following the detection of a UIDLE interrupt event.
Only error conditions enabled through the UEIE register will set this bit. This bit is a status bit only and
cannot be set or cleared by the user.
DS39760A-page 144
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
14.5.2
USB INTERRUPT ENABLE
REGISTER (UIE)
The USB Interrupt Enable register (Register 14-8)
contains the enable bits for the USB status interrupt
sources. Setting any of these bits will enable the
respective interrupt source in the UIR register.
REGISTER 14-8:
The values in this register only affect the propagation
of an interrupt condition to the microcontroller’s
interrupt logic. The flag bits are still set by their
interrupt conditions, allowing them to be polled and
serviced without actually generating an interrupt.
UIE: USB INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
—
SOFIE
STALLIE
IDLEIE
TRNIE
ACTVIE
UERRIE
URSTIE
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 6
SOFIE: START-OF-FRAME Token Interrupt Enable bit
1 = START-OF-FRAME token interrupt enabled
0 = START-OF-FRAME token interrupt disabled
bit 5
STALLIE: STALL Handshake Interrupt Enable bit
1 = STALL interrupt enabled
0 = STALL interrupt disabled
bit 4
IDLEIE: Idle Detect Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Idle detect interrupt enabled
0 = Idle detect interrupt disabled
bit 3
TRNIE: Transaction Complete Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Transaction interrupt enabled
0 = Transaction interrupt disabled
bit 2
ACTVIE: Bus Activity Detect Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Bus activity detect interrupt enabled
0 = Bus activity detect interrupt disabled
bit 1
UERRIE: USB Error Interrupt Enable bit
1 = USB error interrupt enabled
0 = USB error interrupt disabled
bit 0
URSTIE: USB Reset Interrupt Enable bit
1 = USB Reset interrupt enabled
0 = USB Reset interrupt disabled
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
x = Bit is unknown
DS39760A-page 145
PIC18F2450/4450
14.5.3
USB ERROR INTERRUPT STATUS
REGISTER (UEIR)
The USB Error Interrupt Status register (Register 14-9)
contains the flag bits for each of the error sources
within the USB peripheral. Each of these sources is
controlled by a corresponding interrupt enable bit in
the UEIE register. All of the USB error flags are ORed
together to generate the USB Error Interrupt Flag
(UERRIF) at the top level of the interrupt logic.
REGISTER 14-9:
Each error bit is set as soon as the error condition is
detected. Thus, the interrupt will typically not
correspond with the end of a token being processed.
Once an interrupt bit has been set by the SIE, it must
be cleared by software by writing a ‘0’.
UEIR: USB ERROR INTERRUPT STATUS REGISTER
R/C-0
U-0
U-0
R/C-0
R/C-0
R/C-0
R/C-0
R/C-0
BTSEF
—
—
BTOEF
DFN8EF
CRC16EF
CRC5EF
PIDEF
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
C = Clearable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
BTSEF: Bit Stuff Error Flag bit
1 = A bit stuff error has been detected
0 = No bit stuff error
bit 6-5
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 4
BTOEF: Bus Turnaround Time-out Error Flag bit
1 = Bus turnaround time-out has occurred (more than 16 bit times of Idle from previous EOP elapsed)
0 = No bus turnaround time-out
bit 3
DFN8EF: Data Field Size Error Flag bit
1 = The data field was not an integral number of bytes
0 = The data field was an integral number of bytes
bit 2
CRC16EF: CRC16 Failure Flag bit
1 = The CRC16 failed
0 = The CRC16 passed
bit 1
CRC5EF: CRC5 Host Error Flag bit
1 = The token packet was rejected due to a CRC5 error
0 = The token packet was accepted
bit 0
PIDEF: PID Check Failure Flag bit
1 = PID check failed
0 = PID check passed
DS39760A-page 146
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
14.5.4
USB ERROR INTERRUPT ENABLE
REGISTER (UEIE)
As with the UIE register, the enable bits only affect the
propagation of an interrupt condition to the
microcontroller’s interrupt logic. The flag bits are still
set by their interrupt conditions, allowing them to be
polled and serviced without actually generating an
interrupt.
The USB Error Interrupt Enable register (Register 14-10)
contains the enable bits for each of the USB error
interrupt sources. Setting any of these bits will enable the
respective error interrupt source in the UEIR register to
propagate into the UERR bit at the top level of the
interrupt logic.
REGISTER 14-10: UEIE: USB ERROR INTERRUPT ENABLE REGISTER
R/W-0
U-0
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
BTSEE
—
—
BTOEE
DFN8EE
CRC16EE
CRC5EE
PIDEE
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7
BTSEE: Bit Stuff Error Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Bit stuff error interrupt enabled
0 = Bit stuff error interrupt disabled
bit 6-5
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 4
BTOEE: Bus Turnaround Time-out Error Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Bus turnaround time-out error interrupt enabled
0 = Bus turnaround time-out error interrupt disabled
bit 3
DFN8EE: Data Field Size Error Interrupt Enable bit
1 = Data field size error interrupt enabled
0 = Data field size error interrupt disabled
bit 2
CRC16EE: CRC16 Failure Interrupt Enable bit
1 = CRC16 failure interrupt enabled
0 = CRC16 failure interrupt disabled
bit 1
CRC5EE: CRC5 Host Error Interrupt Enable bit
1 = CRC5 host error interrupt enabled
0 = CRC5 host error interrupt disabled
bit 0
PIDEE: PID Check Failure Interrupt Enable bit
1 = PID check failure interrupt enabled
0 = PID check failure interrupt disabled
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
x = Bit is unknown
DS39760A-page 147
PIC18F2450/4450
14.6
14.6.3
USB Power Modes
Many USB applications will likely have several different
sets of power requirements and configuration. The
most common power modes encountered are Bus
Power Only, Self-Power Only and Dual Power with
Self-Power Dominance. The most common cases are
presented here.
14.6.1
BUS POWER ONLY
In Bus Power Only mode, all power for the application
is drawn from the USB (Figure 14-10). This is
effectively the simplest power method for the device.
DUAL POWER WITH SELF-POWER
DOMINANCE
Some applications may require a dual power option.
This allows the application to use internal power primarily, but switch to power from the USB when no internal
power is available. Figure 14-12 shows a simple Dual
Power with Self-Power Dominance example, which
automatically switches between Self-Power Only and
USB Bus Power Only modes.
FIGURE 14-12:
DUAL POWER EXAMPLE
100 kΩ Attach Sense
FIGURE 14-10:
I/O pin
BUS POWER ONLY
VBUS
~5V
VBUS
~5V
VDD
VDD
100 kΩ
VUSB
VSELF
~5V
VUSB
VSS
VSS
Note:
14.6.2
Users should keep in mind the limits for
devices drawing power from the USB.
According to USB Specification 2.0, this
cannot exceed 100 mA per low-power
device or 500 mA per high-power device.
SELF-POWER ONLY
In Self-Power Only mode, the USB application provides
its own power, with very little power being pulled from
the USB. Figure 14-11 shows an example. Note that an
attach indication is added to indicate when the USB
has been connected.
FIGURE 14-11:
SELF-POWER ONLY
Attach Sense
VBUS
~5V
VSELF
~5V
100 kΩ
I/O pin
100 kΩ
VDD
VUSB
VSS
DS39760A-page 148
14.7
Oscillator
The USB module has specific clock requirements. For
full-speed operation, the clock source must be 48 MHz.
Even so, the microcontroller core and other peripherals
are not required to run at that clock speed or even from
the same clock source. Available clocking options are
described in detail in Section 2.3 “Oscillator Settings
for USB”.
14.8
USB Firmware and Drivers
Microchip provides a number of application-specific
resources, such as USB firmware and driver support.
Refer to www.microchip.com for the latest firmware and
driver support.
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 14-6:
Name
INTCON
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH USB MODULE OPERATION(1)
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Details on
page
GIE/GIEH
PEIE/GIEL
TMR0IE
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
IPR2
OSCFIP
—
USBIP
—
—
HLVDIP
—
—
51
PIR2
OSCFIF
—
USBIF
—
—
HLVDIF
—
—
51
PIE2
OSCFIE
—
USBIE
—
—
HLVDIE
—
—
51
52
UCON
—
PPBRST
SE0
PKTDIS
USBEN
RESUME
SUSPND
—
UCFG
UTEYE
UOEMON
—
UPUEN
UTRDIS
FSEN
PPB1
PPB0
52
USTAT
—
ENDP3
ENDP2
ENDP1
ENDP0
DIR
PPBI
—
52
UADDR
—
ADDR6
ADDR5
ADDR4
ADDR3
ADDR2
ADDR1
ADDR0
52
UFRML
FRM7
FRM6
FRM5
FRM4
FRM3
FRM2
FRM1
FRM0
52
UFRMH
—
—
—
—
—
FRM10
FRM9
FRM8
52
UIR
—
SOFIF
STALLIF
IDLEIF
TRNIF
ACTVIF
UERRIF
URSTIF
52
UIE
—
SOFIE
STALLIE
IDLEIE
TRNIE
ACTVIE
UERRIE
URSTIE
52
UEIR
BTSEF
—
—
BTOEF
DFN8EF
CRC16EF
CRC5EF
PIDEF
52
UEIE
BTSEE
—
—
BTOEE
DFN8EE
CRC16EE
CRC5EE
PIDEE
52
UEP0
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
52
UEP1
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
52
UEP2
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
52
UEP3
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
52
UEP4
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
52
UEP5
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
52
UEP6
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
52
UEP7
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
52
UEP8
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
52
UEP9
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
51
UEP10
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
51
UEP11
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
51
UEP12
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
51
UEP13
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
51
UEP14
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
51
UEP15
—
—
—
EPHSHK
EPCONDIS EPOUTEN
EPINEN
EPSTALL
51
Legend:
Note 1:
— = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the USB module.
This table includes only those hardware mapped SFRs located in Bank 15 of the data memory space. The Buffer
Descriptor registers, which are mapped into Bank 4 and are not true SFRs, are listed separately in Table 14-5.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 149
PIC18F2450/4450
14.9
14.9.3
Overview of USB
This section presents some of the basic USB concepts
and useful information necessary to design a USB
device. Although much information is provided in this
section, there is a plethora of information provided
within the USB specifications and class specifications.
Thus, the reader is encouraged to refer to the USB
specifications for more information (www.usb.org). If
you are very familiar with the details of USB, then this
section serves as a basic, high-level refresher of USB.
14.9.1
LAYERED FRAMEWORK
USB device functionality is structured into a layered
framework graphically shown in Figure 14-13. Each
level is associated with a functional level within the
device. The highest layer, other than the device, is the
configuration. A device may have multiple configurations. For example, a particular device may have
multiple power requirements based on Self-Power Only
or Bus Power Only modes.
For each configuration, there may be multiple
interfaces. Each interface could support a particular
mode of that configuration.
Below the interface is the endpoint(s). Data is directly
moved at this level. There can be as many as
16 bidirectional endpoints. Endpoint 0 is always a
control endpoint and by default, when the device is on
the bus, Endpoint 0 must be available to configure the
device.
14.9.2
TRANSFERS
There are four transfer types defined in the USB
specification.
• Isochronous: This type provides a transfer
method for large amounts of data (up to
1023 bytes) with timely delivery ensured;
however, the data integrity is not ensured. This is
good for streaming applications where small data
loss is not critical, such as audio.
• Bulk: This type of transfer method allows for large
amounts of data to be transferred with ensured
data integrity; however, the delivery timeliness is
not ensured.
• Interrupt: This type of transfer provides for
ensured timely delivery for small blocks of data;
plus data integrity is ensured.
• Control: This type provides for device setup
control.
While full-speed devices support all transfer types,
low-speed devices are limited to interrupt and control
transfers only.
14.9.4
POWER
Power is available from the Universal Serial Bus. The
USB specification defines the bus power requirements.
Devices may either be self-powered or bus powered.
Self-powered devices draw power from an external
source, while bus powered devices use power supplied
from the bus.
FRAMES
Information communicated on the bus is grouped into
1 ms time slots, referred to as frames. Each frame can
contain many transactions to various devices and
endpoints. Figure 14-9 shows an example of a
transaction within a frame.
FIGURE 14-13:
USB LAYERS
Device
To other Configurations (if any)
Configuration
To other Interfaces (if any)
Interface
Interface
Endpoint
DS39760A-page 150
Endpoint
Endpoint
Endpoint
Advance Information
Endpoint
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
The USB specification limits the power taken from the
bus. Each device is ensured 100 mA at approximately 5V
(one-unit load). Additional power may be requested, up
to a maximum of 500 mA. Note that power above a oneunit load is a request and the host or hub is not obligated
to provide the extra current. Thus, a device capable of
consuming more than a one-unit load must be able to
maintain a low-power configuration of a one-unit load or
less, if necessary.
14.9.6.2
The USB specification also defines a Suspend mode.
In this situation, current must be limited to 500 μA,
averaged over 1 second. A device must enter a
Suspend state after 3 ms of inactivity (i.e., no SOF
tokens for 3 ms). A device entering Suspend mode
must drop current consumption within 10 ms after
Suspend. Likewise, when signaling a wake-up, the
device must signal a wake-up within 10 ms of drawing
current above the Suspend limit.
The interface descriptor details the number of
endpoints used in this interface, as well as the class of
the interface. There may be more than one interface for
a configuration.
14.9.5
ENUMERATION
When the device is initially attached to the bus, the host
enters an enumeration process in an attempt to identify
the device. Essentially, the host interrogates the device,
gathering information such as power consumption, data
rates and sizes, protocol and other descriptive
information; descriptors contain this information. A
typical enumeration process would be as follows:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
USB Reset: Reset the device. Thus, the device
is not configured and does not have an address
(address 0).
Get Device Descriptor: The host requests a
small portion of the device descriptor.
USB Reset: Reset the device again.
Set Address: The host assigns an address to the
device.
Get Device Descriptor: The host retrieves the
device descriptor, gathering info such as
manufacturer, type of device, maximum control
packet size.
Get configuration descriptors.
Get any other descriptors.
Set a configuration.
The configuration descriptor provides information on
the power requirements of the device and how many
different interfaces are supported when in this
configuration. There may be more than one configuration for a device (i.e., low-power and high-power
configurations).
14.9.6.3
14.9.6.4
DESCRIPTORS
There are eight different standard descriptor types of
which five are most important for this device.
14.9.6.1
Device Descriptor
The device descriptor provides general information,
such as manufacturer, product number, serial number,
the class of the device and the number of configurations.
There is only one device descriptor.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Interface Descriptor
Endpoint Descriptor
The endpoint descriptor identifies the transfer type
(Section 14.9.3 “Transfers”) and direction, as well as
some other specifics for the endpoint. There may be
many endpoints in a device and endpoints may be
shared in different configurations.
14.9.6.5
String Descriptor
Many of the previous descriptors reference one or
more string descriptors. String descriptors provide
human readable information about the layer
(Section 14.9.1
“Layered
Framework”)
they
describe. Often these strings show up in the host to
help the user identify the device. String descriptors are
generally optional to save memory and are encoded in
a unicode format.
14.9.7
BUS SPEED
Each USB device must indicate its bus presence and
speed to the host. This is accomplished through a
1.5 kΩ resistor which is connected to the bus at the
time of the attachment event.
Depending on the speed of the device, the resistor
either pulls up the D+ or D- line to 3.3V. For a lowspeed device, the pull-up resistor is connected to the
D- line. For a full-speed device, the pull-up resistor is
connected to the D+ line.
14.9.8
The exact enumeration process depends on the host.
14.9.6
Configuration Descriptor
CLASS SPECIFICATIONS AND
DRIVERS
USB specifications include class specifications which
operating system vendors optionally support.
Examples of classes include Audio, Mass Storage,
Communications and Human Interface (HID). In most
cases, a driver is required at the host side to ‘talk’ to the
USB device. In custom applications, a driver may need
to be developed. Fortunately, drivers are available for
most common host systems for the most common
classes of devices. Thus, these drivers can be reused.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 151
PIC18F2450/4450
NOTES:
DS39760A-page 152
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
15.0
ENHANCED UNIVERSAL
SYNCHRONOUS RECEIVER
TRANSMITTER (EUSART)
The Universal Synchronous Asynchronous Receiver
Transmitter (USART) module is one of the two serial
I/O modules. (USART is also known as a Serial
Communications Interface or SCI.) The USART can be
configured as a full-duplex asynchronous system that
can communicate with peripheral devices, such as
CRT terminals and personal computers. It can also be
configured as a half-duplex synchronous system that
can communicate with peripheral devices, such as A/D
or D/A integrated circuits, serial EEPROMs and so on.
The Enhanced Universal Synchronous Receiver
Transmitter (EUSART) module implements additional
features, including Automatic Baud Rate Detection
(ABD) and calibration, automatic wake-up on Sync
Break reception and 12-bit Break character transmit.
These features make it ideally suited for use in Local
Interconnect Network bus (LIN bus) systems.
The pins of the Enhanced USART are multiplexed with
PORTC. In order to configure RC6/TX/CK and RC7/RX/
DT as an EUSART:
• bit SPEN (RCSTA<7>) must be set (= 1)
• bit TRISC<7> must be set (= 1)
• bit TRISC<6> must be cleared (= 0) for
Asynchronous and Synchronous Master modes
or set (= 1) for Synchronous Slave mode
Note:
The EUSART control will automatically
reconfigure the pin from input to output as
needed.
The operation of the Enhanced USART module is
controlled through three registers:
• Transmit Status and Control (TXSTA)
• Receive Status and Control (RCSTA)
• Baud Rate Control (BAUDCON)
These are detailed on the following pages in
Register 15-1, Register 15-2 and Register 15-3,
respectively.
The EUSART can be configured in the following
modes:
• Asynchronous (full-duplex) with:
- Auto-wake-up on character reception
- Auto-baud calibration
- 12-bit Break character transmission
• Synchronous – Master (half-duplex) with
selectable clock polarity
• Synchronous – Slave (half-duplex) with selectable
clock polarity
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 153
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 15-1:
R/W-0
TXSTA: TRANSMIT STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER
R/W-0
CSRC
TX9
R/W-0
TXEN
(1)
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R-1
R/W-0
SYNC
SENDB
BRGH
TRMT
TX9D
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
CSRC: Clock Source Select bit
Asynchronous mode:
Don’t care.
Synchronous mode:
1 = Master mode (clock generated internally from BRG)
0 = Slave mode (clock from external source)
bit 6
TX9: 9-Bit Transmit Enable bit
1 = Selects 9-bit transmission
0 = Selects 8-bit transmission
bit 5
TXEN: Transmit Enable bit(1)
1 = Transmit enabled
0 = Transmit disabled
bit 4
SYNC: EUSART Mode Select bit
1 = Synchronous mode
0 = Asynchronous mode
bit 3
SENDB: Send Break Character bit
Asynchronous mode:
1 = Send Sync Break on next transmission (cleared by hardware upon completion)
0 = Sync Break transmission completed
Synchronous mode:
Don’t care.
bit 2
BRGH: High Baud Rate Select bit
Asynchronous mode:
1 = High speed
0 = Low speed
Synchronous mode:
Unused in this mode.
bit 1
TRMT: Transmit Shift Register Status bit
1 = TSR empty
0 = TSR full
bit 0
TX9D: 9th bit of Transmit Data
Can be address/data bit or a parity bit.
Note 1:
SREN/CREN overrides TXEN in Sync mode with the exception that SREN has no effect in Synchronous
Slave mode.
DS39760A-page 154
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 15-2:
RCSTA: RECEIVE STATUS AND CONTROL REGISTER
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R-0
R-0
R-x
SPEN
RX9
SREN
CREN
ADDEN
FERR
OERR
RX9D
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
SPEN: Serial Port Enable bit
1 = Serial port enabled (configures RX/DT and TX/CK pins as serial port pins)
0 = Serial port disabled (held in Reset)
bit 6
RX9: 9-Bit Receive Enable bit
1 = Selects 9-bit reception
0 = Selects 8-bit reception
bit 5
SREN: Single Receive Enable bit
Asynchronous mode:
Don’t care.
Synchronous mode – Master:
1 = Enables single receive
0 = Disables single receive
This bit is cleared after reception is complete.
Synchronous mode – Slave:
Don’t care.
bit 4
CREN: Continuous Receive Enable bit
Asynchronous mode:
1 = Enables receiver
0 = Disables receiver
Synchronous mode:
1 = Enables continuous receive until enable bit CREN is cleared (CREN overrides SREN)
0 = Disables continuous receive
bit 3
ADDEN: Address Detect Enable bit
Asynchronous mode 9-bit (RX9 = 1):
1 = Enables address detection, enables interrupt and loads the receive buffer when RSR<8> is set
0 = Disables address detection, all bytes are received and ninth bit can be used as parity bit
Asynchronous mode 9-bit (RX9 = 0):
Don’t care.
bit 2
FERR: Framing Error bit
1 = Framing error (can be updated by reading RCREG register and receiving next valid byte)
0 = No framing error
bit 1
OERR: Overrun Error bit
1 = Overrun error (can be cleared by clearing bit CREN)
0 = No overrun error
bit 0
RX9D: 9th bit of Received Data
This can be address/data bit or a parity bit and must be calculated by user firmware.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 155
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 15-3:
BAUDCON: BAUD RATE CONTROL REGISTER
R/W-0
R-1
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
ABDOVF
RCIDL
—
SCKP
BRG16
—
WUE
ABDEN
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
ABDOVF: Auto-Baud Acquisition Rollover Status bit
1 = A BRG rollover has occurred during Auto-Baud Rate Detect mode (must be cleared in software)
0 = No BRG rollover has occurred
bit 6
RCIDL: Receive Operation Idle Status bit
1 = Receive operation is Idle
0 = Receive operation is active
bit 5
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 4
SCKP: Synchronous Clock Polarity Select bit
Asynchronous mode:
Unused in this mode.
Synchronous mode:
1 = Idle state for clock (CK) is a high level
0 = Idle state for clock (CK) is a low level
bit 3
BRG16: 16-Bit Baud Rate Register Enable bit
1 = 16-bit Baud Rate Generator – SPBRGH and SPBRG
0 = 8-bit Baud Rate Generator – SPBRG only (Compatible mode), SPBRGH value ignored
bit 2
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 1
WUE: Wake-up Enable bit
Asynchronous mode:
1 = EUSART will continue to sample the RX pin – interrupt generated on falling edge; bit cleared in
hardware on following rising edge
0 = RX pin not monitored or rising edge detected
Synchronous mode:
Unused in this mode.
bit 0
ABDEN: Auto-Baud Detect Enable bit
Asynchronous mode:
1 = Enable baud rate measurement on the next character. Requires reception of a Sync field (55h);
cleared in hardware upon completion.
0 = Baud rate measurement disabled or completed
Synchronous mode:
Unused in this mode.
DS39760A-page 156
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
15.1
Baud Rate Generator (BRG)
The BRG is a dedicated 8-bit or 16-bit generator that
supports both the Asynchronous and Synchronous
modes of the EUSART. By default, the BRG operates
in 8-bit mode. Setting the BRG16 bit (BAUDCON<3>)
selects 16-bit mode.
The SPBRGH:SPBRG register pair controls the period
of a free-running timer. In Asynchronous mode, bits
BRGH (TXSTA<2>) and BRG16 (BAUDCON<3>) also
control the baud rate. In Synchronous mode, BRGH is
ignored. Table 15-1 shows the formula for computation
of the baud rate for different EUSART modes which
only apply in Master mode (internally generated clock).
Given the desired baud rate and FOSC, the nearest
integer value for the SPBRGH:SPBRG registers can be
calculated using the formulas in Table 15-1. From this,
the error in baud rate can be determined. An example
calculation is shown in Example 15-1. Typical baud rates
and error values for the various Asynchronous modes
are shown in Table 15-2. It may be advantageous to use
TABLE 15-1:
Writing a new value to the SPBRGH:SPBRG registers
causes the BRG timer to be reset (or cleared). This
ensures the BRG does not wait for a timer overflow
before outputting the new baud rate.
15.1.1
OPERATION IN POWER-MANAGED
MODES
The device clock is used to generate the desired baud
rate. When one of the power-managed modes is
entered, the new clock source may be operating at a
different frequency. This may require an adjustment to
the value in the SPBRG register pair.
15.1.2
SAMPLING
The data on the RX pin is sampled three times by a
majority detect circuit to determine if a high or a low
level is present at the RX pin.
BAUD RATE FORMULAS
Configuration Bits
SYNC
the high baud rate (BRGH = 1) or the 16-bit BRG to
reduce the baud rate error, or achieve a slow baud rate
for a fast oscillator frequency.
BRG16
BRG/EUSART Mode
BRGH
Baud Rate Formula
FOSC/[64 (n + 1)]
0
0
0
8-bit/Asynchronous
0
0
1
8-bit/Asynchronous
0
1
0
16-bit/Asynchronous
0
1
1
16-bit/Asynchronous
1
0
x
8-bit/Synchronous
1
1
x
16-bit/Synchronous
Legend: x = Don’t care, n = value of SPBRGH:SPBRG register pair
EXAMPLE 15-1:
FOSC/[16 (n + 1)]
FOSC/[4 (n + 1)]
CALCULATING BAUD RATE ERROR
For a device with FOSC of 16 MHz, desired baud rate of 9600, Asynchronous mode, 8-bit BRG:
Desired Baud Rate
= FOSC/(64 ([SPBRGH:SPBRG] + 1)
Solving for SPBRGH:SPBRG:
X
= ((FOSC/Desired Baud Rate)/64) – 1
= ((16000000/9600)/64) – 1
= [25.042] = 25
Calculated Baud Rate = 16000000/(64 (25 + 1))
= 9615
Error
= (Calculated Baud Rate – Desired Baud Rate)/Desired Baud Rate
= (9615 – 9600)/9600 = 0.16%
TABLE 15-2:
Name
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH BAUD RATE GENERATOR
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
TXSTA
CSRC
TX9
TXEN
SYNC
SENDB
BRGH
TRMT
RCSTA
SPEN
RX9
SREN
CREN
ADDEN
FERR
OERR
BAUDCON
ABDOVF RCIDL
—
SCKP
BRG16
—
WUE
SPBRGH
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte
SPBRG
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the BRG.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
Bit 0
TX9D
RX9D
ABDEN
Reset
Values
on page
51
51
51
50
50
DS39760A-page 157
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 15-3:
BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0
BAUD
RATE
(K)
FOSC = 40.000 MHz
FOSC = 20.000 MHz
Actual
Rate
(K)
FOSC = 10.000 MHz
Actual
Rate
(K)
FOSC = 8.000 MHz
Actual
Rate
(K)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
0.3
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
1.2
—
—
—
1.221
1.73
255
1.202
0.16
129
1201
-0.16
103
2.4
2.441
1.73
255
2.404
0.16
129
2.404
0.16
64
2403
-0.16
51
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
%
Error
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
%
Error
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
%
Error
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
9.6
9.615
0.16
64
9.766
1.73
31
9.766
1.73
15
9615
-0.16
12
19.2
19.531
1.73
31
19.531
1.73
15
19.531
1.73
7
—
—
—
57.6
56.818
-1.36
10
62.500
8.51
4
52.083
-9.58
2
—
—
—
115.2
125.000
8.51
4
104.167
-9.58
2
78.125
-32.18
1
—
—
—
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 0
BAUD
RATE
(K)
FOSC = 4.000 MHz
FOSC = 2.000 MHz
(decimal)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
207
300
-0.16
0.16
51
1201
2.404
0.16
25
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
0.3
0.300
0.16
1.2
1.202
2.4
SPBRG
value
FOSC = 1.000 MHz
(decimal)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
103
300
-0.16
51
-0.16
25
1201
-0.16
12
2403
-0.16
12
—
—
—
SPBRG
value
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
9.6
8.929
-6.99
6
—
—
—
—
—
—
19.2
20.833
8.51
2
—
—
—
—
—
—
57.6
62.500
8.51
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
115.2
62.500
-45.75
0
—
—
—
—
—
—
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0
BAUD
RATE
(K)
0.3
1.2
FOSC = 40.000 MHz
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
—
—
—
—
FOSC = 20.000 MHz
(decimal)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
—
—
—
—
—
—
SPBRG
value
FOSC = 10.000 MHz
(decimal)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
—
—
—
—
—
—
SPBRG
value
FOSC = 8.000 MHz
(decimal)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SPBRG
value
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
2.4
—
—
—
—
—
—
2.441
1.73
255
2403
-0.16
207
9.6
9.766
1.73
255
9.615
0.16
129
9.615
0.16
64
9615
-0.16
51
19.2
19.231
0.16
129
19.231
0.16
64
19.531
1.73
31
19230
-0.16
25
57.6
58.140
0.94
42
56.818
-1.36
21
56.818
-1.36
10
55555
3.55
8
115.2
113.636
-1.36
21
113.636
-1.36
10
125.000
8.51
4
—
—
—
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 0
BAUD
RATE
(K)
FOSC = 4.000 MHz
FOSC = 2.000 MHz
(decimal)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
—
0.16
—
207
—
1201
2.404
0.16
103
9.615
0.16
25
19.231
0.16
12
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
0.3
1.2
—
1.202
2.4
9.6
19.2
SPBRG
value
FOSC = 1.000 MHz
(decimal)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
—
-0.16
—
103
300
1201
-0.16
-0.16
207
51
2403
-0.16
51
2403
-0.16
25
9615
-0.16
12
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SPBRG
value
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
57.6
62.500
8.51
3
—
—
—
—
—
—
115.2
125.000
8.51
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
DS39760A-page 158
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 15-3:
BAUD RATES FOR ASYNCHRONOUS MODES (CONTINUED)
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1
BAUD
RATE
(K)
FOSC = 40.000 MHz
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
FOSC = 20.000 MHz
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
FOSC = 10.000 MHz
(decimal)
Actual
Rate
(K)
SPBRG
value
%
Error
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
FOSC = 8.000 MHz
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
0.3
0.300
0.00
8332
0.300
0.02
4165
0.300
0.02
2082
300
-0.04
1.2
1.200
0.02
2082
1.200
-0.03
1041
1.200
-0.03
520
1201
-0.16
1665
415
2.4
2.402
0.06
1040
2.399
-0.03
520
2.404
0.16
259
2403
-0.16
207
9.6
9.615
0.16
259
9.615
0.16
129
9.615
0.16
64
9615
-0.16
51
25
19.2
19.231
0.16
129
19.231
0.16
64
19.531
1.73
31
19230
-0.16
57.6
58.140
0.94
42
56.818
-1.36
21
56.818
-1.36
10
55555
3.55
8
115.2
113.636
-1.36
21
113.636
-1.36
10
125.000
8.51
4
—
—
—
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 0, BRG16 = 1
BAUD
RATE
(K)
FOSC = 4.000 MHz
FOSC = 2.000 MHz
Actual
Rate
(K)
FOSC = 1.000 MHz
Actual
Rate
(K)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
0.3
0.300
0.04
832
300
-0.16
415
300
-0.16
1.2
1.202
0.16
207
1201
-0.16
103
1201
-0.16
51
2.4
2.404
0.16
103
2403
-0.16
51
2403
-0.16
25
9.6
9.615
0.16
25
9615
-0.16
12
—
—
—
19.2
19.231
0.16
12
—
—
—
—
—
—
57.6
62.500
8.51
3
—
—
—
—
—
—
115.2
125.000
8.51
1
—
—
—
—
—
—
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
%
Error
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
%
Error
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
207
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1
BAUD
RATE
(K)
FOSC = 40.000 MHz
FOSC = 20.000 MHz
(decimal)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
0.00
33332
0.300
0.00
8332
1.200
0.02
4165
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
0.3
0.300
1.2
1.200
2.4
2.400
SPBRG
value
FOSC = 10.000 MHz
(decimal)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
0.00
16665
0.300
0.00
0.02
4165
1.200
0.02
2.400
0.02
2082
2.402
0.06
SPBRG
value
FOSC = 8.000 MHz
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
8332
300
-0.01
6665
2082
1200
-0.04
1665
1040
2400
-0.04
832
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
9.6
9.606
0.06
1040
9.596
-0.03
520
9.615
0.16
259
9615
-0.16
207
19.2
19.193
-0.03
520
19.231
0.16
259
19.231
0.16
129
19230
-0.16
103
57.6
57.803
0.35
172
57.471
-0.22
86
58.140
0.94
42
57142
0.79
34
115.2
114.943
-0.22
86
116.279
0.94
42
113.636
-1.36
21
117647
-2.12
16
SYNC = 0, BRGH = 1, BRG16 = 1 or SYNC = 1, BRG16 = 1
BAUD
RATE
(K)
0.3
1.2
FOSC = 4.000 MHz
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
0.300
1.200
0.01
0.04
FOSC = 2.000 MHz
(decimal)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
3332
832
300
1201
-0.04
-0.16
SPBRG
value
FOSC = 1.000 MHz
(decimal)
Actual
Rate
(K)
%
Error
1665
415
300
1201
-0.04
-0.16
832
207
SPBRG
value
SPBRG
value
(decimal)
2.4
2.404
0.16
415
2403
-0.16
207
2403
-0.16
103
9.6
9.615
0.16
103
9615
-0.16
51
9615
-0.16
25
19.2
19.231
0.16
51
19230
-0.16
25
19230
-0.16
12
57.6
58.824
2.12
16
55555
3.55
8
—
—
—
115.2
111.111
-3.55
8
—
—
—
—
—
—
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 159
PIC18F2450/4450
15.1.3
AUTO-BAUD RATE DETECT
The Enhanced USART module supports the automatic
detection and calibration of baud rate. This feature is
active only in Asynchronous mode and while the WUE
bit is clear.
The automatic baud rate measurement sequence
(Figure 15-1) begins whenever a Start bit is received
and the ABDEN bit is set. The calculation is self-averaging.
While the ABD sequence takes place, the EUSART
state machine is held in Idle. The RCIF interrupt is set
once the fifth rising edge on RX is detected. The value
in the RCREG needs to be read to clear the RCIF
interrupt. The contents of RCREG should be discarded.
Note 1: If the WUE bit is set with the ABDEN bit,
Auto-Baud Rate Detection will occur on
the byte following the Break character.
2: It is up to the user to determine that the
incoming character baud rate is within the
range of the selected BRG clock source.
Some combinations of oscillator frequency and EUSART baud rates are not
possible due to bit error rates. Overall
system timing and communication baud
rates must be taken into consideration
when using the Auto-Baud Rate
Detection feature.
In the Auto-Baud Rate Detect (ABD) mode, the clock to
the BRG is reversed. Rather than the BRG clocking the
incoming RX signal, the RX signal is timing the BRG. In
ABD mode, the internal Baud Rate Generator is used
as a counter to time the bit period of the incoming serial
byte stream.
Once the ABDEN bit is set, the state machine will clear
the BRG and look for a Start bit. The Auto-Baud Rate
Detection must receive a byte with the value 55h
(ASCII “U”, which is also the LIN bus Sync character)
in order to calculate the proper bit rate. The measurement is taken over both a low and a high bit time in
order to minimize any effects caused by asymmetry of
the incoming signal. After a Start bit, the SPBRG
begins counting up, using the preselected clock source
on the first rising edge of RX. After eight bits on the RX
pin, or the fifth rising edge, an accumulated value
totalling the proper BRG period is left in the
SPBRGH:SPBRG register pair. Once the 5th edge is
seen (this should correspond to the Stop bit), the
ABDEN bit is automatically cleared.
If a rollover of the BRG occurs (an overflow from FFFFh
to 0000h), the event is trapped by the ABDOVF status
bit (BAUDCON<7>). It is set in hardware by BRG rollovers and can be set or cleared by the user in software.
ABD mode remains active after rollover events and the
ABDEN bit remains set (Figure 15-2).
While calibrating the baud rate period, the BRG
registers are clocked at 1/8th the preconfigured clock
rate. Note that the BRG clock will be configured by the
BRG16 and BRGH bits. Independent of the BRG16 bit
setting, both the SPBRG and SPBRGH will be used as
a 16-bit counter. This allows the user to verify that no
carry occurred for 8-bit modes by checking for 00h in
the SPBRGH register. Refer to Table 15-4 for counter
clock rates to the BRG.
DS39760A-page 160
TABLE 15-4:
BRG COUNTER
CLOCK RATES
BRG16
BRGH
BRG Counter Clock
0
0
FOSC/512
0
1
FOSC/128
1
0
FOSC/128
1
FOSC/32
1
Note:
15.1.3.1
During the ABD sequence, SPBRG and
SPBRGH are both used as a 16-bit counter,
independent of the BRG16 setting.
ABD and EUSART Transmission
Since the BRG clock is reversed during ABD
acquisition, the EUSART transmitter cannot be used
during ABD. This means that whenever the ABDEN bit
is set, TXREG cannot be written to. Users should also
ensure that ABDEN does not become set during a
transmit sequence. Failing to do this may result in
unpredictable EUSART operation.
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 15-1:
BRG Value
AUTOMATIC BAUD RATE CALCULATION
XXXXh
RX pin
0000h
001Ch
Start
Edge #1
bit 1
bit 0
Edge #2
bit 3
bit 2
Edge #3
bit 5
bit 4
Edge #4
bit 7
bit 6
Edge #5
Stop bit
BRG Clock
Auto-Cleared
Set by User
ABDEN bit
RCIF bit
(Interrupt)
Read
RCREG
SPBRG
XXXXh
1Ch
SPBRGH
XXXXh
00h
Note: The ABD sequence requires the EUSART module to be configured in Asynchronous mode and WUE = 0.
FIGURE 15-2:
BRG OVERFLOW SEQUENCE
BRG Clock
ABDEN bit
RX pin
Start
bit 0
ABDOVF bit
FFFFh
BRG Value
XXXXh
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
0000h
Advance Information
0000h
DS39760A-page 161
PIC18F2450/4450
15.2
EUSART Asynchronous Mode
Once the TXREG register transfers the data to the TSR
register (occurs in one TCY), the TXREG register is empty
and the TXIF flag bit (PIR1<4>) is set. This interrupt can
be enabled or disabled by setting or clearing the interrupt
enable bit, TXIE (PIE1<4>). TXIF will be set regardless of
the state of TXIE; it cannot be cleared in software. TXIF
is also not cleared immediately upon loading TXREG but
becomes valid in the second instruction cycle following
the load instruction. Polling TXIF immediately following a
load of TXREG will return invalid results.
The Asynchronous mode of operation is selected by
clearing the SYNC bit (TXSTA<4>). In this mode, the
EUSART uses the standard Non-Return-to-Zero (NRZ)
format (one Start bit, eight or nine data bits and one
Stop bit). The most common data format is eight bits.
An on-chip dedicated 8-bit/16-bit Baud Rate Generator
can be used to derive standard baud rate frequencies
from the oscillator.
The EUSART transmits and receives the LSb first. The
EUSART’s transmitter and receiver are functionally
independent but use the same data format and baud
rate. The Baud Rate Generator produces a clock, either
x16 or x64 of the bit shift rate depending on the BRGH
and BRG16 bits (TXSTA<2> and BAUDCON<3>). Parity
is not supported by the hardware but can be
implemented in software and stored as the ninth data bit.
While TXIF indicates the status of the TXREG register,
another bit, TRMT (TXSTA<1>), shows the status of
the TSR register. TRMT is a read-only bit which is set
when the TSR register is empty. No interrupt logic is
tied to this bit so the user has to poll this bit in order to
determine if the TSR register is empty.
Note 1: The TSR register is not mapped in data
memory so it is not available to the user.
When operating in Asynchronous mode, the EUSART
module consists of the following important elements:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
2: Flag bit TXIF is set when enable bit TXEN
is set.
Baud Rate Generator
Sampling Circuit
Asynchronous Transmitter
Asynchronous Receiver
Auto-Wake-up on Sync Break Character
12-Bit Break Character Transmit
Auto-Baud Rate Detection
15.2.1
To set up an Asynchronous Transmission:
1.
2.
EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS
TRANSMITTER
3.
4.
The EUSART transmitter block diagram is shown in
Figure 15-3. The heart of the transmitter is the Transmit
(Serial) Shift Register (TSR). The Shift register obtains
its data from the Read/Write Transmit Buffer register,
TXREG. The TXREG register is loaded with data in
software. The TSR register is not loaded until the Stop
bit has been transmitted from the previous load. As
soon as the Stop bit is transmitted, the TSR is loaded
with new data from the TXREG register (if available).
FIGURE 15-3:
5.
6.
7.
8.
Initialize the SPBRGH:SPBRG registers for the
appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH
and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the
desired baud rate.
Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing
bit SYNC and setting bit SPEN.
If interrupts are desired, set enable bit TXIE.
If 9-bit transmission is desired, set transmit bit
TX9. Can be used as address/data bit.
Enable the transmission by setting bit TXEN
which will also set bit TXIF.
If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit
should be loaded in bit TX9D.
Load data to the TXREG register (starts
transmission).
If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE
bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are
set.
EUSART TRANSMIT BLOCK DIAGRAM
Data Bus
TXIF
TXREG Register
TXIE
8
MSb
LSb
• • •
(8)
Pin Buffer
and Control
0
TSR Register
TX pin
Interrupt
TXEN
Baud Rate CLK
TRMT
BRG16
SPBRGH
SPBRG
Baud Rate Generator
DS39760A-page 162
SPEN
TX9
TX9D
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 15-4:
ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION
Write to TXREG
Word 1
BRG Output
(Shift Clock)
TX
(pin)
Start bit
bit 0
bit 1
bit 7/8
Stop bit
Word 1
TXIF bit
(Transmit Buffer
Reg. Empty Flag)
1 TCY
Word 1
Transmit Shift Reg
TRMT bit
(Transmit Shift
Reg. Empty Flag)
FIGURE 15-5:
ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (BACK TO BACK)
Write to TXREG
Word 1
Word 2
BRG Output
(Shift Clock)
TX
(pin)
Start bit
bit 0
bit 1
1 TCY
TXIF bit
(Interrupt Reg. Flag)
bit 7/8
Stop bit
Start bit
bit 0
Word 2
Word 1
1 TCY
Word 1
Transmit Shift Reg.
TRMT bit
(Transmit Shift
Reg. Empty Flag)
Note:
Word 2
Transmit Shift Reg.
This timing diagram shows two consecutive transmissions.
TABLE 15-5:
Name
INTCON
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION
Bit 7
Bit 6
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
TMR0IE
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
PIR1
—
ADIF
RCIF
TXIF
—
CCP1IF
TMR2IF
TMR1IF
51
PIE1
—
ADIE
RCIE
TXIE
—
CCP1IE
TMR2IE
TMR1IE
51
—
ADIP
RCIP
TXIP
—
CCP1IP
TMR2IP
TMR1IP
51
SPEN
RX9
SREN
CREN
ADDEN
FERR
OERR
RX9D
51
IPR1
RCSTA
TXREG
TXSTA
EUSART Transmit Register
50
CSRC
TX9
TXEN
SYNC
SENDB
BRGH
TRMT
TX9D
51
BAUDCON
ABDOVF
RCIDL
—
SCKP
BRG16
—
WUE
ABDEN
51
SPBRGH
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte
50
SPBRG
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte
50
Legend: — = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for asynchronous transmission.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 163
PIC18F2450/4450
15.2.2
EUSART ASYNCHRONOUS
RECEIVER
15.2.3
The receiver block diagram is shown in Figure 15-6.
The data is received on the RX pin and drives the data
recovery block. The data recovery block is actually a
high-speed shifter operating at x16 times the baud rate,
whereas the main receive serial shifter operates at the
bit rate or at FOSC. This mode would typically be used
in RS-232 systems.
This mode would typically be used in RS-485 systems.
To set up an Asynchronous Reception with Address
Detect Enable:
1.
Initialize the SPBRGH:SPBRG registers for the
appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH
and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the
desired baud rate.
2. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing
the SYNC bit and setting the SPEN bit.
3. If interrupts are required, set the RCEN bit and
select the desired priority level with the RCIP bit.
4. Set the RX9 bit to enable 9-bit reception.
5. Set the ADDEN bit to enable address detect.
6. Enable reception by setting the CREN bit.
7. The RCIF bit will be set when reception is
complete. The interrupt will be Acknowledged if
the RCIE and GIE bits are set.
8. Read the RCSTA register to determine if any
error occurred during reception, as well as read
bit 9 of data (if applicable).
9. Read RCREG to determine if the device is being
addressed.
10. If any error occurred, clear the CREN bit.
11. If the device has been addressed, clear the
ADDEN bit to allow all received data into the
receive buffer and interrupt the CPU.
To set up an Asynchronous Reception:
1.
Initialize the SPBRGH:SPBRG registers for the
appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRGH
and BRG16 bits, as required, to achieve the
desired baud rate.
2. Enable the asynchronous serial port by clearing
bit SYNC and setting bit SPEN.
3. If interrupts are desired, set enable bit RCIE.
4. If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit RX9.
5. Enable the reception by setting bit CREN.
6. Flag bit RCIF will be set when reception is
complete and an interrupt will be generated if
enable bit RCIE was set.
7. Read the RCSTA register to get the ninth bit (if
enabled) and determine if any error occurred
during reception.
8. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the
RCREG register.
9. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing
enable bit CREN.
10. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE
bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are
set.
FIGURE 15-6:
SETTING UP 9-BIT MODE WITH
ADDRESS DETECT
EUSART RECEIVE BLOCK DIAGRAM
CREN
OERR
FERR
x64 Baud Rate CLK
BRG16
SPBRGH
SPBRG
Baud Rate Generator
÷ 64
or
÷ 16
or
÷4
RSR Register
MSb
Stop
(8)
7
• • •
1
LSb
0
Start
RX9
Pin Buffer
and Control
Data
Recovery
RX
RX9D
RCREG Register
FIFO
SPEN
8
Interrupt
RCIF
Data Bus
RCIE
DS39760A-page 164
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 15-7:
ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION
Start
bit
RX (pin)
bit 0
bit 1
bit 7/8 Stop
bit
Start
bit
bit 0
Rcv Shift Reg
Rcv Buffer Reg
Stop
bit
Start
bit
bit 7/8
Stop
bit
Word 2
RCREG
Word 1
RCREG
Read Rcv
Buffer Reg
RCREG
bit 7/8
RCIF
(Interrupt Flag)
OERR bit
CREN
Note:
This timing diagram shows three words appearing on the RX input. The RCREG (Receive Buffer) is read after the third word
causing the OERR (Overrun) bit to be set.
TABLE 15-6:
Name
INTCON
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH ASYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
PIR1
—
ADIF
RCIF
TXIF
—
CCP1IF
TMR2IF
TMR1IF
51
PIE1
—
ADIE
RCIE
TXIE
—
CCP1IE
TMR2IE
TMR1IE
51
—
ADIP
RCIP
TXIP
—
CCP1IP
TMR2IP
TMR1IP
51
SPEN
RX9
SREN
CREN
ADDEN
FERR
OERR
RX9D
51
IPR1
RCSTA
RCREG
TXSTA
EUSART Receive Register
50
CSRC
TX9
TXEN
SYNC
SENDB
BRGH
TRMT
TX9D
51
RCIDL
—
SCKP
BRG16
—
WUE
ABDEN
51
BAUDCON
ABDOVF
SPBRGH
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte
50
SPBRG
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte
50
Legend: — = unimplemented locations read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for asynchronous reception.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 165
PIC18F2450/4450
15.2.4
AUTO-WAKE-UP ON SYNC BREAK
CHARACTER
During Sleep mode, all clocks to the EUSART are
suspended. Therefore, the Baud Rate Generator is
inactive and proper byte reception cannot be
performed. The auto-wake-up feature allows the
controller to wake-up due to activity on the RX/DT line
while the EUSART is operating in Asynchronous mode.
The auto-wake-up feature is enabled by setting the
WUE bit (BAUDCON<1>). Once set, the typical receive
sequence on RX/DT is disabled and the EUSART
remains in an Idle state, monitoring for a wake-up event
independent of the CPU mode. A wake-up event
consists of a high-to-low transition on the RX/DT line.
(This coincides with the start of a Sync Break or a
Wake-up Signal character for the LIN protocol.)
Following a wake-up event, the module generates an
RCIF interrupt. The interrupt is generated
synchronously to the Q clocks in normal operating
modes (Figure 15-8) and asynchronously if the device
is in Sleep mode (Figure 15-9). The interrupt condition
is cleared by reading the RCREG register.
The WUE bit is automatically cleared once a low-to-high
transition is observed on the RX line following the wakeup event. At this point, the EUSART module is in Idle
mode and returns to normal operation. This signals to
the user that the Sync Break event is over.
15.2.4.1
Special Considerations Using
Auto-Wake-up
Since auto-wake-up functions by sensing rising edge
transitions on RX/DT, information with any state
changes before the Stop bit may signal a false End-of-
FIGURE 15-8:
Character and cause data or framing errors. To work
properly, therefore, the initial character in the
transmission must be all ‘0’s. This can be 00h (8 bytes)
for standard RS-232 devices or 000h (12 bits) for LIN
bus.
Oscillator start-up time must also be considered,
especially in applications using oscillators with longer
start-up intervals (i.e., XT or HS mode). The Sync
Break (or Wake-up Signal) character must be of
sufficient length and be followed by a sufficient interval
to allow enough time for the selected oscillator to start
and provide proper initialization of the EUSART.
15.2.4.2
Special Considerations Using
the WUE Bit
The timing of WUE and RCIF events may cause some
confusion when it comes to determining the validity of
received data. As noted, setting the WUE bit places the
EUSART in an Idle mode. The wake-up event causes
a receive interrupt by setting the RCIF bit. The WUE bit
is cleared after this when a rising edge is seen on RX/
DT. The interrupt condition is then cleared by reading
the RCREG register. Ordinarily, the data in RCREG will
be dummy data and should be discarded.
The fact that the WUE bit has been cleared (or is still
set) and the RCIF flag is set should not be used as an
indicator of the integrity of the data in RCREG. Users
should consider implementing a parallel method in
firmware to verify received data integrity.
To assure that no actual data is lost, check the RCIDL
bit to verify that a receive operation is not in process. If
a receive operation is not occurring, the WUE bit may
then be set just prior to entering the Sleep mode.
AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMINGS DURING NORMAL OPERATION
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
OSC1
Bit set by user
Auto-Cleared
WUE bit(1)
RX/DT Line
RCIF
Cleared due to user read of RCREG
Note 1: The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set.
FIGURE 15-9:
AUTO-WAKE-UP BIT (WUE) TIMINGS DURING SLEEP
Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Q1
Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
OSC1
Bit set by user
Auto-Cleared
WUE bit(2)
RX/DT Line
Note 1
RCIF
Cleared due to user read of RCREG
Sleep Command Executed
Note 1:
2:
Sleep Ends
If the wake-up event requires long oscillator warm-up time, the auto-clear of the WUE bit can occur while the stposc signal is still active.
This sequence should not depend on the presence of Q clocks.
The EUSART remains in Idle while the WUE bit is set.
DS39760A-page 166
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
15.2.5
BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE
The EUSART module has the capability of sending the
special Break character sequences that are required by
the LIN bus standard. The Break character transmit
consists of a Start bit, followed by twelve ‘0’ bits and a
Stop bit. The Frame Break character is sent whenever
the SENDB and TXEN bits (TXSTA<3> and
TXSTA<5>) are set while the Transmit Shift Register is
loaded with data. Note that the value of data written to
TXREG will be ignored and all ‘0’s will be transmitted.
The SENDB bit is automatically reset by hardware after
the corresponding Stop bit is sent. This allows the user
to preload the transmit FIFO with the next transmit byte
following the Break character (typically, the Sync
character in the LIN specification).
Note that the data value written to the TXREG for the
Break character is ignored. The write simply serves the
purpose of initiating the proper sequence.
The TRMT bit indicates when the transmit operation is
active or Idle, just as it does during normal transmission.
See Figure 15-10 for the timing of the Break character
sequence.
15.2.5.1
Break and Sync Transmit Sequence
The following sequence will send a message frame
header made up of a Break, followed by an Auto-Baud
Sync byte. This sequence is typical of a LIN bus master.
1.
2.
Configure the EUSART for the desired mode.
Set the TXEN and SENDB bits to set up the
Break character.
FIGURE 15-10:
Write to TXREG
3.
4.
5.
Load the TXREG with a dummy character to
initiate transmission (the value is ignored).
Write ‘55h’ to TXREG to load the Sync character
into the transmit FIFO buffer.
After the Break has been sent, the SENDB bit is
reset by hardware. The Sync character now
transmits in the preconfigured mode.
When the TXREG becomes empty, as indicated by the
TXIF, the next data byte can be written to TXREG.
15.2.6
RECEIVING A BREAK CHARACTER
The Enhanced USART module can receive a Break
character in two ways.
The first method forces configuration of the baud rate
at a frequency of 9/13 the typical speed. This allows for
the Stop bit transition to be at the correct sampling
location (13 bits for Break versus Start bit and eight
data bits for typical data).
The second method uses the auto-wake-up feature
described in Section 15.2.4 “Auto-Wake-up on Sync
Break Character”. By enabling this feature, the
EUSART will sample the next two transitions on RX/DT,
cause an RCIF interrupt and receive the next data byte
followed by another interrupt.
Note that following a Break character, the user will
typically want to enable the Auto-Baud Rate Detect
feature. For both methods, the user can set the ABD bit
once the TXIF interrupt is observed.
SEND BREAK CHARACTER SEQUENCE
Dummy Write
BRG Output
(Shift Clock)
TX (pin)
Start bit
bit 0
bit 1
bit 11
Stop bit
Break
TXIF bit
(Transmit Buffer
Reg. Empty Flag)
TRMT bit
(Transmit Shift
Reg. Empty Flag)
SENDB sampled here
Auto-Cleared
SENDB
(Transmit Shift
Reg. Empty Flag)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 167
PIC18F2450/4450
15.3
EUSART Synchronous
Master Mode
Once the TXREG register transfers the data to the TSR
register (occurs in one TCYCLE), the TXREG register is
empty and the TXIF flag bit (PIR1<4>) is set. The
interrupt can be enabled or disabled by setting or
clearing the interrupt enable bit, TXIE (PIE1<4>). TXIF
is set regardless of the state of enable bit TXIE; it
cannot be cleared in software. It will reset only when
new data is loaded into the TXREG register.
The Synchronous Master mode is entered by setting
the CSRC bit (TXSTA<7>). In this mode, the data is
transmitted in a half-duplex manner (i.e., transmission
and reception do not occur at the same time). When
transmitting data, the reception is inhibited and vice
versa. Synchronous mode is entered by setting bit,
SYNC (TXSTA<4>). In addition, enable bit, SPEN
(RCSTA<7>), is set in order to configure the TX and RX
pins to CK (clock) and DT (data) lines, respectively.
While flag bit, TXIF, indicates the status of the TXREG
register, another bit, TRMT (TXSTA<1>), shows the
status of the TSR register. TRMT is a read-only bit which
is set when the TSR is empty. No interrupt logic is tied to
this bit so the user must poll this bit in order to determine
if the TSR register is empty. The TSR is not mapped in
data memory so it is not available to the user.
The Master mode indicates that the processor
transmits the master clock on the CK line. Clock
polarity is selected with the SCKP bit (BAUDCON<4>).
Setting SCKP sets the Idle state on CK as high, while
clearing the bit sets the Idle state as low. This option is
provided to support Microwire devices with this module.
15.3.1
To set up a Synchronous Master Transmission:
1.
EUSART SYNCHRONOUS MASTER
TRANSMISSION
2.
The EUSART transmitter block diagram is shown in
Figure 15-3. The heart of the transmitter is the Transmit
(Serial) Shift Register (TSR). The Shift register obtains
its data from the Read/Write Transmit Buffer register,
TXREG. The TXREG register is loaded with data in
software. The TSR register is not loaded until the last
bit has been transmitted from the previous load. As
soon as the last bit is transmitted, the TSR is loaded
with new data from the TXREG (if available).
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
FIGURE 15-11:
Initialize the SPBRGH:SPBRG registers for the
appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRG16
bit, as required, to achieve the desired baud
rate.
Enable the synchronous master serial port by
setting bits SYNC, SPEN and CSRC.
If interrupts are desired, set enable bit TXIE.
If 9-bit transmission is desired, set bit TX9.
Enable the transmission by setting bit TXEN.
If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit
should be loaded in bit TX9D.
Start transmission by loading data to the TXREG
register.
If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE
bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are
set.
SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION
Q1 Q2 Q3Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
RC7/RX/DT pin
bit 0
bit 1
bit 2
bit 7
bit 0
Word 1
bit 1
bit 7
Word 2
RC6/TX/CK pin
(SCKP = 0)
RC6/TX/CK pin
(SCKP = 1)
Write to
TXREG Reg
Write Word 1
Write Word 2
TXIF bit
(Interrupt Flag)
TRMT bit
TXEN bit
Note:
‘1’
‘1’
Sync Master mode (SPBRG = 0), continuous transmission of two 8-bit words.
DS39760A-page 168
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 15-12:
SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (THROUGH TXEN)
RC7/RX/DT pin
bit 0
bit 1
bit 2
bit 6
bit 7
RC6/TX/CK pin
Write to
TXREG reg
TXIF bit
TRMT bit
TXEN bit
TABLE 15-7:
Name
INTCON
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER TRANSMISSION
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
PIR1
—
ADIF
RCIF
TXIF
—
CCP1IF
TMR2IF
TMR1IF
51
PIE1
—
ADIE
RCIE
TXIE
—
CCP1IE
TMR2IE
TMR1IE
51
—
ADIP
RCIP
TXIP
—
CCP1IP
TMR2IP
TMR1IP
51
SPEN
RX9
SREN
CREN
ADDEN
FERR
OERR
RX9D
51
IPR1
RCSTA
TXREG
EUSART Transmit Register
50
CSRC
TX9
TXEN
SYNC
SENDB
BRGH
TRMT
TX9D
51
BAUDCON
ABDOVF
RCIDL
—
SCKP
BRG16
—
WUE
ABDEN
51
SPBRGH
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte
50
SPBRG
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte
50
TXSTA
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous master transmission.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 169
PIC18F2450/4450
15.3.2
EUSART SYNCHRONOUS MASTER
RECEPTION
3.
4.
5.
6.
Ensure bits CREN and SREN are clear.
If interrupts are desired, set enable bit RCIE.
If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit RX9.
If a single reception is required, set bit SREN.
For continuous reception, set bit CREN.
7. Interrupt flag bit RCIF will be set when reception
is complete and an interrupt will be generated if
the enable bit RCIE was set.
8. Read the RCSTA register to get the ninth bit (if
enabled) and determine if any error occurred
during reception.
9. Read the 8-bit received data by reading the
RCREG register.
10. If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing
bit CREN.
11. If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE
bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are
set.
Once Synchronous mode is selected, reception is
enabled by setting either the Single Receive Enable bit,
SREN (RCSTA<5>), or the Continuous Receive
Enable bit, CREN (RCSTA<4>). Data is sampled on the
RX pin on the falling edge of the clock.
If enable bit SREN is set, only a single word is received.
If enable bit CREN is set, the reception is continuous
until CREN is cleared. If both bits are set, then CREN
takes precedence.
To set up a Synchronous Master Reception:
1.
2.
Initialize the SPBRGH:SPBRG registers for the
appropriate baud rate. Set or clear the BRG16
bit, as required, to achieve the desired baud rate.
Enable the synchronous master serial port by
setting bits SYNC, SPEN and CSRC.
FIGURE 15-13:
SYNCHRONOUS RECEPTION (MASTER MODE, SREN)
Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3 Q4
RC7/RX/DT
pin
bit 0
bit 1
bit 2
bit 3
bit 4
bit 5
bit 6
bit 7
RC6/TX/CK pin
(SCKP = 0)
RC6/TX/CK pin
(SCKP = 1)
Write to
bit SREN
SREN bit
CREN bit ‘0’
‘0’
RCIF bit
(Interrupt)
Read
RXREG
Note:
Timing diagram demonstrates Sync Master mode with bit SREN = 1 and bit BRGH = 0.
TABLE 15-8:
Name
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS MASTER RECEPTION
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
GIE/GIEH
PEIE/GIEL
TMR0IE
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
PIR1
—
ADIF
RCIF
TXIF
—
CCP1IF
TMR2IF
TMR1IF
51
PIE1
—
ADIE
RCIE
TXIE
—
CCP1IE
TMR2IE
TMR1IE
51
IPR1
—
ADIP
RCIP
TXIP
—
CCP1IP
TMR2IP
TMR1IP
51
SPEN
RX9
SREN
CREN
ADDEN
FERR
OERR
RX9D
51
INTCON
RCSTA
RCREG
TXSTA
EUSART Receive Register
CSRC
BAUDCON ABDOVF
50
TX9
TXEN
SYNC
SENDB
BRGH
TRMT
TX9D
51
RCIDL
—
SCKP
BRG16
—
WUE
ABDEN
51
SPBRGH
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte
51
SPBRG
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte
50
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous master reception.
DS39760A-page 170
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
15.4
EUSART Synchronous
Slave Mode
To set up a Synchronous Slave Transmission:
1.
Synchronous Slave mode is entered by clearing bit,
CSRC (TXSTA<7>). This mode differs from the
Synchronous Master mode in that the shift clock is
supplied externally at the CK pin (instead of being
supplied internally in Master mode). This allows the
device to transfer or receive data while in any low-power
mode.
15.4.1
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
EUSART SYNCHRONOUS
SLAVE TRANSMIT
7.
The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave
modes is identical, except in the case of Sleep mode.
8.
If two words are written to the TXREG register and then
the SLEEP instruction is executed, the following will occur:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Enable the synchronous slave serial port by
setting bits SYNC and SPEN and clearing bit
CSRC.
Clear bits CREN and SREN.
If interrupts are desired, set enable bit TXIE.
If 9-bit transmission is desired, set bit TX9.
Enable the transmission by setting enable bit
TXEN.
If 9-bit transmission is selected, the ninth bit
should be loaded in bit TX9D.
Start transmission by loading data to the TXREG
register.
If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE
bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are
set.
The first word will immediately transfer to the
TSR register and transmit.
The second word will remain in the TXREG
register.
Flag bit TXIF will not be set.
When the first word has been shifted out of TSR,
the TXREG register will transfer the second word
to the TSR and flag bit TXIF will now be set.
If enable bit TXIE is set, the interrupt will wake the
chip from Sleep. If the global interrupt is enabled,
the program will branch to the interrupt vector.
TABLE 15-9:
Name
INTCON
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE TRANSMISSION
Bit 7
Bit 6
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
TMR0IE
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
PIR1
—
ADIF
RCIF
TXIF
—
CCP1IF
TMR2IF
TMR1IF
51
PIE1
—
ADIE
RCIE
TXIE
—
CCP1IE
TMR2IE
TMR1IE
51
IPR1
—
ADIP
RCIP
TXIP
—
CCP1IP
TMR2IP
TMR1IP
51
SPEN
RX9
SREN
CREN
ADDEN
FERR
OERR
RX9D
51
RCSTA
TXREG
EUSART Transmit Register
50
CSRC
TX9
TXEN
SYNC
SENDB
BRGH
TRMT
TX9D
BAUDCON
ABDOVF
RCIDL
—
SCKP
BRG16
—
WUE
ABDEN
SPBRGH
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte
50
SPBRG
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte
50
TXSTA
51
51
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous slave transmission.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 171
PIC18F2450/4450
15.4.2
EUSART SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE
RECEPTION
To set up a Synchronous Slave Reception:
1.
The operation of the Synchronous Master and Slave
modes is identical, except in the case of Sleep or any
Idle mode and bit SREN, which is a “don’t care” in
Slave mode.
If receive is enabled by setting the CREN bit prior to
entering Sleep or any Idle mode, then a word may be
received while in this low-power mode. Once the word
is received, the RSR register will transfer the data to the
RCREG register. If the RCIE enable bit is set, the
interrupt generated will wake the chip from the lowpower mode. If the global interrupt is enabled, the
program will branch to the interrupt vector.
Enable the synchronous master serial port by
setting bits SYNC and SPEN and clearing bit
CSRC.
If interrupts are desired, set enable bit RCIE.
If 9-bit reception is desired, set bit RX9.
To enable reception, set enable bit CREN.
Flag bit RCIF will be set when reception is
complete. An interrupt will be generated if
enable bit RCIE was set.
Read the RCSTA register to get the ninth bit (if
enabled) and determine if any error occurred
during reception.
Read the 8-bit received data by reading the
RCREG register.
If any error occurred, clear the error by clearing
bit CREN.
If using interrupts, ensure that the GIE and PEIE
bits in the INTCON register (INTCON<7:6>) are
set.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
TABLE 15-10: REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH SYNCHRONOUS SLAVE RECEPTION
Name
INTCON
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL TMR0IE
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
PIR1
—
ADIF
RCIF
TXIF
—
CCP1IF
TMR2IF
TMR1IF
51
PIE1
—
ADIE
RCIE
TXIE
—
CCP1IE
TMR2IE
TMR1IE
51
IPR1
—
ADIP
RCIP
TXIP
—
CCP1IP
TMR2IP
TMR1IP
51
SPEN
RX9
SREN
CREN
ADDEN
FERR
OERR
RX9D
51
RCSTA
RCREG
TXSTA
EUSART Receive Register
50
CSRC
TX9
TXEN
SYNC
SENDB
BRGH
TRMT
TX9D
51
BAUDCON
ABDOVF
RCIDL
—
SCKP
BRG16
—
WUE
ABDEN
51
SPBRGH
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register High Byte
50
SPBRG
EUSART Baud Rate Generator Register Low Byte
50
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for synchronous slave reception.
DS39760A-page 172
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
16.0
10-BIT ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL
CONVERTER (A/D) MODULE
The Analog-to-Digital (A/D) converter module has
10 inputs for the 28-pin devices and 13 for the 40/44-pin
devices. This module allows conversion of an analog
input signal to a corresponding 10-bit digital number.
The ADCON0 register, shown in Register 16-1,
controls the operation of the A/D module. The
ADCON1 register, shown in Register 16-2, configures
the functions of the port pins. The ADCON2 register,
shown in Register 16-3, configures the A/D clock
source, programmed acquisition time and justification.
The module has five registers:
•
•
•
•
•
A/D Result High Register (ADRESH)
A/D Result Low Register (ADRESL)
A/D Control Register 0 (ADCON0)
A/D Control Register 1 (ADCON1)
A/D Control Register 2 (ADCON2)
REGISTER 16-1:
ADCON0: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 0
U0
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
—
—
CHS3
CHS2
CHS1
CHS0
GO/DONE
ADON
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7-6
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 5-2
CHS3:CHS0: Analog Channel Select bits
0000 = Channel 0 (AN0)
0001 = Channel 1 (AN1)
0010 = Channel 2 (AN2)
0011 = Channel 3 (AN3)
0100 = Channel 4 (AN4)
0101 = Channel 5 (AN5)(1,2)
0110 = Channel 6 (AN6)(1,2)
0111 = Channel 7 (AN7)(1,2)
1000 = Channel 8 (AN8)
1001 = Channel 9 (AN9)
1010 = Channel 10 (AN10)
1011 = Channel 11 (AN11)
1100 = Channel 12 (AN12
1101 = Unimplemented(2)
1110 = Unimplemented(2)
1111 = Unimplemented(2)
bit 1
GO/DONE: A/D Conversion Status bit
When ADON = 1:
1 = A/D conversion in progress
0 = A/D Idle
bit 0
ADON: A/D On bit
1 = A/D converter module is enabled
0 = A/D converter module is disabled
Note 1:
2:
x = Bit is unknown
These channels are not implemented on 28-pin devices.
Performing a conversion on unimplemented channels will return a floating input measurement.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 173
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 16-2:
ADCON1: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 1
U-0
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
R/W(1)
—
—
VCFG0
VCFG0
PCFG3
PCFG2
PCFG1
PCFG0
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
PCFG3:
PCFG0
AN5(2)
AN4
AN3
AN2
AN1
AN0
PCFG3:PCFG0: A/D Port Configuration Control bits:
AN6(2)
bit 3-0
AN7(2)
VCFG0: Voltage Reference Configuration bit (VREF+ source)
1 = VREF+ (AN3)
0 = VDD
AN8
bit 4
AN9
VCFG0: Voltage Reference Configuration bit (VREF- source)
1 = VREF- (AN2)
0 = VSS
AN10
bit 5
AN11
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
AN12
bit 7-6
0000(1)
0001
0010
0011
0100
0101
0110
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
D
D
D
D
D
A
A
A
D
D
D
D
A
A
A
A
D
D
D
A
A
A
A
A
D
D
A
A
A
A
A
A
D
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
A
D
D
D
D
D
D
D
A
A
D
D
D
D
D
D
A
A
A
D
D
D
D
D
A
A
A
A
D
D
D
D
A
A
A
A
A
D
D
D
A
A
A
A
A
A
D
D
A
A
A
A
A
A
A
D
0111(1)
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
A = Analog input
Note 1:
2:
x = Bit is unknown
D = Digital I/O
The POR value of the PCFG bits depends on the value of the PBADEN
Configuration bit. When PBADEN = 1, PCFG<3:0> = 0000; when PBADEN = 0, PCFG<3:0> = 0111.
AN5 through AN7 are available only on 40/44-pin devices.
DS39760A-page 174
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 16-3:
ADCON2: A/D CONTROL REGISTER 2
R/W-0
U-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
ADFM
—
ACQT2
ACQT1
ACQT0
ADCS2
ADCS1
ADCS0
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7
ADFM: A/D Result Format Select bit
1 = Right justified
0 = Left justified
bit 6
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 5-3
ACQT2:ACQT0: A/D Acquisition Time Select bits
111 = 20 TAD
110 = 16 TAD
101 = 12 TAD
100 = 8 TAD
011 = 6 TAD
010 = 4 TAD
001 = 2 TAD
000 = 0 TAD(1)
bit 2-0
ADCS2:ADCS0: A/D Conversion Clock Select bits
111 = FRC (clock derived from A/D RC oscillator)(1)
110 = FOSC/64
101 = FOSC/16
100 = FOSC/4
011 = FRC (clock derived from A/D RC oscillator)(1)
010 = FOSC/32
001 = FOSC/8
000 = FOSC/2
Note 1:
x = Bit is unknown
If the A/D FRC clock source is selected, a delay of one TCY (instruction cycle) is added before the A/D
clock starts. This allows the SLEEP instruction to be executed before starting a conversion.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 175
PIC18F2450/4450
The analog reference voltage is software selectable to
either the device’s positive and negative supply voltage
(VDD and VSS) or the voltage level on the RA3/AN3/
VREF+ and RA2/AN2/VREF- pins.
A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state.
This forces the A/D module to be turned off and any
conversion in progress is aborted.
Each port pin associated with the A/D converter can be
configured as an analog input or as a digital I/O. The
ADRESH and ADRESL registers contain the result of
the A/D conversion. When the A/D conversion is complete, the result is loaded into the ADRESH:ADRESL
register pair, the GO/DONE bit (ADCON0 register) is
cleared and A/D Interrupt Flag bit, ADIF, is set. The block
diagram of the A/D module is shown in Figure 16-1.
The A/D converter has a unique feature of being able
to operate while the device is in Sleep mode. To
operate in Sleep, the A/D conversion clock must be
derived from the A/D’s internal RC oscillator.
The output of the sample and hold is the input into the
converter, which generates the result via successive
approximation.
FIGURE 16-1:
A/D BLOCK DIAGRAM
CHS3:CHS0
1100
1011
1010
1001
1000
Reference
Voltage
VREF+
X0
X1
1X
VREF-
0X
AN8
AN6(1)
0101
AN5(1)
0010
0001
VDD(2)
AN9
0110
0011
VCFG1:VCFG0
AN10
AN7(1)
0100
(Input Voltage)
AN11
0111
VAIN
10-Bit
Converter
A/D
AN12
0000
AN4
AN3
AN2
AN1
AN0
VSS(2)
Note 1:
2:
Channels AN5 through AN7 are not available on 28-pin devices.
I/O pins have diode protection to VDD and VSS.
DS39760A-page 176
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
Wait for A/D conversion to complete, by either:
• Polling for the GO/DONE bit to be cleared
OR
• Waiting for the A/D interrupt
Read A/D Result registers (ADRESH:ADRESL);
clear bit ADIF, if required.
For next conversion, go to step 1 or step 2, as
required. The A/D conversion time per bit is
defined as TAD. A minimum wait of 3 TAD is
required before the next acquisition starts.
6.
7.
FIGURE 16-2:
The following steps should be followed to perform an
A/D conversion:
3FFh
1.
3FEh
FIGURE 16-3:
Digital Code Output
002h
1023 LSB
1023.5 LSB
1022 LSB
1022.5 LSB
Analog Input Voltage
ANALOG INPUT MODEL
VDD
Sampling
Switch
VT = 0.6V
Rs
VAIN
2 LSB
000h
3 LSB
001h
2.5 LSB
3.
4.
003h
1 LSB
2.
Configure the A/D module:
• Configure analog pins, voltage reference and
digital I/O (ADCON1)
• Select A/D input channel (ADCON0)
• Select A/D acquisition time (ADCON2)
• Select A/D conversion clock (ADCON2)
• Turn on A/D module (ADCON0)
Configure A/D interrupt (if desired):
• Clear ADIF bit
• Set ADIE bit
• Set GIE bit
Wait the required acquisition time (if required).
Start conversion:
• Set GO/DONE bit (ADCON0 register)
A/D TRANSFER FUNCTION
1.5 LSB
After the A/D module has been configured as desired, the
selected channel must be acquired before the conversion is started. The analog input channels must have
their corresponding TRIS bits selected as an input. To
determine acquisition time, see Section 16.1 “A/D
Acquisition Requirements”. After this acquisition time
has elapsed, the A/D conversion can be started. An
acquisition time can be programmed to occur between
setting the GO/DONE bit and the actual start of the
conversion.
5.
0.5 LSB
The value in the ADRESH:ADRESL registers is not
modified for a Power-on Reset. The ADRESH:ADRESL
registers will contain unknown data after a Power-on
Reset.
RIC ≤ 1k
ANx
CPIN
5 pF
VT = 0.6V
SS
RSS
ILEAKAGE
±100 nA
CHOLD = 25 pF
VSS
Legend: CPIN
= Input Capacitance
= Threshold Voltage
VT
ILEAKAGE = Leakage Current at the pin due to
various junctions
= Interconnect Resistance
RIC
= Sampling Switch
SS
= Sample/hold Capacitance (from DAC)
CHOLD
RSS
= Sampling Switch Resistance
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
VDD
6V
5V
4V
3V
2V
1
2
3
4
Sampling Switch (kΩ)
DS39760A-page 177
PIC18F2450/4450
16.1
A/D Acquisition Requirements
For the A/D converter to meet its specified accuracy,
the charge holding capacitor (CHOLD) must be allowed
to fully charge to the input channel voltage level. The
analog input model is shown in Figure 16-3. The
source impedance (RS) and the internal sampling
switch (RSS) impedance directly affect the time
required to charge the capacitor CHOLD. The sampling
switch (RSS) impedance varies over the device voltage
(VDD). The source impedance affects the offset voltage
at the analog input (due to pin leakage current). The
maximum recommended impedance for analog
sources is 2.5 kΩ. After the analog input channel is
selected (changed), the channel must be sampled for
at least the minimum acquisition time before starting a
conversion.
Note:
CHOLD
Rs
Conversion Error
VDD
Temperature
=
=
≤
=
=
25 pF
2.5 kΩ
1/2 LSb
5V → RSS = 2 kΩ
85°C (system max.)
ACQUISITION TIME
=
Amplifier Settling Time + Holding Capacitor Charging Time + Temperature Coefficient
=
TAMP + TC + TCOFF
EQUATION 16-2:
VHOLD
or
TC
Example 16-3 shows the calculation of the minimum
required acquisition time TACQ. This calculation is
based on the following application system
assumptions:
When the conversion is started, the
holding capacitor is disconnected from the
input pin.
EQUATION 16-1:
TACQ
To calculate the minimum acquisition time,
Equation 16-1 may be used. This equation assumes
that 1/2 LSb error is used (1024 steps for the A/D). The
1/2 LSb error is the maximum error allowed for the A/D
to meet its specified resolution.
A/D MINIMUM CHARGING TIME
=
(VREF – (VREF/2048)) • (1 – e(-TC/CHOLD(RIC + RSS + RS)))
=
-(CHOLD)(RIC + RSS + RS) ln(1/2048)
EQUATION 16-3:
CALCULATING THE MINIMUM REQUIRED ACQUISITION TIME
TACQ
=
TAMP + TC + TCOFF
TAMP
=
0.2 μs
TCOFF
=
(Temp – 25°C)(0.02 μs/°C)
(85°C – 25°C)(0.02 μs/°C)
1.2 μs
Temperature coefficient is only required for temperatures > 25°C. Below 25°C, TCOFF = 0 ms.
TC
=
-(CHOLD)(RIC + RSS + RS) ln(1/2047) μs
-(25 pF) (1 kΩ + 2 kΩ + 2.5 kΩ) ln(0.0004883) μs
1.05 μs
TACQ
=
0.2 μs + 1 μs + 1.2 μs
2.4 μs
DS39760A-page 178
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
16.2
Selecting and Configuring
Acquisition Time
16.3
Selecting the A/D Conversion
Clock
The ADCON2 register allows the user to select an
acquisition time that occurs each time the GO/DONE
bit is set. It also gives users the option to use an
automatically determined acquisition time.
The A/D conversion time per bit is defined as TAD. The
A/D conversion requires 11 TAD per 10-bit conversion.
The source of the A/D conversion clock is software
selectable. There are seven possible options for TAD:
Acquisition time may be set with the ACQT2:ACQT0
bits (ADCON2<5:3>) which provide a range of 2 to
20 TAD. When the GO/DONE bit is set, the A/D module
continues to sample the input for the selected
acquisition time, then automatically begins a
conversion. Since the acquisition time is programmed,
there may be no need to wait for an acquisition time
between selecting a channel and setting the GO/DONE
bit.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Manual
acquisition
is
selected
when
ACQT2:ACQT0 = 000. When the GO/DONE bit is set,
sampling is stopped and a conversion begins. The user
is responsible for ensuring the required acquisition time
has passed between selecting the desired input
channel and setting the GO/DONE bit. This option is
also the default Reset state of the ACQT2:ACQT0 bits
and is compatible with devices that do not offer
programmable acquisition times.
2 TOSC
4 TOSC
8 TOSC
16 TOSC
32 TOSC
64 TOSC
Internal RC Oscillator
For correct A/D conversions, the A/D conversion clock
(TAD) must be as short as possible but greater than the
minimum TAD (see parameter 130 in Table 21-18 for
more information).
Table 16-1 shows the resultant TAD times derived from
the device operating frequencies and the A/D clock
source selected.
In either case, when the conversion is completed, the
GO/DONE bit is cleared, the ADIF flag is set and the
A/D begins sampling the currently selected channel
again. If an acquisition time is programmed, there is
nothing to indicate if the acquisition time has ended or
if the conversion has begun.
TABLE 16-1:
TAD vs. DEVICE OPERATING FREQUENCIES
AD Clock Source (TAD)
4:
PIC18LFXXXX(4)
Operation
ADCS2:ADCS0
PIC18FXXXX
2 TOSC
000
2.86 MHz
1.43 kHz
4 TOSC
100
5.71 MHz
2.86 MHz
8 TOSC
001
11.43 MHz
5.72 MHz
16 TOSC
101
22.86 MHz
11.43 MHz
32 TOSC
010
40.0 MHz
22.86 MHz
64 TOSC
110
40.0 MHz
22.86 MHz
RC(3)
Note 1:
2:
3:
Maximum Device Frequency
x11
1.00
MHz(1)
1.00 MHz(2)
The RC source has a typical TAD time of 1.2 μs.
The RC source has a typical TAD time of 2.5 μs.
For device frequencies above 1 MHz, the device must be in Sleep for the entire conversion or the A/D
accuracy may be out of specification.
Low-power devices only.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 179
PIC18F2450/4450
16.4
Operation in Power-Managed
Modes
The selection of the automatic acquisition time and
A/D conversion clock is determined in part by the clock
source and frequency while in a power-managed
mode.
If the A/D is expected to operate while the device is in
a power-managed mode, the ACQT2:ACQT0 and
ADCS2:ADCS0 bits in ADCON2 should be updated in
accordance with the clock source to be used in that
mode. After entering the mode, an A/D acquisition or
conversion may be started. Once started, the device
should continue to be clocked by the same clock
source until the conversion has been completed.
If desired, the device may be placed into the
corresponding Idle mode during the conversion. If the
device clock frequency is less than 1 MHz, the A/D RC
clock source should be selected.
Operation in the Sleep mode requires the A/D FRC
clock to be selected. If bits ACQT2:ACQT0 are set to
‘000’ and a conversion is started, the conversion will be
delayed one instruction cycle to allow execution of the
SLEEP instruction and entry to Sleep mode. The IDLEN
bit (OSCCON<7>) must have already been cleared
prior to starting the conversion.
DS39760A-page 180
16.5
Configuring Analog Port Pins
The ADCON1, TRISA, TRISB and TRISE registers all
configure the A/D port pins. The port pins needed as
analog inputs must have their corresponding TRIS bits
set (input). If the TRIS bit is cleared (output), the digital
output level (VOH or VOL) will be converted.
The A/D operation is independent of the state of the
CHS3:CHS0 bits and the TRIS bits.
Note 1: When reading the PORT register, all pins
configured as analog input channels will
read as cleared (a low level). Pins configured as digital inputs will convert as analog inputs. Analog levels on a digitally
configured input will be accurately
converted.
2: Analog levels on any pin defined as a
digital input may cause the digital input
buffer to consume current out of the
device’s specification limits.
3: The PBADEN bit in Configuration
Register 3H configures PORTB pins to
reset as analog or digital pins by controlling how the PCFG0 bits in ADCON1 are
reset.
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
16.6
A/D Conversions
After the A/D conversion is completed or aborted, a
2 TAD wait is required before the next acquisition can be
started. After this wait, acquisition on the selected
channel is automatically started.
Figure 16-4 shows the operation of the A/D converter
after the GO/DONE bit has been set and the
ACQT2:ACQT0 bits are cleared. A conversion is
started after the following instruction to allow entry into
Sleep mode before the conversion begins.
Note:
Figure 16-5 shows the operation of the A/D converter
after the GO/DONE bit has been set, the
ACQT2:ACQT0 bits are set to ‘010’ and selecting a
4 TAD acquisition time before the conversion starts.
16.7
Discharge
The discharge phase is used to initialize the value of
the capacitor array. The array is discharged before
every sample. This feature helps to optimize the unitygain amplifier as the circuit always needs to charge the
capacitor array, rather than charge/discharge based on
previous measurement values.
Clearing the GO/DONE bit during a conversion will
abort the current conversion. The A/D Result register
pair will NOT be updated with the partially completed
A/D
conversion
sample.
This
means
the
ADRESH:ADRESL registers will continue to contain
the value of the last completed conversion (or the last
value written to the ADRESH:ADRESL registers).
FIGURE 16-4:
The GO/DONE bit should NOT be set in
the same instruction that turns on the A/D.
A/D CONVERSION TAD CYCLES (ACQT<2:0> = 000, TACQ = 0)
TCY - TAD TAD1 TAD2 TAD3 TAD4 TAD5 TAD6 TAD7 TAD8 TAD9 TAD10 TAD11 TAD1
b4
b1
b0
b6
b7
b2
b9
b8
b3
b5
Conversion starts
Discharge
Holding capacitor is disconnected from analog input (typically 100 ns)
Set GO/DONE bit
On the following cycle:
ADRESH:ADRESL is loaded, GO/DONE bit is cleared,
ADIF bit is set, holding capacitor is connected to analog input.
FIGURE 16-5:
A/D CONVERSION TAD CYCLES (ACQT<2:0> = 010, TACQ = 4 TAD)
TAD Cycles
TACQ Cycles
1
2
3
Automatic
Acquisition
Time
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
b9
b8
b7
b6
b5
b4
b3
b2
b1
b0
Conversion starts
(Holding capacitor is disconnected)
Set GO/DONE bit
(Holding capacitor continues
acquiring input)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
TAD1
Discharge
On the following cycle:
ADRESH:ADRESL is loaded, GO/DONE bit is cleared,
ADIF bit is set, holding capacitor is connected to analog input.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 181
PIC18F2450/4450
16.8
Use of the CCP1 Trigger
An A/D conversion can be started by the Special Event
Trigger of the CCP1 module. This requires that the
CCP1M3:CCP1M0
bits
(CCP1CON<3:0>)
be
programmed as ‘1011’ and that the A/D module is
enabled (ADON bit is set). When the trigger occurs, the
GO/DONE bit will be set, starting the A/D acquisition
and conversion and the Timer1 counter will be reset to
zero. Timer1 is reset to automatically repeat the A/D
acquisition period with minimal software overhead
TABLE 16-2:
Name
INTCON
(moving ADRESH:ADRESL to the desired location).
The appropriate analog input channel must be selected
and the minimum acquisition period is either timed by
the user, or an appropriate TACQ time selected before
the Special Event Trigger sets the GO/DONE bit (starts
a conversion).
If the A/D module is not enabled (ADON is cleared), the
Special Event Trigger will be ignored by the A/D
module but will still reset the Timer1 counter.
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH A/D OPERATION
Bit 7
Bit 6
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
TMR0IE
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
—
ADIF
RCIF
TXIF
—
CCP1IF
TMR2IF
TMR1IF
51
PIE1
—
ADIE
RCIE
TXIE
—
CCP1IE
TMR2IE
TMR1IE
51
IPR1
—
ADIP
RCIP
TXIP
—
CCP1IP
TMR2IP
TMR1IP
51
PIR2
OSCFIF
—
USBIF
—
—
HLVDIF
—
—
51
PIE2
OSCFIE
—
USBIE
—
—
HLVDIE
—
—
51
IPR2
OSCFIP
—
USBIP
—
HLVDIP
—
—
51
PIR1
ADRESH
A/D Result Register High Byte
ADRESL
A/D Result Register Low Byte
—
50
50
—
—
CHS3
CHS2
CHS1
CHS0
GO/DONE
ADON
50
ADCON1
—
—
VCFG1
VCFG0
PCFG3
PCFG2
PCFG1
PCFG0
50
ADCON2
ADFM
—
ACQT2
ACQT1
ACQT0
ADCS2
ADCS1
ADCS0
50
PORTA
—
RA6(2)
RA5
RA4
RA3
RA2
RA1
RA0
51
TRISA
—
TRISA6(2)
TRISA5
TRISA4
TRISA3
TRISA2
TRISA1
TRISA0
51
ADCON0
PORTB
RB7
RB6
RB5
RB4
RB3
RB2
RB1
RB0
51
TRISB
TRISB7
TRISB6
TRISB5
TRISB4
TRISB3
TRISB2
TRISB1
TRISB0
51
LATB
LATB7
LATB6
LATB5
LATB4
LATB3
LATB2
LATB1
LATB0
51
PORTE
—
—
—
—
RE3(1,3)
RE2(4)
RE1(4)
RE0(4)
51
TRISE(4)
—
—
—
—
—
TRISE2(4) TRISE1(4) TRISE0(4)
51
—
—
—
—
—
LATE2(4)
51
(4)
LATE
LATE1(4)
LATE0(4)
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used for A/D conversion.
Note 1: Implemented only when Master Clear functionality is disabled (MCLRE Configuration bit = 0).
2: RA6 and its associated latch and data direction bits are enabled as I/O pins based on oscillator
configuration; otherwise, they are read as ‘0’.
3: RE3 port bit is available only as an input pin when the MCLRE Configuration bit is ‘0’.
4: These registers and/or bits are not implemented on 28-pin devices.
DS39760A-page 182
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
17.0
HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT
(HLVD)
PIC18F2450/4450 devices have a High/Low-Voltage
Detect module (HLVD). This is a programmable circuit
that allows the user to specify both a device voltage trip
point and the direction of change from that point. If the
device experiences an excursion past the trip point in
that direction, an interrupt flag is set. If the interrupt is
enabled, the program execution will branch to the
interrupt vector address and the software can then
respond to the interrupt.
REGISTER 17-1:
The High/Low-Voltage Detect Control register
(Register 17-1) completely controls the operation of the
HLVD module. This allows the circuitry to be “turned
off” by the user under software control which minimizes
the current consumption for the device.
The block diagram for the HLVD module is shown in
Figure 17-1.
HLVDCON: HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT CONTROL REGISTER
R/W-0
U-0
R-0
R/W-0
R/W-0
R/W-1
R/W-0
R/W-1
VDIRMAG
—
IRVST
HLVDEN
HLVDL3(1)
HLVDL2(1)
HLVDL1(1)
HLVDL0(1)
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
x = Bit is unknown
bit 7
VDIRMAG: Voltage Direction Magnitude Select bit
1 = Event occurs when voltage equals or exceeds trip point (HLVDL3:HLDVL0)
0 = Event occurs when voltage equals or falls below trip point (HLVDL3:HLVDL0)
bit 6
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 5
IRVST: Internal Reference Voltage Stable Flag bit
1 = Indicates that the voltage detect logic will generate the interrupt flag at the specified voltage
trip point
0 = Indicates that the voltage detect logic will not generate the interrupt flag at the specified voltage
trip point and the LVD interrupt should not be enabled
bit 4
HLVDEN: High/Low-Voltage Detect Power Enable bit
1 = HLVD enabled
0 = HLVD disabled
bit 3-0
HLVDL3:HLVDL0: Voltage Detection Limit bits(1)
1111 = Reserved
1110 = Maximum setting
.
.
.
0000 = Minimum setting
Note 1:
See Table 21-4 in Section 21.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for specifications.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 183
PIC18F2450/4450
The module is enabled by setting the HLVDEN bit.
Each time that the HLVD module is enabled, the
circuitry requires some time to stabilize. The IRVST bit
is a read-only bit and is used to indicate when the circuit
is stable. The module can only generate an interrupt
after the circuit is stable and IRVST is set.
event, depending on the configuration of the module.
When the supply voltage is equal to the trip point, the
voltage tapped off of the resistor array is equal to the
internal reference voltage generated by the voltage
reference module. The comparator then generates an
interrupt signal by setting the HLVDIF bit.
The VDIRMAG bit determines the overall operation of
the module. When VDIRMAG is cleared, the module
monitors for drops in VDD below a predetermined set
point. When the bit is set, the module monitors for rises
in VDD above the set point.
The trip point voltage is software programmable to any
one of 16 values. The trip point is selected by
programming
the
HLVDL3:HLVDL0
bits
(HLVDCON<3:0>).
17.1
The HLVD module has an additional feature that allows
the user to supply the trip voltage to the module from an
external source. This mode is enabled when bits,
HLVDL3:HLVDL0, are set to ‘1111’. In this state, the
comparator input is multiplexed from the external input
pin, HLVDIN. This gives users flexibility because it
allows them to configure the High/Low-Voltage Detect
interrupt to occur at any voltage in the valid operating
range.
Operation
When the HLVD module is enabled, a comparator uses
an internally generated reference voltage as the set
point. The set point is compared with the trip point,
where each node in the resistor divider represents a
trip point voltage. The “trip point” voltage is the voltage
level at which the device detects a high or low-voltage
FIGURE 17-1:
HLVD MODULE BLOCK DIAGRAM (WITH EXTERNAL INPUT)
Externally Generated
Trip Point
VDD
VDD
HLVDL3:HLVDL0
HLVDCON
Register
HLVDEN
16-to-1 MUX
HLVDIN
VDIRMAG
Set
HLVDIF
HLVDEN
BOREN
DS39760A-page 184
Internal Voltage
Reference
1.2V Typical
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
17.2
HLVD Setup
Depending on the application, the HLVD module does
not need to be operating constantly. To decrease the
current requirements, the HLVD circuitry may only
need to be enabled for short periods where the voltage
is checked. After doing the check, the HLVD module
may be disabled.
The following steps are needed to set up the HLVD
module:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Disable the module by clearing the HLVDEN bit
(HLVDCON<4>).
Write the value to the HLVDL3:HLVDL0 bits that
selects the desired HLVD trip point.
Set the VDIRMAG bit to detect high voltage
(VDIRMAG = 1) or low voltage (VDIRMAG = 0).
Enable the HLVD module by setting the
HLVDEN bit.
Clear the HLVD Interrupt Flag, HLVDIF
(PIR2<2>), which may have been set from a
previous interrupt.
Enable the HLVD interrupt, if interrupts are
desired, by setting the HLVDIE and GIE/GIEH
bits (PIE2<2> and INTCON<7>). An interrupt
will not be generated until the IRVST bit is set.
17.3
17.4
The internal reference voltage of the HLVD module,
specified in electrical specification parameter D420 (see
Table 21-4 in Section 21.0 “Electrical Characteristics”), may be used by other internal circuitry, such as
the Programmable Brown-out Reset. If the HLVD or
other circuits using the voltage reference are disabled to
lower the device’s current consumption, the reference
voltage circuit will require time to become stable before
a low or high-voltage condition can be reliably detected.
This start-up time, TIRVST, is an interval that is
independent of device clock speed. It is specified in
electrical specification parameter 36 (Table 21-10).
Current Consumption
The HLVD interrupt flag is not enabled until TIRVST has
expired and a stable reference voltage is reached. For
this reason, brief excursions beyond the set point may
not be detected during this interval. Refer to Figure 17-2
or Figure 17-3.
When the module is enabled, the HLVD comparator
and voltage divider are enabled and will consume static
current. The total current consumption, when enabled,
is specified in electrical specification parameter D022
(Section 268 “DC Characteristics”).
FIGURE 17-2:
HLVD Start-up Time
LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT OPERATION (VDIRMAG = 0)
CASE 1:
HLVDIF may not be set
VDD
VHLVD
HLVDIF
Enable HLVD
TIRVST
IRVST
Internal Reference is stable
HLVDIF cleared in software
CASE 2:
VDD
VHLVD
HLVDIF
Enable HLVD
TIRVST
IRVST
HLVDIF cleared in software
Internal Reference is stable
HLVDIF cleared in software,
HLVDIF remains set since HLVD condition still exists
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 185
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 17-3:
HIGH-VOLTAGE DETECT OPERATION (VDIRMAG = 1)
CASE 1:
HLVDIF may not be set
VHLVD
VDD
HLVDIF
Enable HLVD
TIRVST
IRVST
HLVDIF cleared in software
Internal Reference is stable
CASE 2:
VHLVD
VDD
HLVDIF
Enable HLVD
TIRVST
IRVST
Internal Reference is stable
HLVDIF cleared in software
HLVDIF cleared in software,
HLVDIF remains set since HLVD condition still exists
FIGURE 17-4:
Applications
In many applications, the ability to detect a drop below
or rise above a particular threshold is desirable. For
example, the HLVD module could be periodically
enabled to detect Universal Serial Bus (USB) attach or
detach. This assumes the device is powered by a lower
voltage source than the USB when detached. An attach
would indicate a high-voltage detect from, for example,
3.3V to 5V (the voltage on USB) and vice versa for a
detach. This feature could save a design a few extra
components and an attach signal (input pin).
For general battery applications, Figure 17-4 shows a
possible voltage curve. Over time, the device voltage
decreases. When the device voltage reaches voltage,
VA, the HLVD logic generates an interrupt at time, TA.
The interrupt could cause the execution of an ISR,
which would allow the application to perform “housekeeping tasks” and perform a controlled shutdown
before the device voltage exits the valid operating
range at TB. The HLVD, thus, would give the application a time window, represented by the difference
between TA and TB, to safely exit.
DS39760A-page 186
TYPICAL
HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE
DETECT APPLICATION
VA
VB
Voltage
17.5
Time
TA
TB
Legend: VA = HLVD trip point
VB = Minimum valid device
operating voltage
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
17.6
Operation During Sleep
17.7
When enabled, the HLVD circuitry continues to operate
during Sleep. If the device voltage crosses the trip
point, the HLVDIF bit will be set and the device will
wake-up from Sleep. Device execution will continue
from the interrupt vector address if interrupts have
been globally enabled.
TABLE 17-1:
Effects of a Reset
A device Reset forces all registers to their Reset state.
This forces the HLVD module to be turned off.
REGISTERS ASSOCIATED WITH HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT MODULE
Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
HLVDCON
VDIRMAG
—
IRVST
HLVDEN
HLVDL3
HLVDL2
HLVDL1
HLVDL0
50
INTCON
GIE/GIEH PEIE/GIEL
TMR0IE
INT0IE
RBIE
TMR0IF
INT0IF
RBIF
49
PIR2
OSCFIF
—
USBIF
—
—
HLVDIF
—
—
51
PIE2
OSCFIE
—
USBIE
—
—
HLVDIE
—
—
51
IPR2
OSCFIP
—
USBIP
—
—
HLVDIP
—
—
51
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are unused by the HLVD module.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 187
PIC18F2450/4450
NOTES:
DS39760A-page 188
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
18.0
SPECIAL FEATURES OF THE
CPU
PIC18F2450/4450 devices include several features
intended to maximize reliability and minimize cost
through elimination of external components. These are:
• Oscillator Selection
• Resets:
- Power-on Reset (POR)
- Power-up Timer (PWRT)
- Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST)
- Brown-out Reset (BOR)
• Interrupts
• Watchdog Timer (WDT)
• Fail-Safe Clock Monitor
• Two-Speed Start-up
• Code Protection
• ID Locations
• In-Circuit Serial Programming
In addition to their Power-up and Oscillator Start-up
Timers provided for Resets, PIC18F2450/4450 devices
have a Watchdog Timer, which is either permanently
enabled via the Configuration bits or software controlled
(if configured as disabled).
The inclusion of an internal RC oscillator also provides
the additional benefits of a Fail-Safe Clock Monitor
(FSCM) and Two-Speed Start-up. FSCM provides for
background monitoring of the peripheral clock and
automatic switchover in the event of its failure. TwoSpeed Start-up enables code to be executed almost
immediately on start-up, while the primary clock source
completes its start-up delays.
All of these features are enabled and configured by
setting the appropriate Configuration register bits.
The oscillator can be configured for the application
depending on frequency, power, accuracy and cost. All
of the options are discussed in detail in Section 2.0
“Oscillator Configurations”.
A complete discussion of device Resets and interrupts
is available in previous sections of this data sheet.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 189
PIC18F2450/4450
18.1
Configuration Bits
Programming the Configuration registers is done in a
manner similar to programming the Flash memory. The
WR bit in the EECON1 register starts a self-timed write
to the Configuration register. In normal operation mode,
a TBLWT instruction, with the TBLPTR pointing to the
Configuration register, sets up the address and the
data for the Configuration register write. Setting the WR
bit starts a long write to the Configuration register. The
Configuration registers are written a byte at a time. To
write or erase a configuration cell, a TBLWT instruction
can write a ‘1’ or a ‘0’ into the cell. For additional details
on Flash programming, refer to Section 6.5 “Writing
to Flash Program Memory”.
The Configuration bits can be programmed (read as
‘0’) or left unprogrammed (read as ‘1’) to select various
device configurations. These bits are mapped starting
at program memory location 300000h.
The user will note that address 300000h is beyond the
user program memory space. In fact, it belongs to the
configuration memory space (300000h-3FFFFFh), which
can only be accessed using table reads and table writes.
TABLE 18-1:
CONFIGURATION BITS AND DEVICE IDs
File Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
300000h
CONFIG1L
—
—
300001h
CONFIG1H
IESO
FCMEN
—
300002h
CONFIG2L
—
—
VREGEN
300003h
CONFIG2H
—
—
—
300005h
CONFIG3H
MCLRE
—
—
—
—
Bit 2
USBDIV CPUDIV1 CPUDIV0 PLLDIV2
—
FOSC3
FOSC2
BORV1
BORV0
BOREN1
Bit 1
Bit 0
Default/
Unprogrammed
Value
PLLDIV1
PLLDIV0
--00 0000
FOSC1
FOSC0
00-- 0101
BOREN0 PWRTEN
WDTPS3 WDTPS2 WDTPS1 WDTPS0
LPT1OSC PBADEN
--01 1111
WDTEN
---1 1111
—
1--- -01100- 01-1
300006h
CONFIG4L
DEBUG
XINST
ICPRT(2)
—
BBSIZ
LVP
—
STVREN
300008h
CONFIG5L
—
—
—
—
—
—
CP1
CP0
---- --11
300009h
CONFIG5H
—
CPB
—
—
—
—
—
—
-1-- ----
30000Ah
CONFIG6L
—
—
—
—
—
—
WRT1
WRT0
---- --11
30000Bh
CONFIG6H
—
WRTB
WRTC
—
—
—
—
—
-11- ----
30000Ch
CONFIG7L
—
—
—
—
—
—
EBTR1
EBTR0
---- --11
30000Dh
CONFIG7H
—
EBTRB
—
—
—
—
—
—
-1-- ----
3FFFFEh DEVID1
DEV2
DEV1
DEV0
REV4
REV3
REV2
REV1
REV0
xxxx xxxx(1)
3FFFFFh
DEVID2
DEV10
DEV9
DEV8
DEV7
DEV6
DEV5
DEV4
DEV3
0001 0010(1)
Legend:
Note 1:
x = unknown, u = unchanged, - = unimplemented. Shaded cells are unimplemented, read as ‘0’.
See Register 18-13 and Register 18-14 for device ID values. DEVID registers are read-only and cannot be programmed
by the user.
Available only on PIC18F4450 devices in 44-pin TQFP packages. Always leave this bit clear in all other devices.
2:
DS39760A-page 190
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 18-1:
CONFIG1L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 300000h)
U-0
U-0
R/P-0
R/P-0
R/P-0
R/P-1
R/P-1
R/P-1
—
—
USBDIV
CPUDIV1
CPUDIV0
PLLDIV2
PLLDIV1
PLLDIV0
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
P = Programmable bit
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
u = Unchanged from programmed state
bit 7-6
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 5
USBDIV: USB Clock Selection bit (used in Full-Speed USB mode only; UCFG:FSEN = 1)
1 = USB clock source comes from the 96 MHz PLL divided by 2
0 = USB clock source comes directly from the primary oscillator block with no postscale
bit 4-3
CPUDIV1:CPUDIV0: System Clock Postscaler Selection bits
For XT, HS, EC and ECIO Oscillator modes:
11 = Primary oscillator divided by 4 to derive system clock
10 = Primary oscillator divided by 3 to derive system clock
01 = Primary oscillator divided by 2 to derive system clock
00 = Primary oscillator used directly for system clock (no postscaler)
For XTPLL, HSPLL, ECPLL and ECPIO Oscillator modes:
11 = 96 MHz PLL divided by 6 to derive system clock
10 = 96 MHz PLL divided by 4 to derive system clock
01 = 96 MHz PLL divided by 3 to derive system clock
00 = 96 MHz PLL divided by 2 to derive system clock
bit 2-0
PLLDIV2:PLLDIV0: PLL Prescaler Selection bits
111 = Divide by 12 (48 MHz oscillator input)
110 = Divide by 10 (40 MHz oscillator input)
101 = Divide by 6 (24 MHz oscillator input)
100 = Divide by 5 (20 MHz oscillator input)
011 = Divide by 4 (16 MHz oscillator input)
010 = Divide by 3 (12 MHz oscillator input)
001 = Divide by 2 (8 MHz oscillator input)
000 = No prescale (4 MHz oscillator input drives PLL directly)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 191
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 18-2:
CONFIG1H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 1 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300001h)
R/P-0
R/P-0
U-0
U-0
R/P-0
R/P-1
R/P-1
R/P-1
IESO
FCMEN
—
—
FOSC3(1)
FOSC2(1)
FOSC1(1)
FOSC0(1)
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
P = Programmable bit
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
u = Unchanged from programmed state
bit 7
IESO: Internal/External Oscillator Switchover bit
1 = Oscillator Switchover mode enabled
0 = Oscillator Switchover mode disabled
bit 6
FCMEN: Fail-Safe Clock Monitor Enable bit
1 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor enabled
0 = Fail-Safe Clock Monitor disabled
bit 5-4
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 3-0
FOSC3:FOSC0: Oscillator Selection bits(1)
111x = HS oscillator, PLL enabled (HSPLL)
110x = HS oscillator (HS)
1011 = Internal oscillator, HS oscillator used by USB (INTHS)
1010 = Internal oscillator, XT used by USB (INTXT)
1001 = Internal oscillator, CLKO function on RA6, EC used by USB (INTCKO)
1000 = Internal oscillator, port function on RA6, EC used by USB (INTIO)
0111 = EC oscillator, PLL enabled, CLKO function on RA6 (ECPLL)
0110 = EC oscillator, PLL enabled, port function on RA6 (ECPIO)
0101 = EC oscillator, CLKO function on RA6 (EC)
0100 = EC oscillator, port function on RA6 (ECIO)
001x = XT oscillator, PLL enabled (XTPLL)
000x = XT oscillator (XT)
Note 1:
The microcontroller and USB module both use the selected oscillator as their clock source in XT, HS and
EC modes. The USB module uses the indicated XT, HS or EC oscillator as its clock source whenever the
microcontroller uses the internal oscillator.
DS39760A-page 192
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 18-3:
U-0
CONFIG2L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 2 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 300002h)
U-0
—
—
R/P-0
R/P-1
VREGEN
BORV1
(1)
R/P-1
BORV0
(1)
R/P-1
R/P-1
(2)
BOREN1
BOREN0
bit 7
R/P-1
(2)
PWRTEN(2)
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
P = Programmable bit
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
u = Unchanged from programmed state
bit 7-6
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 5
VREGEN: USB Internal Voltage Regulator Enable bit
1 = USB voltage regulator enabled
0 = USB voltage regulator disabled
bit 4-3
BORV1:BORV0: Brown-out Reset Voltage bits(1)
11 = Minimum setting
.
.
.
00 = Maximum setting
bit 2-1
BOREN1:BOREN0: Brown-out Reset Enable bits(2)
11 = Brown-out Reset enabled in hardware only (SBOREN is disabled)
10 = Brown-out Reset enabled in hardware only and disabled in Sleep mode (SBOREN is disabled)
01 = Brown-out Reset enabled and controlled by software (SBOREN is enabled)
00 = Brown-out Reset disabled in hardware and software
bit 0
PWRTEN: Power-up Timer Enable bit(2)
1 = PWRT disabled
0 = PWRT enabled
Note 1:
2:
See Section 21.0 “Electrical Characteristics” for the specifications.
The Power-up Timer is decoupled from Brown-out Reset, allowing these features to be independently
controlled.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 193
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 18-4:
U-0
CONFIG2H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 2 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300003h)
U-0
—
—
U-0
R/P-1
R/P-1
R/P-1
R/P-1
R/P-1
—
WDTPS3
WDTPS2
WDTPS1
WDTPS0
WDTEN
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
P = Programmable bit
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
u = Unchanged from programmed state
bit 7-5
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 4-1
WDTPS3:WDTPS0: Watchdog Timer Postscale Select bits
1111 = 1:32,768
1110 = 1:16,384
1101 = 1:8,192
1100 = 1:4,096
1011 = 1:2,048
1010 = 1:1,024
1001 = 1:512
1000 = 1:256
0111 = 1:128
0110 = 1:64
0101 = 1:32
0100 = 1:16
0011 = 1:8
0010 = 1:4
0001 = 1:2
0000 = 1:1
bit 0
WDTEN: Watchdog Timer Enable bit
1 = WDT enabled
0 = WDT disabled (control is placed on the SWDTEN bit)
DS39760A-page 194
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 18-5:
CONFIG3H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 3 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300005h)
R/P-1
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
R/P-0
R/P-1
U-0
MCLRE
—
—
—
—
LPT1OSC
PBADEN
—
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
P = Programmable bit
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
u = Unchanged from programmed state
bit 7
MCLRE: MCLR Pin Enable bit
1 = MCLR pin enabled, RA5 input pin disabled
0 = RA5 input pin enabled, MCLR pin disabled
bit 6-3
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 2
LPT1OSC: Low-Power Timer1 Oscillator Enable bit
1 = Timer1 configured for low-power operation
0 = Timer1 configured for higher power operation
bit 1
PBADEN: PORTB A/D Enable bit
(Affects ADCON1 Reset state. ADCON1 controls PORTB<4:0> pin configuration.)
1 = PORTB<4:0> pins are configured as analog input channels on Reset
0 = PORTB<4:0> pins are configured as digital I/O on Reset
bit 0
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 195
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 18-6:
R/P-1
CONFIG4L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 4 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 300006h)
R/P-0
XINST
DEBUG
R/P-0
ICPRT
U-0
R/P-0
R/P-1
U-0
R/P-1
—
BBSIZ
LVP
—
STVREN
(1)
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
P = Programmable bit
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
u = Unchanged from programmed state
bit 7
DEBUG: Background Debugger Enable bit
1 = Background debugger disabled, RB6 and RB7 configured as general purpose I/O pins
0 = Background debugger enabled, RB6 and RB7 are dedicated to In-Circuit Debug
bit 6
XINST: Extended Instruction Set Enable bit
1 = Instruction set extension and Indexed Addressing mode enabled
0 = Instruction set extension and Indexed Addressing mode disabled (Legacy mode)
bit 5
ICPRT: Dedicated In-Circuit Debug/Programming Port (ICPORT) Enable bit(1)
1 = ICPORT enabled
0 = ICPORT disabled
bit 4
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 3
BBSIZ: Boot Block Size Select bit
1 = 2 kW Boot Block size
0 = 1 kW Boot Block size
bit 2
LVP: Single-Supply ICSP™ Enable bit
1 = Single-Supply ICSP enabled
0 = Single-Supply ICSP disabled
bit 1
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 0
STVREN: Stack Full/Underflow Reset Enable bit
1 = Stack full/underflow will cause Reset
0 = Stack full/underflow will not cause Reset
Note 1:
Available only on PIC18F4450 devices in 44-pin TQFP packages. Always leave this bit clear in all other
devices.
DS39760A-page 196
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 18-7:
CONFIG5L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 5 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 300008h)
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
R/C-1
R/C-1
—
—
—
—
—
—
CP1
CP0
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
C = Clearable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
u = Unchanged from programmed state
bit 7-2
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 1
CP1: Code Protection bit
1 = Block 1 (002000-003FFFh) is not code-protected
0 = Block 1 (002000-003FFFh) is code-protected
bit 0
CP0: Code Protection bit
1 = Block 0 (000800-001FFFh) or (001000-001FFFh) is not code-protected
0 = Block 0 (000800-001FFFh) or (001000-001FFFh) is code-protected
REGISTER 18-8:
CONFIG5H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 5 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 300009h)
U-0
R/C-1
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
—
CPB
—
—
—
—
—
—
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
C = Clearable bit
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
u = Unchanged from programmed state
bit 7
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 6
CPB: Boot Block Code Protection bit
1 = Boot block (000000-0007FFh) or (000000-000FFFh) is not code-protected
0 = Boot block (000000-0007FFh) or (000000-000FFFh) is code-protected
bit 5-0
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 197
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 18-9:
CONFIG6L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 6 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 30000Ah)
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
R/C-1
R/C-1
—
—
—
—
—
—
WRT1
WRT0
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
C = Clearable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
u = Unchanged from programmed state
bit 7-2
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 1
WRT1: Write Protection bit
1 = Block 1 (002000-003FFFh) is not write-protected
0 = Block 1 (002000-003FFFh) is write-protected
bit 0
WRT0: Write Protection bit
1 = Block 0 (000800-001FFFh) or (001000-001FFFh) is not write-protected
0 = Block 0 (000800-001FFFh) or (001000-001FFFh) is write-protected
REGISTER 18-10: CONFIG6H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 6 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 30000Bh)
U-0
—
R/C-1
R-1
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
WRTB
WRTC(1)
—
—
—
—
—
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
C = Clearable bit
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
u = Unchanged from programmed state
bit 7
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 6
WRTB: Boot Block Write Protection bit
1 = Boot block (000000-0007FFh) or (000000-000FFFh) is not write-protected
0 = Boot block (000000-0007FFh) or (000000-000FFFh) is write-protected
bit 5
WRTC: Configuration Register Write Protection bit(1)
1 = Configuration registers (300000-3000FFh) are not write-protected
0 = Configuration registers (300000-3000FFh) are write-protected
bit 4-0
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
Note 1:
This bit is read-only in normal execution mode; it can be written only in Program mode.
DS39760A-page 198
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 18-11: CONFIG7L: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 7 LOW (BYTE ADDRESS 30000Ch)
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
R/C-1
R/C-1
—
—
—
—
—
—
EBTR1
EBTR0
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
C = Clearable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
u = Unchanged from programmed state
bit 7-2
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 1
EBTR1: Table Read Protection bit
1 = Block 1 (002000-003FFFh) is not protected from table reads executed in other blocks
0 = Block 1 (002000-003FFFh) is protected from table reads executed in other blocks
bit 0
EBTR0: Table Read Protection bit
1 = Block 0 (000800-001FFFh) or (001000-001FFFh) is not protected from table reads executed in
other blocks
0 = Block 0 (000800-001FFFh) or (001000-001FFFh) is protected from table reads executed in other
blocks
REGISTER 18-12: CONFIG7H: CONFIGURATION REGISTER 7 HIGH (BYTE ADDRESS 30000Dh)
U-0
R/C-1
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
—
EBTRB
—
—
—
—
—
—
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
C = Clearable bit
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
u = Unchanged from programmed state
bit 7
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 6
EBTRB: Boot Block Table Read Protection bit
1 = Boot block (000000-0007FFh) or (000000-000FFFh) is not protected from table reads executed
in other blocks
0 = Boot block (000000-0007FFh) or (000000-000FFFh) is protected from table reads executed in
other blocks
bit 5-0
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 199
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 18-13: DEVID1: DEVICE ID REGISTER 1 FOR PIC18F2450/4450 DEVICES
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
DEV2
DEV1
DEV0
REV4
REV3
REV2
REV1
REV0
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Read-only bit
P = Programmable bit
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
u = Unchanged from programmed state
bit 7-5
DEV2:DEV0: Device ID bits
001 = PIC18F2450
000 = PIC18F4450
bit 4-0
REV3:REV0: Revision ID bits
These bits are used to indicate the device revision.
REGISTER 18-14: DEVID2: DEVICE ID REGISTER 2 FOR PIC18F2450/4450 DEVICES
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
DEV10(1)
DEV9(1)
DEV8(1)
DEV7(1)
DEV6(1)
DEV5(1)
DEV4(1)
DEV3(1)
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Read-only bit
P = Programmable bit
-n = Value when device is unprogrammed
bit 7-0
Note 1:
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
u = Unchanged from programmed state
DEV10:DEV3: Device ID bits(1)
These bits are used with the DEV2:DEV0 bits in the DEVID1 register to identify the part number.
0010 0100 = PIC18F2450/4450 devices
These values for DEV10:DEV3 may be shared with other devices. The specific device is always identified
by using the entire DEV10:DEV0 bit sequence.
DS39760A-page 200
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
18.2
Watchdog Timer (WDT)
For PIC18F2450/4450 devices, the WDT is driven by
the INTRC source. When the WDT is enabled, the
clock source is also enabled. The nominal WDT period
is 4 ms and has the same stability as the INTRC
oscillator.
The 4 ms period of the WDT is multiplied by a 16-bit
postscaler. Any output of the WDT postscaler is
selected by a multiplexer, controlled by bits in
Configuration Register 2H. Available periods range
from 4 ms to 131.072 seconds (2.18 minutes). The
WDT and postscaler are cleared when any of the
following events occur: a SLEEP or CLRWDT instruction
is executed or a clock failure has occurred.
Note 1: The CLRWDT and SLEEP instructions
clear the WDT and postscaler counts
when executed.
2: When a CLRWDT instruction is executed,
the postscaler count will be cleared.
18.2.1
CONTROL REGISTER
Register 18-15 shows the WDTCON register. This is a
readable and writable register which contains a control
bit that allows software to override the WDT enable
Configuration bit, but only if the Configuration bit has
disabled the WDT.
.
FIGURE 18-1:
WDT BLOCK DIAGRAM
SWDTEN
WDTEN
Enable WDT
INTRC Control
WDT Counter
INTRC Source
÷128
Wake-up from
Power-Managed
Modes
CLRWDT
All Device Resets
Programmable Postscaler
1:1 to 1:32,768
Reset
WDT
Reset
WDT
WDTPS<3:0>
4
SLEEP
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 201
PIC18F2450/4450
REGISTER 18-15: WDTCON: WATCHDOG TIMER CONTROL REGISTER
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
U-0
R/W-0
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SWDTEN(1)
bit 7
bit 0
Legend:
R = Readable bit
W = Writable bit
U = Unimplemented bit, read as ‘0’
-n = Value at POR
‘1’ = Bit is set
‘0’ = Bit is cleared
bit 7-1
Unimplemented: Read as ‘0’
bit 0
SWDTEN: Software Controlled Watchdog Timer Enable bit(1)
1 = Watchdog Timer is on
0 = Watchdog Timer is off
Note 1:
This bit has no effect if the Configuration bit, WDTEN, is enabled.
TABLE 18-2:
Name
RCON
WDTCON
x = Bit is unknown
SUMMARY OF WATCHDOG TIMER REGISTERS
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
Reset
Values
on page
IPEN
SBOREN(1)
—
RI
TO
PD
POR
BOR
50
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
SWDTEN
50
Legend: — = unimplemented, read as ‘0’. Shaded cells are not used by the Watchdog Timer.
Note 1: The SBOREN bit is only available when BOREN<1:0> = 01; otherwise, the bit reads as ‘0’.
DS39760A-page 202
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
18.3
Two-Speed Start-up
In all other power-managed modes, Two-Speed Start-up
is not used. The device will be clocked by the currently
selected clock source until the primary clock source
becomes available. The setting of the IESO bit is
ignored.
The Two-Speed Start-up feature helps to minimize the
latency period, from oscillator start-up to code
execution, by allowing the microcontroller to use the
INTRC oscillator as a clock source until the primary
clock source is available. It is enabled by setting the
IESO Configuration bit.
18.3.1
Two-Speed Start-up should be enabled only if the
primary oscillator mode is XT, HS, XTPLL or HSPLL
(Crystal-based modes). Other sources do not require
an OST start-up delay; for these, Two-Speed Start-up
should be disabled.
While using the INTRC oscillator in Two-Speed Start-up,
the device still obeys the normal command sequences
for entering power-managed modes, including serial
SLEEP instructions (refer to Section 3.1.4 “Multiple
Sleep Commands”). In practice, this means that user
code can change the SCS1:SCS0 bit settings or issue
SLEEP instructions before the OST times out. This would
allow an application to briefly wake-up, perform routine
“housekeeping” tasks and return to Sleep before the
device starts to operate from the primary oscillator.
When enabled, Resets and wake-ups from Sleep mode
cause the device to configure itself to run from the
internal oscillator as the clock source, following the
time-out of the Power-up Timer after a Power-on Reset
is enabled. This allows almost immediate code
execution while the primary oscillator starts and the
OST is running. Once the OST times out, the device
automatically switches to PRI_RUN mode.
User code can also check if the primary clock source is
currently providing the device clocking by checking the
status of the OSTS bit (OSCCON<3>). If the bit is set,
the primary oscillator is providing the clock. Otherwise,
the internal oscillator is providing the clock during
wake-up from Reset or Sleep mode.
Because the OSCCON register is cleared on Reset
events, the INTRC clock is used directly at its base
frequency.
FIGURE 18-2:
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS FOR
USING TWO-SPEED START-UP
TIMING TRANSITION FOR TWO-SPEED START-UP (INTRC TO HSPLL)
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q2 Q3 Q4 Q1 Q2 Q3
Q1
INTRC
OSC1
TOST(1)
TPLL(1)
1
PLL Clock
Output
2
n-1 n
Clock
Transition
CPU Clock
Peripheral
Clock
Program
Counter
PC
Wake from Interrupt Event
Note 1:
PC + 2
PC + 4
PC + 6
OSTS bit Set
TOST = 1024 TOSC; TPLL = 2 ms (approx). These intervals are not shown to scale.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 203
PIC18F2450/4450
18.4
Fail-Safe Clock Monitor
The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor (FSCM) allows the
microcontroller to continue operation in the event of an
external oscillator failure by automatically switching the
device clock to the internal oscillator. The FSCM function
is enabled by setting the FCMEN Configuration bit.
When FSCM is enabled, the INTRC oscillator runs at all
times to monitor clocks to peripherals and provide a
backup clock in the event of a clock failure. Clock
monitoring (shown in Figure 18-3) is accomplished by
creating a sample clock signal, which is the INTRC output
divided by 64. This allows ample time between FSCM
sample clocks for a peripheral clock edge to occur. The
peripheral device clock and the sample clock are
presented as inputs to the Clock Monitor latch (CM). The
CM is set on the falling edge of the device clock source,
but cleared on the rising edge of the sample clock.
FIGURE 18-3:
FSCM BLOCK DIAGRAM
Clock Monitor
Latch (CM)
(edge-triggered)
Peripheral
Clock
INTRC
Source
(32 μs)
÷ 64
S
Q
C
Q
488 Hz
(2.048 ms)
Clock
Failure
Detected
Clock failure is tested for on the falling edge of the
sample clock. If a sample clock falling edge occurs
while CM is still set, a clock failure has been detected
(Figure 18-4). This causes the following:
The FSCM will detect failures of the primary or
secondary clock sources only. If the internal oscillator
fails, no failure would be detected, nor would any action
be possible.
18.4.1
FSCM AND THE WATCHDOG TIMER
Both the FSCM and the WDT are clocked by the
INTRC oscillator. Since the WDT operates with a
separate divider and counter, disabling the WDT has
no effect on the operation of the INTRC oscillator when
the FSCM is enabled.
If the WDT is enabled with a small prescale value, a
decrease in clock speed allows a WDT time-out to
occur and a subsequent device Reset. For this reason,
Fail-Safe Clock Monitor events also reset the WDT and
postscaler, allowing it to start timing from when execution speed was changed and decreasing the likelihood
of an erroneous time-out.
18.4.2
EXITING FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
The fail-safe condition is terminated by either a device
Reset or by entering a power-managed mode. On
Reset, the controller starts the primary clock source
specified in Configuration Register 1H (with any startup delays that are required for the oscillator mode,
such as OST or PLL timer). The INTRC provides the
device clock until the primary clock source becomes
ready (similar to a Two-Speed Start-up). The clock
source is then switched to the primary clock (indicated
by the OSTS bit in the OSCCON register becoming
set). The Fail-Safe Clock Monitor then resumes
monitoring the peripheral clock.
The primary clock source may never become ready
during start-up. In this case, operation is clocked by the
INTRC. The OSCCON register will remain in its Reset
state until a power-managed mode is entered.
• the FSCM generates an oscillator fail interrupt by
setting bit, OSCFIF (PIR2<7>);
• the device clock source is switched to the internal
oscillator (OSCCON is not updated to show the current clock source – this is the fail-safe condition); and
• the WDT is reset.
DS39760A-page 204
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 18-4:
FSCM TIMING DIAGRAM
Sample Clock
Oscillator
Failure
Device
Clock
Output
CM Output
(Q)
Failure
Detected
OSCFIF
CM Test
Note:
18.4.3
CM Test
The device clock is normally at a much higher frequency than the sample clock. The relative frequencies in this
example have been chosen for clarity.
FSCM INTERRUPTS IN
POWER-MANAGED MODES
By entering a power-managed mode, the clock multiplexer selects the clock source selected by the OSCCON
register. Fail-Safe Clock Monitoring of the powermanaged clock source resumes in the power-managed
mode.
If an oscillator failure occurs during power-managed
operation, the subsequent events depend on whether
or not the oscillator failure interrupt is enabled. If
enabled (OSCFIF = 1), code execution will be clocked
by the INTRC. An automatic transition back to the failed
clock source will not occur.
considerably longer than the FCSM sample clock time,
a false clock failure may be detected. To prevent this,
the internal oscillator is automatically configured as the
device clock and functions until the primary clock is
stable (the OST and PLL timers have timed out). This
is identical to Two-Speed Start-up mode. Once the
primary clock is stable, the INTRC returns to its role as
the FSCM source.
Note:
If the interrupt is disabled, subsequent interrupts while
in Idle mode will cause the CPU to begin executing
instructions while being clocked by the INTRC source.
18.4.4
CM Test
POR OR WAKE-UP FROM SLEEP
The FSCM is designed to detect oscillator failure at any
point after the device has exited Power-on Reset
(POR) or Low-Power Sleep mode. When the primary
device clock is either EC or INTRC, monitoring can
begin immediately following these events.
The same logic that prevents false oscillator failure interrupts on POR or wake from
Sleep will also prevent the detection of the
oscillator’s failure to start at all following
these events. This can be avoided by
monitoring the OSTS bit and using a
timing routine to determine if the oscillator
is taking too long to start. Even so, no
oscillator failure interrupt will be flagged.
As noted in Section 18.3.1 “Special Considerations
for Using Two-Speed Start-up”, it is also possible to
select another clock configuration and enter an alternate
power-managed mode while waiting for the primary
clock to become stable. When the new power-managed
mode is selected, the primary clock is disabled.
For oscillator modes involving a crystal or resonator
(HS, HSPLL or XT), the situation is somewhat different.
Since the oscillator may require a start-up time
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 205
PIC18F2450/4450
18.5
Program Verification and
Code Protection
Each of the three blocks has three code protection bits
associated with them. They are:
The overall structure of the code protection on the
PIC18 Flash devices differs significantly from other
PICmicro® devices.
• Code-Protect bit (CPn)
• Write-Protect bit (WRTn)
• External Block Table Read bit (EBTRn)
The user program memory is divided into three blocks.
One of these is a boot block of 1 or 2 Kbytes. The
remainder of the memory is divided into two blocks on
binary boundaries.
Figure 18-5 shows the program memory organization
for 24 and 32-Kbyte devices and the specific code
protection bit associated with each block. The actual
locations of the bits are summarized in Table 18-3.
FIGURE 18-5:
CODE-PROTECTED PROGRAM MEMORY FOR PIC18F2450/4450
MEMORY SIZE/DEVICE
16 Kbytes
(PIC18F2450/4450)
Address
Range
Boot Block
000000h
0007FFh
000FFFh
Block Code Protection
Controlled By:
CPB, WRTB, EBTRB
001000h
Block 0
CP0, WRT0, EBTR0
001FFFh
002000h
Block 1
CP1, WRT1, EBTR1
003FFFh
Unimplemented
Read ‘0’s
Unimplemented
Read ‘0’s
Unimplemented
Read ‘0’s
(Unimplemented Memory Space)
1FFFFFh
TABLE 18-3:
SUMMARY OF CODE PROTECTION REGISTERS
File Name
Bit 7
Bit 6
Bit 5
Bit 4
Bit 3
Bit 2
Bit 1
Bit 0
300008h
CONFIG5L
—
—
—
—
—
—
CP1
CP0
300009h
CONFIG5H
—
CPB
—
—
—
—
—
—
30000Ah
CONFIG6L
—
—
—
—
—
—
WRT1
WRT0
30000Bh
CONFIG6H
—
WRTB
WRTC
—
—
—
—
—
30000Ch
CONFIG7L
—
—
—
—
—
—
EBTR1
EBTR0
30000Dh
CONFIG7H
—
EBTRB
—
—
—
—
—
—
Legend: Shaded cells are unimplemented.
DS39760A-page 206
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
18.5.1
PROGRAM MEMORY
CODE PROTECTION
The program memory may be read to or written from
any location using the table read and table write
instructions. The device ID may be read with table
reads. The Configuration registers may be read and
written with the table read and table write instructions.
A table read instruction that executes from a location
outside of that block is not allowed to read and will
result in reading ‘0’s. Figures207 through208 illustrate
table write and table read protection.
Note:
In normal execution mode, the CPn bits have no direct
effect. CPn bits inhibit external reads and writes. A
block of user memory may be protected from table
writes if the WRTn Configuration bit is ‘0’. The EBTRn
bits control table reads. For a block of user memory
with the EBTRn bit set to ‘0’, a table read instruction
that executes from within that block is allowed to read.
FIGURE 18-6:
Code protection bits may only be written to
a ‘0’ from a ‘1’ state. It is not possible to
write a ‘1’ to a bit in the ‘0’ state. Code
protection bits are only set to ‘1’ by a full
Chip Erase or Block Erase function. The
full Chip Erase and Block Erase functions
can only be initiated via ICSP operation or
an external programmer.
TABLE WRITE (WRTn) DISALLOWED
Register Values
Program Memory
Configuration Bit Settings
000000h
0007FFh
000FFFh
001000h
TBLPTR = 0008FFh
PC = 001FFEh
WRTB, EBTRB = 11
WRT0, EBTR0 = 01
TBLWT*
001FFFh
002000h
WRT1, EBTR1 = 11
003FFFh
WRT2, EBTR2 = 11
WRT3, EBTR3 = 11
Results: All table writes disabled to Blockn whenever WRTn = 0.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 207
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 18-7:
EXTERNAL BLOCK TABLE READ (EBTRn) DISALLOWED
Register Values
Program Memory
Configuration Bit Settings
000000h
0007FFh
000FFFh
001000h
WRTB, EBTRB = 11
WRT0, EBTR0 = 10
TBLPTR = 0008FFh
001FFFh
002000h
WRT1, EBTR1 = 11
PC = 003FFEh
TBLRD*
003FFFh
Results: All table reads from external blocks to Blockn are disabled whenever EBTRn = 0.
TABLAT register returns a value of ‘0’.
FIGURE 18-8:
EXTERNAL BLOCK TABLE READ (EBTRn) ALLOWED
Register Values
Program Memory
Configuration Bit Settings
000000h
0007FFh
000FFFh
001000h
TBLPTR = 0008FFh
WRTB, EBTRB = 11
WRT0, EBTR0 = 10
PC = 001FFEh
TBLRD*
001FFFh
002000h
WRT1, EBTR1 = 11
003FFFh
Results: Table reads permitted within Blockn, even when EBTRBn = 0.
TABLAT register returns the value of the data at the location TBLPTR.
DS39760A-page 208
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
18.5.2
CONFIGURATION REGISTER
PROTECTION
The Configuration registers can be write-protected.
The WRTC bit controls protection of the Configuration
registers. In normal execution mode, the WRTC bit is
readable only. WRTC can only be written via ICSP
operation or an external programmer.
18.6
18.9
ID Locations
Eight memory locations (200000h-200007h) are
designated as ID locations, where the user can store
checksum or other code identification numbers. These
locations are both readable and writable during normal
execution through the TBLRD and TBLWT instructions
or during program/verify. The ID locations can be read
when the device is code-protected.
18.7
In-Circuit Serial Programming
PIC18F2450/4450 microcontrollers can be serially
programmed while in the end application circuit. This is
simply done with two lines for clock and data and three
other lines for power, ground and the programming
voltage. This allows customers to manufacture boards
with unprogrammed devices and then program the
microcontroller just before shipping the product. This
also allows the most recent firmware or a custom
firmware to be programmed.
18.8
To use the In-Circuit Debugger function of the
microcontroller, the design must implement In-Circuit
Serial Programming connections to MCLR/VPP/RE3,
VDD, VSS, RB7 and RB6. This will interface to the
In-Circuit Debugger module available from Microchip
or one of the third party development tool companies.
In-Circuit Debugger
When the DEBUG Configuration bit is programmed to
a ‘0’, the In-Circuit Debugger functionality is enabled.
This function allows simple debugging functions when
used with MPLAB® IDE. When the microcontroller has
this feature enabled, some resources are not available
for general use. Table 18-4 shows which resources are
required by the background debugger.
TABLE 18-4:
DEBUGGER RESOURCES
I/O pins:
RB6, RB7
Stack:
2 levels
Program Memory:
512 bytes
Data Memory:
10 bytes
Special ICPORT Features
(Designated Packages Only)
Under specific circumstances, the No Connect (NC)
pins of PIC18F4450 devices in 44-pin TQFP packages
can provide additional functionality. These features are
controlled by device Configuration bits and are
available only in this package type and pin count.
18.9.1
DEDICATED ICD/ICSP PORT
The 44-pin TQFP devices can use NC pins to provide an
alternate port for In-Circuit Debugging (ICD) and InCircuit Serial Programming (ICSP). These pins are
collectively known as the dedicated ICSP/ICD port, since
they are not shared with any other function of the device.
When implemented, the dedicated port activates three
NC pins to provide an alternate device Reset, data and
clock ports. None of these ports overlap with standard
I/O pins, making the I/O pins available to the user’s
application.
The dedicated ICSP/ICD port is enabled by setting the
ICPRT Configuration bit. The port functions the same
way as the legacy ICSP/ICD port on RB6/RB7.
Table 18-5 identifies the functionally equivalent pins for
ICSP and ICD purposes.
TABLE 18-5:
Pin Name
Legacy
Port
Dedicated
Port
Pin
Type
Pin Function
MCLR/VPP/
RE3
NC/ICRST/
ICVPP
P
Device Reset and
Programming
Enable
RB6/KBI2/
PGC
NC/ICCK/
ICPGC
I
Serial Clock
RB7/KBI3/
PGD
NC/ICDT/
ICPGD
I/O
Serial Data
Legend:
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
EQUIVALENT PINS FOR
LEGACY AND DEDICATED
ICD/ICSP™ PORTS
Advance Information
I = Input, O = Output, P = Power
DS39760A-page 209
PIC18F2450/4450
Even when the dedicated port is enabled, the ICSP and
ICD functions remain available through the legacy port.
When VIH is seen on the MCLR/VPP/RE3 pin, the state
of the ICRST/ICVPP pin is ignored.
Note 1: The ICPRT Configuration bit can only be
programmed through the default ICSP
port.
2: The ICPRT Configuration bit must be
maintained clear for all 28-pin and 40-pin
devices; otherwise, unexpected operation
may occur.
18.9.2
28-PIN EMULATION
PIC18F4450 devices in 44-pin TQFP packages also
have the ability to change their configuration under
external control for debugging purposes. This allows
the device to behave as if it were a PIC18F2455/2550
28-pin device.
This 28-pin Configuration mode is controlled through a
single pin, NC/ICPORTS. Connecting this pin to VSS
forces the device to function as a 28-pin device.
Features normally associated with the 40/44-pin
devices are disabled, along with their corresponding
control registers and bits. On the other hand,
connecting the pin to VDD forces the device to function
in its default configuration.
The configuration option is only available when
background debugging and the dedicated ICD/ICSP
port are both enabled (DEBUG Configuration bit is
clear and ICPRT Configuration bit is set). When
disabled, NC/ICPORTS is a No Connect pin.
18.10 Single-Supply ICSP Programming
The LVP Configuration bit enables Single-Supply
ICSP Programming (formerly known as Low-Voltage
ICSP Programming or LVP). When Single-Supply
Programming is enabled, the microcontroller can be
programmed without requiring high voltage being
applied to the MCLR/VPP/RE3 pin, but the RB5/KBI1/
PGM pin is then dedicated to controlling Program
mode entry and is not available as a general purpose
I/O pin.
Note 1: High-Voltage Programming is always
available, regardless of the state of the
LVP bit, by applying VIHH to the MCLR pin.
2: While in Low-Voltage ICSP Programming
mode, the RB5 pin can no longer be used
as a general purpose I/O pin and should
be held low during normal operation.
3: When using Low-Voltage ICSP Programming (LVP) and the pull-ups on PORTB
are enabled, bit 5 in the TRISB register
must be cleared to disable the pull-up on
RB5 and ensure the proper operation of
the device.
4: If the device Master Clear is disabled,
verify that either of the following is done to
ensure proper entry into ICSP mode:
a) disable Low-Voltage Programming
(CONFIG4L<2> = 0); or
b) make certain that RB5/KBI1/PGM
is held low during entry into ICSP.
If Single-Supply ICSP Programming mode will not be
used, the LVP bit can be cleared. RB5/KBI1/PGM then
becomes available as the digital I/O pin, RB5. The LVP
bit may be set or cleared only when using standard
high-voltage programming (VIHH applied to the MCLR/
VPP/RE3 pin). Once LVP has been disabled, only the
standard high-voltage programming is available and
must be used to program the device.
Memory that is not code-protected can be erased using
either a Block Erase, or erased row by row, then written
at any specified VDD. If code-protected memory is to be
erased, a Block Erase is required. If a Block Erase is to
be performed when using Low-Voltage Programming,
the device must be supplied with VDD of 4.5V to 5.5V.
While programming using Single-Supply Programming, VDD is applied to the MCLR/VPP/RE3 pin as in
normal execution mode. To enter Programming mode,
VDD is applied to the PGM pin.
DS39760A-page 210
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
19.0
INSTRUCTION SET SUMMARY
PIC18F2450/4450 devices incorporate the standard
set of 75 PIC18 core instructions, as well as an
extended set of eight new instructions for the
optimization of code that is recursive or that utilizes a
software stack. The extended set is discussed later in
this section.
19.1
Standard Instruction Set
The standard PIC18 instruction set adds many
enhancements to the previous PICmicro instruction
sets, while maintaining an easy migration from these
PICmicro instruction sets. Most instructions are a
single program memory word (16 bits) but there are
four instructions that require two program memory
locations.
Each single-word instruction is a 16-bit word divided
into an opcode, which specifies the instruction type and
one or more operands, which further specify the
operation of the instruction.
The instruction set is highly orthogonal and is grouped
into four basic categories:
•
•
•
•
Byte-oriented operations
Bit-oriented operations
Literal operations
Control operations
The PIC18 instruction set summary in Table 19-2 lists
byte-oriented, bit-oriented, literal and control
operations. Table 19-1 shows the opcode field
descriptions.
Most byte-oriented instructions have three operands:
1.
2.
3.
The file register (specified by ‘f’)
The destination of the result (specified by ‘d’)
The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’)
The file register designator ‘f’ specifies which file
register is to be used by the instruction. The destination
designator ‘d’ specifies where the result of the
operation is to be placed. If ‘d’ is zero, the result is
placed in the WREG register. If ‘d’ is one, the result is
placed in the file register specified in the instruction.
All bit-oriented instructions have three operands:
1.
2.
3.
The file register (specified by ‘f’)
The bit in the file register (specified by ‘b’)
The accessed memory (specified by ‘a’)
The literal instructions may use some of the following
operands:
• A literal value to be loaded into a file register
(specified by ‘k’)
• The desired FSR register to load the literal value
into (specified by ‘f’)
• No operand required
(specified by ‘—’)
The control instructions may use some of the following
operands:
• A program memory address (specified by ‘n’)
• The mode of the CALL or RETURN instructions
(specified by ‘s’)
• The mode of the table read and table write
instructions (specified by ‘m’)
• No operand required
(specified by ‘—’)
All instructions are a single word, except for four
double-word instructions. These instructions were
made double-word to contain the required information
in 32 bits. In the second word, the 4 MSbs are ‘1’s. If
this second word is executed as an instruction (by
itself), it will execute as a NOP.
All single-word instructions are executed in a single
instruction cycle, unless a conditional test is true or the
program counter is changed as a result of the instruction. In these cases, the execution takes two instruction
cycles with the additional instruction cycle(s) executed
as a NOP.
The double-word instructions execute in two instruction
cycles.
One instruction cycle consists of four oscillator periods.
Thus, for an oscillator frequency of 4 MHz, the normal
instruction execution time is 1 μs. If a conditional test is
true, or the program counter is changed as a result of
an instruction, the instruction execution time is 2 μs.
Two-word branch instructions (if true) would take 3 μs.
Figure 19-1 shows the general formats that the
instructions can have. All examples use the convention
‘nnh’ to represent a hexadecimal number.
The Instruction Set Summary, shown in Table 19-2,
lists the standard instructions recognized by the
Microchip MPASMTM Assembler.
Section 19.1.1 “Standard Instruction Set” provides
a description of each instruction.
The bit field designator ‘b’ selects the number of the bit
affected by the operation, while the file register
designator ‘f’ represents the number of the file in which
the bit is located.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 211
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 19-1:
OPCODE FIELD DESCRIPTIONS
Field
Description
a
RAM access bit
a = 0: RAM location in Access RAM (BSR register is ignored)
a = 1: RAM bank is specified by BSR register
bbb
Bit address within an 8-bit file register (0 to 7).
BSR
Bank Select Register. Used to select the current RAM bank.
C, DC, Z, OV, N
ALU Status bits: Carry, Digit Carry, Zero, Overflow, Negative.
d
Destination select bit
d = 0: store result in WREG
d = 1: store result in file register f
dest
Destination: either the WREG register or the specified register file location.
f
8-bit register file address (00h to FFh) or 2-bit FSR designator (0h to 3h).
fs
12-bit register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the source address.
fd
12-bit register file address (000h to FFFh). This is the destination address.
GIE
Global Interrupt Enable bit.
k
Literal field, constant data or label (may be either an 8-bit, 12-bit or a 20-bit value).
label
Label name.
mm
The mode of the TBLPTR register for the table read and table write instructions.
Only used with table read and table write instructions:
*
No change to register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes)
*+
Post-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes)
*-
Post-Decrement register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes)
Pre-Increment register (such as TBLPTR with table reads and writes)
+*
n
The relative address (2’s complement number) for relative branch instructions or the direct address for
Call/Branch and Return instructions.
PC
Program Counter.
PCL
Program Counter Low Byte.
PCH
Program Counter High Byte.
PCLATH
Program Counter High Byte Latch.
PCLATU
Program Counter Upper Byte Latch.
PD
Power-Down bit.
PRODH
Product of Multiply High Byte.
PRODL
Product of Multiply Low Byte.
s
Fast Call/Return mode select bit
s = 0: do not update into/from shadow registers
s = 1: certain registers loaded into/from shadow registers (Fast mode)
TBLPTR
21-bit Table Pointer (points to a program memory location).
TABLAT
8-bit Table Latch.
TO
Time-out bit.
TOS
Top-of-Stack.
u
Unused or unchanged.
WDT
Watchdog Timer.
WREG
Working register (accumulator).
x
Don’t care (‘0’ or ‘1’). The assembler will generate code with x = 0. It is the recommended form of use for
compatibility with all Microchip software tools.
zs
7-bit offset value for indirect addressing of register files (source).
7-bit offset value for indirect addressing of register files (destination).
zd
{
}
Optional argument.
[text]
Indicates an indexed address.
(text)
The contents of text.
[expr]<n>
Specifies bit n of the register indicated by the pointer expr.
→
Assigned to.
< >
Register bit field.
∈
In the set of.
italics
User-defined term (font is Courier).
DS39760A-page 212
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 19-1:
GENERAL FORMAT FOR INSTRUCTIONS
Byte-oriented file register operations
15
10
9
OPCODE
Example Instruction
8 7
d
0
a
ADDWF MYREG, W, B
f (FILE #)
d = 0 for result destination to be WREG register
d = 1 for result destination to be file register (f)
a = 0 to force Access Bank
a = 1 for BSR to select bank
f = 8-bit file register address
Byte to Byte move operations (2-word)
15
12 11
0
OPCODE
15
MOVFF MYREG1, MYREG2
f (Source FILE #)
12 11
0
f (Destination FILE #)
1111
f = 12-bit file register address
Bit-oriented file register operations
15
12 11
9 8 7
0
OPCODE b (BIT #) a
BSF MYREG, bit, B
f (FILE #)
b = 3-bit position of bit in file register (f)
a = 0 to force Access Bank
a = 1 for BSR to select bank
f = 8-bit file register address
Literal operations
15
8
7
0
OPCODE
MOVLW 7Fh
k (literal)
k = 8-bit immediate value
Control operations
CALL, GOTO and Branch operations
15
8 7
0
OPCODE
15
GOTO Label
n<7:0> (literal)
12 11
0
n<19:8> (literal)
1111
n = 20-bit immediate value
15
8 7
S
OPCODE
15
0
CALL MYFUNC
n<7:0> (literal)
12 11
0
n<19:8> (literal)
1111
S = Fast bit
15
11 10
OPCODE
15
0
8 7
OPCODE
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
BRA MYFUNC
n<10:0> (literal)
0
n<7:0> (literal)
Advance Information
BC MYFUNC
DS39760A-page 213
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 19-2:
PIC18FXXXX INSTRUCTION SET
Mnemonic,
Operands
16-Bit Instruction Word
Description
Cycles
MSb
LSb
Status
Affected
Notes
BYTE-ORIENTED OPERATIONS
ADDWF
ADDWFC
ANDWF
CLRF
COMF
CPFSEQ
CPFSGT
CPFSLT
DECF
DECFSZ
DCFSNZ
INCF
INCFSZ
INFSNZ
IORWF
MOVF
MOVFF
f, d, a
f, d, a
f, d, a
f, a
f, d, a
f, a
f, a
f, a
f, d, a
f, d, a
f, d, a
f, d, a
f, d, a
f, d, a
f, d, a
f, d, a
fs, fd
MOVWF
MULWF
NEGF
RLCF
RLNCF
RRCF
RRNCF
SETF
SUBFWB
f, a
f, a
f, a
f, d, a
f, d, a
f, d, a
f, d, a
f, a
f, d, a
SUBWF
SUBWFB
f, d, a
f, d, a
SWAPF
TSTFSZ
XORWF
f, d, a
f, a
f, d, a
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Add WREG and f
Add WREG and Carry bit to f
AND WREG with f
Clear f
Complement f
Compare f with WREG, skip =
Compare f with WREG, skip >
Compare f with WREG, skip <
Decrement f
Decrement f, Skip if 0
Decrement f, Skip if Not 0
Increment f
Increment f, Skip if 0
Increment f, Skip if Not 0
Inclusive OR WREG with f
Move f
Move fs (source) to 1st word
fd (destination) 2nd word
Move WREG to f
Multiply WREG with f
Negate f
Rotate Left f through Carry
Rotate Left f (No Carry)
Rotate Right f through Carry
Rotate Right f (No Carry)
Set f
Subtract f from WREG with
borrow
Subtract WREG from f
Subtract WREG from f with
borrow
Swap nibbles in f
Test f, skip if 0
Exclusive OR WREG with f
1
1
1
1
1
1 (2 or 3)
1 (2 or 3)
1 (2 or 3)
1
1 (2 or 3)
1 (2 or 3)
1
1 (2 or 3)
1 (2 or 3)
1
1
2
C, DC, Z, OV, N
C, DC, Z, OV, N
Z, N
Z
Z, N
None
None
None
C, DC, Z, OV, N
None
None
C, DC, Z, OV, N
None
None
Z, N
Z, N
None
1, 2
1, 2
1,2
2
1, 2
4
4
1, 2
1, 2, 3, 4
1, 2, 3, 4
1, 2
1, 2, 3, 4
4
1, 2
1, 2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
0010
0010
0001
0110
0001
0110
0110
0110
0000
0010
0100
0010
0011
0100
0001
0101
1100
1111
0110
0000
0110
0011
0100
0011
0100
0110
0101
01da
00da
01da
101a
11da
001a
010a
000a
01da
11da
11da
10da
11da
10da
00da
00da
ffff
ffff
111a
001a
110a
01da
01da
00da
00da
100a
01da
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
1
1
0101
0101
11da
10da
ffff
ffff
ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N
ffff C, DC, Z, OV, N
1, 2
1
0011
1 (2 or 3) 0110
1
0001
10da
011a
10da
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff None
ffff None
ffff Z, N
4
1, 2
None
None
C, DC, Z, OV, N
C, Z, N
Z, N
C, Z, N
Z, N
None
C, DC, Z, OV, N
1, 2
1, 2
1, 2
When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that
value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as an input and is
driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’.
If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and where applicable, ‘d’ = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if
assigned.
If the Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The
second cycle is executed as a NOP.
Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP
unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all
program memory locations have a valid instruction.
DS39760A-page 214
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 19-2:
PIC18FXXXX INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED)
16-Bit Instruction Word
Mnemonic,
Operands
Description
Cycles
MSb
LSb
Status
Affected
Notes
BIT-ORIENTED OPERATIONS
BCF
BSF
BTFSC
BTFSS
BTG
f, b, a
f, b, a
f, b, a
f, b, a
f, d, a
Bit Clear f
Bit Set f
Bit Test f, Skip if Clear
Bit Test f, Skip if Set
Bit Toggle f
1
1
1 (2 or 3)
1 (2 or 3)
1
1001
1000
1011
1010
0111
bbba
bbba
bbba
bbba
bbba
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
None
None
None
None
None
1 (2)
1 (2)
1 (2)
1 (2)
1 (2)
1 (2)
1 (2)
2
1 (2)
2
0010
0110
0011
0111
0101
0001
0100
0nnn
0000
110s
kkkk
0000
0000
1111
kkkk
0000
xxxx
0000
0000
1nnn
0000
0000
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
kkkk
kkkk
0000
0000
kkkk
kkkk
0000
xxxx
0000
0000
nnnn
1111
0001
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
nnnn
kkkk
kkkk
0100
0111
kkkk
kkkk
0000
xxxx
0110
0101
nnnn
1111
000s
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
1110
1110
1110
1110
1110
1110
1110
1101
1110
1110
1111
0000
0000
1110
1111
0000
1111
0000
0000
1101
0000
0000
2
2
1
0000
0000
0000
1100
0000
0000
kkkk
0001
0000
1, 2
1, 2
3, 4
3, 4
1, 2
CONTROL OPERATIONS
BC
BN
BNC
BNN
BNOV
BNZ
BOV
BRA
BZ
CALL
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n
n, s
CLRWDT
DAW
GOTO
—
—
n
NOP
NOP
POP
PUSH
RCALL
RESET
RETFIE
—
—
—
—
n
s
Branch if Carry
Branch if Negative
Branch if Not Carry
Branch if Not Negative
Branch if Not Overflow
Branch if Not Zero
Branch if Overflow
Branch Unconditionally
Branch if Zero
Call subroutine 1st word
2nd word
Clear Watchdog Timer
Decimal Adjust WREG
Go to address 1st word
2nd word
No Operation
No Operation
Pop top of return stack (TOS)
Push top of return stack (TOS)
Relative Call
Software device Reset
Return from interrupt enable
RETLW
RETURN
SLEEP
k
s
—
Return with literal in WREG
Return from Subroutine
Go into Standby mode
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
1
1
2
TO, PD
C
None
None
None
None
None
None
All
GIE/GIEH,
PEIE/GIEL
kkkk None
001s None
0011 TO, PD
4
When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that
value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as an input and is
driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’.
If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and where applicable, ‘d’ = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if
assigned.
If the Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The
second cycle is executed as a NOP.
Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP
unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all
program memory locations have a valid instruction.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 215
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 19-2:
PIC18FXXXX INSTRUCTION SET (CONTINUED)
16-Bit Instruction Word
Mnemonic,
Operands
Description
Cycles
MSb
LSb
Status
Affected
Notes
LITERAL OPERATIONS
ADDLW
ANDLW
IORLW
LFSR
k
k
k
f, k
MOVLB
MOVLW
MULLW
RETLW
SUBLW
XORLW
k
k
k
k
k
k
Add literal and WREG
AND literal with WREG
Inclusive OR literal with WREG
Move literal (12-bit) 2nd word
to FSR(f)
1st word
Move literal to BSR<3:0>
Move literal to WREG
Multiply literal with WREG
Return with literal in WREG
Subtract WREG from literal
Exclusive OR literal with WREG
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
0000
0000
0000
1110
1111
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
1111
1011
1001
1110
0000
0001
1110
1101
1100
1000
1010
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
00ff
kkkk
0000
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
C, DC, Z, OV, N
Z, N
Z, N
None
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
0000
1000
1001
1010
1011
1100
1101
1110
1111
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
None
C, DC, Z, OV, N
Z, N
DATA MEMORY ↔ PROGRAM MEMORY OPERATIONS
TBLRD*
TBLRD*+
TBLRD*TBLRD+*
TBLWT*
TBLWT*+
TBLWT*TBLWT+*
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Table Read
2
Table Read with post-increment
Table Read with post-decrement
Table Read with pre-increment
Table Write
2
Table Write with post-increment
Table Write with post-decrement
Table Write with pre-increment
When a PORT register is modified as a function of itself (e.g., MOVF PORTB, 1, 0), the value used will be that
value present on the pins themselves. For example, if the data latch is ‘1’ for a pin configured as an input and is
driven low by an external device, the data will be written back with a ‘0’.
If this instruction is executed on the TMR0 register (and where applicable, ‘d’ = 1), the prescaler will be cleared if
assigned.
If the Program Counter (PC) is modified or a conditional test is true, the instruction requires two cycles. The
second cycle is executed as a NOP.
Some instructions are two-word instructions. The second word of these instructions will be executed as a NOP
unless the first word of the instruction retrieves the information embedded in these 16 bits. This ensures that all
program memory locations have a valid instruction.
DS39760A-page 216
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
19.1.1
STANDARD INSTRUCTION SET
ADDLW
ADD Literal to W
ADDWF
Syntax:
ADDLW
Syntax:
ADDWF
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 255
Operands:
Operation:
(W) + k → W
Status Affected:
N, OV, C, DC, Z
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(W) + (f) → dest
Status Affected:
N, OV, C, DC, Z
Encoding:
0000
Description:
k
1111
kkkk
kkkk
The contents of W are added to the
8-bit literal ‘k’ and the result is placed in
W.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
ADD W to f
Encoding:
0010
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Read
literal ‘k’
Process
Data
Write to W
Example:
ADDLW
ffff
ffff
Add W to register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the
result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the
result is stored back in register ‘f’
(default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
15h
Before Instruction
W
= 10h
After Instruction
W =
25h
01da
Description:
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode
f {,d {,a}}
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Example:
ADDWF
REG, 0, 0
Before Instruction
W
=
REG
=
After Instruction
W
REG
Note:
=
=
17h
0C2h
0D9h
0C2h
All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument, preceding the instruction mnemonic, for use in
symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction format then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s).
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 217
PIC18F2450/4450
ADDWFC
ADD W and Carry bit to f
ANDLW
AND Literal with W
Syntax:
ADDWFC
Syntax:
ANDLW
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
f {,d {,a}}
(W) + (f) + (C) → dest
Operation:
Status Affected:
Encoding:
0010
Description:
00da
ffff
ffff
Add W, the Carry flag and data memory
location ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
placed in data memory location ‘f’.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 255
Operation:
(W) .AND. k → W
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
N, OV, C, DC, Z
k
0000
1011
kkkk
kkkk
Description:
The contents of W are ANDed with the
8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read literal
‘k’
Process
Data
Write to W
Example:
ANDLW
Before Instruction
W
=
After Instruction
W
=
05Fh
A3h
03h
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Example:
ADDWFC
Before Instruction
Carry bit =
REG
=
W
=
After Instruction
Carry bit =
REG
=
W
=
DS39760A-page 218
REG, 0, 1
1
02h
4Dh
0
02h
50h
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
ANDWF
AND W with f
BC
Branch if Carry
Syntax:
ANDWF
Syntax:
BC
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
f {,d {,a}}
Operation:
(W) .AND. (f) → dest
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
0001
Description:
ffff
ffff
The contents of W are ANDed with
register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored
in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back
in register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Example:
ANDWF
Before Instruction
W
=
REG
=
After Instruction
W
=
REG
=
Operands:
-128 ≤ n ≤ 127
Operation:
if Carry bit is ‘1’
(PC) + 2 + 2n → PC
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
01da
n
1110
0010
nnnn
nnnn
Description:
If the Carry bit is ‘1’, then the program
will branch.
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
added to the PC. Since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
two-cycle instruction.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(2)
Q Cycle Activity:
If Jump:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
Write to PC
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
If No Jump:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
No
operation
REG, 0, 0
Example:
17h
C2h
02h
C2h
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
HERE
Before Instruction
PC
After Instruction
If Carry
PC
If Carry
PC
Advance Information
BC
5
=
address (HERE)
=
=
=
=
1;
address (HERE + 12)
0;
address (HERE + 2)
DS39760A-page 219
PIC18F2450/4450
BCF
Bit Clear f
BN
Branch if Negative
Syntax:
BCF
Syntax:
BN
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
0≤b≤7
a ∈ [0,1]
f, b {,a}
Operation:
0 → f<b>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
bbba
ffff
ffff
Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is cleared.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write
register ‘f’
Example:
BCF
Before Instruction
FLAG_REG =
After Instruction
FLAG_REG =
Operands:
-128 ≤ n ≤ 127
Operation:
if Negative bit is ‘1’
(PC) + 2 + 2n → PC
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1001
FLAG_REG,
7, 0
1110
0110
nnnn
nnnn
Description:
If the Negative bit is ‘1’, then the
program will branch.
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
added to the PC. Since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
two-cycle instruction.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(2)
Q Cycle Activity:
If Jump:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
Write to PC
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
If No Jump:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
No
operation
C7h
47h
Example:
HERE
Before Instruction
PC
After Instruction
If Negative
PC
If Negative
PC
DS39760A-page 220
n
Advance Information
BN
Jump
=
address (HERE)
=
=
=
=
1;
address (Jump)
0;
address (HERE + 2)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
BNC
Branch if Not Carry
BNN
Branch if Not Negative
Syntax:
BNC
Syntax:
BNN
n
n
Operands:
-128 ≤ n ≤ 127
Operands:
-128 ≤ n ≤ 127
Operation:
if Carry bit is ‘0’
(PC) + 2 + 2n → PC
Operation:
if Negative bit is ‘0’
(PC) + 2 + 2n → PC
Status Affected:
None
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1110
0011
nnnn
nnnn
Encoding:
1110
0111
nnnn
nnnn
Description:
If the Carry bit is ‘0’, then the program
will branch.
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
added to the PC. Since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
two-cycle instruction.
Description:
If the Negative bit is ‘0’, then the
program will branch.
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
added to the PC. Since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
two-cycle instruction.
Words:
1
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(2)
Cycles:
1(2)
Q Cycle Activity:
If Jump:
Q Cycle Activity:
If Jump:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
Write to PC
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
Write to PC
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
No
operation
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
No
operation
If No Jump:
Example:
If No Jump:
HERE
Before Instruction
PC
After Instruction
If Carry
PC
If Carry
PC
BNC
Example:
Jump
=
address (HERE)
=
=
=
=
0;
address (Jump)
1;
address (HERE + 2)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
HERE
Before Instruction
PC
After Instruction
If Negative
PC
If Negative
PC
Advance Information
BNN
Jump
=
address (HERE)
=
=
=
=
0;
address (Jump)
1;
address (HERE + 2)
DS39760A-page 221
PIC18F2450/4450
BNOV
Branch if Not Overflow
BNZ
Branch if Not Zero
Syntax:
BNOV
Syntax:
BNZ
n
n
Operands:
-128 ≤ n ≤ 127
Operands:
-128 ≤ n ≤ 127
Operation:
if Overflow bit is ‘0’
(PC) + 2 + 2n → PC
Operation:
if Zero bit is ‘0’
(PC) + 2 + 2n → PC
Status Affected:
None
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1110
0101
nnnn
nnnn
Encoding:
1110
0001
nnnn
nnnn
Description:
If the Overflow bit is ‘0’, then the
program will branch.
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
added to the PC. Since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
two-cycle instruction.
Description:
If the Zero bit is ‘0’, then the program
will branch.
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
added to the PC. Since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
two-cycle instruction.
Words:
1
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(2)
Cycles:
1(2)
Q Cycle Activity:
If Jump:
Q Cycle Activity:
If Jump:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
Write to PC
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
Write to PC
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
No
operation
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
No
operation
If No Jump:
If No Jump:
Example:
HERE
Before Instruction
PC
After Instruction
If Overflow
PC
If Overflow
PC
DS39760A-page 222
Example:
BNOV Jump
=
address (HERE)
=
=
=
=
0;
address (Jump)
1;
address (HERE + 2)
HERE
Before Instruction
PC
After Instruction
If Zero
PC
If Zero
PC
Advance Information
BNZ
Jump
=
address (HERE)
=
=
=
=
0;
address (Jump)
1;
address (HERE + 2)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
BRA
Unconditional Branch
BSF
Bit Set f
Syntax:
BRA
Syntax:
BSF
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
0≤b≤7
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
1 → f<b>
Status Affected:
None
n
Operands:
-1024 ≤ n ≤ 1023
Operation:
(PC) + 2 + 2n → PC
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1101
Description:
0nnn
nnnn
nnnn
Add the 2’s complement number ‘2n’ to
the PC. Since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a
two-cycle instruction.
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Encoding:
1000
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
Write to PC
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
bbba
ffff
ffff
Description:
Bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is set.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode
f, b {,a}
Q Cycle Activity:
Example:
HERE
Before Instruction
PC
After Instruction
PC
BRA
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write
register ‘f’
Jump
=
address (HERE)
=
address (Jump)
Example:
BSF
Before Instruction
FLAG_REG
After Instruction
FLAG_REG
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
FLAG_REG, 7, 1
=
0Ah
=
8Ah
DS39760A-page 223
PIC18F2450/4450
BTFSC
Bit Test File, Skip if Clear
BTFSS
Bit Test File, Skip if Set
Syntax:
BTFSC f, b {,a}
Syntax:
BTFSS f, b {,a}
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
0≤b≤7
a ∈ [0,1]
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
0≤b<7
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
skip if (f<b>) = 0
Operation:
skip if (f<b>) = 1
Status Affected:
None
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1011
Description:
bbba
ffff
ffff
Encoding:
1010
If bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is ‘0’, then the next
instruction is skipped. If bit ‘b’ is ‘0’, then
the next instruction fetched during the
current instruction execution is discarded
and a NOP is executed instead, making
this a two-cycle instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If
‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates in
Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh).
See Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Description:
Words:
1
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(2)
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction.
Cycles:
1(2)
Note:
Q Cycle Activity:
bbba
ffff
ffff
If bit ‘b’ in register ‘f’ is ‘1’, then the next
instruction is skipped. If bit ‘b’ is ‘1’, then
the next instruction fetched during the
current instruction execution is discarded
and a NOP is executed instead, making
this a two-cycle instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected. If
‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh).
See Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction.
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
No
operation
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
No
operation
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
If skip:
If skip:
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Example:
HERE
FALSE
TRUE
Before Instruction
PC
After Instruction
If FLAG<1>
PC
If FLAG<1>
PC
DS39760A-page 224
BTFSC
:
:
FLAG, 1, 0
=
address (HERE)
=
=
=
=
0;
address (TRUE)
1;
address (FALSE)
Example:
HERE
FALSE
TRUE
Before Instruction
PC
After Instruction
If FLAG<1>
PC
If FLAG<1>
PC
Advance Information
BTFSS
:
:
FLAG, 1, 0
=
address (HERE)
=
=
=
=
0;
address (FALSE)
1;
address (TRUE)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
BTG
Bit Toggle f
BOV
Branch if Overflow
Syntax:
BTG f, b {,a}
Syntax:
BOV
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
0≤b<7
a ∈ [0,1]
Operands:
-128 ≤ n ≤ 127
Operation:
if Overflow bit is ‘1’
(PC) + 2 + 2n → PC
Status Affected:
None
Operation:
(f<b>) → f<b>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0111
Description:
Encoding:
bbba
ffff
ffff
Bit ‘b’ in data memory location ‘f’ is
inverted.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
n
1110
0100
nnnn
nnnn
Description:
If the Overflow bit is ‘1’, then the
program will branch.
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
added to the PC. Since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
two-cycle instruction.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(2)
Q Cycle Activity:
If Jump:
Words:
1
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Cycles:
1
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
Write to PC
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write
register ‘f’
Example:
BTG
PORTC,
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
No
operation
4, 0
Before Instruction:
PORTC =
0111 0101 [75h]
After Instruction:
PORTC =
0110 0101 [65h]
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
If No Jump:
Example:
HERE
Before Instruction
PC
After Instruction
If Overflow
PC
If Overflow
PC
Advance Information
BOV
Jump
=
address (HERE)
=
=
=
=
1;
address (Jump)
0;
address (HERE + 2)
DS39760A-page 225
PIC18F2450/4450
BZ
Branch if Zero
CALL
Subroutine Call
Syntax:
BZ
Syntax:
CALL k {,s}
n
Operands:
-128 ≤ n ≤ 127
Operands:
Operation:
if Zero bit is ‘1’
(PC) + 2 + 2n → PC
0 ≤ k ≤ 1048575
s ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
Status Affected:
None
(PC) + 4 → TOS,
k → PC<20:1>,
if s = 1
(W) → WS,
(STATUS) → STATUSS,
(BSR) → BSRS
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1110
Description:
0000
nnnn
nnnn
If the Zero bit is ‘1’, then the program
will branch.
The 2’s complement number ‘2n’ is
added to the PC. Since the PC will have
incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is then a
two-cycle instruction.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(2)
Encoding:
1st word (k<7:0>)
2nd word(k<19:8>)
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
Write to PC
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Q2
Q3
Q4
If No Jump:
Q1
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Example:
HERE
Before Instruction
PC
After Instruction
If Zero
PC
If Zero
PC
DS39760A-page 226
Process
Data
BZ
No
operation
address (HERE)
=
=
=
=
1;
address (Jump)
0;
address (HERE + 2)
kkkk0
kkkk8
Subroutine call of entire 2-Mbyte
memory range. First, return address
(PC + 4) is pushed onto the return
stack. If ‘s’ = 1, the W, STATUS and
BSR
registers are also pushed into their
respective shadow registers, WS,
STATUSS and BSRS. If ‘s’ = 0, no
update occurs (default). Then, the
20-bit value ‘k’ is loaded into PC<20:1>.
CALL is a two-cycle instruction.
Words:
2
Cycles:
2
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read literal
‘k’<7:0>,
Push PC to
stack
Read literal
‘k’<19:8>,
Write to PC
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Jump
=
k7kkk
kkkk
110s
k19kkk
Description:
Q Cycle Activity:
If Jump:
Decode
1110
1111
Example:
HERE
Before Instruction
PC
=
After Instruction
PC
=
TOS
=
WS
=
BSRS
=
STATUSS =
Advance Information
CALL
THERE,1
address (HERE)
address (THERE)
address (HERE + 4)
W
BSR
STATUS
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
CLRF
Clear f
Syntax:
CLRF
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
a ∈ [0,1]
f {,a}
Operation:
000h → f,
1→Z
Status Affected:
Z
Encoding:
0110
Description:
101a
ffff
ffff
Clears the contents of the specified
register.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write
register ‘f’
CLRF
Before Instruction
FLAG_REG
After Instruction
FLAG_REG
Clear Watchdog Timer
Syntax:
CLRWDT
Operands:
None
Operation:
000h → WDT,
000h → WDT postscaler,
1 → TO,
1 → PD
Status Affected:
TO, PD
Encoding:
0000
FLAG_REG,1
=
5Ah
=
00h
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
0000
0000
0100
Description:
CLRWDT instruction resets the
Watchdog Timer. It also resets the
postscaler of the WDT. Status bits, TO
and PD, are set.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
No
operation
Process
Data
No
operation
Example:
Q Cycle Activity:
Example:
CLRWDT
CLRWDT
Before Instruction
WDT Counter
After Instruction
WDT Counter
WDT Postscaler
TO
PD
Advance Information
=
?
=
=
=
=
00h
0
1
1
DS39760A-page 227
PIC18F2450/4450
COMF
Complement f
CPFSEQ
Compare f with W, Skip if f = W
Syntax:
COMF
Syntax:
CPFSEQ
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(f) – (W),
skip if (f) = (W)
(unsigned comparison)
Status Affected:
None
f {,d {,a}}
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(f) → dest
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
0001
11da
ffff
ffff
Description:
The contents of register ‘f’ are
complemented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
stored back in register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Example:
COMF
Before Instruction
REG
=
After Instruction
REG
=
W
=
REG, 0, 0
Encoding:
Description:
0110
001a
ffff
ffff
Compares the contents of data memory
location ‘f’ to the contents of W by
performing an unsigned subtraction.
If ‘f’ = W, then the fetched instruction is
discarded and a NOP is executed
instead, making this a two-cycle
instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(2)
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction.
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Decode
13h
Q2
Read
register ‘f’
Q3
Process
Data
Q4
No
operation
If skip:
13h
ECh
Q1
Q2
Q3
No
No
No
operation
operation
operation
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
Q1
Q2
Q3
No
No
No
operation
operation
operation
No
No
No
operation
operation
operation
Example:
HERE
NEQUAL
EQUAL
Before Instruction
PC Address
W
REG
After Instruction
If REG
PC
If REG
PC
DS39760A-page 228
f {,a}
Advance Information
Q4
No
operation
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
CPFSEQ REG, 0
:
:
=
=
=
HERE
?
?
=
=
≠
=
W;
Address (EQUAL)
W;
Address (NEQUAL)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
CPFSGT
Compare f with W, Skip if f > W
CPFSLT
Compare f with W, Skip if f < W
Syntax:
CPFSGT
Syntax:
CPFSLT
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
a ∈ [0,1]
Operands:
Operation:
(f) – (W),
skip if (f) > (W)
(unsigned comparison)
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(f) – (W),
skip if (f) < (W)
(unsigned comparison)
Status Affected:
None
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
Description:
Words:
Cycles:
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Decode
0110
f {,a}
010a
ffff
ffff
Compares the contents of data memory
location ‘f’ to the contents of the W by
performing an unsigned subtraction.
If the contents of ‘f’ are greater than the
contents of WREG, then the fetched
instruction is discarded and a NOP is
executed instead, making this a
two-cycle instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Encoding:
Q2
Read
register ‘f’
Q3
Process
Data
Q4
No
operation
Q1
Q2
Q3
No
No
No
operation
operation
operation
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
Q1
Q2
Q3
No
No
No
operation
operation
operation
No
No
No
operation
operation
operation
Q4
No
operation
Example:
HERE
NGREATER
GREATER
Before Instruction
PC
W
After Instruction
If REG
PC
If REG
PC
CPFSGT REG, 0
:
:
=
=
Address (HERE)
?
>
=
≤
=
W;
Address (GREATER)
W;
Address (NGREATER)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
000a
ffff
ffff
Compares the contents of data memory
location ‘f’ to the contents of W by
performing an unsigned subtraction.
If the contents of ‘f’ are less than the
contents of W, then the fetched
instruction is discarded and a NOP is
executed instead, making this a
two-cycle instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(2)
Note:
3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction.
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
No
operation
If skip:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
If skip:
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
0110
Description:
1
1(2)
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction.
f {,a}
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Example:
HERE
NLESS
LESS
Before Instruction
PC
W
After Instruction
If REG
PC
If REG
PC
Advance Information
CPFSLT REG, 1
:
:
=
=
Address (HERE)
?
<
=
≥
=
W;
Address (LESS)
W;
Address (NLESS)
DS39760A-page 229
PIC18F2450/4450
DAW
Decimal Adjust W Register
DECF
Decrement f
Syntax:
DAW
Syntax:
DECF f {,d {,a}}
Operands:
None
Operands:
Operation:
If [W<3:0> > 9] or [DC = 1] then
(W<3:0>) + 6 → W<3:0>;
else
(W<3:0>) → W<3:0>
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(f) – 1 → dest
Status Affected:
C, DC, N, OV, Z
If [W<7:4> + DC > 9] or [C = 1] then
(W<7:4>) + 6 + DC → W<7:4>;
else
(W<7:4>) + DC → W<7:4>
Status Affected:
Encoding:
0000
0000
0000
0000
DAW adjusts the eight-bit value in W,
resulting from the earlier addition of two
variables (each in packed BCD format)
and produces a correct packed BCD
result.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register W
Process
Data
Write
W
Example 1:
DAW
Before Instruction
W
=
C
=
DC
=
After Instruction
W
=
C
=
DC
=
A5h
0
0
05h
1
0
Example 2:
Before Instruction
W
=
C
=
DC
=
After Instruction
W
=
C
=
DC
=
DS39760A-page 230
ffff
Decrement register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the
result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the
result is stored back in register ‘f’
(default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
0111
Description:
ffff
Description:
C
Encoding:
01da
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Example:
DECF
Before Instruction
CNT
=
Z
=
After Instruction
CNT
=
Z
=
CNT,
1, 0
01h
0
00h
1
CEh
0
0
34h
1
0
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
DECFSZ
Decrement f, Skip if 0
DCFSNZ
Decrement f, Skip if Not 0
Syntax:
DECFSZ f {,d {,a}}
Syntax:
DCFSNZ
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(f) – 1 → dest,
skip if result = 0
Operation:
(f) – 1 → dest,
skip if result ≠ 0
Status Affected:
None
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0010
11da
ffff
ffff
Description:
The contents of register ‘f’ are
decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
placed back in register ‘f’ (default).
If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction,
which is already fetched, is discarded
and a NOP is executed instead, making
it a two-cycle instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(2)
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction.
Encoding:
0100
Description:
11da
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(2)
Note:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
DECFSZ
GOTO
CNT, 1, 1
LOOP
Example:
HERE
3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction.
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
If skip:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Example:
CONTINUE
Before Instruction
PC
=
After Instruction
CNT
=
If CNT
=
PC =
If CNT
≠
PC =
Address (HERE)
CNT – 1
0;
Address (CONTINUE)
0;
Address (HERE + 2)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
ffff
Q Cycle Activity:
If skip:
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
ffff
The contents of register ‘f’ are
decremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
placed back in register ‘f’ (default).
If the result is not ‘0’, the next
instruction, which is already fetched, is
discarded and a NOP is executed
instead, making it a two-cycle
instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode
f {,d {,a}}
HERE
ZERO
NZERO
Before Instruction
TEMP
After Instruction
TEMP
If TEMP
PC
If TEMP
PC
Advance Information
DCFSNZ
:
:
TEMP, 1, 0
=
?
=
=
=
≠
=
TEMP – 1,
0;
Address (ZERO)
0;
Address (NZERO)
DS39760A-page 231
PIC18F2450/4450
GOTO
Unconditional Branch
INCF
Increment f
Syntax:
GOTO k
Syntax:
INCF
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 1048575
Operands:
Operation:
k → PC<20:1>
Status Affected:
None
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(f) + 1 → dest
Status Affected:
C, DC, N, OV, Z
Encoding:
1st word (k<7:0>)
2nd word(k<19:8>)
1110
1111
1111
k19kkk
k7kkk
kkkk
kkkk0
kkkk8
Description:
GOTO allows an unconditional branch
anywhere within the entire
2-Mbyte memory range. The 20-bit
value ‘k’ is loaded into PC<20:1>. GOTO
is always a two-cycle instruction.
Words:
2
Cycles:
2
Encoding:
0010
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Read literal
‘k’<7:0>,
No
operation
Read literal
‘k’<19:8>,
Write to PC
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Example:
GOTO THERE
After Instruction
PC =
Address (THERE)
ffff
ffff
The contents of register ‘f’ are
incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
placed back in register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Example:
INCF
Before Instruction
CNT
=
Z
=
C
=
DC
=
After Instruction
CNT
=
Z
=
C
=
DC
=
DS39760A-page 232
10da
Description:
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode
f {,d {,a}}
Advance Information
CNT, 1, 0
FFh
0
?
?
00h
1
1
1
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
INCFSZ
Increment f, Skip if 0
INFSNZ
Syntax:
INCFSZ
Syntax:
INFSNZ
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
f {,d {,a}}
Increment f, Skip if Not 0
f {,d {,a}}
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operands:
Operation:
(f) + 1 → dest,
skip if result = 0
Operation:
(f) + 1 → dest,
skip if result ≠ 0
Status Affected:
None
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0011
11da
ffff
ffff
Encoding:
0100
Description:
ffff
ffff
The contents of register ‘f’ are
incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
placed back in register ‘f’ (default).
If the result is not ‘0’, the next
instruction, which is already fetched, is
discarded and a NOP is executed
instead, making it a two-cycle
instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Description:
The contents of register ‘f’ are
incremented. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
placed back in register ‘f’. (default)
If the result is ‘0’, the next instruction,
which is already fetched, is discarded
and a NOP is executed instead, making
it a two-cycle instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(2)
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction.
Cycles:
1(2)
Note:
Q Cycle Activity:
10da
3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction.
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
If skip:
If skip:
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Example:
HERE
NZERO
ZERO
Before Instruction
PC
=
After Instruction
CNT
=
If CNT
=
PC
=
If CNT
≠
PC
=
INCFSZ
:
:
Address (HERE)
CNT + 1
0;
Address (ZERO)
0;
Address (NZERO)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
CNT, 1, 0
Example:
HERE
ZERO
NZERO
Before Instruction
PC
=
After Instruction
REG
=
If REG
≠
PC
=
If REG
=
PC
=
Advance Information
INFSNZ
REG, 1, 0
Address (HERE)
REG + 1
0;
Address (NZERO)
0;
Address (ZERO)
DS39760A-page 233
PIC18F2450/4450
IORLW
Inclusive OR Literal with W
IORWF
Inclusive OR W with f
Syntax:
IORLW k
Syntax:
IORWF
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 255
Operands:
Operation:
(W) .OR. k → W
Status Affected:
N, Z
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(W) .OR. (f) → dest
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
0000
1001
kkkk
kkkk
Description:
The contents of W are ORed with the
eight-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed in
W.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Encoding:
0001
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Read
literal ‘k’
Process
Data
Write to W
Example:
IORLW
Before Instruction
W
=
After Instruction
W
=
ffff
ffff
Inclusive OR W with register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is
‘0’, the result is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’,
the result is placed back in register ‘f’
(default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
35h
9Ah
BFh
00da
Description:
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode
f {,d {,a}}
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Example:
IORWF
Before Instruction
RESULT =
W
=
After Instruction
RESULT =
W
=
DS39760A-page 234
Advance Information
RESULT, 0, 1
13h
91h
13h
93h
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
LFSR
Load FSR
MOVF
Move f
Syntax:
LFSR f, k
Syntax:
MOVF
Operands:
0≤f≤2
0 ≤ k ≤ 4095
Operands:
Operation:
k → FSRf
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Status Affected:
None
Operation:
f → dest
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
1110
1111
1110
0000
00ff
k7kkk
k11kkk
kkkk
Description:
The 12-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the
File Select Register pointed to by ‘f’.
Words:
2
Cycles:
2
Encoding:
0101
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Read literal
‘k’ MSB
Process
Data
Write
literal ‘k’ MSB
to FSRfH
Decode
Read literal
‘k’ LSB
Process
Data
Write literal ‘k’
to FSRfL
Example:
After Instruction
FSR2H
FSR2L
03h
ABh
ffff
ffff
The contents of register ‘f’ are moved to
a destination dependent upon the
status of ‘d’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is
placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
placed back in register ‘f’ (default).
Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the
256-byte bank.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
LFSR 2, 3ABh
=
=
00da
Description:
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode
f {,d {,a}}
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write W
Example:
MOVF
Before Instruction
REG
W
After Instruction
REG
W
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
REG, 0, 0
=
=
22h
FFh
=
=
22h
22h
DS39760A-page 235
PIC18F2450/4450
MOVFF
Move f to f
MOVLB
Move Literal to Low Nibble in BSR
Syntax:
MOVFF fs,fd
Syntax:
MOVLW k
Operands:
0 ≤ fs ≤ 4095
0 ≤ fd ≤ 4095
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 255
Operation:
k → BSR
Status Affected:
None
Operation:
(fs) → fd
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1st word (source)
2nd word (destin.)
Encoding:
1100
1111
Description:
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffff
ffffs
ffffd
The contents of source register ‘fs’ are
moved to destination register ‘fd’.
Location of source ‘fs’ can be anywhere
in the 4096-byte data space (000h to
FFFh) and location of destination ‘fd’
can also be anywhere from 000h to
FFFh.
Either source or destination can be W
(a useful special situation).
MOVFF is particularly useful for
transferring a data memory location to a
peripheral register (such as the transmit
buffer or an I/O port).
The MOVFF instruction cannot use the
PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the
destination register.
Words:
2
Cycles:
2
0000
0001
kkkk
kkkk
Description:
The eight-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into the
Bank Select Register (BSR). The value
of BSR<7:4> always remains ‘0’
regardless of the value of k7:k4.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
literal ‘k’
Process
Data
Write literal
‘k’ to BSR
MOVLB
5
Example:
Before Instruction
BSR Register =
After Instruction
BSR Register =
02h
05h
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
(src)
Process
Data
No
operation
Decode
No
operation
No
operation
Write
register ‘f’
(dest)
No dummy
read
Example:
MOVFF
Before Instruction
REG1
REG2
After Instruction
REG1
REG2
DS39760A-page 236
REG1, REG2
=
=
33h
11h
=
=
33h
33h
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
MOVLW
Move Literal to W
MOVWF
Move W to f
Syntax:
MOVLW k
Syntax:
MOVWF
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 255
Operands:
Operation:
k→W
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
a ∈ [0,1]
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
Description:
1110
kkkk
kkkk
The eight-bit literal ‘k’ is loaded into W.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Operation:
(W) → f
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0110
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Read
literal ‘k’
Process
Data
Write to W
Example:
After Instruction
W
=
MOVLW
111a
ffff
ffff
Description:
Move data from W to register ‘f’.
Location ‘f’ can be anywhere in the
256-byte bank.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode
f {,a}
5Ah
5Ah
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write
register ‘f’
Example:
MOVWF
Before Instruction
W
=
REG
=
After Instruction
W
=
REG
=
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
REG, 0
4Fh
FFh
4Fh
4Fh
DS39760A-page 237
PIC18F2450/4450
MULLW
Multiply Literal with W
MULWF
Multiply W with f
Syntax:
MULLW
Syntax:
MULWF
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(W) x (f) → PRODH:PRODL
Status Affected:
None
k
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 255
Operation:
(W) x k → PRODH:PRODL
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
Description:
1101
kkkk
kkkk
An unsigned multiplication is carried
out between the contents of W and the
8-bit literal ‘k’. The 16-bit result is
placed in PRODH:PRODL register pair.
PRODH contains the high byte.
W is unchanged.
None of the Status flags are affected.
Note that neither Overflow nor Carry is
possible in this operation. A zero result
is possible but not detected.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Encoding:
0000
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Read
literal ‘k’
Process
Data
Write
registers
PRODH:
PRODL
Example:
Before Instruction
W
PRODH
PRODL
After Instruction
W
PRODH
PRODL
MULLW
=
=
=
ffff
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
=
=
=
E2h
ADh
08h
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write
registers
PRODH:
PRODL
Example:
Before Instruction
W
REG
PRODH
PRODL
After Instruction
W
REG
PRODH
PRODL
DS39760A-page 238
ffff
An unsigned multiplication is carried
out between the contents of W and the
register file location ‘f’. The 16-bit
result is stored in the PRODH:PRODL
register pair. PRODH contains the
high byte. Both W and ‘f’ are
unchanged.
None of the Status flags are affected.
Note that neither Overflow nor Carry is
possible in this operation. A zero
result is possible but not detected.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is
selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used
to select the GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction
operates in Indexed Literal Offset
Addressing mode whenever
f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 19.2.3
“Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented
Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset
Mode” for details.
0C4h
E2h
?
?
001a
Description:
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode
f {,a}
Advance Information
MULWF
REG, 1
=
=
=
=
C4h
B5h
?
?
=
=
=
=
C4h
B5h
8Ah
94h
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
NEGF
Negate f
Syntax:
NEGF
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
a ∈ [0,1]
f {,a}
Operation:
(f) + 1 → f
Status Affected:
N, OV, C, DC, Z
Encoding:
0110
Description:
1
Cycles:
1
No Operation
Syntax:
NOP
Operands:
None
Operation:
No operation
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
110a
ffff
0000
1111
ffff
Location ‘f’ is negated using two’s
complement. The result is placed in the
data memory location ‘f’.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
NOP
0000
xxxx
Description:
No operation.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
0000
xxxx
0000
xxxx
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Example:
None.
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write
register ‘f’
Example:
NEGF
Before Instruction
REG
=
After Instruction
REG
=
REG, 1
0011 1010 [3Ah]
1100 0110 [C6h]
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 239
PIC18F2450/4450
POP
Pop Top of Return Stack
PUSH
Push Top of Return Stack
Syntax:
POP
Syntax:
PUSH
Operands:
None
Operands:
None
Operation:
(TOS) → bit bucket
Operation:
(PC + 2) → TOS
Status Affected:
None
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
0000
0000
0110
Encoding:
0000
0000
0000
0101
Description:
The TOS value is pulled off the return
stack and is discarded. The TOS value
then becomes the previous value that
was pushed onto the return stack.
This instruction is provided to enable
the user to properly manage the return
stack to incorporate a software stack.
Description:
The PC + 2 is pushed onto the top of
the return stack. The previous TOS
value is pushed down on the stack.
This instruction allows implementing a
software stack by modifying TOS and
then pushing it onto the return stack.
Words:
1
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
No
operation
Pop TOS
value
No
operation
POP
GOTO
NEW
Example:
Before Instruction
TOS
Stack (1 level down)
After Instruction
TOS
PC
DS39760A-page 240
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Push PC + 2
onto return
stack
No
operation
No
operation
Example:
=
=
=
=
0031A2h
014332h
014332h
NEW
PUSH
Before Instruction
TOS
PC
=
=
345Ah
0124h
After Instruction
PC
TOS
Stack (1 level down)
=
=
=
0126h
0126h
345Ah
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
RCALL
Relative Call
RESET
Reset
Syntax:
RCALL
Syntax:
RESET
n
Operands:
-1024 ≤ n ≤ 1023
Operands:
None
Operation:
(PC) + 2 → TOS,
(PC) + 2 + 2n → PC
Operation:
Reset all registers and flags that are
affected by a MCLR Reset.
Status Affected:
None
Status Affected:
All
Encoding:
1101
Description:
1nnn
nnnn
nnnn
Subroutine call with a jump up to 1K
from the current location. First, return
address (PC + 2) is pushed onto the
stack. Then, add the 2’s complement
number ‘2n’ to the PC. Since the PC will
have incremented to fetch the next
instruction, the new address will be
PC + 2 + 2n. This instruction is a
two-cycle instruction.
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Encoding:
0000
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read literal
‘n’
Process
Data
Write to PC
No
operation
No
operation
1111
1111
This instruction provides a way to
execute a MCLR Reset in software.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Start
Reset
No
operation
No
operation
Example:
Q Cycle Activity:
0000
Description:
After Instruction
Registers =
Flags*
=
RESET
Reset Value
Reset Value
Push PC to
stack
No
operation
Example:
No
operation
HERE
RCALL Jump
Before Instruction
PC =
Address (HERE)
After Instruction
PC =
Address (Jump)
TOS =
Address (HERE + 2)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 241
PIC18F2450/4450
RETFIE
Return from Interrupt
RETLW
Return Literal to W
Syntax:
RETFIE {s}
Syntax:
RETLW k
Operands:
s ∈ [0,1]
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 255
Operation:
(TOS) → PC,
1 → GIE/GIEH or PEIE/GIEL,
if s = 1
(WS) → W,
(STATUSS) → STATUS,
(BSRS) → BSR,
PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged
Operation:
k → W,
(TOS) → PC,
PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged
Status Affected:
None
Status Affected:
0000
0000
Description:
0000
0001
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Q Cycle Activity:
kkkk
kkkk
W is loaded with the eight-bit literal ‘k’.
The program counter is loaded from the
top of the stack (the return address).
The high address latch (PCLATH)
remains unchanged.
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
000s
Return from interrupt. Stack is popped
and Top-of-Stack (TOS) is loaded into
the PC. Interrupts are enabled by
setting either the high or low priority
global interrupt enable bit. If ‘s’ = 1, the
contents of the shadow registers WS,
STATUSS and BSRS are loaded into
their corresponding registers, W,
STATUS and BSR. If ‘s’ = 0, no update
of these registers occurs (default).
1100
Description:
GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL.
Encoding:
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
literal ‘k’
Process
Data
Pop PC from
stack, Write
to W
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Example:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
No
operation
No
operation
Pop PC from
stack
Set GIEH or
GIEL
No
operation
Encoding:
No
operation
Example:
RETFIE
After Interrupt
PC
W
BSR
STATUS
GIE/GIEH, PEIE/GIEL
DS39760A-page 242
No
operation
No
operation
1
=
=
=
=
=
TOS
WS
BSRS
STATUSS
1
CALL TABLE ;
;
;
;
:
TABLE
ADDWF PCL ;
RETLW k0
;
RETLW k1
;
:
:
RETLW kn
;
Before Instruction
W
=
After Instruction
W
=
Advance Information
W contains table
offset value
W now has
table value
W = offset
Begin table
End of table
07h
value of kn
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
RETURN
Return from Subroutine
RLCF
Rotate Left f through Carry
Syntax:
RETURN {s}
Syntax:
RLCF
Operands:
s ∈ [0,1]
Operands:
Operation:
(TOS) → PC,
if s = 1
(WS) → W,
(STATUSS) → STATUS,
(BSRS) → BSR,
PCLATU, PCLATH are unchanged
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(f<n>) → dest<n + 1>,
(f<7>) → C,
(C) → dest<0>
Status Affected:
C, N, Z
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
Encoding:
0000
0001
001s
Description:
Return from subroutine. The stack is
popped and the top of the stack (TOS)
is loaded into the program counter. If
‘s’= 1, the contents of the shadow
registers WS, STATUSS and BSRS are
loaded into their corresponding
registers, W, STATUS and BSR. If
‘s’ = 0, no update of these registers
occurs (default).
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
0011
Description:
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
No
operation
Process
Data
Pop PC
from stack
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
f {,d {,a}}
01da
ffff
ffff
The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated
one bit to the left through the Carry
flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in
W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back
in register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is
selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to
select the GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction
operates in Indexed Literal Offset
Addressing mode whenever
f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 19.2.3
“Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented
Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset
Mode” for details.
register f
C
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Example:
RETURN
After Instruction:
PC = TOS
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Example:
Before Instruction
REG
=
C
=
After Instruction
REG
=
W
=
C
=
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
RLCF
REG, 0, 0
1110 0110
0
1110 0110
1100 1100
1
DS39760A-page 243
PIC18F2450/4450
RLNCF
Rotate Left f (No Carry)
RRCF
Rotate Right f through Carry
Syntax:
RLNCF
Syntax:
RRCF
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(f<n>) → dest<n + 1>,
(f<7>) → dest<0>
Operation:
Status Affected:
N, Z
(f<n>) → dest<n – 1>,
(f<0>) → C,
(C) → dest<7>
Status Affected:
C, N, Z
Encoding:
0100
Description:
f {,d {,a}}
01da
ffff
ffff
The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated
one bit to the left. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result
is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
stored back in register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Encoding:
0011
Description:
register f
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Decode
Q2
Read
register ‘f’
Example:
Before Instruction
REG
=
After Instruction
REG
=
DS39760A-page 244
00da
RLNCF
Q3
Process
Data
Q4
Write to
destination
Words:
1
Cycles:
0101 0111
ffff
register f
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
REG, 1, 0
1010 1011
ffff
The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated
one bit to the right through the Carry
flag. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is placed in W.
If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is placed back in
register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
C
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
f {,d {,a}}
Example:
RRCF
Before Instruction
REG
=
C
=
After Instruction
REG
=
W
=
C
=
Advance Information
REG, 0, 0
1110 0110
0
1110 0110
0111 0011
0
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
RRNCF
Rotate Right f (No Carry)
SETF
Set f
Syntax:
RRNCF
Syntax:
SETF
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(f<n>) → dest<n – 1>,
(f<0>) → dest<7>
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
0100
Description:
f {,d {,a}}
00da
ffff
ffff
register f
1
Cycles:
1
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
RRNCF
Before Instruction
REG
=
After Instruction
REG
=
Example 2:
0110
100a
ffff
ffff
Description:
The contents of the specified register
are set to FFh.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write
register ‘f’
SETF
Before Instruction
REG
After Instruction
REG
REG,1
=
5Ah
=
FFh
REG, 1, 0
1101 0111
1110 1011
RRNCF
Before Instruction
W
=
REG
=
After Instruction
W
=
REG
=
None
Example:
Q Cycle Activity:
Example 1:
FFh → f
Status Affected:
Encoding:
The contents of register ‘f’ are rotated
one bit to the right. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result
is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
placed back in register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank will be
selected, overriding the BSR value. If ‘a’
is ‘1’, then the bank will be selected as
per the BSR value (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
Operation:
f {,a}
REG, 0, 0
?
1101 0111
1110 1011
1101 0111
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 245
PIC18F2450/4450
SLEEP
Enter Sleep mode
SUBFWB
Subtract f from W with Borrow
Syntax:
SLEEP
Syntax:
SUBFWB
Operands:
None
Operands:
Operation:
00h → WDT,
0 → WDT postscaler,
1 → TO,
0 → PD
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(W) – (f) – (C) → dest
Status Affected:
N, OV, C, DC, Z
Status Affected:
TO, PD
Encoding:
0000
Encoding:
0000
0000
0011
Description:
The Power-Down status bit (PD) is
cleared. The Time-out status bit (TO)
is set. Watchdog Timer and its
postscaler are cleared.
The processor is put into Sleep mode
with the oscillator stopped.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
0101
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
operation
Process
Data
Go to
Sleep
Example:
SLEEP
Before Instruction
TO =
?
?
PD =
After Instruction
1†
TO =
0
PD =
† If WDT causes wake-up, this bit is cleared.
DS39760A-page 246
01da
ffff
ffff
Description:
Subtract register ‘f’ and Carry flag
(borrow) from W (2’s complement
method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored
in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored in
register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is
selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used
to select the GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction
operates in Indexed Literal Offset
Addressing mode whenever
f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 19.2.3
“Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented
Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset
Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode
f {,d {,a}}
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
SUBFWB
REG, 1, 0
Example 1:
Before Instruction
REG
=
3
W
=
2
C
=
1
After Instruction
REG
=
FF
W
=
2
C
=
0
Z
=
0
N
=
1 ; result is negative
SUBFWB
REG, 0, 0
Example 2:
Before Instruction
REG
=
2
W
=
5
C
=
1
After Instruction
REG
=
2
W
=
3
C
=
1
Z
=
0
N
=
0 ; result is positive
SUBFWB
REG, 1, 0
Example 3:
Before Instruction
REG
=
1
W
=
2
C
=
0
After Instruction
REG
=
0
W
=
2
C
=
1
Z
=
1 ; result is zero
N
=
0
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
SUBLW
Subtract W from Literal
SUBWF
Subtract W from f
Syntax:
SUBLW k
Syntax:
SUBWF
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 255
Operands:
Operation:
k – (W) → W
Status Affected:
N, OV, C, DC, Z
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(f) – (W) → dest
Status Affected:
N, OV, C, DC, Z
Encoding:
0000
1000
kkkk
kkkk
Description
W is subtracted from the eight-bit
literal ‘k’. The result is placed in W.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Encoding:
0101
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Read
literal ‘k’
Process
Data
Write to W
Example 1:
Before Instruction
W
=
C
=
After Instruction
W
=
C
=
Z
=
N
=
Example 2:
Before Instruction
W
=
C
=
After Instruction
W
=
C
=
Z
=
N
=
Example 3:
Before Instruction
W
=
C
=
After Instruction
W
=
C
=
Z
=
N
=
SUBLW
SUBLW
1
Cycles:
1
; result is positive
02h
?
00h
1
1
0
SUBLW
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
SUBWF
REG, 1, 0
; result is zero
Example 1:
02h
03h
?
FFh
0
0
1
ffff
Words:
02h
02h
ffff
Subtract W from register ‘f’ (2’s
complement method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the
result is stored in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the
result is stored back in register ‘f’
(default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is
selected. If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used
to select the GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction
operates in Indexed Literal Offset
Addressing mode whenever
f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See Section 19.2.3
“Byte-Oriented and Bit-Oriented
Instructions in Indexed Literal Offset
Mode” for details.
01h
?
01h
1
0
0
11da
Description:
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode
f {,d {,a}}
; (2’s complement)
; result is negative
Before Instruction
REG
=
W
=
C
=
After Instruction
REG
=
W
=
C
=
Z
=
N
=
Example 2:
Before Instruction
REG
=
W
=
C
=
After Instruction
REG
=
W
=
C
=
Z
=
N
=
Example 3:
Before Instruction
REG
=
W
=
C
=
After Instruction
REG
=
W
=
C
=
Z
=
N
=
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
3
2
?
1
2
1
0
0
SUBWF
; result is positive
REG, 0, 0
2
2
?
2
0
1
1
0
SUBWF
; result is zero
REG, 1, 0
1
2
?
FFh ;(2’s complement)
2
0
; result is negative
0
1
DS39760A-page 247
PIC18F2450/4450
SUBWFB
Subtract W from f with Borrow
SWAPF
Swap f
Syntax:
SUBWFB
Syntax:
SWAPF f {,d {,a}}
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operands:
Operation:
(f) – (W) – (C) → dest
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
Status Affected:
N, OV, C, DC, Z
(f<3:0>) → dest<7:4>,
(f<7:4>) → dest<3:0>
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0101
Description:
1
Cycles:
1
Q2
Read
register ‘f’
Example 1:
SUBWFB
Before Instruction
REG
=
W
=
C
=
After Instruction
REG
=
W
=
C
=
Z
=
N
=
Example 2:
ffff
ffff
Q3
Process
Data
Q4
Write to
destination
Encoding:
0011
(0001 1001)
(0000 1101)
0Ch
0Dh
1
0
0
(0000 1011)
(0000 1101)
ffff
ffff
The upper and lower nibbles of register
‘f’ are exchanged. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result
is placed in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is
placed in register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
REG, 1, 0
19h
0Dh
1
10da
Description:
Example:
SWAPF
Before Instruction
REG
=
After Instruction
REG
=
REG, 1, 0
53h
35h
; result is positive
SUBWFB REG, 0, 0
Before Instruction
REG
=
W
=
C
=
After Instruction
REG
=
W
=
C
=
Z
=
N
=
Example 3:
1Bh
1Ah
0
(0001 1011)
(0001 1010)
1Bh
00h
1
1
0
(0001 1011)
SUBWFB
Before Instruction
REG
=
W
=
C
=
After Instruction
REG
=
W
C
Z
N
10da
Subtract W and the Carry flag (borrow)
from register ‘f’ (2’s complement
method). If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored
in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back
in register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Decode
f {,d {,a}}
=
=
=
=
DS39760A-page 248
; result is zero
REG, 1, 0
03h
0Eh
1
(0000 0011)
(0000 1101)
F5h
(1111 0100)
; [2’s comp]
(0000 1101)
0Eh
0
0
1
; result is negative
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TBLRD
Table Read
TBLRD
Table Read (Continued)
Syntax:
TBLRD ( *; *+; *-; +*)
Example 1:
TBLRD
Operands:
None
Operation:
if TBLRD *
(Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) → TABLAT;
TBLPTR – No Change;
if TBLRD *+
(Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) → TABLAT;
(TBLPTR) + 1 → TBLPTR;
if TBLRD *(Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) → TABLAT;
(TBLPTR) – 1 → TBLPTR;
if TBLRD +*
(TBLPTR) + 1 → TBLPTR;
(Prog Mem (TBLPTR)) → TABLAT
Before Instruction
TABLAT
TBLPTR
MEMORY (00A356h)
After Instruction
TABLAT
TBLPTR
Example 2:
0000
0000
0000
TBLRD
=
=
=
55h
00A356h
34h
=
=
34h
00A357h
+* ;
Before Instruction
TABLAT
TBLPTR
MEMORY (01A357h)
MEMORY (01A358h)
After Instruction
TABLAT
TBLPTR
Status Affected: None
Encoding:
*+ ;
=
=
=
=
AAh
01A357h
12h
34h
=
=
34h
01A358h
10nn
nn=0 *
=1 *+
=2 *=3 +*
Description:
This instruction is used to read the contents
of Program Memory (P.M.). To address the
program memory, a pointer called Table
Pointer (TBLPTR) is used.
The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to
each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR
has a 2-Mbyte address range.
TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant Byte of
Program Memory Word
TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant Byte of
Program Memory Word
The TBLRD instruction can modify the value
of TBLPTR as follows:
• no change
• post-increment
• post-decrement
• pre-increment
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No operation
(Read Program
Memory)
No
operation
No operation
(Write
TABLAT)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 249
PIC18F2450/4450
TBLWT
Table Write
TBLWT
Table Write (Continued)
Syntax:
TBLWT ( *; *+; *-; +*)
Example 1:
TBLWT
Operands:
None
Operation:
if TBLWT*
(TABLAT) → Holding Register;
TBLPTR – No Change;
if TBLWT*+
(TABLAT) → Holding Register;
(TBLPTR) + 1 → TBLPTR;
if TBLWT*(TABLAT) → Holding Register;
(TBLPTR) – 1 → TBLPTR;
if TBLWT+*
(TBLPTR) + 1 → TBLPTR;
(TABLAT) → Holding Register
Before Instruction
TABLAT
=
55h
TBLPTR
=
00A356h
HOLDING REGISTER
(00A356h)
=
FFh
After Instructions (table write completion)
TABLAT
=
55h
TBLPTR
=
00A357h
HOLDING REGISTER
(00A356h)
=
55h
Example 2:
Status Affected: None
Encoding:
0000
0000
0000
*+;
11nn
nn=0 *
=1 *+
=2 *=3 +*
Description:
This instruction uses the 3 LSBs of TBLPTR
to determine which of the 8 holding
registers the TABLAT is written to. The
holding registers are used to program the
contents of Program Memory (P.M.). (Refer
to Section 6.0 “Flash Program Memory”
for additional details on programming Flash
memory.)
The TBLPTR (a 21-bit pointer) points to
each byte in the program memory. TBLPTR
has a 2-Mbyte address range. The LSb of
the TBLPTR selects which byte of the
program memory location to access.
TBLPTR[0] = 0: Least Significant Byte of
Program Memory Word
TBLPTR[0] = 1: Most Significant Byte of
Program Memory Word
The TBLWT instruction can modify the
value of TBLPTR as follows:
• no change
• post-increment
• post-decrement
• pre-increment
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
TBLWT
+*;
Before Instruction
TABLAT
=
34h
TBLPTR
=
01389Ah
HOLDING REGISTER
(01389Ah)
=
FFh
HOLDING REGISTER
(01389Bh)
=
FFh
After Instruction (table write completion)
TABLAT
=
34h
TBLPTR
=
01389Bh
HOLDING REGISTER
(01389Ah)
=
FFh
HOLDING REGISTER
(01389Bh)
=
34h
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Decode
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
No
No
operation operation operation
No
No
No
No
operation operation operation operation
(Read
(Write to
TABLAT)
Holding
Register)
DS39760A-page 250
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TSTFSZ
Test f, Skip if 0
Syntax:
TSTFSZ f {,a}
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
skip if f = 0
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0110
Description:
011a
ffff
ffff
If ‘f’ = 0, the next instruction fetched
during the current instruction execution
is discarded and a NOP is executed,
making this a two-cycle instruction.
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1(2)
Note: 3 cycles if skip and followed
by a 2-word instruction.
XORLW
Exclusive OR Literal with W
Syntax:
XORLW k
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 255
Operation:
(W) .XOR. k → W
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
0000
1010
kkkk
kkkk
Description:
The contents of W are XORed with
the 8-bit literal ‘k’. The result is placed
in W.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
literal ‘k’
Process
Data
Write to W
Example:
Before Instruction
W
=
After Instruction
W
=
XORLW
0AFh
B5h
1Ah
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
No
operation
If skip:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
If skip and followed by 2-word instruction:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
Example:
HERE
NZERO
ZERO
Before Instruction
PC
After Instruction
If CNT
PC
If CNT
PC
TSTFSZ
:
:
CNT, 1
=
Address (HERE)
=
=
≠
=
00h,
Address (ZERO)
00h,
Address (NZERO)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 251
PIC18F2450/4450
XORWF
Exclusive OR W with f
Syntax:
XORWF
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 255
d ∈ [0,1]
a ∈ [0,1]
Operation:
(W) .XOR. (f) → dest
Status Affected:
N, Z
Encoding:
0001
f {,d {,a}}
10da
ffff
ffff
Description:
Exclusive OR the contents of W with
register ‘f’. If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored
in W. If ‘d’ is ‘1’, the result is stored back
in the register ‘f’ (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’, the Access Bank is selected.
If ‘a’ is ‘1’, the BSR is used to select the
GPR bank (default).
If ‘a’ is ‘0’ and the extended instruction
set is enabled, this instruction operates
in Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode whenever f ≤ 95 (5Fh). See
Section 19.2.3 “Byte-Oriented and
Bit-Oriented Instructions in Indexed
Literal Offset Mode” for details.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Example:
XORWF
Before Instruction
REG
=
W
=
After Instruction
REG
=
W
=
DS39760A-page 252
REG, 1, 0
AFh
B5h
1Ah
B5h
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
19.2
Extended Instruction Set
A summary of the instructions in the extended
instruction set is provided in Table 19-3. Detailed
descriptions are provided in Section 19.2.2
“Extended Instruction Set”. The opcode field
descriptions in Table 19-1 (page 212) apply to both the
standard and extended PIC18 instruction sets.
In addition to the standard 75 instructions of the PIC18
instruction set, PIC18F2450/4450 devices also provide
an optional extension to the core CPU functionality.
The added features include eight additional
instructions that augment indirect and indexed
addressing operations and the implementation of
Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode for many of the
standard PIC18 instructions.
Note:
The additional features of the extended instruction set
are disabled by default. To enable them, users must set
the XINST Configuration bit.
The instructions in the extended set can all be
classified as literal operations, which either manipulate
the File Select Registers, or use them for Indexed
Addressing. Two of the instructions, ADDFSR and
SUBFSR, each have an additional special instantiation
for using FSR2. These versions (ADDULNK and
SUBULNK) allow for automatic return after execution.
19.2.1
EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SYNTAX
Most of the extended instructions use indexed
arguments, using one of the File Select Registers and
some offset to specify a source or destination register.
When an argument for an instruction serves as part of
Indexed Addressing, it is enclosed in square brackets
(“[ ]”). This is done to indicate that the argument is used
as an index or offset. The MPASM™ Assembler will
flag an error if it determines that an index or offset value
is not bracketed.
The extended instructions are specifically implemented
to optimize re-entrant program code (that is, code that
is recursive or that uses a software stack) written in
high-level languages, particularly C. Among other
things, they allow users working in high-level
languages to perform certain operations on data
structures more efficiently. These include:
When the extended instruction set is enabled, brackets
are also used to indicate index arguments in byteoriented and bit-oriented instructions. This is in addition
to other changes in their syntax. For more details, see
Section 19.2.3.1 “Extended Instruction Syntax with
Standard PIC18 Commands”.
• Dynamic allocation and deallocation of software
stack space when entering and leaving
subroutines
• Function Pointer invocation
• Software Stack Pointer manipulation
• Manipulation of variables located in a software
stack
TABLE 19-3:
The instruction set extension and the
Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode
were designed for optimizing applications
written in C; the user may likely never use
these instructions directly in assembler.
The syntax for these commands is provided as a reference for users who may be
reviewing code that has been generated
by a compiler.
Note:
In the past, square brackets have been
used to denote optional arguments in the
PIC18 and earlier instruction sets. In this
text and going forward, optional
arguments are denoted by braces (“{ }”).
EXTENSIONS TO THE PIC18 INSTRUCTION SET
16-Bit Instruction Word
Mnemonic,
Operands
ADDFSR
ADDULNK
CALLW
MOVSF
f, k
k
MOVSS
zs, zd
PUSHL
k
SUBFSR
SUBULNK
f, k
k
zs, fd
Description
Cycles
MSb
Add literal to FSR
Add literal to FSR2 and return
Call subroutine using WREG
Move zs (source) to 1st word
fd (destination) 2nd word
Move zs (source) to 1st word
zd (destination) 2nd word
Store literal at FSR2,
decrement FSR2
Subtract literal from FSR
Subtract literal from FSR2 and
return
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
1
2
2
2
LSb
Status
Affected
1000
1000
0000
1011
ffff
1011
xxxx
1010
ffkk
11kk
0001
0zzz
ffff
1zzz
xzzz
kkkk
kkkk
kkkk
0100
zzzz
ffff
zzzz
zzzz
kkkk
None
None
None
None
1
1110
1110
0000
1110
1111
1110
1111
1110
1
2
1110
1110
1001
1001
ffkk
11kk
kkkk
kkkk
None
None
2
Advance Information
None
None
DS39760A-page 253
PIC18F2450/4450
19.2.2
EXTENDED INSTRUCTION SET
ADDFSR
Add Literal to FSR
ADDULNK
Syntax:
ADDFSR f, k
Syntax:
ADDULNK k
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 63
f ∈ [ 0, 1, 2 ]
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 63
Operation:
FSR(f) + k → FSR(f)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1110
Add Literal to FSR2 and Return
FSR2 + k → FSR2,
Operation:
(TOS) → PC
Status Affected:
1000
ffkk
kkkk
Description:
The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the
contents of the FSR specified by ‘f’.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
None
Encoding:
1110
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Read
literal ‘k’
Process
Data
Write to
FSR
Example:
ADDFSR
Before Instruction
FSR2
=
03FFh
After Instruction
FSR2
=
0422h
2, 23h
kkkk
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
literal ‘k’
Process
Data
Write to
FSR
No
Operation
No
Operation
No
Operation
No
Operation
Example:
Note:
11kk
The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is added to the
contents of FSR2. A RETURN is then
executed by loading the PC with the
TOS.
The instruction takes two cycles to
execute; a NOP is performed during
the second cycle.
This may be thought of as a special
case of the ADDFSR instruction,
where f = 3 (binary ‘11’); it operates
only on FSR2.
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode
1000
Description:
ADDULNK 23h
Before Instruction
FSR2
=
PC
=
03FFh
0100h
After Instruction
FSR2
=
PC
=
0422h
(TOS)
All PIC18 instructions may take an optional label argument preceding the instruction mnemonic for use in
symbolic addressing. If a label is used, the instruction syntax then becomes: {label} instruction argument(s).
DS39760A-page 254
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
CALLW
Subroutine Call Using WREG
MOVSF
Move Indexed to f
Syntax:
CALLW
Syntax:
MOVSF [zs], fd
Operands:
None
Operands:
Operation:
(PC + 2) → TOS,
(W) → PCL,
(PCLATH) → PCH,
(PCLATU) → PCU
0 ≤ zs ≤ 127
0 ≤ fd ≤ 4095
Operation:
((FSR2) + zs) → fd
Status Affected:
None
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0000
0000
0001
0100
Description
First, the return address (PC + 2) is
pushed onto the return stack. Next, the
contents of W are written to PCL; the
existing value is discarded. Then the
contents of PCLATH and PCLATU are
latched into PCH and PCU,
respectively. The second cycle is
executed as a NOP instruction while the
new next instruction is fetched.
Unlike CALL, there is no option to
update W, STATUS or BSR.
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Encoding:
1st word (source)
2nd word (destin.)
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Read
WREG
Push PC to
stack
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
No
operation
HERE
Before Instruction
PC
=
PCLATH =
PCLATU =
W
=
After Instruction
PC
=
TOS
=
PCLATH =
PCLATU =
W
=
2
Cycles:
2
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Decode
address (HERE)
10h
00h
06h
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
zzzzs
ffffd
Words:
CALLW
001006h
address (HERE + 2)
10h
00h
06h
0zzz
ffff
The contents of the source register are
moved to destination register ‘fd’. The
actual address of the source register is
determined by adding the 7-bit literal
offset ‘zs’ in the first word to the value of
FSR2. The address of the destination
register is specified by the 12-bit literal
‘fd’ in the second word. Both addresses
can be anywhere in the 4096-byte data
space (000h to FFFh).
The MOVSF instruction cannot use the
PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the
destination register.
If the resultant source address points to
an indirect addressing register, the
value returned will be 00h.
Decode
Example:
1011
ffff
Description:
Q Cycle Activity:
Decode
1110
1111
Q2
Q3
Determine
Determine
source addr source addr
No
operation
No
operation
No dummy
read
Example:
MOVSF
Before Instruction
FSR2
Contents
of 85h
REG2
After Instruction
FSR2
Contents
of 85h
REG2
Advance Information
Q4
Read
source reg
Write
register ‘f’
(dest)
[05h], REG2
=
80h
=
=
33h
11h
=
80h
=
=
33h
33h
DS39760A-page 255
PIC18F2450/4450
MOVSS
Move Indexed to Indexed
PUSHL
Store Literal at FSR2, Decrement FSR2
Syntax:
MOVSS [zs], [zd]
Syntax:
PUSHL k
Operands:
0 ≤ zs ≤ 127
0 ≤ zd ≤ 127
Operation:
((FSR2) + zs) → ((FSR2) + zd)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1st word (source)
2nd word (dest.)
1110
1111
Description
1011
xxxx
1zzz
xzzz
zzzzs
zzzzd
The contents of the source register are
moved to the destination register. The
addresses of the source and destination
registers are determined by adding the
7-bit literal offsets ‘zs’ or ‘zd’,
respectively, to the value of FSR2. Both
registers can be located anywhere in
the 4096-byte data memory space
(000h to FFFh).
The MOVSS instruction cannot use the
PCL, TOSU, TOSH or TOSL as the
destination register.
If the resultant source address points to
an indirect addressing register, the
value returned will be 00h. If the
resultant destination address points to
an indirect addressing register, the
instruction will execute as a NOP.
Words:
2
Cycles:
2
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 255
Operation:
k → (FSR2),
FSR2 – 1→ FSR2
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1111
1010
kkkk
kkkk
Description:
The 8-bit literal ‘k’ is written to the data
memory address specified by FSR2. FSR2
is decremented by ‘1’ after the operation.
This instruction allows users to push values
onto a software stack.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read ‘k’
Process
data
Write to
destination
Example:
PUSHL
08h
Before Instruction
FSR2H:FSR2L
Memory (01ECh)
=
=
01ECh
00h
After Instruction
FSR2H:FSR2L
Memory (01ECh)
=
=
01EBh
08h
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Decode
Decode
Q2
Q3
Determine
Determine
source addr source addr
Determine
dest addr
Example:
MOVSS
Before Instruction
FSR2
Contents
of 85h
Contents
of 86h
After Instruction
FSR2
Contents
of 85h
Contents
of 86h
DS39760A-page 256
Determine
dest addr
Q4
Read
source reg
Write
to dest reg
[05h], [06h]
=
80h
=
33h
=
11h
=
80h
=
33h
=
33h
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
SUBFSR
Subtract Literal from FSR
SUBULNK
Syntax:
SUBFSR f, k
Syntax:
SUBULNK k
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 63
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 63
f ∈ [ 0, 1, 2 ]
Operation:
Operation:
FSRf – k → FSRf
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
1110
FSR2 – k → FSR2
(TOS) → PC
Status Affected: None
1001
ffkk
kkkk
Description:
The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from
the contents of the FSR specified by
‘f’.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Encoding:
1110
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Before Instruction
FSR2
=
After Instruction
FSR2
=
SUBFSR 2, 23h
1001
11kk
kkkk
Description:
The 6-bit literal ‘k’ is subtracted from the
contents of the FSR2. A RETURN is then
executed by loading the PC with the TOS.
The instruction takes two cycles to
execute; a NOP is performed during the
second cycle.
This may be thought of as a special case of
the SUBFSR instruction, where f = 3 (binary
‘11’); it operates only on FSR2.
Words:
1
Cycles:
2
Q Cycle Activity:
Example:
Subtract Literal from FSR2 and Return
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
03FFh
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
03DCh
No
Operation
No
Operation
No
Operation
No
Operation
Example:
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
SUBULNK 23h
Before Instruction
FSR2
=
PC
=
03FFh
0100h
After Instruction
FSR2
=
PC
=
03DCh
(TOS)
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 257
PIC18F2450/4450
19.2.3
Note:
BYTE-ORIENTED AND
BIT-ORIENTED INSTRUCTIONS IN
INDEXED LITERAL OFFSET MODE
Enabling the PIC18 instruction set
extension may cause legacy applications
to behave erratically or fail entirely.
In addition to eight new commands in the extended set,
enabling the extended instruction set also enables
Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode (Section 5.6.1
“Indexed Addressing with Literal Offset”). This has
a significant impact on the way that many commands of
the standard PIC18 instruction set are interpreted.
When the extended set is disabled, addresses
embedded in opcodes are treated as literal memory
locations: either as a location in the Access Bank
(‘a’ = 0) or in a GPR bank designated by the BSR
(‘a’ = 1). When the extended instruction set is enabled
and ‘a’ = 0, however, a file register argument of 5Fh or
less is interpreted as an offset from the pointer value in
FSR2 and not as a literal address. For practical
purposes, this means that all instructions that use the
Access RAM bit as an argument – that is, all byteoriented and bit-oriented instructions, or almost half of
the core PIC18 instructions – may behave differently
when the extended instruction set is enabled.
When the content of FSR2 is 00h, the boundaries of the
Access RAM are essentially remapped to their original
values. This may be useful in creating backward
compatible code. If this technique is used, it may be
necessary to save the value of FSR2 and restore it
when moving back and forth between C and assembly
routines in order to preserve the Stack Pointer. Users
must also keep in mind the syntax requirements of the
extended instruction set (see Section 19.2.3.1
“Extended Instruction Syntax with Standard PIC18
Commands”).
19.2.3.1
Extended Instruction Syntax with
Standard PIC18 Commands
When the extended instruction set is enabled, the file
register argument, ‘f’, in the standard byte-oriented and
bit-oriented commands is replaced with the literal offset
value, ‘k’. As already noted, this occurs only when ‘f’ is
less than or equal to 5Fh. When an offset value is used,
it must be indicated by square brackets (“[ ]”). As with
the extended instructions, the use of brackets indicates
to the compiler that the value is to be interpreted as an
index or an offset. Omitting the brackets, or using a
value greater than 5Fh within brackets, will generate an
error in the MPASM Assembler.
If the index argument is properly bracketed for Indexed
Literal Offset Addressing mode, the Access RAM
argument is never specified; it will automatically be
assumed to be ‘0’. This is in contrast to standard
operation (extended instruction set disabled) when ‘a’
is set on the basis of the target address. Declaring the
Access RAM bit in this mode will also generate an error
in the MPASM Assembler.
The destination argument, ‘d’, functions as before.
In the latest versions of the MPASM assembler,
language support for the extended instruction set must
be explicitly invoked. This is done with either the
command line option, /y, or the PE directive in the
source listing.
19.2.4
CONSIDERATIONS WHEN
ENABLING THE EXTENDED
INSTRUCTION SET
It is important to note that the extensions to the
instruction set may not be beneficial to all users. In
particular, users who are not writing code that uses a
software stack may not benefit from using the
extensions to the instruction set.
Although the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing mode
can be very useful for dynamic stack and pointer
manipulation, it can also be very annoying if a simple
arithmetic operation is carried out on the wrong
register. Users who are accustomed to the PIC18
programming must keep in mind that, when the
extended instruction set is enabled, register addresses
of 5Fh or less are used for Indexed Literal Offset
Addressing.
Additionally, the Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
mode may create issues with legacy applications
written to the PIC18 assembler. This is because
instructions in the legacy code may attempt to address
registers in the Access Bank below 5Fh. Since these
addresses are interpreted as literal offsets to FSR2
when the instruction set extension is enabled, the
application may read or write to the wrong data
addresses.
Representative examples of typical byte-oriented and
bit-oriented instructions in the Indexed Literal Offset
Addressing mode are provided on the following page to
show how execution is affected. The operand
conditions shown in the examples are applicable to all
instructions of these types.
When porting an application to the PIC18F2450/4450,
it is very important to consider the type of code. A large,
re-entrant application that is written in ‘C’ and would
benefit from efficient compilation will do well when
using the instruction set extensions. Legacy applications that heavily use the Access Bank will most likely
not benefit from using the extended instruction set.
DS39760A-page 258
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
ADD W to Indexed
(Indexed Literal Offset mode)
BSF
Bit Set Indexed
(Indexed Literal Offset mode)
Syntax:
ADDWF
Syntax:
BSF [k], b
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 95
d ∈ [0,1]
Operands:
0 ≤ f ≤ 95
0≤b≤7
Operation:
(W) + ((FSR2) + k) → dest
Operation:
1 → ((FSR2) + k)<b>
Status Affected:
N, OV, C, DC, Z
Status Affected:
None
ADDWF
Encoding:
[k] {,d}
0010
Description:
01d0
kkkk
kkkk
The contents of W are added to the
contents of the register indicated by
FSR2, offset by the value ‘k’.
If ‘d’ is ‘0’, the result is stored in W. If ‘d’
is ‘1’, the result is stored back in
register ‘f’ (default).
Encoding:
1000
bbb0
kkkk
kkkk
Description:
Bit ‘b’ of the register indicated by FSR2,
offset by the value ‘k’, is set.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Words:
1
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Cycles:
1
Decode
Read
register ‘f’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read ‘k’
Process
Data
Write to
destination
Example:
ADDWF
Before Instruction
W
OFST
FSR2
Contents
of 0A2Ch
After Instruction
W
Contents
of 0A2Ch
[OFST] ,0
=
=
=
17h
2Ch
0A00h
=
20h
=
37h
=
20h
Example:
BSF
Before Instruction
FLAG_OFST
FSR2
Contents
of 0A0Ah
After Instruction
Contents
of 0A0Ah
[FLAG_OFST], 7
=
=
0Ah
0A00h
=
55h
=
D5h
SETF
Set Indexed
(Indexed Literal Offset mode)
Syntax:
SETF [k]
Operands:
0 ≤ k ≤ 95
Operation:
FFh → ((FSR2) + k)
Status Affected:
None
Encoding:
0110
1000
kkkk
kkkk
Description:
The contents of the register indicated by
FSR2, offset by ‘k’, are set to FFh.
Words:
1
Cycles:
1
Q Cycle Activity:
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Decode
Read ‘k’
Process
Data
Write
register
Example:
SETF
Before Instruction
OFST
FSR2
Contents
of 0A2Ch
After Instruction
Contents
of 0A2Ch
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
[OFST]
=
=
2Ch
0A00h
=
00h
=
FFh
DS39760A-page 259
PIC18F2450/4450
19.2.5
SPECIAL CONSIDERATIONS WITH
MICROCHIP MPLAB® IDE TOOLS
The latest versions of Microchip’s software tools have
been designed to fully support the extended instruction
set of the PIC18F2450/4450 family of devices. This
includes the MPLAB C18 C compiler, MPASM
Assembly
language and
MPLAB
Integrated
Development Environment (IDE).
When selecting a target device for software
development, MPLAB IDE will automatically set default
Configuration bits for that device. The default setting for
the XINST Configuration bit is ‘0’, disabling the
extended instruction set and Indexed Literal Offset
Addressing mode. For proper execution of applications
developed to take advantage of the extended
instruction set, XINST must be set during
programming.
DS39760A-page 260
To develop software for the extended instruction set,
the user must enable support for the instructions and
the Indexed Addressing mode in their language tool(s).
Depending on the environment being used, this may be
done in several ways:
• A menu option, or dialog box within the
environment, that allows the user to configure the
language tool and its settings for the project
• A command line option
• A directive in the source code
These options vary between different compilers,
assemblers and development environments. Users are
encouraged to review the documentation accompanying their development systems for the appropriate
information.
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
20.0
DEVELOPMENT SUPPORT
The PICmicro® microcontrollers are supported with a
full range of hardware and software development tools:
• Integrated Development Environment
- MPLAB® IDE Software
• Assemblers/Compilers/Linkers
- MPASMTM Assembler
- MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 C Compilers
- MPLINKTM Object Linker/
MPLIBTM Object Librarian
- MPLAB ASM30 Assembler/Linker/Library
• Simulators
- MPLAB SIM Software Simulator
• Emulators
- MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator
- MPLAB ICE 4000 In-Circuit Emulator
• In-Circuit Debugger
- MPLAB ICD 2
• Device Programmers
- PICSTART® Plus Development Programmer
- MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer
• Low-Cost Demonstration and Development
Boards and Evaluation Kits
20.1
MPLAB Integrated Development
Environment Software
The MPLAB IDE software brings an ease of software
development previously unseen in the 8/16-bit microcontroller market. The MPLAB IDE is a Windows®
operating system-based application that contains:
• A single graphical interface to all debugging tools
- Simulator
- Programmer (sold separately)
- Emulator (sold separately)
- In-Circuit Debugger (sold separately)
• A full-featured editor with color-coded context
• A multiple project manager
• Customizable data windows with direct edit of
contents
• High-level source code debugging
• Visual device initializer for easy register
initialization
• Mouse over variable inspection
• Drag and drop variables from source to watch
windows
• Extensive on-line help
• Integration of select third party tools, such as
HI-TECH Software C Compilers and IAR
C Compilers
The MPLAB IDE allows you to:
• Edit your source files (either assembly or C)
• One touch assemble (or compile) and download
to PICmicro MCU emulator and simulator tools
(automatically updates all project information)
• Debug using:
- Source files (assembly or C)
- Mixed assembly and C
- Machine code
MPLAB IDE supports multiple debugging tools in a
single development paradigm, from the cost-effective
simulators, through low-cost in-circuit debuggers, to
full-featured emulators. This eliminates the learning
curve when upgrading to tools with increased flexibility
and power.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 261
PIC18F2450/4450
20.2
MPASM Assembler
20.5
The MPASM Assembler is a full-featured, universal
macro assembler for all PICmicro MCUs.
The MPASM Assembler generates relocatable object
files for the MPLINK Object Linker, Intel® standard HEX
files, MAP files to detail memory usage and symbol
reference, absolute LST files that contain source lines
and generated machine code and COFF files for
debugging.
The MPASM Assembler features include:
• Integration into MPLAB IDE projects
• User-defined macros to streamline
assembly code
• Conditional assembly for multi-purpose
source files
• Directives that allow complete control over the
assembly process
MPLAB ASM30 Assembler produces relocatable
machine code from symbolic assembly language for
dsPIC30F devices. MPLAB C30 C Compiler uses the
assembler to produce its object file. The assembler
generates relocatable object files that can then be
archived or linked with other relocatable object files and
archives to create an executable file. Notable features
of the assembler include:
•
•
•
•
•
•
Support for the entire dsPIC30F instruction set
Support for fixed-point and floating-point data
Command line interface
Rich directive set
Flexible macro language
MPLAB IDE compatibility
20.6
20.3
MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30
C Compilers
The MPLAB C18 and MPLAB C30 Code Development
Systems are complete ANSI C compilers for
Microchip’s PIC18 family of microcontrollers and
dsPIC30F family of digital signal controllers. These
compilers provide powerful integration capabilities,
superior code optimization and ease of use not found
with other compilers.
For easy source level debugging, the compilers provide
symbol information that is optimized to the MPLAB IDE
debugger.
20.4
MPLINK Object Linker/
MPLIB Object Librarian
The MPLINK Object Linker combines relocatable
objects created by the MPASM Assembler and the
MPLAB C18 C Compiler. It can link relocatable objects
from precompiled libraries, using directives from a
linker script.
MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker
and Librarian
MPLAB SIM Software Simulator
The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator allows code
development in a PC-hosted environment by simulating the PICmicro MCUs and dsPIC® DSCs on an
instruction level. On any given instruction, the data
areas can be examined or modified and stimuli can be
applied from a comprehensive stimulus controller.
Registers can be logged to files for further run-time
analysis. The trace buffer and logic analyzer display
extend the power of the simulator to record and track
program execution, actions on I/O, as well as internal
registers.
The MPLAB SIM Software Simulator fully supports
symbolic debugging using the MPLAB C18 and
MPLAB C30 C Compilers, and the MPASM and
MPLAB ASM30 Assemblers. The software simulator
offers the flexibility to develop and debug code outside
of the laboratory environment, making it an excellent,
economical software development tool.
The MPLIB Object Librarian manages the creation and
modification of library files of precompiled code. When
a routine from a library is called from a source file, only
the modules that contain that routine will be linked in
with the application. This allows large libraries to be
used efficiently in many different applications.
The object linker/library features include:
• Efficient linking of single libraries instead of many
smaller files
• Enhanced code maintainability by grouping
related modules together
• Flexible creation of libraries with easy module
listing, replacement, deletion and extraction
DS39760A-page 262
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
20.7
MPLAB ICE 2000
High-Performance
In-Circuit Emulator
20.9
The MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator is intended
to provide the product development engineer with a
complete microcontroller design tool set for PICmicro
microcontrollers. Software control of the MPLAB ICE
2000 In-Circuit Emulator is advanced by the MPLAB
Integrated Development Environment, which allows
editing, building, downloading and source debugging
from a single environment.
The MPLAB ICE 2000 is a full-featured emulator
system with enhanced trace, trigger and data monitoring features. Interchangeable processor modules allow
the system to be easily reconfigured for emulation of
different processors. The architecture of the MPLAB
ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator allows expansion to
support new PICmicro microcontrollers.
The MPLAB ICE 2000 In-Circuit Emulator system has
been designed as a real-time emulation system with
advanced features that are typically found on more
expensive development tools. The PC platform and
Microsoft® Windows® 32-bit operating system were
chosen to best make these features available in a
simple, unified application.
20.8
MPLAB ICE 4000
High-Performance
In-Circuit Emulator
The MPLAB ICE 4000 In-Circuit Emulator is intended to
provide the product development engineer with a
complete microcontroller design tool set for high-end
PICmicro MCUs and dsPIC DSCs. Software control of
the MPLAB ICE 4000 In-Circuit Emulator is provided by
the MPLAB Integrated Development Environment,
which allows editing, building, downloading and source
debugging from a single environment.
MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger
Microchip’s In-Circuit Debugger, MPLAB ICD 2, is a
powerful, low-cost, run-time development tool,
connecting to the host PC via an RS-232 or high-speed
USB interface. This tool is based on the Flash PICmicro
MCUs and can be used to develop for these and other
PICmicro MCUs and dsPIC DSCs. The MPLAB ICD 2
utilizes the in-circuit debugging capability built into
the Flash devices. This feature, along with Microchip’s
In-Circuit Serial ProgrammingTM (ICSPTM) protocol,
offers cost-effective, in-circuit Flash debugging from the
graphical user interface of the MPLAB Integrated
Development Environment. This enables a designer to
develop and debug source code by setting breakpoints,
single stepping and watching variables, and CPU
status and peripheral registers. Running at full speed
enables testing hardware and applications in real
time. MPLAB ICD 2 also serves as a development
programmer for selected PICmicro devices.
20.10 MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer
The MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer is a universal,
CE compliant device programmer with programmable
voltage verification at VDDMIN and VDDMAX for
maximum reliability. It features a large LCD display
(128 x 64) for menus and error messages and a modular, detachable socket assembly to support various
package types. The ICSP™ cable assembly is included
as a standard item. In Stand-Alone mode, the MPLAB
PM3 Device Programmer can read, verify and program
PICmicro devices without a PC connection. It can also
set code protection in this mode. The MPLAB PM3
connects to the host PC via an RS-232 or USB cable.
The MPLAB PM3 has high-speed communications and
optimized algorithms for quick programming of large
memory devices and incorporates an SD/MMC card for
file storage and secure data applications.
The MPLAB ICE 4000 is a premium emulator system,
providing the features of MPLAB ICE 2000, but with
increased emulation memory and high-speed performance for dsPIC30F and PIC18XXXX devices. Its
advanced emulator features include complex triggering
and timing, and up to 2 Mb of emulation memory.
The MPLAB ICE 4000 In-Circuit Emulator system has
been designed as a real-time emulation system with
advanced features that are typically found on more
expensive development tools. The PC platform and
Microsoft Windows 32-bit operating system were
chosen to best make these features available in a
simple, unified application.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 263
PIC18F2450/4450
20.11 PICSTART Plus Development
Programmer
20.12 Demonstration, Development and
Evaluation Boards
The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer is an
easy-to-use, low-cost, prototype programmer. It
connects to the PC via a COM (RS-232) port. MPLAB
Integrated Development Environment software makes
using the programmer simple and efficient. The
PICSTART Plus Development Programmer supports
most PICmicro devices in DIP packages up to 40 pins.
Larger pin count devices, such as the PIC16C92X and
PIC17C76X, may be supported with an adapter socket.
The PICSTART Plus Development Programmer is CE
compliant.
A wide variety of demonstration, development and
evaluation boards for various PICmicro MCUs and dsPIC
DSCs allows quick application development on fully functional systems. Most boards include prototyping areas for
adding custom circuitry and provide application firmware
and source code for examination and modification.
The boards support a variety of features, including LEDs,
temperature sensors, switches, speakers, RS-232
interfaces, LCD displays, potentiometers and additional
EEPROM memory.
The demonstration and development boards can be
used in teaching environments, for prototyping custom
circuits and for learning about various microcontroller
applications.
In addition to the PICDEM™ and dsPICDEM™ demonstration/development board series of circuits, Microchip
has a line of evaluation kits and demonstration software
for analog filter design, KEELOQ® security ICs, CAN,
IrDA®, PowerSmart® battery management, SEEVAL®
evaluation system, Sigma-Delta ADC, flow rate
sensing, plus many more.
Check the Microchip web page (www.microchip.com)
and the latest “Product Selector Guide” (DS00148) for
the complete list of demonstration, development and
evaluation kits.
DS39760A-page 264
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
21.0
ELECTRICAL CHARACTERISTICS
Absolute Maximum Ratings(†)
Ambient temperature under bias.............................................................................................................. .-40°C to +85°C
Storage temperature .............................................................................................................................. -65°C to +150°C
Voltage on any pin with respect to VSS (except VDD, MCLR and RA4) .......................................... -0.3V to (VDD + 0.3V)
Voltage on VDD with respect to VSS ......................................................................................................... -0.3V to +7.5V
Voltage on MCLR with respect to VSS (Note 2) ......................................................................................... 0V to +13.25V
Total power dissipation (Note 1) ...............................................................................................................................1.0W
Maximum current out of VSS pin ...........................................................................................................................300 mA
Maximum current into VDD pin ..............................................................................................................................250 mA
Input clamp current, IIK (VI < 0 or VI > VDD)...................................................................................................................... ±20 mA
Output clamp current, IOK (VO < 0 or VO > VDD) .............................................................................................................. ±20 mA
Maximum output current sunk by any I/O pin..........................................................................................................25 mA
Maximum output current sourced by any I/O pin ....................................................................................................25 mA
Maximum current sunk by all ports .......................................................................................................................200 mA
Maximum current sourced by all ports ..................................................................................................................200 mA
Note 1: Power dissipation is calculated as follows:
Pdis = VDD x {IDD – ∑ IOH} + ∑ {(VDD – VOH) x IOH} + ∑(VOL x IOL)
2: Voltage spikes below VSS at the MCLR/VPP/RE3 pin, inducing currents greater than 80 mA, may cause
latch-up. Thus, a series resistor of 50-100Ω should be used when applying a “low” level to the MCLR/VPP/
RE3 pin, rather than pulling this pin directly to VSS.
† NOTICE: Stresses above those listed under “Absolute Maximum Ratings” may cause permanent damage to the
device. This is a stress rating only and functional operation of the device at those or any other conditions above those
indicated in the operation listings of this specification is not implied. Exposure to maximum rating conditions for
extended periods may affect device reliability.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 265
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 21-1:
PIC18F2450/4450 VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY GRAPH (INDUSTRIAL)
6.0V
5.5V
Voltage
5.0V
PIC18F2450/4450
4.5V
4.2V
4.0V
3.5V
3.0V
2.5V
2.0V
48 MHz
Frequency
FIGURE 21-2:
PIC18LF2450/4450 VOLTAGE-FREQUENCY GRAPH (INDUSTRIAL)
6.0V
5.5V
5.0V
PIC18LF2450/4450
4.5V
4.2V
Voltage
4.0V
3.5V
3.0V
2.5V
2.0V
4 MHz
16 MHz
25 MHz
48 MHz
Frequency
Note: VDDAPPMIN is the minimum voltage of the PICmicro® device in the application.
DS39760A-page 266
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
21.1
DC Characteristics:
Supply Voltage
PIC18F2450/4450 (Industrial)
PIC18LF2450/4450 (Industrial)
PIC18LF2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
PIC18F2331/2431/4331/4431
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
Param
No.
D001
Symbol
VDD
Characteristic
Supply Voltage
Min
Typ
2.0
3.0
—
—
Max Units
5.5
5.5
V
V
Conditions
EC, HS, XT and Internal Oscillator modes
HSPLL, XTPLL, ECPIO and ECPLL
Oscillator modes
RAM Data Retention
1.5
—
—
V
Voltage(1)
VDD Start Voltage
—
—
0.7
V
See Section 4.3 “Power-on Reset (POR)”
D003
VPOR
to ensure internal Power-on
for details
Reset signal
D004
SVDD
VDD Rise Rate
0.05
—
— V/ms See Section 4.3 “Power-on Reset (POR)”
to ensure internal Power-on
for details
Reset signal
D005
VBOR
Brown-out Reset Voltage
BORV1:BORV0 = 11
2.00 2.05 2.16
V
BORV1:BORV0 = 10
2.65 2.79 2.93
V
BORV1:BORV0 = 01
4.11 4.33 4.55
V
BORV1:BORV0 = 00
4.36 4.59 4.82
V
Legend: Shading of rows is to assist in readability of the table.
Note 1: This is the limit to which VDD can be lowered in Sleep mode, or during a device Reset, without losing RAM data.
D002
VDR
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 267
PIC18F2450/4450
21.2
DC Characteristics:
Power-Down and Supply Current
PIC18F2450/4450 (Industrial)
PIC18LF2450/4450 (Industrial)
PIC18LF2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
PIC18F2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
Param
No.
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Device
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
Power-Down Current (IPD)(1)
PIC18F2450/4450 0.1
TBD
μA
-40°C
VDD = 2.0V
0.1
TBD
μA
+25°C
(Sleep mode)
0.2
TBD
μA
+85°C
PIC18LF2450/4450 0.1
TBD
μA
-40°C
VDD = 3.0V
0.1
TBD
μA
+25°C
(Sleep mode)
0.3
TBD
μA
+85°C
All devices 0.1
TBD
μA
-40°C
VDD = 5.0V
0.1
TBD
μA
+25°C
(Sleep mode)
0.4
TBD
μA
+85°C
TBD = To Be Determined. Shading of rows is to assist in readability of the table.
The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured
with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that
add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 Oscillator, BOR, etc.).
The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin
loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have
an impact on the current consumption.
The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are:
OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD or VSS;
MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified.
Standard low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended
temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost.
BOR and HLVD enable internal band gap reference. With both modules enabled, current consumption will be
less than the sum of both specifications.
DS39760A-page 268
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
21.2
DC Characteristics:
Power-Down and Supply Current
PIC18F2450/4450 (Industrial)
PIC18LF2450/4450 (Industrial) (Continued)
PIC18LF2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
PIC18F2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
Param
No.
Device
Supply Current (IDD)(2)
PIC18LF2450/4450
PIC18LF2450/4450
All devices
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
15
15
15
TBD
TBD
TBD
μA
μA
μA
-40°C
+25°C
+85°C
40
35
30
105
90
80
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
μA
μA
μA
μA
μA
μA
-40°C
+25°C
+85°C
-40°C
+25°C
+85°C
VDD = 2.0V
VDD = 3.0V
FOSC = 31 kHz
(RC_RUN mode,
INTRC source)
VDD = 5.0V
TBD = To Be Determined. Shading of rows is to assist in readability of the table.
The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured
with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that
add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 Oscillator, BOR, etc.).
The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin
loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have
an impact on the current consumption.
The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are:
OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD or VSS;
MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified.
Standard low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended
temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost.
BOR and HLVD enable internal band gap reference. With both modules enabled, current consumption will be
less than the sum of both specifications.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 269
PIC18F2450/4450
21.2
DC Characteristics:
Power-Down and Supply Current
PIC18F2450/4450 (Industrial)
PIC18LF2450/4450 (Industrial) (Continued)
PIC18LF2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
PIC18F2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
Param
No.
Device
Supply Current (IDD)(2)
PIC18LF2450/4450
PIC18LF2450/4450
All devices
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
2.9
3.1
TBD
TBD
μA
μA
-40°C
+25°C
3.6
4.5
4.8
5.8
9.2
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
μA
μA
μA
μA
μA
+85°C
-40°C
+25°C
+85°C
-40°C
VDD = 2.0V
VDD = 3.0V
FOSC = 31 kHz
(RC_IDLE mode,
INTRC source)
VDD = 5.0V
9.8
TBD
μA
+25°C
11.4 TBD
μA
+85°C
TBD = To Be Determined. Shading of rows is to assist in readability of the table.
The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured
with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that
add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 Oscillator, BOR, etc.).
The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin
loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have
an impact on the current consumption.
The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are:
OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD or VSS;
MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified.
Standard low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended
temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost.
BOR and HLVD enable internal band gap reference. With both modules enabled, current consumption will be
less than the sum of both specifications.
DS39760A-page 270
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
21.2
DC Characteristics:
Power-Down and Supply Current
PIC18F2450/4450 (Industrial)
PIC18LF2450/4450 (Industrial) (Continued)
PIC18LF2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
PIC18F2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
Param
No.
Device
Supply Current (IDD)(2)
PIC18LF2450/4450
PIC18LF2450/4450
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Typ
Max
Units
250
250
250
550
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
μA
μA
μA
μA
Conditions
-40°C
+25°C
+85°C
-40°C
VDD = 2.0V
FOSC = 1 MHZ
(PRI_RUN,
480
TBD
μA
+25°C
VDD = 3.0V
EC oscillator)
460
TBD
μA
+85°C
All devices 1.2
TBD
mA
-40°C
VDD = 5.0V
1.1
TBD
mA
+25°C
1.0
TBD
mA
+85°C
PIC18LF2450/4450 0.74 TBD
mA
-40°C
VDD = 2.0V
0.74 TBD
mA
+25°C
0.74 TBD
mA
+85°C
PIC18LF2450/4450 1.3
TBD
mA
-40°C
FOSC = 4 MHz
(PRI_RUN,
VDD = 3.0V
1.3
TBD
mA
+25°C
EC oscillator)
1.3
TBD
mA
+85°C
All devices 2.7
TBD
mA
-40°C
2.6
TBD
mA
+25°C
VDD = 5.0V
2.5
TBD
mA
+85°C
All devices 15
TBD
mA
-40°C
16
TBD
mA
+25°C
VDD = 4.2V
FOSC = 40 MHZ
16
TBD
mA
+85°C
(PRI_RUN,
All devices 21
TBD
mA
-40°C
EC oscillator)
21
TBD
mA
+25°C
VDD = 5.0V
21
TBD
mA
+85°C
All devices 20
TBD
mA
-40°C
20
TBD
mA
+25°C
VDD = 4.2V
FOSC = 48 MHZ
20
TBD
mA
+85°C
(PRI_RUN,
All devices 25
TBD
mA
-40°C
EC oscillator)
25
TBD
mA
+25°C
VDD = 5.0V
25
TBD
mA
+85°C
TBD = To Be Determined. Shading of rows is to assist in readability of the table.
The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured
with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that
add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 Oscillator, BOR, etc.).
The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin
loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have
an impact on the current consumption.
The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are:
OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD or VSS;
MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified.
Standard low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended
temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost.
BOR and HLVD enable internal band gap reference. With both modules enabled, current consumption will be
less than the sum of both specifications.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 271
PIC18F2450/4450
21.2
DC Characteristics:
Power-Down and Supply Current
PIC18F2450/4450 (Industrial)
PIC18LF2450/4450 (Industrial) (Continued)
PIC18LF2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
PIC18F2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
Param
No.
Device
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
Supply Current (IDD)(2)
65
TBD
μA
-40°C
VDD = 2.0V
65
TBD
μA
+25°C
70
TBD
μA
+85°C
PIC18LF2450/4450 120
TBD
μA
-40°C
FOSC = 1 MHz
VDD = 3.0V
(PRI_IDLE mode,
120
TBD
μA
+25°C
EC oscillator)
130
TBD
μA
+85°C
All devices 230
TBD
μA
-40°C
VDD = 5.0V
240
TBD
μA
+25°C
250
TBD
μA
+85°C
PIC18LF2450/4450 255
TBD
μA
-40°C
VDD = 2.0V
260
TBD
μA
+25°C
270
TBD
μA
+85°C
PIC18LF2450/4450 420
TBD
μA
-40°C
FOSC = 4 MHz
VDD = 3.0V
(PRI_IDLE mode,
430
TBD
μA
+25°C
EC oscillator)
450
TBD
μA
+85°C
All devices 0.9
TBD
mA
-40°C
VDD = 5.0V
0.9
TBD
mA
+25°C
0.9
TBD
mA
+85°C
All devices 6.0
TBD
mA
-40°C
6.2
TBD
mA
+25°C
VDD = 4.2V
FOSC = 40 MHz
6.6
TBD
mA
+85°C
(PRI_IDLE mode,
All devices 8.1
TBD
mA
-40°C
EC oscillator)
VDD = 5.0V
8.3
TBD
mA
+25°C
9.0
TBD
mA
+85°C
All devices 8.0
TBD
mA
-40°C
8.1
TBD
mA
+25°C
VDD = 4.2V
FOSC = 48 MHz
8.2
TBD
mA
+85°C
(PRI_IDLE mode,
All devices 9.8
TBD
mA
-40°C
EC oscillator)
VDD = 5.0V
10.0 TBD
mA
+25°C
10.5 TBD
mA
+85°C
TBD = To Be Determined. Shading of rows is to assist in readability of the table.
The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured
with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that
add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 Oscillator, BOR, etc.).
The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin
loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have
an impact on the current consumption.
The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are:
OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD or VSS;
MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified.
Standard low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended
temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost.
BOR and HLVD enable internal band gap reference. With both modules enabled, current consumption will be
less than the sum of both specifications.
PIC18LF2450/4450
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
DS39760A-page 272
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
21.2
DC Characteristics:
Power-Down and Supply Current
PIC18F2450/4450 (Industrial)
PIC18LF2450/4450 (Industrial) (Continued)
PIC18LF2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
PIC18F2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
Param
No.
Device
Supply Current (IDD)(2)
PIC18LF2450/4450
PIC18LF2450/4450
All devices
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
14
15
TBD
TBD
μA
μA
-40°C
+25°C
16
40
35
31
99
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
μA
μA
μA
μA
μA
+85°C
-40°C
+25°C
+85°C
-40°C
VDD = 2.0V
VDD = 3.0V
FOSC = 32 kHz(3)
(SEC_RUN mode,
Timer1 as clock)
VDD = 5.0V
81
TBD
μA
+25°C
75
TBD
μA
+85°C
PIC18LF2450/4450 2.5
TBD
μA
-40°C
VDD = 2.0V
3.7
TBD
μA
+25°C
4.5
TBD
μA
+85°C
PIC18LF2450/4450 5.0
TBD
μA
-40°C
FOSC = 32 kHz(3)
5.4
TBD
μA
+25°C
VDD = 3.0V
(SEC_IDLE mode,
Timer1 as clock)
6.3
TBD
μA
+85°C
All devices 8.5
TBD
μA
-40°C
VDD = 5.0V
9.0
TBD
μA
+25°C
10.5 TBD
μA
+85°C
TBD = To Be Determined. Shading of rows is to assist in readability of the table.
The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured
with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that
add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 Oscillator, BOR, etc.).
The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin
loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have
an impact on the current consumption.
The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are:
OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD or VSS;
MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified.
Standard low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended
temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost.
BOR and HLVD enable internal band gap reference. With both modules enabled, current consumption will be
less than the sum of both specifications.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 273
PIC18F2450/4450
21.2
DC Characteristics:
Power-Down and Supply Current
PIC18F2450/4450 (Industrial)
PIC18LF2450/4450 (Industrial) (Continued)
PIC18LF2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
PIC18F2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
Param
No.
D022
(ΔIWDT)
D022A
(ΔIBOR)
Device
Typ
D025
(ΔIOSCB)
D026
(ΔIAD)
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Units
Conditions
Module Differential Currents (ΔIWDT, ΔIBOR, ΔILVD, ΔIOSCB, ΔIAD)
Watchdog Timer 1.3
TBD
μA
-40°C
1.4
TBD
μA
+25°C
Brown-out Reset(4)
2.0
1.9
2.0
2.8
4.0
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
μA
μA
μA
μA
μA
+85°C
-40°C
+25°C
+85°C
-40°C
5.5
5.6
35
40
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
TBD
μA
μA
μA
μA
+25°C
+85°C
-40°C to +85°C
-40°C to +85°C
μA
-40°C to +85°C
0
D022B
(ΔILVD)
Max
VDD = 2.0V
VDD = 3.0V
VDD = 5.0V
VDD = 3.0V
VDD = 5.0V
Sleep mode,
BOREN1:BOREN0 = 10
22
TBD
μA
-40°C to +85°C
VDD = 2.0V
25
TBD
μA
-40°C to +85°C
VDD = 3.0V
29
TBD
μA
-40°C to +85°C
VDD = 5.0V
Timer1 Oscillator 2.1
TBD
μA
-40°C
VDD = 2.0V
1.8
TBD
μA
+25°C
32 kHz on Timer1(3)
2.1
TBD
μA
+85°C
2.2
TBD
μA
-40°C
VDD = 3.0V
2.6
TBD
μA
+25°C
32 kHz on Timer1(3)
2.9
TBD
μA
+85°C
3.0
TBD
μA
-40°C
VDD = 5.0V
3.2
TBD
μA
+25°C
32 kHz on Timer1(3)
3.4
TBD
μA
+85°C
A/D Converter 1.0
TBD
μA
-40°C to +85°C
VDD = 2.0V
1.0
TBD
μA
-40°C to +85°C
VDD = 3.0V
A/D on, not converting
1.0
TBD
μA
-40°C to +85°C
VDD = 5.0V
TBD = To Be Determined. Shading of rows is to assist in readability of the table.
The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured
with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that
add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 Oscillator, BOR, etc.).
The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin
loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have
an impact on the current consumption.
The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are:
OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD or VSS;
MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified.
Standard low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended
temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost.
BOR and HLVD enable internal band gap reference. With both modules enabled, current consumption will be
less than the sum of both specifications.
DS39760A-page 274
High/Low-Voltage
Detect(4)
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
21.2
DC Characteristics:
Power-Down and Supply Current
PIC18F2450/4450 (Industrial)
PIC18LF2450/4450 (Industrial) (Continued)
PIC18LF2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
PIC18F2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
Param
No.
ΔIUSBx
ΔIPLL
ΔIUREG
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Device
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
USB and Related Module Differential Currents (ΔIUSBx, ΔIPLL, ΔIUREG)
USB Module TBD TBD
mA
+25°C
VDD = 3.3V
with On-Chip Transceiver TBD TBD
mA
+25°C
VDD = 5.0V
96 MHz PLL TBD TBD TBD
+25°C
VDD = 3.3V
(Oscillator Module) TBD TBD TBD
+25°C
VDD = 5.0V
USB Internal Voltage TBD TBD TBD
+25°C
VDD = 5.0V
Regulator
TBD = To Be Determined. Shading of rows is to assist in readability of the table.
The power-down current in Sleep mode does not depend on the oscillator type. Power-down current is measured
with the part in Sleep mode, with all I/O pins in high-impedance state and tied to VDD or VSS and all features that
add delta current disabled (such as WDT, Timer1 Oscillator, BOR, etc.).
The supply current is mainly a function of operating voltage, frequency and mode. Other factors, such as I/O pin
loading and switching rate, oscillator type and circuit, internal code execution pattern and temperature, also have
an impact on the current consumption.
The test conditions for all IDD measurements in active operation mode are:
OSC1 = external square wave, from rail-to-rail; all I/O pins tri-stated, pulled to VDD or VSS;
MCLR = VDD; WDT enabled/disabled as specified.
Standard low-cost 32 kHz crystals have an operating temperature range of -10°C to +70°C. Extended
temperature crystals are available at a much higher cost.
BOR and HLVD enable internal band gap reference. With both modules enabled, current consumption will be
less than the sum of both specifications.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 275
PIC18F2450/4450
21.3
DC Characteristics: PIC18F2450/4450 (Industrial)
PIC18LF2450/4450 (Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Sym
VIL
Characteristic
Min
Max
Units
Conditions
VSS
0.15 VDD
V
VDD < 4.5V
—
0.8
V
4.5V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5V
VSS
VSS
0.2 VDD
0.3 VDD
V
V
Input Low Voltage
I/O Ports (except RC4/RC5 in
USB mode):
D030
with TTL buffer
D030A
D031
with Schmitt Trigger buffer
RC3 and RC4
D032
MCLR
VSS
0.2 VDD
V
D032A
OSC1 and T1OSI
VSS
0.3 VDD
V
XT, HS, HSPLL modes(1)
D033
OSC1
VSS
0.2 VDD
V
EC mode(1)
—
0.8
V
VDD = 4.35V,
USB suspended(5)
0.25 VDD + 0.8V
VDD
V
VDD < 4.5V
2.0
VDD
V
4.5V ≤ VDD ≤ 5.5V
0.8 VDD
0.7 VDD
VDD
VDD
V
V
VILU
D+/D- Input
VIH
Input High Voltage
I/O Ports (except RC4/RC5 in
USB mode):
D040
with TTL buffer
D040A
D041
with Schmitt Trigger buffer
RC3 and RC4
D042
MCLR
0.8 VDD
VDD
V
D042A
OSC1 and T1OSI
0.7 VDD
VDD
V
XT, HS, HSPLL modes(1)
D043
OSC1
0.8 VDD
VDD
V
EC mode(1)
2.4
—
V
VDD = 4.35V,
USB suspended(5)
VIHU
D+/D- Input
IIL
Input Leakage Current(2,3)
D060
I/O Ports
—
±1
μA
VSS ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD,
Pin at high-impedance
D061
MCLR
—
±5
μA
Vss ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD
OSC1
—
±5
μA
Vss ≤ VPIN ≤ VDD
50
400
μA
VDD = 5V, VPIN = VSS
D063
D070
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
IPU
Weak Pull-up Current
IPURB
PORTB Weak Pull-up Current
In RC oscillator configuration, the OSC1/CLKI pin is a Schmitt Trigger input. It is not recommended that the
PICmicro® device be driven with an external clock while in RC mode.
The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified
levels represent normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input
voltages.
Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin.
Parameter is characterized but not tested.
D+ parameters per USB Specification 2.0.
DS39760A-page 276
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
21.3
DC Characteristics: PIC18F2450/4450 (Industrial)
PIC18LF2450/4450 (Industrial) (Continued)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
DC CHARACTERISTICS
Param
No.
Sym
VOL
Characteristic
Min
Max
Units
Conditions
Output Low Voltage
D080
I/O Ports (except RC4/RC5 in
USB mode)
—
0.6
V
IOL = 8.5 mA, VDD = 4.5V,
-40°C to +85°C
D083
OSC2/CLKO
(EC, ECIO modes)
—
0.6
V
IOL = 1.6 mA, VDD = 4.5V,
-40°C to +85°C
VOLU
D+/D- Out
—
0.3
VOH
Output High Voltage(3)
VDD = 4.35V,
USB suspended(5)
D090
I/O Ports (except RC4/RC5 in
USB mode)
VDD – 0.7
—
V
IOH = -3.0 mA, VDD = 4.5V,
-40°C to +85°C
D092
OSC2/CLKO
(EC, ECIO, ECPIO modes)
VDD – 0.7
—
V
IOH = -1.3 mA, VDD = 4.5V,
-40°C to +85°C
2.8
3.6
V
VDD = 4.35V,
USB suspended(5)
D100(4) COSC2 OSC2 pin
—
15
pF
In XT and HS modes
when external clock is
used to drive OSC1
D101
—
50
pF
To meet the AC Timing
Specifications
VOHU
D+/D- Out
Capacitive Loading Specs
on Output Pins
CIO
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
5:
All I/O pins and OSC2
(in RC mode)
In RC oscillator configuration, the OSC1/CLKI pin is a Schmitt Trigger input. It is not recommended that the
PICmicro® device be driven with an external clock while in RC mode.
The leakage current on the MCLR pin is strongly dependent on the applied voltage level. The specified
levels represent normal operating conditions. Higher leakage current may be measured at different input
voltages.
Negative current is defined as current sourced by the pin.
Parameter is characterized but not tested.
D+ parameters per USB Specification 2.0.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 277
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 21-1:
MEMORY PROGRAMMING REQUIREMENTS
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
DC Characteristics
Param
No.
Sym
Characteristic
Min
Typ†
Max
Units
Conditions
9.00
—
13.25
V
—
—
10
mA
E/W -40°C to +85°C
Internal Program Memory
Programming Specifications(1)
D110
VPP
Voltage on MCLR/VPP/RE3 pin
D113
IDDP
Supply Current during
Programming
D130
EP
Cell Endurance
10K
100K
—
D131
VPR
VDD for Read
VMIN
—
5.5
D132
VIE
VDD for Block Erase
4.5
—
5.5
V
Using ICSP™ port
D132A
VIW
VDD for Externally Timed Erase
or Write
3.0
—
5.5
V
Using ICSP port
VMIN
—
5.5
V
VMIN = Minimum operating
voltage
(Note 2)
Program Flash Memory
V
VMIN = Minimum operating
voltage
D132B VPEW
VDD for Self-Timed Write
D133
ICSP Block Erase Cycle Time
—
4
—
ms
VDD > 4.5V
D133A TIW
ICSP Erase or Write Cycle Time
(externally timed)
1
—
—
ms
VDD > 4.5V
D133A TIW
Self-Timed Write Cycle Time
D134
TIE
TRETD Characteristic Retention
—
2
—
40
100
—
ms
Year Provided no other
specifications are violated
† Data in “Typ” column is at 5.0V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance
only and are not tested.
Note 1: These specifications are for programming the on-chip program memory through the use of table write
instructions.
2: Required only if Single-Supply Programming is disabled.
DS39760A-page 278
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 21-2:
USB MODULE SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Conditions: -40°C < TA < +85°C (unless otherwise stated).
Param
No.
Sym
Characteristic
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Comments
Voltage on bus must be in this
range for proper USB
operation
D313
VUSB
USB Voltage
3.0
—
3.6
V
D314
IIL
Input Leakage on pin
—
—
±1
μA
VSS ≤ VPAD ≤ VDD;
pin at high impedance
D315
VILUSB
Input Low Voltage for USB
Buffer
—
—
0.8
V
For VUSB range
D316
VIHUSB
Input High Voltage for USB
Buffer
2.0
—
—
V
For VUSB range
D317
VCRS
Crossover Voltage
1.3
2.0
V
Voltage range for pad_dp and
pad_dm crossover to occur
D318
VDIFS
Differential Input Sensitivity
—
—
0.2
V
The difference between D+
and D- must exceed this value
while VCM is met
D319
VCM
Differential Common Mode
Range
0.8
—
2.5
V
D320
ZOUT
Driver Output Impedance
28
—
44
Ω
D321
VOL
Voltage Output Low
0.0
—
0.3
V
1.5 kΩ load connected to 3.6V
D322
VOH
Voltage Output High
2.8
—
3.6
V
15 kΩ load connected to
ground
TABLE 21-3:
USB INTERNAL VOLTAGE REGULATOR SPECIFICATIONS
Operating Conditions: -40°C < TA < +85°C (unless otherwise stated).
Param
No.
Sym
Characteristics
D323
VUSBANA Regulator Output Voltage*
D324
CUSB
*
External Filter Capacitor
Value*
Min
Typ
Max
Units
3.0
—
3.6
V
220
—
—
nF
Comments
Must hold sufficient charge
for peak load with minimal
voltage drop
These parameters are characterized but not tested. Parameter numbers not yet assigned for these
specifications.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 279
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 21-3:
HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT CHARACTERISTICS
For VDIRMAG = 1:
VDD
VHLVD
(HLVDIF set by hardware)
(HLVDIF can be
cleared in software)
VHLVD
For VDIRMAG = 0:
VDD
HLVDIF
TABLE 21-4:
HIGH/LOW-VOLTAGE DETECT CHARACTERISTICS
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature -40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
Param
No.
D420
Sym
Characteristic
Min
Typ
Max
Units
HLVD Voltage on VDD HLVDL<3:0> = 0000
Transition High-to-Low HLVDL<3:0> = 0001
2.06
2.17
2.28
V
2.12
2.23
2.34
V
HLVDL<3:0> = 0010
2.24
2.36
2.48
V
DS39760A-page 280
HLVDL<3:0> = 0011
2.32
2.44
2.56
V
HLVDL<3:0> = 0100
2.47
2.60
2.73
V
HLVDL<3:0> = 0101
2.65
2.79
2.93
V
HLVDL<3:0> = 0110
2.74
2.89
3.04
V
HLVDL<3:0> = 0111
2.96
3.12
3.28
V
HLVDL<3:0> = 1000
3.22
3.39
3.56
V
HLVDL<3:0> = 1001
3.37
3.55
3.73
V
HLVDL<3:0> = 1010
3.52
3.71
3.90
V
HLVDL<3:0> = 1011
3.70
3.90
4.10
V
HLVDL<3:0> = 1100
3.90
4.11
4.32
V
HLVDL<3:0> = 1101
4.11
4.33
4.55
V
HLVDL<3:0> = 1110
4.36
4.59
4.82
V
Advance Information
Conditions
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
21.4
21.4.1
AC (Timing) Characteristics
TIMING PARAMETER SYMBOLOGY
The timing parameter symbols have been created
using one of the following formats:
1. TppS2ppS
2. TppS
T
F
Frequency
Lowercase letters (pp) and their meanings:
pp
cc
ck
dt
io
CCP1
CLKO
Data in
I/O port
:Uppercase Letters and their meanings
S
F
Fall
H
High
I
Invalid (High-Impedance)
L
Low
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
T
Time
mc
osc
wr
t0
t1
MCLR
OSC1
WR
T0CKI
T1CKI
P
R
V
Z
Period
Rise
Valid
High-Impedance
High
Low
High
Low
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 281
PIC18F2450/4450
21.4.2
TIMING CONDITIONS
Note:
The temperature and voltages specified in Table 21-5
apply to all timing specifications unless otherwise
noted. Figure 21-4 specifies the load conditions for the
timing specifications.
TABLE 21-5:
Because of space limitations, the generic
terms “PIC18FXXXX” and “PIC18LFXXXX”
are used throughout this section to refer to
the PIC18F2450/4450 and PIC18LF2450/
4450 families of devices specifically and
only those devices.
TEMPERATURE AND VOLTAGE SPECIFICATIONS – AC
AC CHARACTERISTICS
FIGURE 21-4:
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
Operating voltage VDD range as described in DC spec Section 21.1 and
Section 21.3 .
LF parts operate for industrial temperatures only.
LOAD CONDITIONS FOR DEVICE TIMING SPECIFICATIONS
Load Condition 1
Load Condition 2
VDD/2
RL
CL
Pin
VSS
CL
Pin
RL = 464Ω
VSS
DS39760A-page 282
CL = 50 pF
for all pins except OSC2/CLKO
and including D and E outputs as ports
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
21.4.3
TIMING DIAGRAMS AND SPECIFICATIONS
FIGURE 21-5:
EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING (ALL MODES EXCEPT PLL)
Q4
Q1
Q2
Q3
Q4
Q1
OSC1
1
3
4
3
4
2
CLKO
TABLE 21-6:
Param.
No.
1A
1
EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Symbol
FOSC
TOSC
Characteristic
Min
Max
Units
External CLKI Frequency(1)
Oscillator Frequency(1)
DC
48
MHz
EC, ECIO Oscillator mode
0.1
4
MHz
XT, XTPLL Oscillator mode
4
25
MHz
HS Oscillator mode
4
48
MHz
HSPLL Oscillator mode
External CLKI Period(1)
Oscillator Period(1)
Time(1)
Conditions
20.8
—
ns
EC, ECIO Oscillator mode
250
10,000
ns
XT Oscillator mode
25
250
ns
HS Oscillator mode
20.8
250
ns
HSPLL Oscillator mode
2
TCY
Instruction Cycle
83.3
—
ns
TCY = 4/FOSC
3
TosL,
TosH
External Clock in (OSC1)
High or Low Time
30
—
ns
XT Oscillator mode
10
—
ns
HS Oscillator mode
4
TosR,
TosF
External Clock in (OSC1)
Rise or Fall Time
—
20
ns
XT Oscillator mode
—
7.5
ns
HS Oscillator mode
Note 1:
Instruction cycle period (TCY) equals four times the input oscillator time base period for all configurations
except PLL. All specified values are based on characterization data for that particular oscillator type under
standard operating conditions with the device executing code. Exceeding these specified limits may result
in an unstable oscillator operation and/or higher than expected current consumption. All devices are tested
to operate at “min.” values with an external clock applied to the OSC1/CLKI pin. When an external clock
input is used, the “max.” cycle time limit is “DC” (no clock) for all devices.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 283
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 21-7:
Param
No.
PLL CLOCK TIMING SPECIFICATIONS (VDD = 4.2V TO 5.5V)
Sym
Characteristic
F10
F11
FOSC Oscillator Frequency Range
FSYS On-Chip VCO System Frequency
F12
trc
PLL Start-up Time (Lock Time)
ΔCLK
CLKO Stability (Jitter)
F13
Min
Typ†
Max
Units
4
—
—
96
48
—
MHz
MHz
—
—
2
ms
-0.25
—
+0.25
%
Conditions
† Data in “Typ” column is at 5V, 25°C unless otherwise stated. These parameters are for design guidance
only and are not tested.
TABLE 21-8:
AC CHARACTERISTICS: INTERNAL RC ACCURACY
PIC18F2450/4450 (INDUSTRIAL)
PIC18LF2450/4450 (INDUSTRIAL)
PIC18LF2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
PIC18F2450/4450
(Industrial)
Standard Operating Conditions (unless otherwise stated)
Operating temperature
-40°C ≤ TA ≤ +85°C for industrial
Param
No.
Device
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
INTRC Accuracy @ Freq = 31 kHz(1)
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
PIC18LF2450/4450 26.562
—
35.938
kHz
-40°C to +85°C
VDD = 2.7-3.3V
PIC18F2450/4450 26.562
—
35.938
kHz
-40°C to +85°C
VDD = 4.5-5.5V
Shading of rows is to assist in readability of the table.
INTRC frequency after calibration.
Change of INTRC frequency as VDD changes.
FIGURE 21-6:
CLKO AND I/O TIMING
Q1
Q4
Q2
Q3
OSC1
11
10
CLKO
12
13
14
19
18
16
I/O pin
(Input)
15
17
I/O pin
(Output)
New Value
Old Value
20, 21
Note:
Refer to Figure 21-4 for load conditions.
DS39760A-page 284
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 21-9:
Param
No.
CLKO AND I/O TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Symbol
Characteristic
TosH2ckL OSC1 ↑ to CLKO ↓
10
Min
Typ
Max
—
75
200
Units Conditions
ns
(Note 1)
11
TosH2ckH OSC1 ↑ to CLKO ↑
—
75
200
ns
(Note 1)
12
TckR
CLKO Rise Time
—
35
100
ns
(Note 1)
13
TckF
CLKO Fall Time
—
35
100
ns
(Note 1)
14
TckL2ioV
CLKO ↓ to Port Out Valid
—
—
0.5 TCY + 20
ns
(Note 1)
15
TioV2ckH Port In Valid before CLKO ↑
16
TckH2ioI
17
TosH2ioV OSC1 ↑ (Q1 cycle) to Port Out Valid
18
TosH2ioI
18A
0.25 TCY + 25
—
—
ns
(Note 1)
0
—
—
ns
(Note 1)
Port In Hold after CLKO ↑
OSC1 ↑ (Q2 cycle) to
Port Input Invalid
(I/O in hold time)
—
50
150
ns
PIC18FXXXX
100
—
—
ns
PIC18LFXXXX
200
—
—
ns
19
TioV2osH Port Input Valid to OSC1 ↑ (I/O in setup time)
0
—
—
ns
20
TioR
Port Output Rise Time
20A
21
TioF
Port Output Fall Time
21A
PIC18FXXXX
—
10
25
ns
PIC18LFXXXX
—
—
60
ns
PIC18FXXXX
—
10
25
ns
PIC18LFXXXX
—
—
60
ns
22†
TINP
INT Pin High or Low Time
TCY
—
—
ns
23†
TRBP
RB7:RB4 Change INT High or Low Time
TCY
—
—
ns
VDD = 2.0V
VDD = 2.0V
VDD = 2.0V
† These parameters are asynchronous events not related to any internal clock edges.
Note 1: Measurements are taken in RC mode, where CLKO output is 4 x TOSC.
FIGURE 21-7:
RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER AND
POWER-UP TIMER TIMING
VDD
MCLR
30
Internal
POR
PWRT
Time-out
33
32
Oscillator
Time-out
Internal
Reset
Watchdog
Timer
Reset
34
31
34
I/O pins
Note:
Refer to Figure 21-4 for load conditions.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 285
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 21-8:
BROWN-OUT RESET TIMING
BVDD
VDD
35
VBGAP = 1.2V
VIRVST
Enable Internal
Reference Voltage
Internal Reference
Voltage Stable
36
TABLE 21-10: RESET, WATCHDOG TIMER, OSCILLATOR START-UP TIMER, POWER-UP TIMER
AND BROWN-OUT RESET REQUIREMENTS
Param.
Symbol
No.
Characteristic
Min
Typ
Max
Units
30
TmcL
MCLR Pulse Width (low)
2
—
—
μs
31
TWDT
Watchdog Timer Time-out Period
(no postscaler)
—
4.00
TBD
ms
32
TOST
Oscillator Start-up Timer Period
1024 TOSC
—
1024 TOSC
—
33
TPWRT
Power-up Timer Period
—
65.5
TBD
ms
34
TIOZ
I/O High-Impedance from MCLR
Low or Watchdog Timer Reset
—
2
—
μs
200
—
—
μs
—
20
50
μs
200
—
—
μs
CPU Start-up Time
5
—
10
μs
Time for INTRC to Stabilize
—
1
—
ms
35
TBOR
Brown-out Reset Pulse Width
36
TIRVST
Time for Internal Reference
Voltage to become Stable
37
TLVD
Low-Voltage Detect Pulse Width
38
TCSD
39
TIOBST
Conditions
TOSC = OSC1 period
VDD ≤ BVDD (see D005)
VDD ≤ VLVD
Legend: TBD = To Be Determined
DS39760A-page 286
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 21-9:
TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK TIMINGS
T0CKI
41
40
42
T1OSO/T1CKI
46
45
47
48
TMR0 or
TMR1
Note:
Refer to Figure 21-4 for load conditions.
TABLE 21-11: TIMER0 AND TIMER1 EXTERNAL CLOCK REQUIREMENTS
Param
Symbol
No.
Characteristic
40
Tt0H
T0CKI High Pulse Width
41
Tt0L
T0CKI Low Pulse Width
42
Tt0P
T0CKI Period
No prescaler
Min
Max
Units
0.5 TCY + 20
—
ns
With prescaler
No prescaler
10
—
ns
0.5 TCY + 20
—
ns
With prescaler
No prescaler
With prescaler
45
Tt1H
T1CKI High
Time
Synchronous, no prescaler
10
—
ns
TCY + 10
—
ns
Greater of:
20 ns or
(TCY + 40)/N
—
ns
0.5 TCY + 20
—
ns
10
—
ns
Synchronous,
with prescaler
PIC18FXXXX
PIC18LFXXXX
25
—
ns
Asynchronous
PIC18FXXXX
30
—
ns
PIC18LFXXXX
46
Tt1L
T1CKI Low
Time
Synchronous, no prescaler
Synchronous,
with prescaler
Asynchronous
47
50
—
ns
0.5 TCY + 5
—
ns
VDD = 2.0V
VDD = 2.0V
PIC18FXXXX
10
—
ns
25
—
ns
PIC18FXXXX
30
—
ns
PIC18LFXXXX
50
—
ns
VDD = 2.0V
Greater of:
20 ns or
(TCY + 40)/N
—
ns
N = prescale
value (1, 2, 4, 8)
Tt1P
T1CKI Input
Period
Ft1
T1CKI Oscillator Input Frequency Range
Synchronous
Tcke2tmrI Delay from External T1CKI Clock Edge to Timer
Increment
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
N = prescale
value
(1, 2, 4,..., 256)
PIC18LFXXXX
Asynchronous
48
Conditions
60
—
ns
DC
50
kHz
2 TOSC
7 TOSC
—
Advance Information
VDD = 2.0V
DS39760A-page 287
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 21-10:
CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM TIMINGS (CCP MODULE)
CCP1
(Capture Mode)
50
51
52
CCP1
(Compare or PWM Mode)
53
Note:
54
Refer to Figure 21-4 for load conditions.
TABLE 21-12: CAPTURE/COMPARE/PWM REQUIREMENTS
Param
Symbol
No.
50
51
TccL
TccH
Characteristic
CCP1 Input
Low Time
No prescaler
CCP1 Input
High Time
No prescaler
With
prescaler
With
prescaler
52
TccP
CCP1 Input Period
53
TccR
CCP1 Output Fall Time
54
TccF
CCP1 Output Fall Time
DS39760A-page 288
PIC18FXXXX
PIC18LFXXXX
Min
Max
Units
0.5 TCY + 20
—
ns
10
—
ns
20
—
ns
0.5 TCY + 20
—
ns
Conditions
VDD = 2.0V
PIC18FXXXX
10
—
ns
PIC18LFXXXX
20
—
ns
VDD = 2.0V
3 TCY + 40
N
—
ns
N = prescale
value (1, 4 or 16)
—
25
ns
PIC18FXXXX
PIC18LFXXXX
—
45
ns
PIC18FXXXX
—
25
ns
PIC18LFXXXX
—
45
ns
Advance Information
VDD = 2.0V
VDD = 2.0V
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 21-11:
EUSART SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION (MASTER/SLAVE) TIMING
RC6/TX/CK
pin
121
121
RC7/RX/DT
pin
120
Note:
122
Refer to Figure 21-4 for load conditions.
TABLE 21-13: EUSART SYNCHRONOUS TRANSMISSION REQUIREMENTS
Param
No.
120
Symbol
Characteristic
TckH2dtV SYNC XMIT (MASTER & SLAVE)
Clock High to Data Out Valid
PIC18FXXXX
Min
Max
Units
—
40
ns
PIC18LFXXXX
—
100
ns
121
Tckrf
Clock Out Rise Time and Fall Time
(Master mode)
PIC18FXXXX
—
20
ns
PIC18LFXXXX
—
50
ns
122
Tdtrf
Data Out Rise Time and Fall Time
PIC18FXXXX
—
20
ns
PIC18LFXXXX
—
50
ns
FIGURE 21-12:
Conditions
VDD = 2.0V
VDD = 2.0V
VDD = 2.0V
EUSART SYNCHRONOUS RECEIVE (MASTER/SLAVE) TIMING
RC6/TX/CK
pin
125
RC7/RX/DT
pin
126
Note:
Refer to Figure 21-4 for load conditions.
TABLE 21-14: EUSART SYNCHRONOUS RECEIVE REQUIREMENTS
Param.
No.
125
126
Symbol
Characteristic
TDTV2CKL SYNC RCV (MASTER & SLAVE)
Data Hold before CK ↓ (DT hold time)
TCKL2DTL
Data Hold after CK ↓ (DT hold time)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Min
Max
Units
10
—
ns
15
—
ns
Advance Information
Conditions
DS39760A-page 289
PIC18F2450/4450
FIGURE 21-13:
USB SIGNAL TIMING
USB Data Differential Lines
90%
VCRS
10%
TLF, TFF
TLR, TFR
TABLE 21-15: USB LOW-SPEED TIMING REQUIREMENTS
Param
No.
Symbol
Characteristic
Min
Typ
Max
Units
Conditions
TLR
Transition Rise Time
75
—
300
ns
CL = 200 to 600 pF
TLF
Transition Fall Time
75
—
300
ns
CL = 200 to 600 pF
TLRFM
Rise/Fall Time Matching
80
—
125
%
Min
Typ
Max
Units
4
—
20
ns
CL = 50 pF
CL = 50 pF
TABLE 21-16: USB FULL-SPEED REQUIREMENTS
Param
No.
Symbol
Characteristic
TFR
Transition Rise Time
TFF
Transition Fall Time
4
—
20
ns
TFRFM
Rise/Fall Time Matching
90
—
111.1
%
DS39760A-page 290
Advance Information
Conditions
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 21-17: A/D CONVERTER CHARACTERISTICS: PIC18F2450/4450 (INDUSTRIAL)
PIC18LF2450/4450 (INDUSTRIAL)
Param
Symbol
No.
Characteristic
Min
Typ
Max
Units
—
—
10
bit
Conditions
ΔVREF ≥ 3.0V
A01
NR
Resolution
A03
EIL
Integral Linearity Error
—
—
<±1
LSb ΔVREF ≥ 3.0V
A04
EDL
Differential Linearity Error
—
—
<±1
LSb ΔVREF ≥ 3.0V
A06
EOFF
Offset Error
—
—
<±1.5
LSb ΔVREF ≥ 3.0V
A07
EGN
Gain Error
—
—
<±1
LSb ΔVREF ≥ 3.0V
A10
—
Monotonicity
—
VSS ≤ VAIN ≤ VREF
A20
ΔVREF
Reference Voltage Range
(VREFH – VREFL)
1.8
3
—
—
—
—
V
V
VDD < 3.0V
VDD ≥ 3.0V
A21
VREFH
Reference Voltage High
VSS
—
VREFH
V
A22
VREFL
Reference Voltage Low
VSS – 0.3V
—
VDD – 3.0V
V
A25
VAIN
Analog Input Voltage
VREFL
—
VREFH
V
A30
ZAIN
Recommended Impedance of
Analog Voltage Source
—
—
2.5
kΩ
A50
IREF
VREF Input Current(2)
—
—
—
—
5
150
μA
μA
Note 1:
2:
Guaranteed(1)
During VAIN acquisition.
During A/D conversion
cycle.
The A/D conversion result never decreases with an increase in the input voltage and has no missing codes.
VREFH current is from RA3/AN3/VREF+ pin or VDD, whichever is selected as the VREFH source.
VREFL current is from RA2/AN2/VREF- pin or VSS, whichever is selected as the VREFL source.
FIGURE 21-14:
A/D CONVERSION TIMING
BSF ADCON0, GO
(Note 2)
131
Q4
130
A/D CLK
132
9
A/D DATA
8
7
...
...
2
OLD_DATA
ADRES
1
0
NEW_DATA
TCY(1)
ADIF
GO
DONE
SAMPLING STOPPED
SAMPLE
Note
1:
If the A/D clock source is selected as RC, a time of TCY is added before the A/D clock starts. This allows the SLEEP instruction
to be executed.
2:
This is a minimal RC delay (typically 100 ns), which also disconnects the holding capacitor from the analog input.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 291
PIC18F2450/4450
TABLE 21-18: A/D CONVERSION REQUIREMENTS
Param
Symbol
No.
130
TAD
Characteristic
A/D Clock Period
Min
Max
Units
0.7
25.0(1)
μs
TOSC based, VREF ≥ 3.0V
1.4
25.0
(1)
μs
VDD = 2.0V,
TOSC based, VREF full range
PIC18FXXXX
TBD
1
μs
A/D RC mode
PIC18LFXXXX
TBD
3
μs
VDD = 2.0V,
A/D RC mode
11
12
TAD
1.4
TBD
—
—
μs
μs
PIC18FXXXX
PIC18LFXXXX
131
TCNV
Conversion Time
(not including acquisition time)(2)
132
TACQ
Acquisition Time(3)
135
TSWC
Switching Time from Convert → Sample
—
(Note 4)
137
TDIS
Discharge Time
0.2
—
Legend:
Note 1:
2:
3:
4:
Conditions
-40°C to +85°C
0°C ≤ to ≤ +85°C
μs
TBD = To Be Determined
The time of the A/D clock period is dependent on the device frequency and the TAD clock divider.
ADRES registers may be read on the following TCY cycle.
The time for the holding capacitor to acquire the “New” input voltage when the voltage changes full scale
after the conversion (VDD to VSS or VSS to VDD). The source impedance (RS) on the input channels is 50Ω.
On the following cycle of the device clock.
DS39760A-page 292
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
22.0
DC AND AC
CHARACTERISTICS GRAPHS
AND TABLES
Graphs and tables are not available at this time.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 293
PIC18F2450/4450
NOTES:
DS39760A-page 294
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
23.0
PACKAGING INFORMATION
23.1
Package Marking Information
28-Lead PDIP (Skinny DIP)
Example
PIC18F2450-I/SP e3
0510017
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
28-Lead SOIC
Example
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
28-Lead QFN
Example
XXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
18F2450
-I/ML e3
0510017
Legend: XX...X
Y
YY
WW
NNN
e3
*
Note:
PIC18F2450-E/SO e3
0510017
Customer-specific information
Year code (last digit of calendar year)
Year code (last 2 digits of calendar year)
Week code (week of January 1 is week ‘01’)
Alphanumeric traceability code
Pb-free JEDEC designator for Matte Tin (Sn)
This package is Pb-free. The Pb-free JEDEC designator ( e3 )
can be found on the outer packaging for this package.
In the event the full Microchip part number cannot be marked on one line, it will
be carried over to the next line, thus limiting the number of available
characters for customer-specific information.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 295
PIC18F2450/4450
Package Marking Information (Continued)
40-Lead PDIP
Example
PIC18F4450-I/P e3
0510017
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
44-Lead TQFP
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
44-Lead QFN
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
XXXXXXXXXX
YYWWNNN
DS39760A-page 296
Example
PIC18F4450
-I/PT e3
0510017
Example
PIC18F4450
-I/ML e3
0510017
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
23.2
Package Details
The following sections give the technical details of the
packages.
28-Lead Skinny Plastic Dual In-line (SP) – 300 mil Body (PDIP)
E1
D
2
n
1
α
E
A2
A
L
c
β
B1
A1
eB
Units
Number of Pins
Pitch
p
B
Dimension Limits
n
p
INCHES*
MIN
NOM
MILLIMETERS
MAX
MIN
28
NOM
MAX
28
.100
2.54
Top to Seating Plane
A
.140
.150
.160
3.56
3.81
4.06
Molded Package Thickness
A2
.125
.130
.135
3.18
3.30
3.43
8.26
Base to Seating Plane
A1
.015
Shoulder to Shoulder Width
E
.300
.310
.325
7.62
7.87
Molded Package Width
E1
.275
.285
.295
6.99
7.24
7.49
Overall Length
D
1.345
1.365
1.385
34.16
34.67
35.18
Tip to Seating Plane
L
c
.125
.130
.135
3.18
3.30
3.43
.008
.012
.015
0.20
0.29
0.38
B1
.040
.053
.065
1.02
1.33
1.65
Lead Thickness
Upper Lead Width
Lower Lead Width
Overall Row Spacing
Mold Draft Angle Top
§
0.38
B
.016
.019
.022
0.41
0.48
0.56
eB
α
.320
.350
.430
8.13
8.89
10.92
5
10
15
5
10
15
β
Mold Draft Angle Bottom
5
10
15
5
10
15
* Controlling Parameter
§ Significant Characteristic
Notes:
Dimension D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010” (0.254mm) per side.
JEDEC Equivalent: MO-095
Drawing No. C04-070
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 297
PIC18F2450/4450
28-Lead Plastic Small Outline (SO) – Wide, 300 mil Body (SOIC)
E
E1
p
D
B
2
1
n
h
α
45°
c
A2
A
φ
β
L
Units
Dimension Limits
n
p
A1
INCHES*
NOM
28
.050
.099
.091
.008
.407
.295
.704
.020
.033
4
.011
.017
12
12
MAX
MILLIMETERS
NOM
28
1.27
2.36
2.50
2.24
2.31
0.10
0.20
10.01
10.34
7.32
7.49
17.65
17.87
0.25
0.50
0.41
0.84
0
4
0.23
0.28
0.36
0.42
0
12
0
12
MAX
Number of Pins
Pitch
Overall Height
A
.093
.104
2.64
Molded Package Thickness
A2
.088
.094
2.39
Standoff
§
A1
.004
.012
0.30
Overall Width
E
.394
.420
10.67
Molded Package Width
E1
.288
.299
7.59
Overall Length
D
.695
.712
18.08
Chamfer Distance
h
.010
.029
0.74
Foot Length
L
.016
.050
1.27
φ
Foot Angle Top
0
8
8
c
Lead Thickness
.009
.013
0.33
Lead Width
B
.014
.020
0.51
α
Mold Draft Angle Top
0
15
15
β
Mold Draft Angle Bottom
0
15
15
* Controlling Parameter
§ Significant Characteristic
Notes:
Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010” (0.254mm) per side.
JEDEC Equivalent: MS-013
Drawing No. C04-052
DS39760A-page 298
MIN
Advance Information
MIN
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
28-Lead Plastic Quad Flat No Lead Package (ML) 6x6 mm Body (QFN) –
With 0.55 mm Contact Length (Saw Singulated)
E2
E
EXPOSED
METAL
PAD
(NOTE 2)
e
D
b
D2
2
1
K
n
OPTIONAL
INDEX
TOP VIEW
AREA
SEE DETAIL
ALTERNATE
INDEX
INDICATORS
L
BOTTOM VIEW
(NOTE 1)
A1
A
Units
Dimension Limits
n
MILLIMETERS*
INCHES
MIN
Number of Pins
DETAIL
ALTERNATE
PAD OUTLINE
MAX
NOM
MIN
NOM
28
MAX
28
Pitch
e
Overall Height
A
.031
.035
.039
0.80
0.90
1.00
Standoff
A1
.000
.001
.002
0.00
0.02
0.05
Contact Thickness
A3
Overall Width
Exposed Pad Width
Overall Length
Exposed Pad Length
0.65 BSC
.026 BSC
0.20 REF
.008 REF
E
.232
.236
.240
5.90
6.00
6.10
E2
.153
.167
.169
3.89
4.24
4.29
D
.232
.236
.240
5.90
6.00
6.10
D2
.153
.167
.169
3.89
4.24
4.29
Contact Width
β
.009
.011
.013
0.23
0.28
0.33
Contact Length §
L
.018
.022
.024
0.45
0.55
0.65
K
.008
–
–
0.20
–
–
Contact-to-Exposed Pad
§
* Controlling Parameter
§ Significant Characteristic
Notes:
1. Pin 1 visual index feature may vary, but must be located within the hatched area.
2. Exposed pad varies according to die attach paddle size.
BSC: Basic Dimension. Theoretically exact value shown without tolerances.
See ASME Y14.5M
REF: Reference Dimension, usually without tolerance, for information purposes only.
See ASME Y14.5M
JEDEC equivalent: MO-220
Drawing No. C04-105
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
Revised 09-12-05
DS39760A-page 299
PIC18F2450/4450
40-Lead Plastic Dual In-line (P) – 600 mil Body (PDIP)
E1
D
α
2
1
n
E
A2
A
L
c
β
B1
A1
eB
p
B
Units
Dimension Limits
n
p
INCHES*
NOM
40
.100
.175
.150
MAX
MILLIMETERS
NOM
40
2.54
4.06
4.45
3.56
3.81
0.38
15.11
15.24
13.46
13.84
51.94
52.26
3.05
3.30
0.20
0.29
0.76
1.27
0.36
0.46
15.75
16.51
5
10
5
10
MAX
Number of Pins
Pitch
Top to Seating Plane
A
.160
.190
4.83
Molded Package Thickness
A2
.140
.160
4.06
Base to Seating Plane
.015
A1
Shoulder to Shoulder Width
E
.595
.600
.625
15.88
Molded Package Width
E1
.530
.545
.560
14.22
Overall Length
D
2.045
2.058
2.065
52.45
Tip to Seating Plane
L
.120
.130
.135
3.43
c
Lead Thickness
.008
.012
.015
0.38
Upper Lead Width
B1
.030
.050
.070
1.78
Lower Lead Width
B
.014
.018
.022
0.56
Overall Row Spacing
§
eB
.620
.650
.680
17.27
α
Mold Draft Angle Top
5
10
15
15
β
Mold Draft Angle Bottom
5
10
15
15
* Controlling Parameter
§ Significant Characteristic
Notes:
Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010” (0.254mm) per side.
JEDEC Equivalent: MO-011
Drawing No. C04-016
DS39760A-page 300
MIN
Advance Information
MIN
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
44-Lead Plastic Thin-Quad Flatpack (PT) 10x10x1 mm Body, 1.0/0.10 mm Lead Form (TQFP)
E
E1
#leads=n1
p
D1
D
2
1
B
n
CH x 45°
α
A
c
φ
β
A1
L
Number of Pins
Units
Dimension Limits
n
p
Pitch
Pins per Side
Overall Height
Molded Package Thickness
Standoff
Foot Length
Footprint (Reference)
n1
A
A2
A1
L
F
φ
MIN
.039
.037
.002
.018
A2
F
INCHES
NOM
44
.031
11
.043
.039
.004
.024
.039 REF.
MAX
.047
.041
.006
.030
MIN
MILLIMETERS*
NOM
44
1.00
0.95
0.05
0.45
MAX
0.80
11
1.10
1.00
0.10
0.60
1.00 REF.
1.20
1.05
0.15
0.75
Foot Angle
0
3.5
7
0
3.5
7
Overall Width
E
.463
.472
.482
11.75
12.00
12.25
Overall Length
D
.463
.472
.482
11.75
12.00
12.25
Molded Package Width
E1
.390
.394
.398
9.90
10.00
10.10
Molded Package Length
D1
.390
.394
.398
9.90
10.00
10.10
c
Lead Thickness
.004
.006
.008
0.09
0.15
0.20
Lead Width
B
.012
.015
.017
0.30
0.38
0.44
CH
.025
.035
.045
0.64
0.89
1.14
Pin 1 Corner Chamfer
α
5
10
15
5
10
15
Mold Draft Angle Top
β
5
10
15
5
10
15
Mold Draft Angle Bottom
* Controlling Parameter
Notes:
Dimensions D and E1 do not include mold flash or protrusions. Mold flash or protrusions shall not exceed .010" (0.254mm) per side.
REF: Reference Dimension, usually without tolerance, for information purposes only.
See ASME Y14.5M
JEDEC Equivalent: MS-026
Revised 07-22-05
Drawing No. C04-076
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 301
PIC18F2450/4450
44-Lead Plastic Quad Flat No Lead Package (ML) 8x8 mm Body (QFN)
E
EXPOSED
METAL PAD
(NOTE 2)
K
p
D
D2
B
2
1
n
PIN 1
INDEX ON
EXPOSED PAD
(PROFILE MAY VARY)
OPTIONAL
INDEX AREA
(NOTE 1)
E2
L
TOP VIEW
BOTTOM VIEW
DETAIL: CONTACT VARIANTS
A
A3
A1
Units
Dimension Limits
MILLIMETERS*
INCHES
MIN
MAX
NOM
MIN
Pitch
n
p
Overall Height
A
.031
.035
.039
Standoff
A1
.000
.001
.002
Base Thickness
A3
Number of Contacts
Overall Width
Exposed Pad Width
Overall Length
Exposed Pad Length
Contact Width
NOM
44
MAX
44
.026 BSC
0.65 BSC
0.80
0
.010 REF
0.90
1.00
0.02
0.05
0.25 REF
E
.309
.315
.321
7.85
8.00
8.15
E2
.236
.258
.260
5.99
6.55
6.60
D
.309
.315
.321
7.85
8.00
8.15
D2
.236
.258
.260
5.99
6.55
6.60
B
.008
.013
.013
0.20
0.33
0.35
Contact Length
§
L
.014
.016
.019
0.35
0.40
0.48
Contact-to-Exposed-Pad
§
K
.014
-
-
0.20
-
-
* Controlling Parameter
§ Significant Characteristic
Notes:
1. Pin 1 visual index feature may vary, but must be located within the hatched area.
2. Exposed pad varies according to die attach paddle size.
BSC: Basic Dimension. Theoretically exact value shown without tolerances.
See ASME Y14.5M
REF: Reference Dimension, usually without tolerance, for information purposes only.
See ASME Y14.5M
JEDEC equivalent: M0-220
Drawing No. C04-103
DS39760A-page 302
Advance Information
Revised 09-12-05
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
APPENDIX A:
REVISION HISTORY
APPENDIX B:
Revision A (January 2006)
The differences between the devices listed in this data
sheet are shown in Table B-1.
Original data sheet for PIC18F2450/4450 devices.
TABLE B-1:
DEVICE
DIFFERENCES
DEVICE DIFFERENCES
Features
PIC18F2450
PIC18F4450
Program Memory (Bytes)
16384
16384
Program Memory (Instructions)
8192
8192
13
13
Ports A, B, C, (E)
Ports A, B, C, D, E
1
1
10 input channels
13 input channels
28-pin SDIP
28-pin SOIC
28-pin QFN
40-pin PDIP
44-pin TQFP
44-pin QFN
Interrupt Sources
I/O Ports
Capture/Compare/PWM Modules
10-bit Analog-to-Digital Module
Packages
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 303
PIC18F2450/4450
APPENDIX C:
CONVERSION
CONSIDERATIONS
This appendix discusses the considerations for
converting from previous versions of a device to the
ones listed in this data sheet. Typically, these changes
are due to the differences in the process technology
used. An example of this type of conversion is from a
PIC16C74A to a PIC16C74B.
Not Applicable
DS39760A-page 304
APPENDIX D:
MIGRATION FROM
BASELINE TO
ENHANCED DEVICES
This section discusses how to migrate from a Baseline
device (i.e., PIC16C5X) to an Enhanced MCU device
(i.e., PIC18FXXX).
The following are the list of modifications over the
PIC16C5X microcontroller family:
Not Currently Available
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
APPENDIX E:
MIGRATION FROM
MID-RANGE TO
ENHANCED DEVICES
A detailed discussion of the differences between the
mid-range MCU devices (i.e., PIC16CXXX) and the
enhanced devices (i.e., PIC18FXXX) is provided in
AN716, “Migrating Designs from PIC16C74A/74B to
PIC18C442”. The changes discussed, while device
specific, are generally applicable to all mid-range to
enhanced device migrations.
APPENDIX F:
MIGRATION FROM
HIGH-END TO
ENHANCED DEVICES
A detailed discussion of the migration pathway and
differences between the high-end MCU devices (i.e.,
PIC17CXXX) and the enhanced devices (i.e.,
PIC18FXXX) is provided in AN726, “PIC17CXXX to
PIC18CXXX Migration”. This Application Note is
available as Literature Number DS00726.
This Application Note is available as Literature Number
DS00716.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 305
PIC18F2450/4450
NOTES:
DS39760A-page 306
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
INDEX
A
A/D ................................................................................... 173
Acquisition Requirements ........................................ 178
ADCON0 Register .................................................... 173
ADCON1 Register .................................................... 173
ADCON2 Register .................................................... 173
ADRESH Register ............................................ 173, 176
ADRESL Register .................................................... 173
Analog Port Pins, Configuring .................................. 180
Associated Registers ............................................... 182
Configuring the Module ............................................ 177
Conversion Clock (TAD) ........................................... 179
Conversion Requirements ....................................... 292
Conversion Status (GO/DONE Bit) .......................... 176
Conversions ............................................................. 181
Converter Characteristics ........................................ 291
Converter Interrupt, Configuring .............................. 177
Discharge ................................................................. 181
Operation in Power-Managed Modes ...................... 180
Selecting and Configuring Acquisition Time ............ 179
Special Event Trigger (CCP1) .................................. 182
Use of the CCP1 Trigger .......................................... 182
Absolute Maximum Ratings ............................................. 265
AC (Timing) Characteristics ............................................. 281
Load Conditions for Device
Timing Specifications ....................................... 282
Parameter Symbology ............................................. 281
Temperature and Voltage Specifications ................. 282
Timing Conditions .................................................... 282
AC Characteristics
Internal RC Accuracy ............................................... 284
ADCON0 Register ............................................................ 173
GO/DONE Bit ........................................................... 176
ADCON1 Register ............................................................ 173
ADCON2 Register ............................................................ 173
ADDFSR .......................................................................... 254
ADDLW ............................................................................ 217
ADDULNK ........................................................................ 254
ADDWF ............................................................................ 217
ADDWFC ......................................................................... 218
ADRESH Register ............................................................ 173
ADRESL Register .................................................... 173, 176
Analog-to-Digital Converter. See A/D.
ANDLW ............................................................................ 218
ANDWF ............................................................................ 219
Assembler
MPASM Assembler .................................................. 262
Auto-Wake-up on Sync Break Character ......................... 166
B
BC .................................................................................... 219
BCF .................................................................................. 220
Block Diagrams
A/D ........................................................................... 176
Analog Input Model .................................................. 177
Capture Mode Operation ......................................... 124
Compare Mode Operation ....................................... 125
Device Clock .............................................................. 24
EUSART Receive .................................................... 164
EUSART Transmit ................................................... 162
External Power-on Reset Circuit
(Slow VDD Power-up) ......................................... 43
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Fail-Safe Clock Monitor ........................................... 204
Generic I/O Port ......................................................... 99
High/Low-Voltage Detect with External Input .......... 184
Interrupt Logic ............................................................ 86
On-Chip Reset Circuit ................................................ 41
PIC18F2450 .............................................................. 10
PIC18F4450 .............................................................. 11
PLL (HS Mode) .......................................................... 26
PWM Operation (Simplified) .................................... 127
Reads from Flash Program Memory ......................... 77
Table Read Operation ............................................... 73
Table Write Operation ............................................... 74
Table Writes to Flash Program Memory .................... 79
Timer0 in 16-Bit Mode ............................................. 112
Timer0 in 8-Bit Mode ............................................... 112
Timer1 ..................................................................... 116
Timer1 (16-Bit Read/Write Mode) ............................ 116
Timer2 ..................................................................... 122
USB Interrupt Logic Funnel ..................................... 143
USB Peripheral and Options ................................... 129
Watchdog Timer ...................................................... 201
BN .................................................................................... 220
BNC ................................................................................. 221
BNN ................................................................................. 221
BNOV .............................................................................. 222
BNZ ................................................................................. 222
BOR. See Brown-out Reset.
BOV ................................................................................. 225
BRA ................................................................................. 223
Brown-out Reset (BOR) ..................................................... 44
Detecting ................................................................... 44
Disabling in Sleep Mode ............................................ 44
Software Enabled ...................................................... 44
BSF .................................................................................. 223
BTFSC ............................................................................. 224
BTFSS ............................................................................. 224
BTG ................................................................................. 225
BZ .................................................................................... 226
C
C Compilers
MPLAB C18 ............................................................. 262
MPLAB C30 ............................................................. 262
CALL ................................................................................ 226
CALLW ............................................................................ 255
Capture (CCP Module) .................................................... 124
Associated Registers ............................................... 126
CCP1 Pin Configuration .......................................... 124
CCPR1H:CCPR1L Registers .................................. 124
Prescaler ................................................................. 124
Software Interrupt .................................................... 124
Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) ....................................... 123
Capture Mode. See Capture.
CCP Mode and Timer Resources ............................ 124
CCPR1H Register ................................................... 124
CCPR1L Register .................................................... 124
Compare Mode. See Compare.
Module Configuration .............................................. 124
Clock Sources .................................................................... 30
Selection Using OSCCON Register .......................... 30
CLRF ............................................................................... 227
CLRWDT ......................................................................... 227
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 307
PIC18F2450/4450
Code Examples
16 x 16 Signed Multiply Routine ................................ 84
16 x 16 Unsigned Multiply Routine ............................ 84
8 x 8 Signed Multiply Routine .................................... 83
8 x 8 Unsigned Multiply Routine ................................ 83
Changing Between Capture Prescalers ................... 124
Computed GOTO Using an Offset Value ................... 56
Erasing a Flash Program Memory Row ..................... 78
Fast Register Stack .................................................... 56
How to Clear RAM (Bank 1) Using
Indirect Addressing ............................................ 67
Implementing a Real-Time Clock Using
a Timer1 Interrupt Service ............................... 119
Initializing PORTA ...................................................... 99
Initializing PORTB .................................................... 101
Initializing PORTC .................................................... 104
Initializing PORTD .................................................... 107
Initializing PORTE .................................................... 109
Reading a Flash Program Memory Word .................. 77
Saving STATUS, WREG and
BSR Registers in RAM ....................................... 97
Writing to Flash Program Memory ....................... 80–81
Code Protection ............................................................... 189
COMF ............................................................................... 228
Compare (CCP Module) ................................................... 125
Associated Registers ............................................... 126
CCP1 Pin Configuration ........................................... 125
CCPR1 Register ...................................................... 125
Software Interrupt .................................................... 125
Special Event Trigger ............................................... 125
Timer1 Mode Selection ............................................ 125
Configuration Bits ............................................................. 190
Configuration Register Protection .................................... 209
Context Saving During Interrupts ....................................... 97
Conversion Considerations .............................................. 304
CPFSEQ .......................................................................... 228
CPFSGT ........................................................................... 229
CPFSLT ........................................................................... 229
Crystal Oscillator/Ceramic Resonator ................................ 25
Customer Change Notification Service ............................ 315
Customer Notification Service .......................................... 315
Customer Support ............................................................ 315
D
Data Addressing Modes ..................................................... 67
Comparing Addressing Modes with
the Extended Instruction Set Enabled ................ 71
Direct .......................................................................... 67
Indexed Literal Offset ................................................. 70
BSR Operation ................................................... 72
Instructions Affected .......................................... 70
Mapping the Access Bank ................................. 72
Indirect ....................................................................... 67
Inherent and Literal .................................................... 67
Data Memory ...................................................................... 59
Access Bank .............................................................. 61
and the Extended Instruction Set ............................... 70
Bank Select Register (BSR) ....................................... 59
General Purpose Registers ........................................ 61
Map for PIC18F2450/4450 Devices ........................... 60
Special Function Registers ........................................ 62
Map .................................................................... 62
USB RAM ................................................................... 59
DAW ................................................................................. 230
DC and AC Characteristics
Graphs and Tables .................................................. 293
DS39760A-page 308
DC Characteristics ........................................................... 276
Power-Down and Supply Current ............................ 268
Supply Voltage ........................................................ 267
DCFSNZ .......................................................................... 231
DECF ............................................................................... 230
DECFSZ .......................................................................... 231
Dedicated ICD/ICSP Port ................................................ 209
Development Support ...................................................... 261
Device Differences ........................................................... 303
Device Overview .................................................................. 7
Features (table) ........................................................... 9
New Core Features ...................................................... 7
Other Special Features ................................................ 8
Direct Addressing .............................................................. 68
E
Effect on Standard PIC MCU Instructions ....................... 258
Electrical Characteristics ................................................. 265
Enhanced Universal Synchronous Receiver
Transmitter (USART). See EUSART.
Equations
A/D Acquisition Time ............................................... 178
A/D Minimum Charging Time ................................... 178
Calculating the Minimum Required
A/D Acquisition Time ....................................... 178
Errata ................................................................................... 6
EUSART
Asynchronous Mode ................................................ 162
Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 165
Associated Registers, Transmit ....................... 163
Auto-Wake-up on Sync Break ......................... 166
Break Character Sequence ............................. 167
Receiver .......................................................... 164
Setting Up 9-Bit Mode with Address Detect .... 164
Transmitter ...................................................... 162
Baud Rate Generator (BRG) ................................... 157
Associated Registers ....................................... 157
Auto-Baud Rate Detect .................................... 160
Baud Rate Error, Calculating ........................... 157
Baud Rates, Asynchronous Modes ................. 158
High Baud Rate Select (BRGH Bit) ................. 157
Operation in Power-Managed Modes .............. 157
Sampling .......................................................... 157
Synchronous Master Mode ...................................... 168
Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 170
Associated Registers, Transmit ....................... 169
Reception ........................................................ 170
Transmission ................................................... 168
Synchronous Slave Mode ........................................ 171
Associated Registers, Receive ........................ 172
Associated Registers, Transmit ....................... 171
Reception ........................................................ 172
Transmission ................................................... 171
Extended Instruction Set .................................................. 253
ADDFSR .................................................................. 254
ADDULNK ................................................................ 254
and Using MPLAB IDE Tools ................................... 260
CALLW .................................................................... 255
Considerations for Use ............................................ 258
MOVSF .................................................................... 255
MOVSS .................................................................... 256
PUSHL ..................................................................... 256
SUBFSR .................................................................. 257
SUBULNK ................................................................ 257
Syntax ...................................................................... 253
External Clock Input ........................................................... 26
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
F
Fail-Safe Clock Monitor ............................................ 189, 204
Interrupts in Power-Managed Modes ....................... 205
POR or Wake-up from Sleep ................................... 205
WDT During Oscillator Failure ................................. 204
Fast Register Stack ............................................................ 56
Firmware Instructions ....................................................... 211
Flash Program Memory ..................................................... 73
Associated Registers ................................................. 81
Control Registers ....................................................... 74
EECON1 and EECON2 ..................................... 74
TABLAT (Table Latch) Register ......................... 76
TBLPTR (Table Pointer) Register ...................... 76
Erase Sequence ........................................................ 78
Erasing ....................................................................... 78
Operation During Code-Protect ................................. 81
Protection Against Spurious Writes ........................... 81
Reading ...................................................................... 77
Table Pointer
Boundaries Based on Operation ........................ 76
Table Pointer Boundaries .......................................... 76
Table Reads and Table Writes .................................. 73
Unexpected Termination of Write .............................. 81
Write Sequence ......................................................... 79
Write Verify ................................................................ 81
Writing To ................................................................... 79
FSCM. See Fail-Safe Clock Monitor.
G
GOTO .............................................................................. 232
H
Hardware Multiplier ............................................................ 83
Introduction ................................................................ 83
Operation ................................................................... 83
Performance Comparison .......................................... 83
High/Low-Voltage Detect ................................................. 183
Applications .............................................................. 186
Associated Registers ............................................... 187
Characteristics ......................................................... 280
Current Consumption ............................................... 185
Effects of a Reset ..................................................... 187
Operation ................................................................. 184
During Sleep .................................................... 187
Setup ........................................................................ 185
Start-up Time ........................................................... 185
Typical Application ................................................... 186
HLVD. See High/Low-Voltage Detect.
I
I/O Ports ............................................................................. 99
ID Locations ............................................................. 189, 209
Idle Modes ......................................................................... 37
INCF ................................................................................. 232
INCFSZ ............................................................................ 233
In-Circuit Debugger .......................................................... 209
In-Circuit Serial Programming (ICSP) ...................... 189, 209
Indexed Literal Offset Addressing
and Standard PIC18 Instructions ............................. 258
Indexed Literal Offset Mode ............................................. 258
Indirect Addressing ............................................................ 68
INFSNZ ............................................................................ 233
Initialization Conditions for all Registers ...................... 49–52
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Instruction Cycle ................................................................ 57
Clocking Scheme ....................................................... 57
Flow/Pipelining .......................................................... 57
Instruction Set .................................................................. 211
ADDLW .................................................................... 217
ADDWF ................................................................... 217
ADDWF (Indexed Literal Offset mode) .................... 259
ADDWFC ................................................................. 218
ANDLW .................................................................... 218
ANDWF ................................................................... 219
BC ............................................................................ 219
BCF ......................................................................... 220
BN ............................................................................ 220
BNC ......................................................................... 221
BNN ......................................................................... 221
BNOV ...................................................................... 222
BNZ ......................................................................... 222
BOV ......................................................................... 225
BRA ......................................................................... 223
BSF .......................................................................... 223
BSF (Indexed Literal Offset mode) .......................... 259
BTFSC ..................................................................... 224
BTFSS ..................................................................... 224
BTG ......................................................................... 225
BZ ............................................................................ 226
CALL ........................................................................ 226
CLRF ....................................................................... 227
CLRWDT ................................................................. 227
COMF ...................................................................... 228
CPFSEQ .................................................................. 228
CPFSGT .................................................................. 229
CPFSLT ................................................................... 229
DAW ........................................................................ 230
DCFSNZ .................................................................. 231
DECF ....................................................................... 230
DECFSZ .................................................................. 231
General Format ....................................................... 213
GOTO ...................................................................... 232
INCF ........................................................................ 232
INCFSZ .................................................................... 233
INFSNZ .................................................................... 233
IORLW ..................................................................... 234
IORWF ..................................................................... 234
LFSR ....................................................................... 235
MOVF ...................................................................... 235
MOVFF .................................................................... 236
MOVLB .................................................................... 236
MOVLW ................................................................... 237
MOVWF ................................................................... 237
MULLW .................................................................... 238
MULWF ................................................................... 238
NEGF ....................................................................... 239
NOP ......................................................................... 239
Opcode Field Descriptions ...................................... 212
POP ......................................................................... 240
PUSH ....................................................................... 240
RCALL ..................................................................... 241
RESET ..................................................................... 241
RETFIE .................................................................... 242
RETLW .................................................................... 242
RETURN .................................................................. 243
RLCF ....................................................................... 243
RLNCF ..................................................................... 244
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 309
PIC18F2450/4450
RRCF ....................................................................... 244
RRNCF .................................................................... 245
SETF ........................................................................ 245
SETF (Indexed Literal Offset mode) ........................ 259
SLEEP ..................................................................... 246
Standard Instructions ............................................... 211
SUBFWB .................................................................. 246
SUBLW .................................................................... 247
SUBWF .................................................................... 247
SUBWFB .................................................................. 248
SWAPF .................................................................... 248
TBLRD ..................................................................... 249
TBLWT ..................................................................... 250
TSTFSZ ................................................................... 251
XORLW .................................................................... 251
XORWF .................................................................... 252
INTCON Register
RBIF Bit .................................................................... 101
INTCON Registers ............................................................. 87
Internal Oscillator Block
INTHS, INTXT, INTCKO and INTIO Modes ............... 27
Internal RC Oscillator
Use with WDT .......................................................... 201
Internet Address ............................................................... 315
Interrupt Sources .............................................................. 189
A/D Conversion Complete ....................................... 177
Capture Complete (CCP) ......................................... 124
Compare Complete (CCP) ....................................... 125
Interrupt-on-Change (RB7:RB4) .............................. 101
INTn Pin ..................................................................... 97
PORTB, Interrupt-on-Change .................................... 97
TMR0 ......................................................................... 97
TMR0 Overflow ........................................................ 113
TMR1 Overflow ........................................................ 115
TMR2 to PR2 Match (PWM) .................................... 127
Interrupts ............................................................................ 85
USB ............................................................................ 85
Interrupts, Flag Bits
Interrupt-on-Change (RB7:RB4) Flag
(RBIF Bit) ......................................................... 101
INTOSC, INTRC. See Internal Oscillator Block.
IORLW ............................................................................. 234
IORWF ............................................................................. 234
IPR Registers ..................................................................... 94
L
LFSR ................................................................................ 235
Low-Voltage ICSP Programming.
See Single-Supply ICSP Programming.
M
Master Clear Reset (MCLR) ............................................... 43
Memory Organization ......................................................... 53
Data Memory ............................................................. 59
Program Memory ....................................................... 53
Memory Programming Requirements .............................. 278
Microchip Internet Web Site ............................................. 315
Migration from Baseline to Enhanced Devices ................ 304
Migration from High-End to Enhanced Devices ............... 305
Migration from Mid-Range to Enhanced Devices ............. 305
MOVF ............................................................................... 235
MOVFF ............................................................................. 236
MOVLB ............................................................................. 236
MOVLW ............................................................................ 237
MOVSF ............................................................................ 255
MOVSS ............................................................................ 256
DS39760A-page 310
MOVWF ........................................................................... 237
MPLAB ASM30 Assembler, Linker, Librarian .................. 262
MPLAB ICD 2 In-Circuit Debugger .................................. 263
MPLAB ICE 2000 High-Performance
Universal In-Circuit Emulator ................................... 263
MPLAB ICE 4000 High-Performance
Universal In-Circuit Emulator ................................... 263
MPLAB Integrated Development
Environment Software ............................................. 261
MPLAB PM3 Device Programmer ................................... 263
MPLINK Object Linker/MPLIB Object Librarian ............... 262
MULLW ............................................................................ 238
MULWF ............................................................................ 238
N
NEGF ............................................................................... 239
NOP ................................................................................. 239
O
Oscillator Configuration ..................................................... 23
EC .............................................................................. 23
ECIO .......................................................................... 23
ECPIO ....................................................................... 23
ECPLL ....................................................................... 23
HS .............................................................................. 23
HSPLL ....................................................................... 23
INTCKO ..................................................................... 23
Internal Oscillator Block ............................................. 27
INTHS ........................................................................ 23
INTIO ......................................................................... 23
INTXT ........................................................................ 23
Oscillator Modes and USB Operation ........................ 24
XT .............................................................................. 23
XTPLL ........................................................................ 23
Oscillator Selection .......................................................... 189
Oscillator Settings for USB ................................................ 27
Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ................................... 32, 45
Oscillator Switching ........................................................... 30
Oscillator Transitions ......................................................... 30
Oscillator, Timer1 ............................................................. 115
P
Packaging Information ..................................................... 295
Details ...................................................................... 297
Marking .................................................................... 295
PICSTART Plus Development Programmer .................... 264
PIE Registers ..................................................................... 92
Pin Functions
MCLR/VPP/RE3 ................................................... 12, 16
NC/ICCK/ICPGC ........................................................ 21
NC/ICDT/ICPGD ........................................................ 21
NC/ICPORTS ............................................................. 21
NC/ICRST/ICVPP ....................................................... 21
OSC1/CLKI .......................................................... 12, 16
OSC2/CLKO/RA6 ................................................ 12, 16
RA0/AN0 .............................................................. 13, 17
RA1/AN1 .............................................................. 13, 17
RA2/AN2/VREF- ................................................... 13, 17
RA3/AN3/VREF+ .................................................. 13, 17
RA4/T0CKI/RCV .................................................. 13, 17
RA5/AN4/HLVDIN ................................................ 13, 17
RB0/AN12/INT0 ................................................... 14, 18
RB1/AN10/INT1 ................................................... 14, 18
RB2/AN8/INT2/VMO ............................................ 14, 18
RB3/AN9/VPO ..................................................... 14, 18
RB4/AN11/KBI0 ................................................... 14, 18
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
RB5/KBI1/PGM .................................................... 14, 18
RB6/KBI2/PGC .................................................... 14, 18
RB7/KBI3/PGD .................................................... 14, 18
RC0/T1OSO/T1CKI ............................................. 15, 19
RC1/T1OSI/UOE .................................................. 15, 19
RC2/CCP1 ........................................................... 15, 19
RC4/D-/VM ........................................................... 15, 19
RC5/D+/VP .......................................................... 15, 19
RC6/TX/CK .......................................................... 15, 19
RC7/RX/DT .......................................................... 15, 19
RD0 ............................................................................ 20
RD1 ............................................................................ 20
RD2 ............................................................................ 20
RD3 ............................................................................ 20
RD4 ............................................................................ 20
RD5 ............................................................................ 20
RD6 ............................................................................ 20
RD7 ............................................................................ 20
RE0/AN5 .................................................................... 21
RE1/AN6 .................................................................... 21
RE2/AN7 .................................................................... 21
VDD ...................................................................... 15, 21
VSS ....................................................................... 15, 21
VUSB ..................................................................... 15, 21
Pinout I/O Descriptions
PIC18F2450 ............................................................... 12
PIC18F4450 ............................................................... 16
PIR Registers ..................................................................... 90
PLL Frequency Multiplier ................................................... 26
HSPLL, XTPLL, ECPLL and ECPIO
Oscillator Modes ................................................ 26
PLL Lock Time-out ............................................................. 45
POP ................................................................................. 240
POR. See Power-on Reset.
PORTA
Associated Registers ............................................... 100
I/O Summary ............................................................ 100
LATA Register ............................................................ 99
PORTA Register ........................................................ 99
TRISA Register .......................................................... 99
PORTB
Associated Registers ............................................... 103
I/O Summary ............................................................ 102
LATB Register .......................................................... 101
PORTB Register ...................................................... 101
RB7:RB4 Interrupt-on-Change Flag
(RBIF Bit) ......................................................... 101
TRISB Register ........................................................ 101
PORTC
Associated Registers ............................................... 106
I/O Summary ............................................................ 105
LATC Register ......................................................... 104
PORTC Register ...................................................... 104
TRISC Register ........................................................ 104
PORTD
Associated Registers ............................................... 108
I/O Summary ............................................................ 108
LATD Register ......................................................... 107
PORTD Register ...................................................... 107
TRISD Register ........................................................ 107
PORTE
Associated Registers ............................................... 110
I/O Summary ............................................................ 110
LATE Register .......................................................... 109
PORTE Register ...................................................... 109
TRISE Register ........................................................ 109
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Postscaler, WDT
Assignment (PSA Bit) .............................................. 113
Rate Select (T0PS2:T0PS0 Bits) ............................. 113
Power-Managed Modes ..................................................... 33
and A/D Operation ................................................... 180
Clock Sources ........................................................... 33
Clock Transitions and Status Indicators .................... 34
Effects on Various Clock Sources ............................. 32
Entering ..................................................................... 33
Exiting Idle and Sleep Modes .................................... 39
by Interrupt ........................................................ 39
by Reset ............................................................ 39
by WDT Time-out .............................................. 39
Without an Oscillator Start-up Delay ................. 40
Idle ............................................................................. 37
Idle Modes
PRI_IDLE .......................................................... 38
RC_IDLE ........................................................... 39
SEC_IDLE ......................................................... 38
Multiple Sleep Commands ......................................... 34
Run Modes ................................................................ 34
PRI_RUN ........................................................... 34
RC_RUN ............................................................ 35
SEC_RUN ......................................................... 34
Selecting .................................................................... 33
Sleep ......................................................................... 37
Summary (table) ........................................................ 33
Power-on Reset (POR) ...................................................... 43
Power-up Delays ............................................................... 32
Power-up Timer (PWRT) ............................................. 32, 45
Prescaler, Timer0 ............................................................ 113
Assignment (PSA Bit) .............................................. 113
Rate Select (T0PS2:T0PS0 Bits) ............................. 113
Prescaler, Timer2 ............................................................ 128
PRI_IDLE Mode ................................................................. 38
PRI_RUN Mode ................................................................. 34
Program Counter ............................................................... 54
PCL, PCH and PCU Registers .................................. 54
PCLATH and PCLATU Registers .............................. 54
Program Memory
and the Extended Instruction Set .............................. 70
Code Protection ....................................................... 207
Instructions ................................................................ 58
Two-Word .......................................................... 58
Interrupt Vector .......................................................... 53
Look-up Tables .......................................................... 56
Map and Stack (diagram) .......................................... 53
Reset Vector .............................................................. 53
Program Verification and Code Protection ...................... 206
Associated Registers ............................................... 206
Programming, Device Instructions ................................... 211
Pulse-Width Modulation. See PWM (CCP Module).
PUSH ............................................................................... 240
PUSH and POP Instructions .............................................. 55
PUSHL ............................................................................. 256
PWM (CCP Module)
Associated Registers ............................................... 128
Duty Cycle ............................................................... 127
Example Frequencies/Resolutions .......................... 128
Period ...................................................................... 127
Setup for PWM Operation ....................................... 128
TMR2 to PR2 Match ................................................ 127
Q
Q Clock ............................................................................ 128
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 311
PIC18F2450/4450
R
RAM. See Data Memory.
RC_IDLE Mode .................................................................. 39
RC_RUN Mode .................................................................. 35
RCALL .............................................................................. 241
RCON Register
Bit Status During Initialization .................................... 48
Reader Response ............................................................ 316
Register File Summary ................................................. 63–65
Registers
ADCON0 (A/D Control 0) ......................................... 173
ADCON1 (A/D Control 1) ......................................... 174
ADCON2 (A/D Control 2) ......................................... 175
BAUDCON (Baud Rate Control) .............................. 156
BDnSTAT (Buffer Descriptor n Status,
CPU Mode) ...................................................... 139
BDnSTAT (Buffer Descriptor n Status,
SIE Mode) ........................................................ 140
CCP1CON (Capture/Compare/PWM
Control) ............................................................ 123
CONFIG1H (Configuration 1 High) .......................... 192
CONFIG1L (Configuration 1 Low) ............................ 191
CONFIG2H (Configuration 2 High) .......................... 194
CONFIG2L (Configuration 2 Low) ............................ 193
CONFIG3H (Configuration 3 High) .......................... 195
CONFIG4L (Configuration 4 Low) ............................ 196
CONFIG5H (Configuration 5 High) .......................... 197
CONFIG5L (Configuration 5 Low) ............................ 197
CONFIG6H (Configuration 6 High) .......................... 198
CONFIG6L (Configuration 6 Low) ............................ 198
CONFIG7H (Configuration 7 High) .......................... 199
CONFIG7L (Configuration 7 Low) ............................ 199
DEVID1 (Device ID 1) .............................................. 200
DEVID2 (Device ID 2) .............................................. 200
EECON1 (Memory Control 1) .................................... 75
HLVDCON (High/Low-Voltage
Detect Control) ................................................. 183
INTCON (Interrupt Control) ........................................ 87
INTCON2 (Interrupt Control 2) ................................... 88
INTCON3 (Interrupt Control 3) ................................... 89
IPR1 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority 1) .......................... 94
IPR2 (Peripheral Interrupt Priority 2) .......................... 95
OSCCON (Oscillator Control) .................................... 31
PIE1 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 1) .......................... 92
PIE2 (Peripheral Interrupt Enable 2) .......................... 93
PIR1 (Peripheral Interrupt Request
(Flag) 1) ............................................................. 90
PIR2 (Peripheral Interrupt Request
(Flag) 2) ............................................................. 91
PORTE ..................................................................... 109
RCON (Reset Control) ......................................... 42, 96
RCSTA (Receive Status and Control) ...................... 155
STATUS ..................................................................... 66
STKPTR (Stack Pointer) ............................................ 55
T0CON (Timer0 Control) .......................................... 111
T1CON (Timer1 Control) .......................................... 115
T2CON (Timer2 Control) .......................................... 121
TXSTA (Transmit Status and Control) ..................... 154
UCFG (USB Configuration) ...................................... 132
UCON (USB Control) ............................................... 130
UEIE (USB Error Interrupt Enable) .......................... 147
UEIR (USB Error Interrupt Status) ........................... 146
DS39760A-page 312
UEPn (USB Endpoint n Control) .............................. 135
UIE (USB Interrupt Enable) ..................................... 145
UIR (USB Interrupt Status) ...................................... 144
USTAT (USB Status) ............................................... 134
WDTCON (Watchdog Timer Control) ...................... 202
RESET ............................................................................. 241
Reset State of Registers .................................................... 48
Reset Timers ..................................................................... 45
Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ................................. 45
PLL Lock Time-out ..................................................... 45
Power-up Timer (PWRT) ........................................... 45
Resets ........................................................................ 41, 189
Brown-out Reset (BOR) ........................................... 189
Oscillator Start-up Timer (OST) ............................... 189
Power-on Reset (POR) ............................................ 189
Power-up Timer (PWRT) ......................................... 189
RETFIE ............................................................................ 242
RETLW ............................................................................ 242
RETURN .......................................................................... 243
Return Address Stack ........................................................ 54
and Associated Registers .......................................... 54
Return Stack Pointer (STKPTR) ........................................ 55
Revision History ............................................................... 303
RLCF ............................................................................... 243
RLNCF ............................................................................. 244
RRCF ............................................................................... 244
RRNCF ............................................................................ 245
S
SEC_IDLE Mode ............................................................... 38
SEC_RUN Mode ................................................................ 34
SETF ................................................................................ 245
Single-Supply ICSP Programming ................................... 210
SLEEP ............................................................................. 246
Sleep
OSC1 and OSC2 Pin States ...................................... 32
Sleep Mode ........................................................................ 37
Software Simulator (MPLAB SIM) ................................... 262
Special Event Trigger. See Compare (CCP Module).
Special Features of the CPU ........................................... 189
Special ICPORT Features ............................................... 209
Stack Full/Underflow Resets .............................................. 56
STATUS Register .............................................................. 66
SUBFSR .......................................................................... 257
SUBFWB ......................................................................... 246
SUBLW ............................................................................ 247
SUBULNK ........................................................................ 257
SUBWF ............................................................................ 247
SUBWFB ......................................................................... 248
SWAPF ............................................................................ 248
T
T0CON Register
PSA Bit .................................................................... 113
T0CS Bit .................................................................. 112
T0PS2:T0PS0 Bits ................................................... 113
T0SE Bit .................................................................. 112
Table Pointer Operations (table) ........................................ 76
Table Reads/Table Writes ................................................. 56
TBLRD ............................................................................. 249
TBLWT ............................................................................. 250
Time-out in Various Situations (table) ................................ 45
Time-out Sequence ........................................................... 45
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
Timer0 .............................................................................. 111
16-Bit Mode Timer Reads and Writes ...................... 112
Associated Registers ............................................... 113
Clock Source Edge Select (T0SE Bit) ...................... 112
Clock Source Select (T0CS Bit) ............................... 112
Operation ................................................................. 112
Overflow Interrupt .................................................... 113
Prescaler .................................................................. 113
Switching Assignment ...................................... 113
Prescaler. See Prescaler, Timer0.
Timer1 .............................................................................. 115
16-Bit Read/Write Mode ........................................... 117
Associated Registers ....................................... 119, 126
Interrupt .................................................................... 118
Operation ................................................................. 116
Oscillator .......................................................... 115, 117
Layout Considerations ..................................... 118
Low-Power Option ........................................... 117
Using Timer1 as a Clock Source ..................... 117
Overflow Interrupt .................................................... 115
Resetting, Using a Special Event Trigger
Output (CCP) ................................................... 118
TMR1H Register ...................................................... 115
TMR1L Register ....................................................... 115
Use as a Real-Time Clock ....................................... 118
Timer2 .............................................................................. 121
Associated Registers ............................................... 122
Interrupt .................................................................... 122
Operation ................................................................. 121
Output ...................................................................... 122
PR2 Register ............................................................ 127
TMR2 to PR2 Match Interrupt .................................. 127
Timing Diagrams
A/D Conversion ........................................................ 291
Asynchronous Reception ......................................... 165
Asynchronous Transmission .................................... 163
Asynchronous Transmission
(Back to Back) ................................................. 163
Automatic Baud Rate Calculation ............................ 161
Auto-Wake-up Bit (WUE) During
Normal Operation ............................................ 166
Auto-Wake-up Bit (WUE) During Sleep ................... 166
BRG Overflow Sequence ......................................... 161
Brown-out Reset (BOR) ........................................... 286
Capture/Compare/PWM (CCP) ................................ 288
CLKO and I/O .......................................................... 284
Clock/Instruction Cycle .............................................. 57
EUSART Synchronous Receive
(Master/Slave) ................................................. 289
EUSART Synchronous Transmission
(Master/Slave) ................................................. 289
External Clock (All Modes Except PLL) ................... 283
Fail-Safe Clock Monitor ............................................ 205
High/Low-Voltage Detect Characteristics ................ 280
High-Voltage Detect (VDIRMAG = 1) ...................... 186
Low-Voltage Detect (VDIRMAG = 0) ....................... 185
PWM Output ............................................................ 127
Reset, Watchdog Timer (WDT), Oscillator
Start-up Timer (OST) and Power-up
Timer (PWRT) .................................................. 285
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Send Break Character Sequence ............................ 167
Slow Rise Time (MCLR Tied to VDD,
VDD Rise > TPWRT) ............................................ 47
Synchronous Reception
(Master Mode, SREN) ..................................... 170
Synchronous Transmission ..................................... 168
Synchronous Transmission (Through TXEN) .......... 169
Time-out Sequence on POR w/PLL Enabled
(MCLR Tied to VDD) .......................................... 47
Time-out Sequence on Power-up
(MCLR Not Tied to VDD), Case 1 ...................... 46
Time-out Sequence on Power-up
(MCLR Not Tied to VDD), Case 2 ...................... 46
Time-out Sequence on Power-up
(MCLR Tied to VDD, VDD Rise TPWRT) .............. 46
Timer0 and Timer1 External Clock .......................... 287
Transition for Entry to Idle Mode ............................... 38
Transition for Entry to SEC_RUN Mode .................... 34
Transition for Entry to Sleep Mode ............................ 37
Transition for Two-Speed Start-up
(INTOSC to HSPLL) ........................................ 203
Transition for Wake from Idle to
Run Mode .......................................................... 38
Transition for Wake from Sleep (HSPLL) .................. 37
Transition from RC_RUN Mode to
PRI_RUN Mode ................................................. 36
Transition from SEC_RUN Mode to
PRI_RUN Mode (HSPLL) .................................. 35
Transition to RC_RUN Mode ..................................... 36
USB Signal .............................................................. 290
Timing Diagrams and Specifications ............................... 283
Capture/Compare/PWM
Requirements (CCP) ....................................... 288
CLKO and I/O Requirements ................................... 285
EUSART Synchronous Receive
Requirements .................................................. 289
EUSART Synchronous Transmission
Requirements .................................................. 289
External Clock Requirements .................................. 283
PLL Clock ................................................................ 284
Reset, Watchdog Timer, Oscillator Start-up
Timer, Power-up Timer and Brown-out
Reset Requirements ........................................ 286
Timer0 and Timer1 External Clock
Requirements .................................................. 287
USB Full-Speed Requirements ............................... 290
USB Low-Speed Requirements ............................... 290
Top-of-Stack Access .......................................................... 54
TQFP Packages and Special Features ........................... 209
TSTFSZ ........................................................................... 251
Two-Speed Start-up ................................................. 189, 203
Two-Word Instructions
Example Cases ......................................................... 58
TXSTA Register
BRGH Bit ................................................................. 157
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 313
PIC18F2450/4450
U
W
Universal Serial Bus ........................................................... 59
Address Register (UADDR) ..................................... 136
Associated Registers ............................................... 149
Buffer Descriptor Table ............................................ 137
Buffer Descriptors .................................................... 137
Address Validation ........................................... 140
Assignment in Different
Buffering Modes ....................................... 142
BDnSTAT Register (CPU Mode) ..................... 138
BDnSTAT Register (SIE Mode) ....................... 140
Byte Count ....................................................... 140
Example ........................................................... 137
Memory Map .................................................... 141
Ownership ........................................................ 137
Ping-Pong Buffering ......................................... 141
Register Summary ........................................... 142
Status and Configuration ................................. 137
Class Specifications and Drivers ............................. 151
Descriptors ............................................................... 151
Endpoint Control ...................................................... 135
Enumeration ............................................................. 151
External Transceiver ................................................ 131
Eye Pattern Test Enable .......................................... 133
Firmware and Drivers ............................................... 148
Frame Number Registers ......................................... 136
Frames ..................................................................... 150
Internal Transceiver ................................................. 131
Internal Voltage Regulator ....................................... 133
Interrupts .................................................................. 143
and USB Transactions ..................................... 143
Layered Framework ................................................. 150
Oscillator Requirements ........................................... 148
Output Enable Monitor ............................................. 133
Overview .......................................................... 129, 150
Ping-Pong Buffer Configuration ............................... 133
Power ....................................................................... 150
Power Modes ........................................................... 148
Bus Power Only ............................................... 148
Dual Power with Self-Power
Dominance ............................................... 148
Self-Power Only ............................................... 148
Pull-up Resistors ...................................................... 133
RAM ......................................................................... 136
Memory Map .................................................... 136
Speed ....................................................................... 151
Status and Control ................................................... 130
Transfer Types ......................................................... 150
UFRMH:UFRML Registers ...................................... 136
USB
Internal Voltage Regulator Specifications ................ 279
Module Specifications .............................................. 279
USB. See Universal Serial Bus.
Watchdog Timer (WDT) ........................................... 189, 201
Associated Registers ............................................... 202
Control Register ....................................................... 201
During Oscillator Failure .......................................... 204
Programming Considerations .................................. 201
WWW Address ................................................................ 315
WWW, On-Line Support ...................................................... 6
DS39760A-page 314
X
XORLW ............................................................................ 251
XORWF ........................................................................... 252
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
THE MICROCHIP WEB SITE
CUSTOMER SUPPORT
Microchip provides online support via our WWW site at
www.microchip.com. This web site is used as a means
to make files and information easily available to
customers. Accessible by using your favorite Internet
browser, the web site contains the following
information:
Users of Microchip products can receive assistance
through several channels:
• Product Support – Data sheets and errata,
application notes and sample programs, design
resources, user’s guides and hardware support
documents, latest software releases and archived
software
• General Technical Support – Frequently Asked
Questions (FAQ), technical support requests,
online discussion groups, Microchip consultant
program member listing
• Business of Microchip – Product selector and
ordering guides, latest Microchip press releases,
listing of seminars and events, listings of
Microchip sales offices, distributors and factory
representatives
•
•
•
•
•
Distributor or Representative
Local Sales Office
Field Application Engineer (FAE)
Technical Support
Development Systems Information Line
Customers
should
contact
their
distributor,
representative or field application engineer (FAE) for
support. Local sales offices are also available to help
customers. A listing of sales offices and locations is
included in the back of this document.
Technical support is available through the web site
at: http://support.microchip.com
CUSTOMER CHANGE NOTIFICATION
SERVICE
Microchip’s customer notification service helps keep
customers current on Microchip products. Subscribers
will receive e-mail notification whenever there are
changes, updates, revisions or errata related to a
specified product family or development tool of interest.
To register, access the Microchip web site at
www.microchip.com, click on Customer Change
Notification and follow the registration instructions.
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 315
PIC18F2450/4450
READER RESPONSE
It is our intention to provide you with the best documentation possible to ensure successful use of your Microchip product. If you wish to provide your comments on organization, clarity, subject matter, and ways in which our documentation
can better serve you, please FAX your comments to the Technical Publications Manager at (480) 792-4150.
Please list the following information, and use this outline to provide us with your comments about this document.
To:
Technical Publications Manager
RE:
Reader Response
Total Pages Sent ________
From: Name
Company
Address
City / State / ZIP / Country
Telephone: (_______) _________ - _________
FAX: (______) _________ - _________
Application (optional):
Would you like a reply?
Device: PIC18F2450/4450
Y
N
Literature Number: DS39760A
Questions:
1. What are the best features of this document?
2. How does this document meet your hardware and software development needs?
3. Do you find the organization of this document easy to follow? If not, why?
4. What additions to the document do you think would enhance the structure and subject?
5. What deletions from the document could be made without affecting the overall usefulness?
6. Is there any incorrect or misleading information (what and where)?
7. How would you improve this document?
DS39760A-page 316
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
PIC18F2450/4450
PIC18F2450/4450 PRODUCT IDENTIFICATION SYSTEM
To order or obtain information, e.g., on pricing or delivery, refer to the factory or the listed sales office.
PART NO.
X
/XX
XXX
Device
Temperature
Range
Package
Pattern
Examples:
a)
b)
Device
PIC18F2450(1), PIC18F4450(1),
PIC18F2450T(2), PIC18F4450(2);
VDD range 4.2V to 5.5V
PIC18LF2450(1), PIC18LF4450(1),
PIC18LF2450(2), PIC18LF4450(2);
VDD range 2.0V to 5.5V
Temperature Range
I
E
=
=
-40°C to +85°C (Industrial)
-40°C to +125°C (Extended)
Package
PT
SO
SP
P
ML
=
=
=
=
=
TQFP (Thin Quad Flatpack)
SOIC
Skinny Plastic DIP
PDIP
QFN
Pattern
c)
PIC18LF4450-I/P 301 = Industrial temp., PDIP
package, Extended VDD limits, QTP pattern
#301.
PIC18LF2450-I/SO = Industrial temp., SOIC
package, Extended VDD limits.
PIC18F4450-I/P = Industrial temp., PDIP
package, normal VDD limits.
Note 1:
2:
F = Standard Voltage Range
LF = Wide Voltage Range
T = in tape and reel TQFP
packages only.
QTP, SQTP, Code or Special Requirements
(blank otherwise)
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.
Advance Information
DS39760A-page 317
WORLDWIDE SALES AND SERVICE
AMERICAS
ASIA/PACIFIC
ASIA/PACIFIC
EUROPE
Corporate Office
2355 West Chandler Blvd.
Chandler, AZ 85224-6199
Tel: 480-792-7200
Fax: 480-792-7277
Technical Support:
http://support.microchip.com
Web Address:
www.microchip.com
Australia - Sydney
Tel: 61-2-9868-6733
Fax: 61-2-9868-6755
India - Bangalore
Tel: 91-80-2229-0061
Fax: 91-80-2229-0062
China - Beijing
Tel: 86-10-8528-2100
Fax: 86-10-8528-2104
India - New Delhi
Tel: 91-11-5160-8631
Fax: 91-11-5160-8632
Austria - Wels
Tel: 43-7242-2244-399
Fax: 43-7242-2244-393
Denmark - Copenhagen
Tel: 45-4450-2828
Fax: 45-4485-2829
China - Chengdu
Tel: 86-28-8676-6200
Fax: 86-28-8676-6599
India - Pune
Tel: 91-20-2566-1512
Fax: 91-20-2566-1513
France - Paris
Tel: 33-1-69-53-63-20
Fax: 33-1-69-30-90-79
China - Fuzhou
Tel: 86-591-8750-3506
Fax: 86-591-8750-3521
Japan - Yokohama
Tel: 81-45-471- 6166
Fax: 81-45-471-6122
Germany - Munich
Tel: 49-89-627-144-0
Fax: 49-89-627-144-44
China - Hong Kong SAR
Tel: 852-2401-1200
Fax: 852-2401-3431
Korea - Gumi
Tel: 82-54-473-4301
Fax: 82-54-473-4302
China - Qingdao
Tel: 86-532-8502-7355
Fax: 86-532-8502-7205
Korea - Seoul
Tel: 82-2-554-7200
Fax: 82-2-558-5932 or
82-2-558-5934
Atlanta
Alpharetta, GA
Tel: 770-640-0034
Fax: 770-640-0307
Boston
Westborough, MA
Tel: 774-760-0087
Fax: 774-760-0088
Chicago
Itasca, IL
Tel: 630-285-0071
Fax: 630-285-0075
Dallas
Addison, TX
Tel: 972-818-7423
Fax: 972-818-2924
Detroit
Farmington Hills, MI
Tel: 248-538-2250
Fax: 248-538-2260
Kokomo
Kokomo, IN
Tel: 765-864-8360
Fax: 765-864-8387
Los Angeles
Mission Viejo, CA
Tel: 949-462-9523
Fax: 949-462-9608
San Jose
Mountain View, CA
Tel: 650-215-1444
Fax: 650-961-0286
China - Shanghai
Tel: 86-21-5407-5533
Fax: 86-21-5407-5066
China - Shenyang
Tel: 86-24-2334-2829
Fax: 86-24-2334-2393
China - Shenzhen
Tel: 86-755-8203-2660
Fax: 86-755-8203-1760
China - Shunde
Tel: 86-757-2839-5507
Fax: 86-757-2839-5571
China - Wuhan
Tel: 86-27-5980-5300
Fax: 86-27-5980-5118
China - Xian
Tel: 86-29-8833-7250
Fax: 86-29-8833-7256
Malaysia - Penang
Tel: 60-4-646-8870
Fax: 60-4-646-5086
Philippines - Manila
Tel: 63-2-634-9065
Fax: 63-2-634-9069
Italy - Milan
Tel: 39-0331-742611
Fax: 39-0331-466781
Netherlands - Drunen
Tel: 31-416-690399
Fax: 31-416-690340
Spain - Madrid
Tel: 34-91-708-08-90
Fax: 34-91-708-08-91
UK - Wokingham
Tel: 44-118-921-5869
Fax: 44-118-921-5820
Singapore
Tel: 65-6334-8870
Fax: 65-6334-8850
Taiwan - Hsin Chu
Tel: 886-3-572-9526
Fax: 886-3-572-6459
Taiwan - Kaohsiung
Tel: 886-7-536-4818
Fax: 886-7-536-4803
Taiwan - Taipei
Tel: 886-2-2500-6610
Fax: 886-2-2508-0102
Thailand - Bangkok
Tel: 66-2-694-1351
Fax: 66-2-694-1350
Toronto
Mississauga, Ontario,
Canada
Tel: 905-673-0699
Fax: 905-673-6509
10/31/05
DS39760A-page 318
Advance Information
© 2006 Microchip Technology Inc.